.7MS77-MCTOK, 


fplTMAN'Sl 

SHORTHAND 


'stf^a^a^c/ 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


0.  BAKtK 
5ER 

S   1E1A3 


ISAAC   PITMAN'S 
SHORTHAND  INSTRUCTOR 


THE  STANDARD  SYSTEM  OF  THE  WORLD 

ISAAC  PITMAN'S 
SHORTHAND  INSTRUCTOR 

•» 

AN   EXPOSITION   OP   ISAAC   PITMAN'S 

SYSTEM    OF  PHONOGRAPHY 


DESIGNED  FOR  CLASS  OR  SELF-INSTRUCTION 

TWENTIETH  CENTURY  EDITION 
REVISED 


NEW  YORK : 

ISAAC  PITMAN  &  SONS,  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  DEPOT 
2  WEST  45-TH  STREET 

TORONTO,  CANADA: 

THE  COMMERCIAL  TEXT-BOOK  Co. 

THE  COPP,  CLARK  Co.,  LIMITED. 

1912 


COFTKISHT,  1893,  BY  ISAAC  PITMAN 


OOPYBISHT,  1899,  BY  ISAAC  PITMAN  &  SONS 


COPYRIGHT,  1901,  BY  ISAAC  PITMAN  &  SONS 
COPYRIGHT,  1905,  BY  ISAAC  PITMAN  &  SONS 


COPYRIGHT,  1910,  BY  ISAAC  PITMAN  &  SONS 


4T.T.  BIGHTS  RESERVED 


COPYRIGHT  ALSO  IN  GREAT  BRITAIN  AND  COLONIES 


THE  DEVICE  AND  THE  FACSIMILE  SIGNATURE  WHICH  APPEAR  ON  THB 

COVER  ARE  THE  SUBJECT  OP  PROTECTION  UNDER  THE  TRADE 

MARK  LAWS  OP  THE  BRITISH  EMPIRE  AND  THE 

UNITED  STATES  OP  AMERICA 


Printed  by 

J.  J.  Little  &  Ives  Co. 
New  York 


PREFACE 


nnHE  system  of  shorthand  writing  presented  in  the  fol- 
JL      lowing  pages  was  invented  by  Sir  Isaac  Pitman,  who 
in  1837  published  his  first  treatise  on  the  art.  •  Many  im- 
provements were   from   time   to    time   introduced   in   the 
numerous  editions  of  Phonography  published  in  succeeding 
years.     These  were  the  fruit  of  long  and  widely  extended 
stenographic  experiments,  and  of  the  valuable  criticism  and 
experience  of  phonographers  generally.     No  other  system 
j—    of  shorthand  designed  for  the  English  language  has  had  the 
v*    advantage  of  being  subjected  to  so  large  an  amount  of  ex- 
>•    periment  and  of  practical  tests  in  work  of  every  conceivable 
\    description  as  that  invented  by  Sir  Isaac  Pitman ;   and,  as 
22    a  result,  this  system  has  been  most  successfully  adapted  to 
the  practical  requirements  of  all  classes  of  shorthand  writers. 
In  the  Twentieth  Century  Edition  of  PITMAN'S  SHORTHAND 
S?   — the  title  by  which  the  system  is  now  generally  known — 
M    the  method  is  presented  as  it  has  been  perfected  after  over 
5    sixty  years  of  use.     A  number  of  improvements  have  been 
for  the  first  time  introduced  in  the  rules  of  the  system,  anjd 
in  the  method  of  presenting  it  to  the  student,  which  will 
u   greatly  assist  the  learner  in  the  acquirement  of   the   art. 
h   The  general  plan  adopted  in  the  presentation  of  the  various 
P   parts  is  designed  to  render  the  work  equally  serviceable  for 
class  or  self-tuition.      No  effort  has  been  spared  to  explain 
and  illustrate  the  rules  in  the  clearest  and  simplest  manner 
possible,  and  in  the  revision  of  this  work  especial  care  has 
been  taken  to  introduce  no  word  in  either  the  reading  or 
writing  exercises,  which  would  afterwards  require  an  altera- 
tion of  form,  a  feature  that  will  be  appreciated  by  teachers- 
of  shorthand  who  are  familiar  with  the  reverse  conditions 

448608 


viii  Preface. 

so  frequently  met  with  in  other  shorthand  text-books. 
Although  students,  as  a  rule,  experience  no  difficulty  in 
understanding  the  method  here  set  forth,  it  is  desirable  that 
they  should  have,  at  the  commencement,  an  intelligent 
grasp  of  all  that  is  conveyed  by  that  term.  Therefore, 
before  the  mastery  of  the  first  chapter  is  attempted,  it  is 
important  that  the  Introduction  should  be  thoroughly 
understood. 

The  advantage  of  practical  ability  in  the  art  of  shorthand 
writing  is  so  universally  acknowledged  in  the  present  day, 
that  it  is  unnecessary  to  enforce  it.  It  is  obvious,  however, 
that  the  value  of  shorthand,  either  as  a  vehicle  for  private 
communications  or  for  use  in  various  ways  in  business  or 
professional  life,  would  be  largely  diminished  if  the  same 
system — and  that  the  best — were  not  generally  employed. 
This  important  fact  has  at  last  been  thoroughly  recognized, 
and  statistics,  the  testimony  of  public  men,  and  general 
observation,  concur  in  demonstrating  that  the  Isaac  Pitman 
system  is  the  shorthand  par  excellence  for  all  who  speak  the 
English  language.  The  United  States  Commissioner  of 
Education  says: 

"It  will  be  seen,  in  the  chapter  giving  the  statistics  of 
instruction  in  shorthand  in  the  United  States,  that  the  system 
mainly  followed  is  that  of  Isaac  Pitman.  Few  inventors 
within  the  last  two  hundred  years  have  been  so  happy  as  he 
in  discovering  devices  that  have  proved  useful  in  practice, 
and  at  the  same  time  called  forth  universal  admiration  for 
their  theoretic  perfection." — Extract  from  "  Circular  of  In- 
formation No.  1  (Washington,  D.  C.\  1893." 

The  Publishers  desire  to  tender  their  hearty  thanks  to 
the  large  number  of  expert  teachers  and  reporters  who  have 
offered  valuable  criticisms  and  suggestions  for  the  improve- 
ment of  this  work. 


INTRODUCTION 


T)HONOGRAPHY,  the  name  originally  given  to  Isaac 
JL  Pitman's  Shorthand,  has  been  briefly  but  accurately 
defined  as  "  the  art  of  representing  spoken  sounds  by 
character,  a  system  of  shorthand."  It  fs  obvious  that  the 
usual  or  Romanic  alphabet,  of.  twenty-six  letters,  cannot 
represent  by  distinct  characters  the  thirty-six  typical  sounds 
of  the  English  language.  As  a  consequence,  many  of  the 
symbols  of  that  alphabet  are  of  necessity  used  with  several 
significations.  If,  therefore,  a  system  of  shorthand  were 
founded  on  the  common  alphabet,  it  is  manifest  that  it  would 
prove  a  very  imperfect  and  cumbrous  instrument  for  record- 
ing spoken  utterances  with  certainty  and  speed — the  chief 
objects  of  shorthand.  With  this  alphabet  either  a  single 
sign  standing  for  one  of  the  letters  would  be  required  to 
do  duty  for  several  sounds,  or  more  than  one  character 
would  need  to  be  used  to  represent  a  single  sound,  as  is 
done  in  ordinary  spelling.  Both  methods  are  open  to 
serious  objections.  Two  simple  illustrations  will  demon- 
strate the  difference  between  the  ordinary  spelling  and  the 
phonetic  method,  which  is  the  distinctive  feature  of  Pit- 
man's Shorthand. 

Our  first  illustration  deals  with  consonants,  and  is  con- 
cerned with  the  ordinary  spelling  of  the  words  gaol  and 
gale.  If  the  common  spelling  were  followed  in  shorthand, 
we  should  have  symbols  for  both  words  containing  the 
characters  g-a-l.  But  Phonography  .provides  different  sym- 


*  Introduction. 

bols  for  the  first  consonant  in  the  above  two  words,  which 
are  accordingly  represented  thus  :  /""  gaol  (j-eh-l)  and 
__y^"  gale  (g-eh-l).  Our  second  illustration  deals  with 
Towels,  and  we  take  as  examples  the  ordinary  spelling  of 
the  two  words  tub  and  tube.  If  the  shorthand  symbols 
were  the  equivalents  of  the  letters  of  the  common  alphabet, 
the  stenographer  would  be  obliged  to  write  both  words  by 
two  precisely  similar  sets  of  characters,  namely,  t-u-b. 
Phonography,  however,  provides  for  the  representation  of 
the  different  sounds  u  and  u  heard  in  the  respective 
words,  and  these  are  indicated  by  different  symbols,  thus: 

L     tub,  and  L     tube.     It  may  be  pointed  out  that,  in  two 

of  the  words  used  above  as  illustrations,  there  is  a  final 
silent  e,  but  silent  letters,  whether  vowels  or  consonants, 
are,  of  course,  unrepresented  in  shorthand. 
. .  The  phonetic  notation  of  the  system  of  shorthand  de- 
veloped in  the  present  work  has  been  found,  after  widely 
extended  use,  to  possess  important  practical  advantages. 
By  the  employment  of  what  has  been  termed  the  "  alphabet 
of  nature, "  spoken  language  can  be  recorded  with  one-sixth 
of  the  trouble  and  time  longhand  requires,  by  those  who 
use  Isaac  Pitman's  Shorthand  simply  as  a  substitute  for 
the  ordinary  longhand  writing.  With  the  adoption  of  the 
systematized"  methods  of  abbreviation  developed  in  the 
briefest  or  Reporting  style  of  writing  Phonography,  this 
method  of  shorthand  can  be  written  with  the  speed  of  the 
most  rapid  distinct  articulation,  while  it  may  be  read  with 
the  certainty  and  ease  of  ordinary  longhand  writing. 
Badly  written  shorthand  is,  of  course,  neither  more  nor  less 
legible  than  badly  written  longhand. 

An  explanation  on  one  point  is,  however,  desirable.  In 
etudying  and  using  Phonography,  it  should  be  distinctly 
borne  in  mind  that  the  art  is  not  designed  to  represent  or 


Introduction.  xi 

record  minute  shades  of  pronunciation.  The  Pitmanic 
alphabet,  in  the  words  of  Max  Miiller,  "comprehends  the 
thirty-six  broad,  typical  sounds  of  the  English  language, 
and  assigns  to  each  a  definite  sign."  It  does  not  seek  to 
mark,  for  example,  the  thirty  or  more  variations  of  sound 
•which  have  been  found  to  exist  in  the  utterance  of  the 
twelve  simple  vowels.  Experience  shows  that  the  pronun- 
ciation of  the  vowels  varies  greatly  in  different  localities 
and  in  the  various  countries  of  the  world  in  .which  the 
English  language  is  spoken,  and  Phonography  taught  and 
used.  The  standard  of  pronunciation,  as  exhibited  in 
printed  shorthand,  cannot,  therefore,  be  expected  to  min- 
utely coincide  with  the  pronunciation  of  English  in  all 
parts.  For  this  reason  the  observations  of  Max  Miiller 
deserve  the  careful  notice  of  students  and  teachers.  He 
calls  attention  to  the  vocal  a,  and  points  out  that  it  can 
easily  be  perceived  that  its  original  pure  pronunciation, 
like  Italian  a,  has  undergone  different  modifications  in  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  country. 

"Yet  in  writing,"  he  continues,  "it  maybe  treated  as 
one,  because  it  has  but  one  and  the  same  grammatical 
intention,  and  does  not  convey  a  new  meaning  till  it  exceeds 
its  widest  limits.  Good  speakers  pronounce  the  a  in  last 
like  the  pure  Italian  a ;  with  others  it  becomes  broad  ; 
with  others  thin.  But  though  it  may  thus  oscillate  con- 
siderably, it  must  not  encroach  on  the  province  of  «,  which 
would  change  its  meaning  to  lest;  nor  on  the  province  of 
j,  which  would  change  it  to  lost ;  nor  on  the  province  of 
«,  which  would  change  it  to  lust." 

With  the  accurate  employment  of  the  phonographic 
signs,  there  need  be  no  uncertainty  as  to  what  those  em- 
ployed for  a  particular  word  are  intended  to  represent, 
and,  to  again  quote  Max  Miiller,  "English  can  be  written 
rationally  and  read  easily"  with  the  Pitmauic  alphabet. 


xii  Introduction. 

To  successfully  use  Phonography,  however,  the  rules  of  the 
system  must  be  mastered,  and  applied.  By  the  employ- 
ment of  the  various  abbreviating  devices  according  to  rule, 
the  most  important  benefit  to  be  derived  from  shorthand 
will  be  attained,  namely,  the  maximum  of  brevity  with 
legibility.  In  the  present  work  these  rules  are  fully  set 
forth. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER 

Preface . .        .  vii 

Introduction .  ix 

I.  Directions  to  the  Student          ....  1 

Consonants       .......  5 

II.  Long  Vowels 10 

III.  Joined  Consonants 14 

Grammalogues 16 

IV.  Short  Vowels   .        .         .         .     -    .         .         .18 
V.  Diphthongs .22 

VI.  Circle  8  and  Z          .        .        .         .         .         .25 

Loops  St  and  Sir 27 

VII.  Large  Circles  Sw  and  Ss  or  Sz  .         .         .30 

Vowels  and  8  and  T 31 

VIII.  L  and  R  Hooks 34 

Circles  and  Loops  Prefixed  to  Initial  Hooks     .     39 

IX.  N  and  F  Hooks 43 

X.  -TionHook       .......     47 

XI.  Additional  Double  Consonants          .         .         .51 
Xn.  The  Aspirate 53 

XIII.  Upward  and  Downward  L  and  H     .        .        .56 

XIV.  The  Halving  Principle 61 

Single  and  Double  Consonants,  Table  of  .         .67 

XV.  The  Double-length  Principle    .         .        .         .68 

XVI.  Vocalization  of  PI  and  Pr                 .         .         .72 

XVII.    TFand  Y  Diphthongs 75 

XVIII.  Dissyllabic  Diphthongs 79 

XIX.  Prefixes                                                                   ,     82 


xiv  Contents. 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

XX.   Suffixes 86 

XXI.   Grammalogues 90 

XXII.   Contractions 99 

XXIII.  Contractions 102 

XXIV.  Phraseography Ill 

XXV.  Punctuation,  etc 116 

XXVI.  Method  of  Practice 119 

Engraved  Shorthand 122 

XXVII.  Writing  in  Position 129 

Outlines  for  States  and  Territories      .         .    135 
Outlines  for  Fifty  Principal  Cities       .         .   136 

Business  Letters 137 

XXVIII.  Speed  Practice .145 

XXIX.  Significant    Marks — Mishearings — Errors — 
Reference  Marks — Quotations — Examina- 
tion of  "Witnesses — Figures— Compounds 
of  Here,  There,  Where — Negative  Prefixes  153 
XXX.  Reporting  Grammalogues — Grammalogues, 

Alphabetical  List 159 

XXXI.  Reporting  Contractions — ContractedWords, 

Complete  Alphabetical  List  of          .         .   167 
XXXII.  Advanced  Phraseography   .         .      '  .         .182 

XXXIII.  Business  Phrases  *nd  Contractions      .         .192 

XXXIV.  Law  Phrases  200 

XXXV.  Legal  Correspondence          ....  204 

XXXVI.  Legal  Forms — Miscellaneous    Legal  Docu- 
ments— Legal  Papers  in  Actions      .         .  209 
XXXVII.  Intersected  Words  and  Phrases  .         .         .225 

XXXVIII.  Similar  Words 228 

XXXIX.  Shorthand  in  Practice          .         .         .         .239 
XL.  Reporting   Exercises   in    Engraved    Short- 
hand          243 

Index  .  274 


ISAAC 
PITMAN'S    SHORTHAND 

(PHONOGRAPHY). 

CHAPTER    I. 

DIRECTIONS  TO   THE   STUDENT. 

1.  The  system  of  shorthand  set  forth  in  the   following 
pages  was  given  the  name  of  Phonography  (a  term  derived 
from  two  Greek  words  meaning  "sound  writing")  because 
it  affords  the  means  of  accurately  recording  the  sounds  of 
spoken  language.     From  the  outset,  therefore,  the  student 
should  remember  that  he  is  learning  to  write  by  SOUND  ;  that 
each  character  represents  one  definite  sound  and  no  other  ; 
and  that  the  ordinary  spelling — with  its  many  irregularities 
and  inconsistencies — as  exhibited  in  printing  and  in  long- 
hand writing,  is  not  to  be  followed,  or  imitated. 

2.  When  he  has  mastered  the  signification  of  the  phono- 
graphic signs,  the  student  should  use  those  which  represent 
the  equivalent  sounds  in  forming  the   characters   for  the 
words  he  desires  to  write.     For  example,  if  he  wishes  to 
write  in  Phonography  the  word  knee  (commonly  spelt  with 
four  letters,  though  made  up  of  only  two  sounds),  he  needs 
to  use  but  two  phonographic  signs,  namely,  that  for  the 
consonant  ^^  n  and  that  for  the  vowel  .  e,  thus,  v_x.  knee. 
To  spell  in  this  fashion  a  mental  analysis  of  the  sounds  of 


2  Directions  to  the  Student.  3~5 

words  must  be  made,  but  this  process  is  very  easily  acquired, 
and  is  soon  exercised  without  conscious  effort. 

3.  For  working   the   exercises  and  for  ordinary  phono- 
graphic writing,  a  pen  and  ruled  paper  should  be  used. 
Speaking  generally,  it  is  not  so  easy  to  acquire  a  neat  style 
of  writing  by  the  use  of  a  pencil  instead  of  a  pen.     In  re- 
porting, no  doubt,   the  pencil  is  frequently  employed;  in 
some  cases,  indeed,  it  is  impossible  to  use  a  pen  for  note- 
taking.     The  student  would  do  well,  therefore,  to  accustom 
himself  to  write  with  either  a  pen  or  a  pencil  in  the  more 
advanced  stages  of  his  progress,  though  for  writing  the 
exercises  in  this  book  the  pen  only  is  recommended. 

4.  The  student   should  hold   his   pen   as   for  longhand 
writing,  but  the  elbow  should  be  turned  out,  so  that  the 
letter  \  &  can  be  struck  with  ease.     He  should  also  hold 
the  pen  lightly.     The  wrist  must  not  be  allowed  to  rest 
upon  the  note-book  or  desk.     In  order  to  secure  the  great- 
est freedom  of  movement,  the  middle  of  the  fore-arm  should 
rest  on  the  edge  of  the  desk.     The  writer   should  sit  in 
front  of  his  work,  and  should  have  the  paper  or  note-book 
parallel  with  the  edge  of  the  desk  or  table.     For  shorthand 
writing  the  nib  employed  should  not  be  too  stiff,  but,  as  the 
thick  and  thin  characters  of  Phonography  need  to  be  made 
quite  distinctive,  it  must  have  a  sufficiently  fine  point  for 
this  purpose.     Paper  with  a  smooth  surface  is  absolutely 
essential.     Particulars  of  stationery,  etc.,  suitable  for  short- 
hand purposes  will  be  found  in  the  catalogue  at  the  end  of 
this  work. 

5.  At  the  outset  the  student  should  not  attempt  rapid 
writing.     It  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  he  should 
train  his  hand  to  write  all  the  signs  employed  in  the  system 
with  accuracy  and  neatness,  before  he  endeavors  to  write 
with  speed.     If  he  accustoms  himself  to  do  this  in   the 
earlier  portion  of  his  shorthand  studies,  he  will  never  have 


6-y  Directions  to  the  Student.  3 

occasion  to  lament  the  illegibility  of  his  writing  when,  at 
the  proper  time,  he  practises  for  speed. 

6.  The  course  of  procedure  recommended  to  the  student 
of  Phonography  is  that  he  should  thoroughly  master  the 
explanations  and  rules  which  precede  the  respective  exer- 
cises,   and  write  out    the   illustrative  words,    afterwards 
working  the  exercises.     As  the  secret  of  success  in  short- 
hand is  PRACTICE,  it  is  advisable  that  the  various  exercises 
should  be  written  and  re-written  until  they  can  be  done 
with  perfect  accuracy.     The  perusal  of  progressive  reading 
lessons  in  printed  shorthand  will  also  be  found  helpful  to 
the  student  in  forming  a  correct  style  of  writing. 

7.  The  system  is  fully  explained  in  the  following  pages, 
and  can  be  acquired  from  the  instruction  books  alone  by 
any  one  who  is  prepared  to  devote  ordinary  perseverance 
and  application  to  the  study.     With  the  assistance  of  a 
teacher,  however,  more  rapid  and  satisfactory  advance  will 
be  made  iu  the  mastery  of  the  art.     Should  any  difficulty 
be  experienced  in    finding    one,    the   publishers  will  be 
pleased  to  furnish  any  student  with  the  names  and  ad- 
dresses of  the  nearest  teachers  of  Pitman's  Shorthand,  on 
his  forwarding  a  stamped  and  addressed  envelope  for  a 
reply.     It  should  be  pointed  out  that  adequate  progress  in 
the  acquirement  of  the  art  of  shorthand  will  only  be  made 
if  a  certain  portion  of  time  is  regularly  devoted  to  the 
study  EVERY  DAY  ;  or,  in  the  case  of  school  or  class  instruc- 
tion,   by  a   thorough   and   punctual   performance   of    the 
allotted  portions  of  work  forming  the  course.     Study  at 
irregular  intervals  of  time  is  of  little  value,  but  an  hour,  or 
a  longer  period,  devoted  daily  to  the  task  will,  in  a  com- 
paratively short  time,  allow  of  a  complete  knowledge  of 
the  system  being  gained,  while  assiduous  practice  will 
bring  speed. 


TABLE    OF    CONSONANTS. 


Letter. 

Character. 

Name. 

As  in 

P 

\ 

pee 

rope         'post 

B 

\ 

bee 

robe          boast 

T 

1 

tee 

fate          rip 

Explo- 
dents. 

D 
CH 

1 

dee 
chay 

fade          dip 
etch          chest 

J 

/ 

jay 

edge         jest 

K 



kay 

lee&           cane 

G 



gay 

league       <7ain 

F 

v 

ef 

safe         fat 

V 

V. 

vee 

safe          vat 

TH 

( 

ith 

vfreath      thigh 

Con- 

TH 

( 

thee 

wrea^e    thy 

tinuants. 

S 

) 

ess 

hiss           seal 

z 

) 

zee 

his            seal 

SH 

J 

ish 

vicious      she 

ZH 

J 

zhee 

vision   treasure 

f 

M 

— 

em 

seem         met 

Nasals,    -j 

N 

— 

en 

seen          ?zet 

I 

NG 

w 

ing 

low<7          aw<7er 

Liquids,   j 

L 
R 

^~  IP 

~"\  ^  up 

el 
ar,  ray 

fa.ll            light 
for            right 

Coales-     f 

W 

down 
o^"  up 

way 

away         wet 

cents.       [ 

Y 

c^   up 

yay 

ayah         yet 

Aspirate. 

>  - 

H 

/    cT^  up 
down 

hay 

adAere      high 

8-12  The  Consonants.  5 

THE   CONSONANTS. 

8.  For  the  representation  of  all  the  consonant  sounds 
(except  w,  y,  and  aspirate  A),  the  simplest  geometrical 
forms  are  used,  namely,  straight  lines  or  curves,  as  shown 
in  the  following  diagrams  : 


9.  The  order  of  the  arrangement  of  each  group  of  con- 
sonants, as  exhibited  in  the  table  on  the  opposite  page, 
follows  the  order  of  the  oral  movements  from  the  lips  back- 
wards in  the  utterance  of  their  respective  sounds.   The  first 
two  consonants,  p,  J,  are  pronounced  between  the  lips,  and 
the  remaining  six  at  the  several  barriers  further  back  in 
the  mouth,  in  the  succession  indicated  in  the  phonographic 
alphabet. 

10.  The  first  group  of  eight  consonants,  represented  by 
straight  strokes,  is  called  "explodents,"  because,  in  pro- 
nouncing them,  the  outgoing  breath  is  forced  in  a  sudden 
gust  through  barriers  previously  closed. 

11.  The  next  group  of  eight,  represented  by  upright  or 
sloping  curves,  is  called  "continuants,"  because  in  these 
the  outgoing  breath,  instead  of  being  expelled  suddenly,  is 
allowed  to  escape  in  a  continuous  stream  through  similar 
barriers  partially  open. 

12.  The  "nasals,"  represented  by  horizontal  curves,  are 
produced  by  closing  the  successive  barriers  in  the  mouth 
against  the  outgoing  air-stream,  so  that  it  has  to  escape 
through  the  nose.     The  "liquids,"  represented  by  arched 
curves,  flow  into  union  with  other  consonants,   and  thus 
make  double  consonants  or  consonantal  diphthongs.     The 
"  coalescents  "  precede  vowels  and    coalesce   with  them. 
The  "  aspirate  "  is  a  breathing  upon  the  following  vowel. 


6  The  Consonants.  13-16 

13.  The  first  sixteen  consonants  form  pairs  ;  thus,  p  and 
b;  t  and  d;  ch  andj;  k  and  g ;  /and  v;  th  and  th;  s  and 
z;  sh  and  zh.    The  articulations  in  these  pairs  are  the  same, 
but  the  sound  is  light  in  the  first,  and  heavy  in  the  second 
consonant  of  each  pair.     Each  pair  of  consonants  is  rep- 
resented by  similar  strokes,  but  that  chosen  for  the  second 
is  written  thick,  instead   of  thin;    as  \  p,  \  5,  |  t,  \  d, 

^  f,  V.  «,  etc.  We  have,  therefore,  a  light  sign  for  the 
light  sound,  and  a  heavy  sign  for  the  heavy  sound.  In  this, 
as  in  the  fact  that  each  group  of  consonants  is  represented 
by  kindred  signs,  a  natural  relation  is  preserved  between 
the  sound  heard  and  the  sign  written.  Throughout  this 
book  whatever  relates  to  the  light  consonants  relates  also 
to  the  corresponding  heavy  ones  (unless  otherwise  stated). 

14.  The  consonants  should  be  written  about  one-sixth  of 
an  inch  long,  as  in  these  pages.     Care  should  be  taken  to 
form  the  curved  thick  letters,  when  standing  alone,  thus 
^_  «,  )  2.     If  made  heavy  throughout  they  look  clumsy  : 
they  should  be  thick  in  the  middle  only,  and  taper  off  at 

each  end,  except  when  a  joining  such  as  V v  g  is  made. 

Thick  strokes  are  never  written  upward. 

15.  As  an  aid  to  remember  the  strokes  for  th  and  s,  note 
that  )  s  is  the  curve  on  the  right  side  of  /)    The  consonants 
Z  and  r  form  the  Zeft  and  right  sides  of  an  arch  ^1^ 

16.  All  the  Exercises  that  follow  must  be  carefully  writ- 
ten out,  the  name  of  each  shorthand  letter  being  pronounced 
aloud  as  it  is  written.     The  consonants  must  always  be 
called   by   their   phonetic   names:    thus,    "ch"  is   to   be 
named  chay,  not  see  aitch ;    "g"  gay,  not  jee;    "ng"ing, 
not  en  jee.     The  reason  for  this  is  that  the  letters  of  the 
phonetic  alphabet  stand  on  such  an  entirely  new  basis  of 
constancy  and  fixity  of  value,  as  compared  with  the  letters 
of  the  ordinary  alphabet,  that  they  require  to  be  designated 
by  new  names. 


Exercise  on   Consonants.  7 

Exercise  1. 

{To  te  written  "by  the  student.      The  arrow    »+•   shows  the 
direction  in  which  the  consonant  is  to  be  struck.) 

P,  B     ^\  *X         \\         \\         \\         \\ 

T,  D       $|      ||  ||  |          |    |          |    |          || 

CH,  J  [down]  //     //          If         I    /         I  I         II 

K,  G     ±±    ±±    _    _    _    _    _    _    _    _ 

F,  V     ^\V  V.V.  V.V.  VV.  V.^ 

TH,  TH    t(    l(  (     (  (     (  (     (  (     ( 

S,  Z        fi    t)  )     )  )     )  )     )  )     ) 

BH,  ZH     &  &  JJ  JJ  JJ  JJ 

M  ^"^  *—  N  '-•^  ^-S  X—  N  X—  N  ^-^  X—  X 


L[uP]  fr   rrrrrrrr 

R  [down]    *^  ~^      "*N     "^   [up]    5^      ^     ^     ^ 

W  [up]   *2-  t^<^<^^^'&^&^^' 

Y  [up]     j?^  cr-^-^-^^c^^ 

H  [down]  tf  1       J       J  [up]   ^        ^       ^       ^ 


8  Exercises  on  Consonants.  17-18 

17.  The  consonants   /  chay  and   ^  ray  are  somewhat 
similar    in    appearance.      It    is    impossible,    however,    to 
mistake  one  for  the   other,  inasmuch   as   chay  is   always 
written  DOWN,    while   ray  is    always  written   UP  ;    thus, 
fj    chay,   *&'  ray. 

18.  If  the  pupil  cannot  produce  a  fair  copy  of  the  letters 
in  Exercise  1  at  the  first  trial,  he  should  write  the  page 
several  times,  and  vary  the  practice  by  writing  the  letters 
in  irregular  order  ;  thus,  _       /      ^      ~^\       ^-"       / 

Exercise   2. 

Copy  the  shorthand  letters  and  write  the  longhand  letter  after 
or  on  the  line  below  each. 

i-\p,\s,\\//  ___  ^  «-  ;  ^  ^ 

2-    ^    \    cr-     |    7     \  -  c-     I     /   ^    _    /   _ 

3.     Vs   ((}^jj^^^r~\ 


5.   \^_^~ 

6.  \_;v_^-/<r-_  <^  ^  ^  —  ! 

7.  j^)(^^^_jo^r~^ 

8.   |_|_-\      /    \      /      J    ^    ^  ^  ^ 

Exercise   3. 

Write  the  longhand  letters,  and,  place  the  shorthand  letter  after 
each.  The  letter  (  named  "ith,"  is  represented  by  "£A"y 
and  (  named  "thee,"  by  "th." 

1.  d  |  ,  h  (up),  h  (down),  y,  w,  r  (up),  r  (down),  1,  ng,  n,  m. 

2.  zh,  sh,  z,  s,  th,  th,  v,  f,  g,  k,  j,  ch,  d,  t,  b,  p,  y,  r  (down). 

3.  ng,  m,  s,  th,  g,  d,  h  (up),  w,  1,  r  (up),  ch,  b,  g,  1,  w,  f. 

4.  th,  r  (down),  th,  v,  m,  ch,  g,  y,  j,  t,  b,  s,  d,  zh,  sh,  p,  n,  v, 


Review.  • 

REVIEW. 

1.  Into  how  many  groups  are  the  consonants  of  the  alphabet 

of  Phonography  divided  ?    Name  them. 

2.  Why  is  it  wrong  to  call  them  by  their  ordinary  instead 

of  their  phonetic  names  ? 

3.  Give  some  words  in  which  the  following  sounds  occur:— 

ith,  tlite;  lay,  gay;  way,  yay ;  chay,  jay. 

4.  How  is  ray  distinguished  from  ch  f 

5.  Write  the  shorthand  letters  for  w,  y,  5,  j,  Tc,  f,  s,  I,  ah. 

6.  Name  the  sixteen  letters  which  form  pairs. 


10  Long  Vowels.  19-21 

CHAPTER  II. 

LONG    VOWELS. 

19.  There   are   six  simple   long  vowels  in  the  English 
language,  namely, — 

Lingual.  Labial. 

AH,          EH,          EE;'      'AW,          OH,  OO.' 

as  heard  in  the  words 
Alms,         Ale,          Eel;        All,  Oak,        Ooze. 

They  should  be  pronounced  as  single  sounds ;  thus,  ah  aa 
in  alms  [not  a-aitch];  eh  as  in  ape;  ee  as  in  eel;  aw  as  awe 
[not  a-double-you] ;  oh  as  owe;  oo  as  in  ooze.  They  may  be  re- 
membered by  repeating  the  following  sentence  : 

Pa    may     w0    all     go    too. 

ah,      eh,      ee,    aw,    oh,    oo. 

20.  They  are  sounded   in   the   larynx  or  voice-box  by 
the  play  of  the  vocal  cords  on  the  outgoing  stream  of  air, 
with  simultaneous  adaptation  of  the  position  of  the  tongue 
and  lips.     The  order  of  the  vowels  in  each  group  corre- 
sponds with  the  order  of  their  utterance  by  the  vocal  organs, 
each  series  commencing  with  the  most  open  and  ending 
with  the  most  closed  sound.     The  first  three  vowels,  repre- 
sented in  Phonography  by  a  heavy  dot  (.),  are  called  Lingual, 
because  in  their  production  the  tongue  is  mainly  concerned ; 
the  last  three,  represented  by  a  short  heavy  dash  (_),  are 
called  Labial,    because   in  their  production  the  lips  are 
mainly  concerned. 

21.  The  dots  and  dashes,  representing  the  long  vowels, 
are  numbered  1,  2,  and  3,  thus  : 

1.  ah    "\  1.  aw  ~i 

2.  eh    •;  2.  oh    - 

3.  ee    j  3.  oo    J 


22-26  Long  Vowels.  11 

They  are  hence  called  first-place,  second-place,  and  third- 
place  vowels  respectively. 

22.  There  are  three  distinct  positions  at  the  side  of  each 
consonant  where  the  respective  vowel  signs  may  be  placed, 
namely,  at  the  beginning,  the  middle,  and  the  end.  These 
places  are  also  numbered  1,  2,  and  3.  They  are  counted 
from  the  point  where  the  consonant  begins.  In  the  case  of 
down-strokes,  the  vowel  places  count  from  the  top  down- 

>!          *|"        ii 
wards,  thus  >\^,     TU      ^*ji   in  the  case  of  up-strokes, 

the  vowel  places  count  from  the  bottom  upwards,   thus 
in  the  case  of  horizontal  strokes  from 

*>-» 


left  to  right,  thus 

I    2    3 

23.  The  vowel  signs  are  put  in  the  places  which  corres- 
pond with  their  numbers;    thus  |  taA('),  |«  feA(J),  |.  tea(*), 


(     low(*), 

24.  The  vowel  signs  must  be  written  at  a  little  distance 
from  the  consonant.     If  allowed  to  touch  (except  in  a  few 
cases  which  will  be  mentioned  hereafter),  they  would  give 
rise  to  mistakes.     A  dash  vowel  may  be  written  at  any 
angle  that  is  distinct,  the  right  angle  being  generally  most 
convenient;  thus,  |_or  |    two;   \^_  or  \^_  foe;  /.  or  /^  Joe. 

25.  When  a  vowel  is  placed  on  the  left-hand  side  of  a 
perpendicular  or  sloping  consonant,  it  is  read  before  the 
consonant,  as  "X  ape,  •[  ate,  '/age.   When  a  vowel  is  placed 
on  the  right-hand  side  of  a  perpendicular  or  sloping  con- 
sonant, it  is  read  after  the  consonant,  as  X  pay,  J-  Tay, 
/-  ^y. 

26.  When  a  vowel  is  placed  above  a  horizontal  consonant, 
it  is  read  before  the  consonant,  as  _•_  ache,  _  :  eke,  -J^mcn. 
When  a  vowel  is  placed  below  a  horizontal  consonant  it  is 
read  after  the  consonant,  as  ___  Tcay,  —  .  key,  •*  __  no. 


12  Long  Vowels,  27-28 

27.  The  following  Diagrams  further  illustrate  the  posi- 
tions of  the  vowels,  as  explained  in  paragraphs  21-26 : 


A  VOWEL   BEFORE   A   CONSONANT. 
p  t  sh  I  J{ 

2\       2       •?  y        "Y 

(down)         (up) 
A  VOWEL   AFTER   A   CONSONANT. 

p  t          sh  I  k 

4.  I1  J1        /d 

\2  2  y        r z 

V        |3        T^        ''  rn 

(down)         (up) 

28.  In  writing  Plionography  the  student  should  strike 
the  consonant  first,  and  then  fill  in  the  vowel  in  its  proper- 
place. 

Exercise  4. 

Write  the  longhand  word  after  the  shorthand,  as  in  line  1. 

1.  *|  aid,        I"  day,        ^  aim,        ^r^  may,        _X  show. 

2.  i        ^        '         r        -T-     -^V      ^       <~^      L      j—^ 

3.  -I         I"          K  )-  ')          >          -)          \ 

<.     \       ^       (-)-_).        ^       -|        J        ) 


5.  ^  x  "^  v  .    ^ 

6.     I.  <*  ^        ^          / 


Long  Vowels.  !• 

Exercise  5. 

Write  the  shorthand  word  after  the  longhand. 

1.  Bah  \  ha  (A  down) ;  raw  (r  up),  awed,  daw. 

2.  Yea  ^<"  ale,  fay ;  roe  (r  up),  though. 

3.  Eat  J  pea,  thee,  we  ;  Zoo,  moo,  boo,  rue  (r  up). 

4.  Paw,  woo,  maw,  aught,  jaw,  shay,  haw  (h  down). 

5.  They,  chew,  Ayr  (r  down),  re  (r  up),  awn,  Co. 

6.  Caw,  e'en,  auk,  yew,  awl. 

REVIEW. 

1.  How  many  long  vowels  are  there  ? 

2.  Name  the  two  groups  into  which  they  are  divided,  and 

explain  the  reason  for  this  division. 

3.  By  what  signs  are  they  represented  ? 

4.  How  are  they  distinguished  ? 

5.  How  are  the  places  of  the  vowels  counted  with  regard 

to  an  upstroke;    and  how  with  regard  to  a  down- 
stroke  ? 

6.  In  what  positions  or  places  should  the  vowel  signs  ah, 

oh,  oo,  eh,  aw,  ee  be  written  ? 

7.  Write  the   consonants  p  and   ?,  and   show  the  vowel 

places  before  and  after  them. 


14  Joined  Consonants.  29-34 

CHAPTER    III. 
JOINED     CONSONANTS. 

29.  Consonants  when  joined  should  be  written  without 
taking  the  pen  from  the  paper,  the  beginning  of  the  second 
consonant  joining  the  end  of  the  first  ;  thus, 

| not    | —      V^-^     \ Y~      I    I       \f        f\      } s 

tk,  fm,        pic,       tl,       It,        pi,        lp,        sk. 

30.  Consonants  when   joined   are  written  in   the   same 
direction  as  when  standing  alone,  up  strokes  being  always 
written    upward,    and    down    strokes    downward  ;    thus, 

~~]  mt,  not  ^~\ 

31.  L  and  sh,  however,  when  joined  to  other  strokes, 
may  be  written  either  upward  or  downward,  under  rules 
which  will  be  explained  later.     The  following  are  examples 
of  the  joining  of  these  consonants  : 

Im,        Im,         Ik,        Ik,        I  ng,      shf,    sh  m,      sh  I,     I  sh. 

32.  In  a  combination  of  consonants,  the  first  descending 
stroke  usually  rests  on  the  line  ;  thus, 

3  2  ^  O  ^  .X 

tch,  cht,    Jet,    mch,    rib,      mr,      ptk,    Tcchp,    ptf,  mnthi. 

33.  An  ascending  stroke  beginning  a  combination  should 
commence  on  the  line  ;  thus, 


lp,        ro,        wk,        yr,        hf,         yip,        rmn,        rlv. 

34.  A  horizontal  stroke  followed  by  an  ascending  stroke 
is  written  on  the  line  ;  thus, 


mlr,         nr,          Id,  Jar,  gl,  lew. 


35'39  Joined  Consonants.  15 

85.  "When  a  straight  consonant  is  repeated,  there  must 
be  no  break  between  the  two  letters  ;  thus, 

-V-V/-/ --\--f 

pp,      lib,     chch,  jj,        kk,        gg,        td,        kg,         bp,     dt. 
36.  A  curved  consonant  is  repeated  thus, 


mm,  nn,  II,  ff,          ss,          rr. 

CH  AND   UPWARD   R. 

37.  As  already  poinced  out,  chay  is  always  a  downstroke, 
and  ray  always  an  upstroke ;  moreover,  when  ch  and  r  stand 
alone,  ch  slopes  a  little  from  the  perpendicular,  and  r  slopes 
a  little  from  the  horizontal ;  thus  /  ch,  ^  r.     The  stroke 
naturally  takes  these  slopes  when  struck  downward  and 
upward  respectively. 

38.  When  ch  and  r  are  joined  to  other  strokes,  they  are 
distinguished  by  the  direction  of  the  stroke,  and  the  amount 
of  slope  is  of  no  importance ;  thus, 

.f   A   L  /-  n  ^ 

p  ch,       pr,        ch  t,        rt,        ch  n,         rn,       m  ch,       mr. 

LONG   VOWELS   BETWEEN  TWO   CONSONANTS. 

39.  FIKST  and  SECOND-PLACE  long  vowels,  when  occur- 
ring between  two  consonants,   are  written  after  the  first 
stroke;  as  {__  talk,       \  gate.     But  in   order  to   avoid   an 
awkward   position  for  the  sign,  THIRD-PLACE  vowels  are 
written  before  the  second  stroke;  as   |^.  team,       \    teach, 

X]  read.    The  vowel  is  still  in  the  third  place,  as  indicated 
in  the  following  diagram  : 

LONG  VOWELS'  PLACES. 


16 


Gram  malogues. 


40-41 


GRAMMALOGUES. 

40.  Frequently  occurring  words  are  expressed  in  short- 
hand  by   one   of   their  letters,  as  \    for  \.   be.     These 
words  are   called   grammalogues  or  letter-words,   and  the 
shorthand  characters  that  represent  them  are  called  logo- 
grams, or  word-letters.     At  the  head  of  the  next  and  fol- 
lowing   Exercises    some    grammalogues   are    given   which 
should  be  committed  to  memory.     These    characters   are 
generally  written  on  the  line,  but  often  above  or  through 
it.     The  position  in  which  they  should  be  written  is  indi- 
cated thus  :    (1)  above  the  line  ;    (3)  through  the  line  ;    all 
others  rest  on  the  line. 

41.  The  succeeding  Exercises  when  in  shorthand  are  to 
be  transcribed  in  longhand  ;  when  in  ordinary  print  they 
are  to  be  written  in  shorthand. 

Exercise  6. 

The  full  stop  is  represented  by  a  small  cross;  thus  x 
all  ('),     \  be,     i  he,     .  the,     /•  who  (down). 


2-  V 

3.    K      -A,      ./"      ^ 

4. 


^1 


.    f    (• 


(•  I- 

\  *  I 

P-  (- 

.     r          — !-  x  o.    \      .     — 

^     ^     .     \    *          9.    s    ' 

L  S>    O-  I.;    N   , 


10.  ,  T- 


Joined  Consonants.  17 

Exercise  7. 

In  this  and  following  Exercises  (until  the  rules  on  the  subject 
are  reached),  the  student  is  directed  by  a  small  capital  letter 
when  to  write  the  letters  L,  R,  and  H  downward.  Gramma- 
logues  are  printed  in  italic. 

1.  Balm,  laugh,  palm;  ball,  yawL,  maul,  cawed. 

2.  Shape,  bake,  mane,  fame,  Hague;  polo,  boat,  joke,  foaL. 

3.  PeeR,  deen,  veaL,  leap,  kneeL;  boot,  booth,  rude,  tooth. 

4.  Pope,  coal,  chalk,  faiR,  zeal,  Hawk,  vogue,  cage,  naiL. 

5.  Feed,  liege,  beam,  laud,  poach,  both,  boom,  shoRe. 

6.  Wreathe,  IORC,  ream,  weep,  ware,  thieve,  zero,  sheep.   • 

7.  The  page  may  see  the  mail.     8.  They  saw  the  thief  who 
tORe  the  robe.    9.  Though  he  jeeR,  they  may  name  the  knave. 
10.  Folk  all  say  he  may  be  the  rogue.     11.  They  know  the 
doom  he  may  loathe.     12.  He  may  be  no  hero. 

REVIEW. 

1.  How  are  joined  consonants  written  ? 

2.  Show  by  examples  how  I  and  sh  are  written  when  joined 

to  other  consonants. 

3.  What  is  usually  the  position  of  the  first  descending 

stroke  in  a  combination  ? 

4.  State  the  position  of  an  ascending  stroke  commencing  a 

combination. 

5.  Show  how  a  horizontal  stroke  is  written  when  followed 

by  a  descending  stroke,  and  when  followed  by  an 
ascending  stroke. 

6.  How  are  straight  strokes  repeated  ?     Give  examples. 

7.  State  the  distinction  between  ch  and  upward  r  (a)  when 

standing  alone  ;  (J)  when  joined  to  other  consonants. 

8.  Indicate  by  figures  the  respective  positions  of  the  first, 

second,  and   third-place  long  vowels   between  the 
following  consonants, 


9.  Define  a  grammalogue  and  a  logogram. 
2 


18  Short  Vowels.  42-43 

CHAPTER    IV. 

SHORT    VOWELS. 

42.  In  addition  to  the  six  long  vowel  sounds,  there  are 
six  corresponding  short  vowel  sounds  in  English,  which  are 
heard  respectively  in  the  words  pat,  pet,  pit ;  not,  nut,  foot. 
The  vocal  organs  occupy  nearly  the  same  positions  in  the 
production  of  these  sounds  as  in  the  utterance  of  the  long 
vowels  in  palm,  pate,  peat;  nought,  note,  food,  but  the  short 
vowels  are  pronounced  more  rapidly,  thus  : 

The  short  sound  of  ah  in  palm  is  a  (say  ah  quickly)  in  pat. 
The  short  sound  of  eh  in  pate  is  e  (say  eh  quickly)  in  pet. 
The  short  sound  of  ee  in  peat  is  i  (say  ee  quickly)  in  pit. 
The  short  sound  of  aw  in  nought  is  o  (say  aw  quickly)  in  not. 
The  short  sound  of  oh  in  note  is  nearly  u  (uh)  in  nut. 
The  short  sound  of  oo  in  food  (say  oo  quickly)  is  66  in  foot. 

By  drawling  a  word  containing  a  short  vowel,  the  corre- 
sponding long  vowel  will  be  heard.  Compare  pick,  peek; 
cot,  caught. 

43.  Similar  signs  are  employed  for  the  short  as  for  the 
long  vowels,  namely,  dots  and  dashes  ;  but  the  signs  for 
the  short  vowels  are  written  lightly,  in  order  to  indicate 
their  short  and  lighter  sound,  thus  : 


Sound  Sign 

win 

a      that 


pen 


Stund  Sign 


«s  in 


not 


ii       much    -I 


66      good 

The  order  of  the  short  vowels  may  be  remembered  by  say« 
ing  the  following  sentence  : 

That  pen  is  not  much  good. 


44-45  Short  Vowels.  19 

44.  The  student  will  find  the  exact  value  of  the  short 
vowels  by  pronouncing  each  in  conjunction- with  a  follow- 
ing consonant.  In  order  to  gain  familiarity  with  them,  he 
should  write  them  before  the  different  consonants,  and  pro- 
nounce the  combination  ;  thus, 


at     et     it     ot     ut    66t  ad     ed     id    od    ud  odd 

and  so  on  with  other  consonants  from^?  to  r  (down).  When 
he  has  clone  this,  he  should  contrast  each  short  vowel  with 
its  corresponding  long  vowel  ;  thus, 


aht    at,     eht    et,      eet     it,    ahd    ad,    ehd    ed,     eed    id, 

1    1    -I    -I    J    J    "I    1    -I   -I    .1   J 

awt    ot,     oht    ut,    dot    dot,    awd  od,    ohd    ud,    odd  odd* 


ahm        am,        ehm        em,         eem        im, 

^          l^          ^          A          ^~*          ^4 

awm        om,        ohm        um,        ddm        66m. 

45.  As  a  result  of  this  practice,   many  common  words 
will  be  made,  of  which  the  following  are  examples  : — 

I  at,     J)  ash,      |  add,     ^^  am,     <^  Ann. 
\  ebb,      •/  etch,     _^_  egg,     /  edge,      f  ell. 

J  it,     ./  itch,     \^  if,      (*  ill,     ~|  odd. 
^  off,     ^  or,     \  up,     •)  us. 


20 


Short  Vowels. 


46-48 


SHORT  VOWELS   BETWEEN   TWO   CONSONANTS. 

46.  FIRST  and  THIRD-PLACE  short  vowels  are  written  in 

the  same  position  as  their  corresponding  long  vowels  ;  as 
..  .  x  N.  j  —  _  1 

tack,   I  _  t  tick,   \    pap,    \    pip,  <        rock,  /      rook. 

47.  SECOND-PLACE   short   vowels   are   written   before  the 
second    consonant  ;     as    ~~|  get,  /~*~  wreck,     jj  lutt,  L    tub, 

_f  gull,  ^"  lug. 

48.  Compare  the  places  of  second-place  long  and  short 
vowels  in  the  following  diagrams  and  words:  —    . 

SECOND-PLACE  LOIIG  VOWELS  AFTER  THE  FIRST  CONSONANT. 

/ 

/-\ 


P 

y\ 
I  _  3 


31 


r~2~ 


L, 


SECOND-PLACE   SHORT   VOWELS   BEFORE   THE   SECOND 
CONSONANT. 

2\ 


\f  pale,  X/"  pell,  ~T\  cope,      \  cup,  /(\  robe,  /\  rub, 
[• take,  L^_  Teck,  /^  roam,  s^  rum. 

Exercise  8. 

a,  an  (J),     and  (J  up),     ^  are,      i  but,      I  i^, 


2. 


fl   A  -* 


Y 


V 


Short  Vowels.  21 

Exercise  8  (continued). 
5.    U       \ •       l±       -^        k        —       ^       ^ 

e.  r-1    N>     i     L.    <1     <I.    v/* 

. ).  x  s  N  -)  >  (• 

Exercise  9. 

1.  Dab,  lad,  ARab,  bab,  canaL,  attack,  Hack,  aRk,  bark. 

2.  Check,  leg,  earth,  feLL,  bell,  shed,  yeLL,  wretch. 

3.  FiLL,  giddy,  tinge,  nick,  pig,  rich,  kill,  thick,  gill. 

4.  Cod,  rob,  dot,  knob,  lodge,  foRm,  shock,  nock,  notch. 

5.  Pug,  hutch,  touch,  mug,  bunch,  Hug,  month,  punch. 

6.  Book,  nook,  shook,  push,  pull,  pulley,  nook,  bull,  bully. 

7.  Johnny  saw   the  bay  cob  and  the  filly  eat  nay  in  the 
meadow.     8.  A  lamb  and  a  bullock  are  in  the  meadow,  but 
they  feed  a  long  way  off.     9.  Each  animal  may  go  to  the 
Hay;  all  may  take  of  it.     10.    The  faRm,  though  bane  and. 
chalky,  Jim  and  Bob  hope  may  pay  in  March. 

REVIEW. 

1.  How  many  short  vowels  are  there  ? 

2.  How  do  the  short  vowels  differ  from  the  long  vowels  f 

3.  Give  the  sounds  of  the  six  short  vowels  followed  by  the- 

consonant  t. 

4.  Give  the  signs  by  which  they  are  represented. 

5.  How  do  the  signs  of  the  short  vowels  differ  from  those 

of  the  long  vowels  ? 

6.  Give  six  words  illustrating  the  powers  of  the  short  vowels. 

7.  What  is  the  position  of  a  first-place  short  vowel  between 

two  consonants  ?      A  second-place  short  vowel  ?     A, 
third- place  short  vowel  ? 


22  Diphthongs.  49~55 

CHAPTER  V 
DIPHTHONGS. 

49.  There  are  four  double  vowels,  or  diphthongs,  namely, 
*,  ow,  oi,  ii,  as  heard  in  the  words  vie,  vow,  loy,  and  due. 
The  first  three  are  represented  by  a  small  acute  angle,  and 
the  fourth  by  a  sma-11  semicircle,  thus 

i  v|     ow  AJ     oi  "|     u  n| 

The  component  vowels  in  each  case  may  be  supposed  to  be : 
ei  ou  oi  iu 

50.  The  triphthong  wi,  as  heard  in  wife,  is  represented 
by  a  small  right  angle,  thus  WI  Lj 

51.  The  diphthong  oi  is  written  in  the  first-place,  aud 
therefore  always  at  the  beginning  of  a  stroke,  as    f7  toy, 
•*       coy,    ^  Hoy.     The   diphthong   u   is  written   in   the 
third-place,  and  therefore  always  at  the  end  of  a  stroke,  as 

— _  cue,    ~^\  your. 

52.  The  diphthongs  I  and  oio  and  the  triphthong  wl  may 
be  written  either  in  first,  second,  or  third-place,  as  is  most 
convenient,    as    ^"    isle,    \^~    tile;     \-    fowl,     >-    vowel; 
\^-  twiHll.  . 

53.  Both  I  and  wl  may  be  joined  initially  to  a  down- 
stroke,  as^^  item,  \^  ivy,   )  ice,  ^~~\  ire ;   ]    white,  \_  wife. 

54.  Both  ow  and  oi  may  be  joined  initially  to  upward  Z, 
as  //^"  owl,  //*""  oil. 

55.  Both  ow  and  u  may  be  joined  finally  to  a  downstroke, 
as  \/v  bough,  ^o\  vow,  \,  pew,    [^  due.     After  the  conso- 
nant n,  the  diphthong  u  may  be  written  thus,  ^_<  new,  and 
ow  thus,   — ,  now  ;  I  is  joined  to  n  thus,  ^^j  nigh. 


56-57  Diphthongs.  23 

56.  Learners  sometimes  confuse  the  diphthong  vi  I  with  the 
short  vowel    j  i;  also  j  u  with  the  short  vowel  -j  u,  and 

j  ow  with  the  long  vowel  -j  oh.  The  following  pairs  of 
words  illustrate  the  contrast  between  diphthongs  and  vowels: 
N  bite,  ^\bit;  /Bright,  /\writ;  I  tube,  I  tub; 

v|  -I  >  ^ 

n)  use,  -j  us;  x^|  rout,  X]  wrote;  \  sow  (noun),  "j-sow  (verb). 

57.  When  a  diphthong  and  vowel,  or  two  vowels,  occur 
between  two  stroke  consonants,  each  should,  if  convenient, 
be  placed   against  the   consonant   to  which   it   naturally 
belongs  ;  thus,  ^-«x  newer,    ^)  Louisa. 

Exercise    1 0. 

can  0),      V.  have,       A  how,      /,  or  eye  ('), 

_^.  our  or  hour  (*),      )  was,      why  (')      „  you. 

i.  r  )v  \    u  ^  A|  77  /*   \ 

V\  V\  A/ 

^  <;  L,  '  V-  u  *    4. .  i ) 

"'x      ,„--)•     •  \f    >     L     > 
>  Q   4*      §.  X  .  Vy*  v-.  1,  > 

, .  ^  n  y  x '  <^-,  ,  tf ,  i- ' 

>  A/ 

:vq  I  Vx     ,.  L/  (-  xi  ,  u  -)  ^, 
8. .  Y  )  U  /LS  •)  I 


24  Diphthongs. 

Exercise    11. 

1.  Guy,  rye,  vie,  guile,  mighty;  row  (ra.),  thou,  loud,  cowry. 

2.  Alloy,  Hoy,  envoy ;  Kew,  new,  feud ;  widen,  wifely,  feweR. 

3.  Though  the  dike  may  be  a  mile  away  at  the  mouth  of  the 
valley,  we  can  move  it  by  dynamite.    4.  Why  have  you  allowed 
the  enemy  to  take  a  refuge  so  valued  ?     5.  We  can  manage 
to  annoy  and  terrify  the  foe  eRe  /  go  to  China.     6.  We  can 
aRgue  how  we  may  occupy  the  toweR.     7.  He  was  loyal,  we 
knew,  so  we  may  enjoy  the  aid  we  value  to  renew  the  attack 
and  assail  the  huge  foe.    8.  We  hope  we  may  luRe  our  enemy 
to  downfaLL. 

REVIEW. 

1.  How  many  diphthongs  are  there  ? 

2.  Give  words  in  which  the  diphthongs  and  triphthong  are 

used. 

3.  How  may  I,  ow,  and  wl  be  written  as  to  place  ? 

4.  State  the  positions  for  oi  and  u. 

5.  What  signs  may  be  joined  initially  to  consonants  ? 

6.  What  diphthongs  may  be  joined  finally  to  consonants? 

7.  Give  examples  of  (a)  joined  initial  and  final  diphthongs 

and  triphthong  ;  (b)  show  how  the  diphthongs  u  and 
i  are  written  to  the  consonant  n. 


58-6i  Circle  "s"  and  "  z."  35 

CHAPTER    VI. 

CIRCLE     8    AND     Z. 

58.  £  (together  -with  its  heavy  sound  z,  for  which  «  is 
generally  written)  is  one  of  the  most  frequently  occurring 
consonants  in  the  English  language.     The  consonant  8  is 
represented  not  only  by  the  stroke  ),  but  also  by  a  small 
circle  [o],  which  forms  an  easy  means  of  joining  one  con- 
sonant to  another. 

59.  "When  the  circle  stands  alone,  or  is  joined  to  straight 
consonants  not  forming  an  angle,   it  is  written  with  the 
backward  or  LEFT  motion,  thus  *~) 

^s.    sp,       r  it,      T*  sch,     @L.  sic,      ^  or,       •&    Jcsk; 
^  Ps,    b  ts>     *b  ch  *>     —  *>  **>     ^  rs> 


60.  Between  two  straight  lines  forming  an  angle,  the 
circle  *  is  written  on  the  OUTSIDE  of  the  angle  ;  thus,      f  fat, 

J  —    t*k,       N>   pst,       J.     ch  sp,       <XN  rsp,        /?        rsk. 


61.  When  the  circle  «  is  joined  to  curves,  it  is  written 
inside  the  curve,  and  when  it  occurs  between  two  curves, 

it  is  usually  written  inside  the  first  ;  as,   \^   sf,     \e  fit, 
d  ss,     ^~o  ms,     ^p  ns,      6     si,      I     Is,       _y  s  sh,      ^  sh  *, 

a~t>   sms,       s-v~*    msm,      /         Isl,          \.  msv,       /**  .fslt 
s~o~s  mm,      —  s>-^  nsm,      ^  —  fsJc,       L^  tsn,      t*  Ism, 


msls,     os^  rung,       <¥   ssts, 

b 


26  Circle  "  s"  and  "  z."  63 

62.  The  circle  s  is  always  read  first  at  the  beginning  of  a 
word,  and  last  at  the  end,  the  vowel  or  vowels  being  read 
according  to  their  positions  with  regard  to  the  stroke  con- 
sonant, and  not  with  reference  to  the  circle,  as, 

XI      /     _±-     ^     X     ^     ^     I-     V. 

up,    ought,  age,     oak,     aim,     pay,    may,    ray,    day,    fay ; 

X  I  /  0-!-  0^  X>  STt>  ^  b  Xo 

sup,  sought,  sage,  soak,  same,    pace,  mace,  race,  days,  face. 

» 

Exercise  12. 

v s  o 

._.      any,  or  in  ('), as,  has  (*),  o  is,  his,  —  give,  or  given, 

^— *  him,  or  may, me,  or  my  ('), on  ('). 

1.    f      /       °>\       i       f      c*       <*       -*       ^      -f 
2. 

3. 

o  ,,       •   O      <cx    i          r 

4.  .    -^a-1    i         —    s-s    sf    o  i  .^r.    N 

i     o    •  <o 

5.  -/  -TQ-X     x     V      '""  '       °     "^~ 

8.  A    !•    r   *<V  \     r    W  o     ux     ^  x 

»;  V. h  x  r  o  r\  ~  ^  V 

s.  i  ).  ,  ^  "  J  r  :  c-  -  o  vx  o>< 

Exercise  13. 

1.  Soup,  snow,  eaRS,  keys,  psalm,  seed,  bees,  alms,  thaws. 

2.  Upset,  musk,  deceit,  opossum,  teans,  beseech,  o!xide. 

3.  Sam  is  fuLL  of  dismay  in  passing  the  Bay  of  Biscay. 


63-66  Loops  "st"  and  "str."  27 

4.  But  my  Scotch  gillie  shows  he  has  no  feaRs,  and  my 
Sepoy  has  no  scaRe  as  to  Ms  safety.  5.  Can  you  say  how  I 
may  pacify  Sam  on  this  scpne  ?  6.  Why  you  may  assuRe 
him  he  has  no  cause  to  give  way  to  any  alaRms,  OR  speak  to 
him  in  such  ways  as  seem  likely  to  allay  his  sorrows.  7.  But 
he  is  worse  if  he  feeLs  the  ship  rise  on  the  sea.  8.  The 
reason  is  the  gusty  aiRs  now  rising,  but  we  have  no  heavy 
gales. 

LOOPS   8T  AND   STR. 

63.  The  frequently  occurring  combination  st  at  the  be- 
ginning of  a  word,  as  stem,  and  st  and  zd  at  the  end  of  a 
word,  as  in  mist,  mused,  are  represented  by  a  loop  made 
half  the  length  of  the  stroke  to  which  it  is  attached.  This 
st  (stee)  loop  follows  the  same  rule  as  the  circle  s,  that  is, 
it  is  always  read  first  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  and  last 
at  the  end  ;  like  the  circle  s  it  is  written  backward  to 
straight  letters  and  inside  curves ;  thus  .  ache,  n  .  sake, 

<=*•_  stake ;  __  Kay,  __D  case,  _<=>  cased ;  ^-^  mew,  /— *>  muse, 

s^s  mused ;    (     ale,  6     sale,  g     stale. 

64.  When    convenient    the    st    loop   may  be   employed 
medially,  thus  ^^  vestry,  (j— '  testing,  (^  jesting. 

65.  A  large  loop,  extending  two-thirds  of  the  length  of 
the  stroke  to  which  it  is  attached,  represents  str.     This  str 
(ster)  loop  is  not  written  at  the  beginning  of  a  word.     At  the 
end  of  a  word  it  is  invariably  read  last.     The  same  rules 
for  writing  apply  to  it  as  to  the  circle  s  and  the  loop  st,  and 
it  is  written  backward  to  straight  letters  and  inside  curves; 
thus   \>  pass,    \s>  past,    \$  pastor ;    **-*>  mass,    <-^>  mast, 

<^)   master.    This    loop    may    be    used   medially,    as    in 
<^,«  masterpiece.  ^ 

66.  The  circle  s  is  added  to  a  final  loop,  as  in  the  fol- 
lowing examples,   |f   taste,  ^  tastes,   (^   lustre,  ^  lustres. 


28  Loops  "  si  "  and  "  str." 

Exercise  14. 

0  first,  ..\_  put  (3),   _y  shall,  /  should,  (  them, 
..(..  these  (3),  (,  this,  _4_  those  ('). 

i.  -P     I-    b-    t-    -F     IT    f    b-  •  /V  /* 
i.  f  r  V'  V  >  -r  •*  -i*  *>  * 

3.  v  '  o    J_    •   |p  ,  .  fr  *   \    )   s  %  .  /^ 

/      '    .     b.       1.x  4.    .._      ^      f     N     \     . 


-4-  _ 


t    ^    Ly    N   A.    x  ^    JL      ( 


7.  c  o  .  ^  ,  x  IN 

>  )-  x 


Exercise  15. 

1.  Steep,  pest,  stick,  kissed,  stuff,  foist,  statue,  statute. 

2.  Jest,  jester,  jesters,  elastic,  pastors,  foster,  Chester. 

3.  A  king's  ministers  occupy  nigh  posts;   they  can  speak 
first,  and  they  may  make  OR  man  the  peace  of  the  rest. 

4.  If  chosen  by  vote,  those  who  have  the  powen  to  register 
such  a  vote  should  use  it  to  put  in  office  just  advisers  and 
tho»e  honest  in  counseL.     5.  By  these  the  head  of  the  state 
may  le  safely  advised,  and  in  this  way  his  ruLe  may  he  fixed. 

6.  Ministers  who  faiL,  go  out  of  office  if  they  shall  have  lost 
poweR  in  the  house  ;  in  eaRly  times  kings  dismissed  them. 

7.  Many  are  the  jests  on  the  way  some  kings  bolster  up  dis- 


Loops  "st"  and  "sir.' 


29 


honest  ministers.     8.  In  eajaly  days  staid  officers  have  many 
times  lost  poweR,  as  they  refused  to  be  unjust. 

REVIEW. 

1.  In  addition  to  the  consonant  ),  what  other  sign  is  used 

to  represent  s  1 

2.  How  is  the  circle  «  written  between  two  straight  strokes 

(1)  when  at  an  angle  ;  (2)  when  running  in  the  same 
direction  ? 

3.  How  between  curvec  ? 

4.  How  is  st  indicated  ? 

*  5.  How  is  sir  represented  ? 

6.  Is  the  sign  for  sir  used  initially  ? 

7.  When  may  the  signs  for  st  and  sir  be  written  in  the 

middle  of  a  word  ?     Give  some  examples. 

8.  Show  by  examples   how  a  final  «  may  be  added  to  st 

and  sir. 


30         Large  Circles  "  sw  "  and  "  ss  "  or  "  sz."     67-69 

CHAPTER    VII. 
LARGE   CIRCLES   SW  AND   SS  OR   SZ. 

67.  A  large  INITIAL  circle  written  in  the  same  manner 
as  the  circle  «,  represents  the  double  consonant  sw,  thus 
,f  seat,  ,fy  sweet,  a^  sum,   ^~^  swum,  °^\  sore,   "^\  swore, 
but  &f*  sway,  *<    '  swaying. 

68.  A  large  MEDIAL  or  FINAL  circle,  written  in  the  same 
way  as  circle  s,  represents  ss  or  sz.     This  large  circle  may 
be  supposed  to  contain  the  second-place  short  vowel  e,  and 
thus  to  represent  ses,  see,  ses,  or  zez  •  thus,  '^  (ses)  necessity  ; 

\3  (MZ)  passes  j  ^o  (zes)  possessive;  j-0  (zez)  catises. 
Other  vowels  may  be  expressed  by  placing  the  vowel-sign 
within  the  circle;  thus,  -*p  exist  (ekzist),  exhaust, 


exercise.     Final  s  is  added  by  continuing  the  circle; 
thus,  _^j®  exercises. 

69.  When  a  word  has  a  final  accent,  the  stroke  s  and 
small  circle  or  the  small  circle  and  stroke  s  are  generally 
used,  and  not  the  large  circle,  thus  ^P  ra'ces,  but 

^-  recess';    ND  paces,  but    \  possess'. 


Exercise  16. 

f      Lord,     ^<  thing,    (    think. 

f    f  '  <L    <T 


2. 

3.  .  f  -  .  9  (  (-  _  \  ,  i  r  <?  M, 
-  )-  (•  -f  -  - 


70-71  Vowels  and  "s"  and  "/."  31 

Exercise    16    (continued). 

4.  t  J^  n>«  (  x  •*-    C  1   '  -^    A* 

5.  1    f  .         E        ' 


Exercise    1 7. 

1.  Switch,  Swedish  (sh  up),  swing,  swill,  swiftest,  swivel,. 

2.  POSSCSSOR,    accessory,    unsuccessful,  ;    roses,    anaLysis. 

3.  At  the  desiRe  of  Lord  Swanage,   they  wrote  essays  on 
Genesis.     4.   The  successful,  essay  boRe  the  name  of  Thomas 
Davis.     5.  Many  were  fuLL  of  CRRORS,  but  the  master  seems 
to  think  Highly  of  Davis's  as  possessing  many  excellences. 
6.  A  thing  given  by  many  was  a  synopsis  of  the  book 

VOWELS  AND   8  AND    T. 

70.  As  an  initial  circle  or  loop  must  always  be  readj^rsi, 
and  a  final  circle  or  loop  must  always  be  read  last  (see 
paragraphs  62,  63),  it  is  necessary,  when  a  word  begins  or 
ends  with  a  vowel,  that  stroke  consonants  be  employed, 
and   not   circle   s  or  loop  st,  to  which  vowels  cannot  be 
placed.    Compare,  for  example,  f\  asleep,  and  £^\  sleep ; 
\/  puss,  and  \  pussy ;  [>-  dust,  and   F  dusty.     Therefore, 

71.  The  STROKE  consonant  must  be  used — 

(a)  When  s  or  z  is  the  only  consonant  in  a  word,  as 
)  saw,  )v  sigh,  .)  easy.  The  stroke  is  also  employed  in 
derivatives  from  such  words,  as  J-Y*1  -saw-mill,  £ 
.)  f.  easiness. 


32  Vowels  and  "  s  "  and  "  t."  72 

(b)  When  a  word  begins  with  a  vowel  immediately  fol- 

lowed by  «  or  z,  as   )  _  ask,   v     espy,   )_<  assume,  v)>  _  Isaac 

Nf 

(c)  When  a  word  begins  with  s,  followed  by  a  vowel 
and  another  s  or  z,  the  stroke  s  is  written  and   then  the 

circle  ;  as  j.  cease,  °\  seizure,    J~  society,  cl.  saucer. 

" 


(d)  When   initial   s   is    followed    by   two   vowels,    as 
J-s  Siam,  Jlj>  science,  (      sciatica  ;   or  when  final  s  is   pre- 
ceded by  two  vowels  in  different  positions  ;  as     (   joyous,  • 

i/T  tortuous. 

(e)  When  a  word  ends  with  a  vowel  immediately  pre- 

ceded by  s  or  z,  as  ^/}.  mercy,  ^Q  racy,  \  'busy,  r  )  lazy. 

(/)  When  a  word  begins  with  z,  the  stroke  )  is  written, 
thus  K  zero,  r     seal,   }  "•     zigzag. 

72.  When  the  last  consonants  in  a  word  are  s  t,  with  a 
vowel  between  them,  and  when  a  vowel  follows  s  t,  the 
circle  «  and  the  consonant  t  must  be  used,  and  not  the  loop; 
thus,  ^  rosette,  ^  rusty. 

Exercise     18. 

)  so,  us,  _^_  see,  use  (noun)  (*),     \    use  (verb),   whose  (*), 
/  which. 


2. 


'  I  °  °<  *  <v 

)  X— D  \ 

T-^  i*  j   y^  )      r 
,     )   i 

x-\       P      /  *     •>          O     I       \ 

.an  ...)..  ] .   i  > 

J.~^  4. L  !  »  \- 

•    •  j 


Vowels  and  "s"  and  "/."  88 

Exercise   18  (continued). 

5.  ,  °  t  . 

6.  4.  i 

Exercise    19. 

1.  Ace,  essay,  says,  espouse,  schism,  assize,  assignee. 

2.  Dizzy,  cosy,  rosy,  russett,  suicide,  scissoRs,  easel,  zenith. 

3.  Cecil  can  now  see  it  is  of  no  use  to  assail  the  lessee  who  is 
honest,  and  to  whose  honesty  all  of  us  can  testify.     4.  If  we 
may  say  so,  Tie  ought  to  fie  less  zealous  to  abuse  in  so  fussy  a 
way  such  an  unassuming  fellow.     5.   To  use  Mm  thus  is  to 
show  a  sauciness  which  is  wrong.     6.  OnLy  a  ninny  can  pur- 
sue it  in  so  testy  a  style. 

REVIEW. 

1.  How  is  initial  sw  represented  ? 

2.  Write  several  words  in  which  initial  sw  occurs. 

3.  How  is  ss  represented,  and  how  is  it  distinguished  from 

sw? 

4.  Illustrate  by  examples  the  way  in  which  the  vowel  is 

shown  in  ss. 

5.  Give  examples  of  each  of  the  classes  of  words  in  which 

stroke  s  is  employed. 

6.  When  is  stroke  z  used  ? 

7.  Write  deceit,  sewer  (a  drain). 

3 


84 


CHAPTER    VIII. 


73-75 


L  AND    R   HOOKS. 

73.  The  liquids  I  and  r  are  often  found  following  and 
.closely  united  or  blended  with  other  consonants,  forming  a 

double  consonant  or  consonantal  diphthong  ;  as  in  the 
words  plow,  &row,  glare,  <Zrink,  fly,  fry,  mafor,  douWe, 
etc.  In  pronouncing  these  words,  the  combination  of  the  I 
or  r  with  the  preceding  consonant  is  uttered  by  a  single 
effort  of  the  organs  of  speech.  These  consonant  combina- 
tions are  represented  by  adding  an  initial  hook  to  the  simple 
characters  to  indicate  their  union  with  a  following  I  or  r. 

INITIAL   HOOK   ADDING   L   AND  R  TO  STRAIGHT 
LETTERS. 

74.  A  small  initial  hook  written  towards  the  LEFT,  adds 
L  to  straight  consonants;  thus, 

\  V  A  r  r  T*  P  *-  4- 

p,        pi,        U,        tl,        dl,      ch  I,      jl,          kl,         gl. 

75.  A  small  initial  hook  written  towards  the  RIGHT,  adds 
R  to  straight  consonants,  thus, 


p,  pr,  &r,  tr,  dr,  chr,  jr,  kr,  gr. 
The  following  mnemonic  aid  will  be  useful  for  remembering 
the  pi  and  pr  series.  If  the  Zeft  hand  be  held  up,  with  the 
first  finger  bent,  the  outline  of  tl  will  be  seen  ;  and  if  the 
.Right  hand  be  held  up,  in  the  same  way,  the  outline  of  tr 
will  be  seen.  By  turning  the  hand  round  to  the  following 
positions,  all  the  straight  double  consonants  of  the  pi  and 
pr  series  will  be  formed  by  the  first  finger. 

tl  ,  tr 

chl 


76-79  "/"  and"r"  Hooks.  85 

76.  The  consonant  .*--*  r  is  not  hooked  initially,  the  char- 
acters o^  and  e^  being  employed  for  w  and  y. 

77.  The  double  consonants  formed  by  the  initial  hooks 
should  be  considered  as  syllables,  and  named  accordingly. 
Thus  *\   should  be  called  per,  as  heard  at  the  end  of  the 
word  "paper,"  and  not  pee-ar,  which  would  be  written   V. 


78.  Vowels  are  read  before  and  after  these  double  con- 
sonants  as   they   are   before    or  after   single    consonants; 
thus,    X  pw,    \  ply*  '^  apply,  /X.  repfy,  /S_»  replica  ; 
J  eat,   [|  eater,  ^|  Peter,   ^*ls\  Peterloo. 

79.  The  double   consonants  in  the   following  exercises 
should  be  called  by  their  single  names,  and  they  will  thea 
be  easily  recognized  ;  thus,   *X  per-eh  (pray). 

Exercise  20. 
-----  call  O,    c  —  care,     I  dear. 

L    \    N      I"  -  1  '   >•      T      «f      *  :  ••**      V 

a-  \  v  .^  ^  X  V  ^".  V 


\,  r 

/  -  -  r  -  v  \) 

e.  L  —  v  1   '  ^  Is 


Exercise  21. 

1.  Plow,  apple,  odor,  draw,  pebble,  feeder,  rocker. 

2.  Pickle,  globe,  shudder,  crumble,  mocker,  aRcher,  track. 

3.  Save  a  care,  my  dear  Parker  ;  if  you  call  on  him  you  may 
betray  all.     4.  No,  /  shall  aim  to  please  ;  he  may  "be  bitter, 
but  I  shall  refuse  to  be  angry.     5.  But  he  is  no  peacemaker, 


36  «/»  and"r"  Hooks.  80-84 

so  take  care  how  you  address  him.     6.  He  is  my  debtor,  hut  / 
shall  indulge  in  no  vulgar  reproaches. 

INITIAL    HOOK    TO    CURVES. 

80.  An  initial  hook  can  only  be  added  to  curved  con. 
sonants   in   one   position,  namely,  inside   the   curve,   thus 

Q_  ^  The  hook,  however,  may  be  made  either  large 
or  small,  as  in  the  examples. 

81.  The  consonants   f~  I,    ~\r,  and  )  s  are  not  hooked 
to  indicate  the  addition  of  I  or  r.     The  signs  ^  "^  are, 
therefore,  used  as  extra  forms  for  ft,  fr,  and  ^  *)  as  extra 
signs  for  thl,  thr,  which  with  the  corresponding  heavy  con- 
sonants, have  duplicated  forms,  thus, 

fl,     Q5>   vl,     00^1,    CO  thl. 
fr,     ^  vr,    (  1  thr,    (  ?  thr. 

L   HOOK. 

82.  A  LARGE  initial  hook  adds  I  to  .the  curves  V_  V.^ 

(  ^J  s-^  *• —  ;  thus,  Q_y  fly,  ^_  evil,  C  Ethel,  Vv  official, 
_c~^  camel,  \.  .  penal.  The  double  consonant  shl  may  be 
written  either  upward  or  downward  ;  it  is,  however,  gener- 
ally written  upward.  The  right  curves  ^  .^  ^  9  must 
only  be  used  AFTER  another  consonant  ;  they  are  most  con- 
veniently written  after  Tc,  g,  n,  or  a  straight  up-stroke,  as 
^-C>V/  cavalry,  <r~c\  gruffly,  ^-^X-^  inflame,  J*\  .  n  reflex ; 
and  9  *)  after  &,  I,  as  V\  Bethel,  fj  lethal. 

R  HOOK. 

83.  A  SMALL  initial  hook  adds  r  to  curves;  thus,  /(^_  offer, 
^  every,    "f   author,    v(  either,     ji?  usher,    '~j2  measure, 

^-c-~*  calmer,  I  dinner.  The  double  consonant  shr  is  writ- 
ten downward  only. 

84.  The  alternative  forms  for  fr,  vr,  thr,  are  employed  as 
follows  : — 


8s  "/"  and  "r"  Hooks.  37 

• 

(a)  When   not   joined  to   another   stroke    consonant, 
the  LEFT  curves    ^_     \    are  used  when  the  word  begins 
with  a  vowel,  as   ^.    ever,   \,    affray,  £  ether. 

(b)  The  RIGHT  curves  ^A     )    are  used  when  a  vowel 
does  not  precede  the  consonant,  as   ^  fray,    I.  three. 

(c)  When  joined  to  a  stroke  consonant  which  is  written 
towards  the  right,  the  RIGHT  curves  should  be  used  when- 
ever possiMe,  as  in    I      throb,  ^x  proffer. 

(d")  When  joined  to  a  stroke  consonant  written  towards 
the  left,  the  LEFT  curves  should  be  used  whenever  possible, 
as  in  ^  average,  J  Jeffrey. 

(e)  But  in  preference  to  an  awkward  joining,  eithel 
form  can  be  used,  as  in  ^^_^_  Frank,  \-  froth. 

NO-    HOOKED. 

85.  In  accordance  with  rule,  the  sigu<=  —  would  represent 
the  sound  ng-r,  as  in  singer.  There  are,  however,  so  few 
words  in  which  ng  is  followed  by  r,  that  this  hooked  out- 
line is  used  to  represent  the  frequently  occurring  sounds  of 
ng-lcr  and  ng-gr,  as  heard  in  \_^  banker  ^.  tinker; 
\._^  finger,  (*~*  linger.  Words  such  as  singer  and  wringer 
must,  therefore,  be  written  in  full,  thus, 

Exercise  22. 

i.  < 


3.    -C 

4. 
5. 
6. 


«L 


448G08 


88  «/"  and  "  r"  Hooks. 

Exercise  23. 

1.  ABKival,  rival,  cavil,  flap,  muffle,  fennel,  kennel,  shuffle, 

2.  Athol,  flog,  flooR,  flurry,  ruffle,  flinch,  gravely,  flask. 

3.  Fever,  leather,  Aiithur,  knuckle,  freak,  friaR,  locker. 

4.  Canker,  malinger,  adverse,  packer,  loafer,  docker. 

5.  Fisher,  rider,  owner,  taper,  bugleR,  treacle,  rumor. 

6.  Dover,  river,  giver,  manner,  tether,  thrust,  freely. 

Exercise  24. 

^_     ft1",    *\    from,  er-*.    Mr.    or    mere,   _____   more  or  re- 
mark-ed(l),  <^^   near,  ____  nor(l),  j    their,  or  there,    ^  very. 


J    ^    ^     '    '    V     A     Ux         2.    ) 


2.          o 


V  "  *-•* 

-  4.    C      o     ^ 


^  \r\> 


86-88  Initial  Circles  and  Loops.  39 

Exercise  25. 

1.  My  dear  Ethel,— From  tropical  Africa  there  anises  a 
call  for  more  laboreas  to  raise  the  people  from  their  very 
low  scaLe  of  life.  2.  As  Lord  Bythell  and  Mr.  Thackeray 
both  remarked,  this  people  has  a  rightful  claim  on  all  who 
care  for  the  progress  of  the  race,  and  the  removal  of  brutal 
ruLe.  3.  Slavery,  drink,  the  evils  of  rubber  gathering,  the 
rivalry  of  the  leaders,  and  the  horrible  cannibal  customs 
cause  f eaRf ul  sorrow,  nor  is  it  a  mere  foBm  of  speech  to  say 
many  tribes  must  die  out.  4.  May  we  all  try  to  take  away 
the  feaRful  yoke  is  the  prayen  of, 

YOURS  sincereLy,         GRACE  FLETCHER. 

CIRCLES  AND   LOOPS  PREFIXED   TO   INITIAL 
HOOKS. 

86.  The    circle    «    is    prefixed    to    straight    consonants 
which  are  hooked  for  ?,  and  to  curves  which  are  hooked 
for  I  or  r,  by  writing  the  circle  inside  the  hook  ;   thus, 

^    ply,    ^    supply,     L     disciple,     "^  explode,    f  settle, 
\    pedesta',     <s_:     sickle,      V^_,     physical,     v^_     cipher, 

1       decipher,      ^,     civil,       <$      peaceful,      &^     summer, 

VS.  ^" 

dulcimer,    <s_>    sinner,    'Ns^    prisoner. 

87.  In  cases  where  the  hook  cannot  be   clearly  shown 
(which   are   comparatively  few),  the   separate   consonants 
should  be  .written,  as  in  ^~X>--  forcible,  ^T  unsaddle. 

88.  The  circles  s  and  sw  and  the  loop  st  are  prefixed  to 
the  straight  consonants  which  are  hooked  for  r,  by  writing 
the  circle  or  loop  on  the  same  side  as  the  hook,  thus  turning 
the  hook  into  a  circle   or  loop,    as   ^<    pry,    *X    spry, 

<^  prosper,    °\   sweeper,    %    steeper,   1'   tray,    *)•    strayt 


40  Initial  Circles  and  Loops.  89 

•   <*/    destroy,     \     distress,    |j    eater,    Q   sweeter,    ^  stouter, 
c-j   crew,  a-j   screw,  '    ^N—  o—  corkscrew. 

89.  "When  the  circle  and  hook  occur  medially  at  an  angle, 

both  circle  and  hook  must  be  shown  ;  thus,     j»    pastry, 

a]    abstruse,  ~^\  extra,  r~\_i  gastric,  *~\  mystery,  /"*\  lisper, 

X3  reciter.     The  method  of  writing  slcr  and  sgr  after  the 
consonants  £  and  d  is  shown  in  the  following  examples  : 
\.  _    tacker,         j,  —    tasker,         \^-    degree,        \j-.    disagree, 
|__o  digress,      (^  disgrace. 

Exercise   26. 


T     3 


Exercise   27. 

1.  Satchel,    sidle,    peaceable,    exclusive,   seclude,*  tricycle. 

2.  Feasible,     noticeable,      visible,      traceable,     plausible. 

3.  Simmer,   chastener,   Listener,    passover,    lucifer,    scrap. 

4.  Spread,   jack-screw,    stripe,    sprung,    suitor,    stretcher. 

5.  Stater,  cider,  stalker,  stager,  stabber,  scrub,  scrupulous. 

6.  Exeter,   lustrous,    rostrum,    rascal,    crusader,    decrease, 


Initial  Circles  and  Loops.  41 

Exercise   88. 

^     q        I    •     /  -  ^\  N    <V     '    «\ 

^     LJ_  <  V._^=  >N>  \_, 

C       *        2.    .    cr-[  ,    ./    )      .    ^    'T5    <*->      I       Hx  .    /.  > 

rl  ^  xx  x  X   ./  -c"  x 


V     ^\.    'Xx          3. 

t-^  •  \^\ 

L_    x'. 


4.  'i  c  u,.(-  .  ^ 

'j»n.,r  .  "^u-  v 

kr  s  .    x  5.  ,  r,  )  > 


L.   s 


Exercise   29. 


1.  My  dear  Tom,  —  We  feaK  the  nostrum  you  now  take  may 
possibly  cause  you  to  suffer  afresh.  2.  This  is  distressful  to 
us  all.  3.  If  it  disagrees,  pray  stop  it,  and  have  no  scruples, 
OR  it  may  destroy  youR  poweRs.  4.  We  strongLy  advise 
you  to  eat  no  more  of  the  sweeter  pastry.  5.  Sacrifice  youR 
taste  to  youR  sense.  6.  ARthur  says  you  are  stouter. 
7.  Do  you  cycle  as  freely  as  on  youR  stay  at  Tring  ?  8.  We 
hope  to  call  on  you  this  summer.  9.  Is  the  cider  they  supply 
serviceable  for  you?  10.  If  you  mistrust  it,  you  should 


12  Review. 

supersede  the  stuff,  which  may  onLy  disable  you.     11.    This 
is  the  sensible  path  to  follow.      YOURS  truly, 

LUTHER  BROOKER. 

REVIEW. 

1.  Give  examples  of  words  containing  a  double  consonant 

formed  by  the  combination  of  I  or  r  with  the  pre- 
ceding consonant. 

2.  By  what  sign  is  I  or  r  added  to  straight  consonants  ? 

3.  How  are  the  double  consonants  to  be  named  ? 

4.  By  what  sign  is  I  added  to  curves,  and  by  what  sign  is  r 

added  ? 

5.  Write  the  two  forms  of  fl,  vl,  thl,  thZ,  and.fr,  vr,  thr,  thr. 

6.  When  should  the  right  curves  fl,  til,  thl,  thZ,  be  used  ? 

7.  When  should  the  fr,  vr,  thr,  thr  left-hand  curves  be 

used,  and  when  the  right-hand  curves  ? 

8.  How  is  circle  s  prefixed  to  straight  consonants  hooked 

for  I  and  to  curves  hooked  for  I  and  r ;  and  how  are 
«,  sw,  and  st  prefixed  to  straight  consonants  hooked 
for  r  ? 

9.  How  is  circle  s  and  the  r  hook  represented  medially  at  an 

angle  (a)  between  a  horizontal  or  upward  stroke  and 
a  perpendicular;  (&)  between  a  perpendicular  and  a 
horizontal  ? 


90-96  "n"and"f"  Hooks.  43 

CHAPTER    IX. 

N  AND  .  F   HOOKS. 

90.  A  small  final  hook,  struck  by  the  RIGHT  or  forward 
motion  T^Ji  ,  adds  n  to  straight  consonants  ;  thus, 

^|  Ben,  ^.  tone,  <d£  chain,  T~§  coin,    /&.  rain,    <f&.  hone. 

91.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  hook  which  represents  r 
at  the  beginning  of  a  straight  consonant,  and  that  which 
represents  n  at  the  end  are  both  struck  towards  the  RIGHT, 

£s^.  *T* 

thus,  ''jyj  twain,  ^-  train. 

92.  A  small  final  hook,  written  inside  the  curve,  adds  n 
to  all  curved  consonants  ;  thus, 

Vo  fain,  (^.thin,     jv  assign,    ^  shine,    ^^moon,   /**"  lean. 

93.  A  small  final  hook,  struck  by  the  LEFT  or  backward 
motion,  adds/  or  v  to  straight  consonants  ;  thus, 

^i&tuff,  i^tough,  ^  chafe,   -^>  cave,    ^  rave,    afi  hive. 
There  is  no/  or  «  hook  to  curves. 

94.  The  hook  which  represents  I  at  the  beginning  of  a 
straight  consonant  represents  f  or  v  at  the  end,  and  both 

hooks  are  struck   towards  the   LEFT  ;    thus, 


95.  The  n  and  f  hooks  may  be  employed  medially  when 
they  join  easily  and  clearly  with  the  following  stroke  ;  thus, 

yi  punish,  Jv^  dining,  c-^_>1  cleaning,  ^-\  fancy,  \^  toughish, 
\^,  diving,  ^-a-1  graphic,    -JL-^~]  excellency. 

96.  A  hook  at  the  end  of  a  word  is  always  read  LAST  ; 


44  ««»  and  "/"  Hooks.  97 


as>  \  fen-,  X>  P^ZTj  Va  /M»/  therefore,  when  a  word 
ends  with  n,  or/  or  0,  followed  by  a  vowel,  the  stroke  con- 
sonant must  be  written  and  not  the  hook,  as  \^,  penny, 
\^  puffi,  \^Li  funny. 

97.  The  forms  cJ  shl,  J)'shn,  when  written  upward, 
and  C  In,  when  written  downward,  must  never  stand 
ALONE,  because  it  might  be  supposed  that  cJ  J)  had 
been  written  downward,  and  (?~  upward.  These  forms 
are  distinct  when  joined  to  others  ;  as,  \^j  official, 
Vj"7^  valuation,  >•  fallen. 

Exercise  30. 

1.  V  J   «/    X    J^  Jv    J.    J1-   L  S    H 

2.  V    I-    L    X    L    T    t   t>    [    V    I 

3.  ^      ^     c<>     ^     ^     ^      ^^<^<rV 

4.  V,       fe       ^      ^      -r.       ^       &       J        Y        ^ 

5.  ^        r^,        1- 

ft  •  Vu    V^    t      I 

Vy 

Exercise  31. 

1.  Ten,    John,    bun,    ozone,    Dane,    then,    plain,    drain. 

2.  Doff,    Jeff,    pave,    chough,    Duff,    hoof,    brave,    proof. 

3.  Wean,     weave,    wine,    woof,     run,     roof,    turn,    turf. 

4.  Fen,    fenny,   Avon,    venue,    mine,   Minnie,    nun,    ninny. 

5.  Banish,  plenty,  ORganic,  mechanic,  paving,  cuff,  coffee. 

6.  David,   gun,   agony,   martial,   traveL,   chiefLy,    aniline. 


98-102  «  n  "  and  "f"  Hooks.  45 

CIRCLES    AND    LOOPS    ADDED    TO    FINAL 
HOOKS. 

98.  A  circle  or  loop  is  added  to  tbe  hook  n  attached  to 
a  straight  consonant  by  writing  the  circle  or  loop  on  the 
jame  side  as  the  hook,  and  thus  turning  the  hook  into  & 
circle  or  loop,   as   J   Dan,    J  dance,    J    dances,    J  danced, 

(j-  Dunster  ;  *\  pen,  *\  pens,  ~^\  expense,  ~o  expenses ; 
%  spin,  \.  spins,  .\j-  spinster,  \-  spinsters;  &_,  glen, 
c_o  glens,  ^-Q  glances,  ^-,  glanced. 

99.  The  circle  represents  s  only  b/stween  two  consonants, 
thus  NV-X  ig  not  pns-m  but  p-s-m,  as  in  the  word   /<V1^  opos- 
sum.    Therefore,  when  ns  occurs  medially  both  letters  must 
be  shown,  as  ./?"^  ransom,    LP  density. 

100.  The  circle  s  is  added  to  the  hook  n  attached  to 
curved  consonants  and  to  the  hook  f  attached  to  straight 
consonants  by  writing  the  circle  inside  the  hook  ;  thus, 

V^  fine,  Va  fines,  "^  frowns;  %  Puff»,  ^  drives, 
,_s  grieves,  c^>.  weaves. 

101.  In  order  to  distinguish  between  nz  and  ns,  etc., 
after  a  curved  consonant,  as  in  vans(z)  and   Vance(s),  the 
stroke  n  must  be  used  for  anse,  ense,  inse,  or  ance,  ence,  ince, 
thus,  ^s  vansbut  ^^p Vance;  ^>  menls(z)  but  ^-^s>mince(s). 
This  distinction  does  not  apply  to  I  when  coming  after 
another  consonant,  and  the  hook  is  used  in  such  olitlines  for 
ns  ;  thus,  \^  balance. 

102.  The  large  circle  ses  and  the  loops  st  and  sir  cannot 
be  written  inside  the  small  n  and  f  hooks  ;  therefore,  nsez, 
nst,   and    nster,    following  a    curved    consonant,    must  be 
expressed  by  the  stroke  n  with  the  large  circle  or  loop 
attached  ;   thus,     V^  fences,    V^,  fenced,     f*^  lances, 

lanced,    C^  Leinster. 


.  J-    d-     3,     I    \     ^     ^    </• 


Exercise  33. 

1.  Pins,    spoons,    bounced,    brains,    tuns,    trains,    grains. 

2.  Jones,     dunce,     dunces,     pounce,     pounces,     winsome. 

3.  Fens,  offence,  lens,  lance,  nines,  ninnies,  derives,  Buffs. 

4.  Prudence,  opulence,  summons,  science,  lines,  violence. 

5.  Men  brave  the  periLs  of  the  sky  in  balloons,  and  of  the 
waves  in  skiffs,  if  they  may  perchance  gain  eminence  as 
scientists.      6.    The  aitchives  of  many   societies  give  in- 
stances of  vigilance  and  endurance  in  the  pursuit  of  truth 
on  the  meanest  allowance. 

REVIEW. 

1.  By  what  sign  is  n  added  to  a  straight  consonant  and  a 

curved  consonant  respectively  ? 

2.  By  what  sign  is/  or  v  added  to  a  straight  consonant  ? 

3.  How  is  a  circle  or  loop  added  to  n.  on  a  straight  conso- 

nant ;  and  how  in  the  case  of  curved  consonants  ? 

4.  How  is  the  circle  s  added  tof  OTV  in  the  case  of  straight 

consonants  ? 

5.  Write  offences,  feigns,  fence. 


io3-io8  « -turn"  Hook.  47 

CHAPTER   X. 

-TION  HOOK. 

103.  The  termination  -tion,  also  variously  written  -sion, 
•dan,   -tian,   -sian,   etc.,   which   ends   over   2,000  English 
words,  is  expressed  by  a  large  final  hook  ;  thus,  \j  edition, 

\3  fashion,    'O    mission,    p— J  caution,  NX*  Persian.     The 
circle  s  is  added  thus,    -^p  nations,    b   additions. 

104.  When  -<io»  hook  follows  a  curved  consonant  it  is 
written  inside   the   curve,   like   the  final  n  hook  ;    thus, 

VR>  fusion,    \3  vision,  J-  session,    TS  motion,    ^3  notion. 

105.  When  -tion  follows  a  simple  straight  consonant,  the 
hook  is  written  on  the  side  opposite  to  the  LAST  vowel; 
thus,    N)    passion,    /s\i  option,     !_D   occasion,    *-$    auction, 

1   .    diction,    |  ^   education,   \s?    aberration,    [2  duratiort,. 

106.  When  -tion  follows  a  straight  letter  which  begins 
with  a  hook,  circle,  or  loop,  or  springs  from  the  curves 

V_     V_    /""    the  -tion  hook  is  written  on   the   opposite 

side,    to  preserve   the   straightness   of    the   letter  ^    thus, 

'No    abrasion,     /*^   repletion,      (j    attrition,     ^    citation, 

e^?   Grecian,   0^-5  section,     ^—^    affection,      /^~^   location. 

107.  After  t,  d,  or  j,  not  beginning  with  a  hook,  circle, 
or  loop,  the  -tion  hook  is  written  on  the  BIGHT  side,  ir- 
respective of  the  vowel ;  thus,   LI    dictation,  X]^  rotation, 
Irn.  degradation,      (^  magician. 

108.  The  -tion   hook  is  used  medially,    as       l>     addi- 
tional,    L/  dictionary,    ~^\  auctioneer^     jJ5     cautionary, 


48  «-fion"  Hook.  109-111 

*—  >/*  actionary,  ^^  actionable,  (./*"  devotional, 
^-yp  affectionate,  :O  national,  N>  optional. 

109.  When  -£M>H,  follows  the  circle  s  or  ras,  it  is  expressed 
by  continuing  the  circle  on  the  other  side  of  the  consonant 
so  as  to  form  a  small  hook;    thus,  ^      Second-place  dot 
vowels  between  the  circle  and  -tion  are  written  OUTSIDE 
the  hook;  third-place  vowels  are  written  INSIDE  the  hook; 
thus,  %5  possession,    \,  position,  -~ssi  musician,  •__<>  accession, 

^ji  sensation,  ^e;  incision,  fa  authorization,  i^.  dispen- 
sation, J  transition.  First-place  vowels  do  not  occur  be- 
tween s  and  the  syllable  -tion. 

110.  The  circle  s  may  be  added  to  this   hook  ;    thus, 
%>   positions,    ^    suppositions,    ^7$;   musicians;    and   the 

hook  may  be  used  medially;  thus,  f-  positional,  If  tran- 
sitional. 

111.  When  two  distinct  vowel  signs  occur  immediately 
before  -tion,  write  sh  and  the  hook  n,  in  order  to  accommo- 
date the  vowel  signs;   thus,  ^/^  valuation,  ~~[^J  exten~ 
nation,     JQ  tuition. 

Exercise  34. 


1. 


1789    ) 


M-    2. 


"  -tion  "  Hook. 
Exercise  34  (continued). 


Exercise  35. 

1.  Ovation,  omission,  illusion  ;  lotions,  ORations,  sessions. 

2.  Potion,       cushion,       ration,       apparition,      eLocution. 

3.  Expression,   fiction,   navigation  ;  Prussians,  accretions. 

4.  Tactician,  adaptation,   cogitation  ;  notions,   imitations. 

5.  Cremation,   salvation,   remission  ;  donations,   collisions. 

6.  Exceptional^,        occasional,       sessional^,        missionary. 

7.  Cessation,  precision,  vexation  ;  annexations,  pulsations. 

8.  AccessionaL,     recessionaL  ;     superannuation    (ahn    up). 

4 


50  "  .tion  "  Hook. 

Exercise  35  (continued). 

9.  His  elation  at  the  solution  of  the  problem  was  illusory, 
and  as  soon  as  he  saw  it  was  a  mere  delusion,  his  grief  ica& 
keen,   and  his  relations  began  to  feau   mental  dejection. 

10.  lie  should  have  taken  more  care  in  his  explorations,  nor 
should  he  have  given  heed  to  exaggerations  which  a  brief 
examination  showed  to  have  no  solid  basis.     11.   The  propo- 
sitions he  put  forth  were  shown  to  be  pure  assertions,  and 
illustrations  onLy  of  his  aspirations,  for  his  relaxation  of  all 
tests  brought  its  own  retribution.     12.   There  is  no  division 
in  their  views  on  this  thing,  and  the  exasperation  to  which  it 
may  give  rise  is  increased  by  the  disruption  it  caused. 

REVIEW. 

1.  How  is  the  termination  -tion  expressed  ? 

2.  How  is  the  -tion  hook  written  after  a  curve  ? 

3.  How  is  the  -tion  hook  written  after  a  straight  consonant  ? 

4.  How  after  a  straight  letter  beginning  with  a  hook,  circle, 

or  loop,  or  springing  fromy,  v,  or  upward  I? 

5.  How  is  the  -tion  hook  written  after  t,  d,  or  j? 

6.  Give  examples  of  the  -tion  hook  used  medially. 

7.  How  is  -tion  expressed  when  following  the  circle  s  or  ns? 

8.  How  far  can  this  hook  be  vocalized  ? 

9.  How  is  'tion  written  when  two  vowel  signs  occur  im 

mediately  before  it  ?    Write  accentuation. 


H2-II5  CHAPTER    XI.  51 

ADDITIONAL  DOUBLE   CONSONANTS. 

112.  In  addition  to  the  general  method  of  doubling  con* 
sonants  by  the  use  of  hooks,  the  following  eight  double 
consonants  are  represented  as  shown  below  : 


Letters. 

Sign. 

Name. 

As  in. 

KW 

e_ 

kway 

quick,  revest 

GW 

C_ 

gway 

guava,  anguish 

WL 

(T  (HP) 

wel 

wail,  unwell 

WHL 

C  <UP) 

whel 

whale,  whelp 

LR 

f~  (down) 

ler 

feeler,  nailer 

RR 

"^  (down) 

rer 

poorer,  sharer 

MP,  MB 

~ 

(  emp    ) 
(  emb    ) 

camp,  ewiJalm 

WH 

C^ 

whay 

where,  whig 

113.  The  initial  hook  in  wl  and  whl  is  read  FIKST  ;  thus, 
(^  ill,    (T  wiH">     (F  Billow,     '(J~  whale,    '(/   Whaley.     If  a 

vowel  precedes  w  or  wh,  write  the  stroke  and  not  the  hook, 
thus  </(  awhile. 

114.  The   remaining    six   characters   are   vocalized    like 


qualm, 
gulf, 


the    single   consonants  ;    thus,     j_^-^  .  calm, 
._)    squeamish  ;     —  D    "keen,      C-p  queen  ; 
r  /\    Ouelph  ;    V  fowl,     V  fowler,  ^  Icneel,  "jf  ~kneeler  ; 

A*  Af 

^v  bear,  >-v  hearer,  ^  jeer,  L  jeerer  ;  1^  tram, 
^  tramp,  /^^\  mire,  ^^~^  empire  ;  (^-  way,  cs  whey  ; 
<x?  weasel,  c&  whistle. 

115.  The  double  consonants  LR  and  RR  are  employed 
only  to  indicate  the  terminations  ler  and  rer  ;  separate 
letters  must  be  written  when  another  vowel  occurs  in  the 


52  Additional  Double  Consonants. 

termination,  or  when  a  vowel  follows  ;   thus,    ^  foiler, 
failure ;    -f  railer,    ^/~^     raillery ;    ^  fairer, 
uror;  ^>.  usurer,  r\/' orrery. 
116.  The  double  consonant  x-^  with  a  small  initial  hook 
becomes   mpr   or   mbr ;    thus,    *_,<  scamp,    ^^  scamper. 
ci_e-v  clamber,  f*^  limber. 

Exercise  36. 


Exercise  37. 

1.  Quack,     quaker,    quince,     quiver  ;    linguist,    languoR. 

2.  Welsh,    welfase,     wool,     Willie  ;     whilst,    whalebone. 

3.  Caviller,     ruler,     scholar  ;     adorer,     assurer,     sneerer. 

4.  Damp,  pomp,  Jumbo,  Sambo  ;  whey,  anywhere,  whipper. 

5.  While  on  his  voyage  of  discovery,  the  sailoRs  of  CoLumbus 
began  to  wJiimper  and  whine,  and  he  was  led  to  employ 
whimsical    excuses.      6.    Distress  and    all    sorer   feeLings 
passed  away,  and  there  was  no  desiRe  to  show  anger  as  soon 
as  he  knew  day  must  be  the  revealer  of  the  unknown  shoRe. 

REVIEW. 

1.  Write  the  signs  for  the  double  consonants  Ir,  gw,  mp, 

wl,  Tew,  rr,  wh,  whl. 

2.  In  which  two  double  consonants  is  the  initial  hook  read 

first? 

3.  Write  two  words  illustrating  the  vocalization  of  some  of 

the  other  consonants. 

4.  What  does  /-s,  when  hooked  represent  ? 


xi7-121  The  Aspirate.  M 

CHAPTER    XII. 

THE    ASPIRATE. 

117.  The  aspirate  is  represented,  in  addition  to  the  down- 
ward /  and  upward  <j--*  ,  by  a  downward  tick,  thus,    /    (a 
contraction  of  the  lower  half  of  the  sign  /  ),  and  by  a  dot. 

118.  The  downward  stroke    /    is  used   when  Ji  stands 

ALONE,    or    is    followed    by  or  — ;    thus,    ^v    high, 

f  Hugh;    ^_  hawk,    ^  hog ;  also  when  it  gives  a  better 
outline  than  the  upward  stroke,  as  cA.     hawser. 

119.  The  upward  stroke  a-"   is  generally  used  when  h  is 
followed  by  a  downstroke,  a  straight  upstroke,  the  curves 
n  and  ng,  or  by  a  hook,  circle,  or  loop  ;   thus,    <j//\  hop, 

.   haughty,     <S\   hid,    <f]  hatch,     <tf  hedge, 
heath,    ^  heathen,    <*$  hush,    d^  harrow, 

hurry,    ^^  honey,    ^^  hung,    <f~z  hewn, 
hews,  ^—  hackle. 

120.  When   following  another  consonant,  the   stroke  h 
must  be  so  joined  that  the  circle  of  the  character  cannot 
be  read  as  the  circle  «/  as,  ~*Z.  cohere,  *^L  mohair,    y"  Soho  ; 

V" 
\j?  behave,  t\r%  outhouse,  ^L^     unholy. 

121.  The  downward  tick  h  is  used  initially,  and  is  always 
read  first.     It  is  prefixed  to  the  stroke  consonants    )   ^» 

f    ~~\   (the  fact  that  these  are  the  four  consonants  in  the 

word  SMALLER  forms  a  useful  mnemonic)  or  to  any  of  the 

double  consonants  to  which  it  will  easily  join  ;  thus,    j  hiss, 

{  hazy,   *— -  ham,    t^-~.  hem,    ^  hemp,    *f  hall,    ^'  holly,. 

L\  hear,    S>    hearer,      >'  Hebrew,    v|   hydra,    ^   hedger% 

hither. 


54  The  Aspirate.  122 

122.  The  dot  h  is  placed  before  the  vowel  which  is  to  be 
aspirated.  It  is  used  as  an  alternative  to  the  stroke  h, 
usually  in  order  to  avoid  an  awkward  or  long  outline  ;  thus, 
•'Vj>  happiness,  '%_>  happening,  j.  handy,  ^^\  apprehend, 
"Nw  perhaps,  *~^|  manhood,  (~^F~  loophole. 

Exercise  38. 
...L.  had,  _\_  happy. 


L,l  X  .4, 

.  r        \  o  ^x     2. 


>  rl  \  °  •  </  ^.  v  j  -  -  1 


c  u  .  ^  .1  J-  1^ 

-  1«         3.    ^",    x    7    - 

^    ^    H,  '  . 

U  U 

u  H>  i 


\ 


The  Aspirate. 
Exercise  38  (continued). 

5. }  ^  A  v_  ^  ^  N 

(>  r**i  V  -C 

6.    *^     <<\,     (, 
V  v      •         •~-l*"N     *     <-P"^     -t^^>  (    ^ 

V,         «         V.          \  )        "        x         V 

^  -  o  h>,  ' .  \  o  V^NI  v  ^  C  >  I-, 
\f  ^SS'  :      " 

Exercise  39. 

1.  Hicks,    hock,    Hawkins,    haggis,    hackney,    huckster. 

2.  hoop,    hod,     hitch,     hoary,     heap,    heady,     haddock. 

3.  hone,    hive,    housed,    haggle,    hammer,    hairy,    hardy. 

4.  Unhook,   Sahara,   cohesion  ;    abhor,   unhinge,  unhitch. 

5.  hymn,      hilly,      horn,      horroR,     haze,     hump,     hasty. 

6.  Gingham,   happily,   uphill,  household,   handy,  Redhill. 

7.  In  the  isle  which  is  his  home,  he  says  the  herring  fishery  is 
among  the  occupations  of  the  honest,  homely  people,  and  is 
far  from  unhealthy  ;  on  their  behoof  he  hastens  to  say  this  to 
Hugo.     8.    There  is  no  hotel  there,  but  you  may  stay  at  a 
coffee-house  ;  I  hear  from  Huxley  the  name  of  the  owner  is 
Hogg.     9.  /  shall  be  happy  to  hear  you  have  had  a  pleasing 
holiday  there. 

REVIEW. 

1.  Give  the  four  signs  used  to  represent  the  aspirate. 

2.  Explain  when  the  stroke  forms  of  h  are  employed. 

3.  What  rule  must  be  observed  when  h  follows  another 

consonant  ? 

4.  Show  when  the  two  other  forms  of  h  are  used. 


66         Upward  and  Downward  "  /  "  and  "  r."    123-125 


CHAPTER    XIII. 
UPWARD  AND  DOWNWARD   L  AND   It. 

123.  The   following    rules   govern   the   writing    of    the 
consonant  I  in  either  the  upward  or  the  downward  direc- 
tion, and  the  use  of  the  upward  or  downward  forms  of  r : — 

124.  INITIAL    L    is     generally    written    upward,    thus, 
(^\  loud,    ,r\  aloud,   f^__  life,  /^  alive.     In  the  following 

cases  it  is  written  downward: 

(a)  When  Z  is  preceded  by  a  vowel  and  is  followed  by  a 
horizontal  letter  not  hooked  initially  ;  as,    '£_  elk,    £C.  elm, 
'(^,  Ellen,  ^_,  almoner. 

(&)  When  I  precedes  ^_  o_^  and  o_^  ;  as,   •(£    illusive, 
^  lesson,  (^  Leasing. 

125.  FINAL  £  is  generally  written  upward,  thus,  \f~Paul, 
\f'  Polly,    I?'**  tale,   ]f~-  Italy.     In  the  following  cases  it  is 
written  downward  : 

(a)  After  the  letters  V.    ^v_    ° —  O-  and  any  straight 
upstroke,    if    no   vowel    follows    the    1;    thus,     V  full, 

V  tile,  °p*  scale,  *~f~  quail,  ^  sequel,  -^f  rail,  <rf  yell, 
<%f  Hotcell.  But  if  a  vowel  follows,  I  is  written  upward,  as 
'  fully,  V/'  villa,  ^_f'  scaly,  t_f  Aquila,  ^  rally, 
yellow. 

(b)  After  a  straight  downstroke  if    two  vowel-signs 
come  between  ;  as,    .L  duel,     J     trial. 


126-127     Upward  and  Downward  "  /  "  and  "  r."       57 

(c)  After  a  curve  and  circle,  final  I  follows  the  same 
direction  as  the  circle  ;  thus,  v=  fossil,  No  vessel,  L  thistle, 
^f  nasal,  ^f  Kingdey,  ^  Cecil,  ^"  muscle. 

(d*)  After  the  consonants  n  and  ng,  I  is  also  always 
written  downward  ;  as,  ^  kneel,  ~~/f  only,  \_^  strongly. 

(e)  The  double  consonant  Ir  is  used  for  the  sound  of  ler 
where  a  final  downward  Z  would  be  written  ;  as,  V  fowler, 
~y  Tcneeler,  -if  roller. 

Exercise   40. 

1.  laugh,  olive,  lead  (verb),  allowed,   leach,  allege,  loth. 

2.  limb,  long,  loyal,  lunch,  lugger,  legal,  loudly,  location. 

3.  Alack,  Alma,  allocation,  alcove,  almanac,  Elgin,  alkali. 

4.  Alum,    Allan,    Olga,    alchemy,    align,    along,    alcade. 

5.  Lawson,    lacing,    lozenge,    listener,   looseness,   license. 

6.  Pill,  pillow ;  bell,  below ;  dell,  delay ;  gale,  galley ;  chilly. 

7.  Fell,  fill,  vale,  vowel,  skill,  quill,  roll,  rill,  file,  avail. 

8.  Fellow,  filly,  value;  volley,  skilly,  quilly,  Hollo,  relay. 

9.  Yawl,    Yale,    Powell,    dial,     bowel,    dowel,     trowel. 
10.  Facile,    vassal,    saucily,    missal,    Nile,    -Bingley,    filer. 

126.  INITIAL  E  is  written  upward  ;  thus,  ,<-*  ray,  ^~  roe, 
,/\  rob,  /~7  rag,   /~*  rim,  ^  rife,  ^  rain,    ^  rose, 

2  ration,  -f'  rail.     But  when  r  is  preceded  by  a  vowel  it 
is  written  downward;  thus,    ~^\  air,    ~~*\    oar,   r\     Arab, 

^\ argue,   '"\_N  arm,      \     arrive,    '"^  arraign,   ^  arose, 

•f^~ 
'~^5  oration,  ~V^  early,  r\_.  arena. 

127.  When  r  precedes  t,  d,  ch,  j,  th,  Id,  gl,  w,  it  is  •written 
upward,  whether  a  vowel  precedes  or  not';  thus,  Xlj  irrita- 
tion, '/-J  aridity,   •/  arch,  ^^^  original,  V/C-^     orthography, 
\/t—  oracle,  •/*—  argal,   \/^~~~^Y  ornamental,   x*^5  Irain. 


58        Upward  and  Downward  "  /  "  and  "  r.       S28-I3O 

128.  FINAL  R,  in  short  words,  is  written  downward  when 
St  ends  a  word,  and  upward  when  it  is  followed  by  a  vowel ; 
thus,  ^-^pair,  \/~  perry  ;   1^  tare,   [^  Terry;    L^  jeer, 

I/-  jury;   ~~~~\  car,    . /"  carry;    -c    share,    J^-   sherry; 

*      >• 

^T^  Nore,  ^/  Norah;  f~^  leer,  £*  Laura;  °>\  sore, 
^y  surrey  ;  ^  store,  ^  story ;  °\  swear,  o^  soiree; 
^  utern,  <&>  siren. 

129.  When  r  is  preceded  by  two  descending  strokes,  it 
is  generally  written   upward,  so  as  to  preserve  the  line- 
ality   of  the  writing  ;    thus,    ^N^/  prepare,    I,  debar, 

A  .,  Shakspere.  Write  upward  r,  irrespective  of  vowels, 
rather  than  an  awkward  outline  ;  thus,  xVvcx^  officer, 
/\£o/  reviser,  <^s/  answer,  x/>  rear,  ,^  wore,  ^  yore, 
cS  where.  When  r  follows  another  stroke  and  is  hooked 
finally,  it  is  generally  written  upward  ;  thus,  \/^  lorn, 
j-^/"  morn,  \/>  portion. 

130.  The  double  consonant  rr  is  used  for  the  sound  of 
rer  where   a   final  downward  r  would  be  written  ;  thus, 

l^  adorer,  ^^  "borer. 

Exercise   41. 

1.  raWj     roan,     rough,    reign,     rice,    ram,     rill,     royal. 

2.  rum,     renew,     room,     review,     wreath,     racy,     rush. 

3.  Ear,     ire,     urban,     arrack,    Arran,     Argyll,     orphan. 

4.  Arise,    ark,    irk,    arm,    organ,    urn,    Armada,   Arthur. 

5.  Errata,  arrayed,  Archie,  orgie,  Erith,  earthy,  auricle. 

6.  Boar,  borrow ;   tore,   tory  ;  jar,   Jarrow  ;  cur,    curry. 

7.  Shower,    showery  ;    moor,    Murray  ;    newer,    Newry. 

8.  Sear,  Sarah;  star,  starry;  swore,  swarthy;  steer,  Sterry. 

9.  Aspire,  transpire,  deplore,  dabbler,  babbler,  bugbear. 

10.  Viscera,   razor,    sincere,    Spencer ;    roar,   wire,   ewer. 

11.  Tarn,    barn,    corn,     adorn,    churn,    fern,    learn,    turnr 
\2.  Duration,    immersion,    enumeration,   jeerer. 


1.     s 


Upward  and  Downward  "  /  "  and  "  r." 
Exercise   42. 

v 

o    x     X 


.        a 


r      .  xi 


6. 


S 


-I 


NT, 


7. 


4.  x  4.  'N  '  <  /  f  ^  x  b*  s.4  - 

X          ^  x  \    ~T.    /   ^    ^    )    ^     I 


9. 


c, 


1  ^r  v^,  //  H 
x,  r  N\  .  ^ 
•/  M  c  .x&,  x 


60  Upward  and  Downward  "  /  "  ana  "  r. " 

Exercise  43. 

1.  We  may  fairly  say  the  novel  is  the  popular  shape  in  which 
all  manner  of  erudition  is  now  given  to  the  reader.  2.  The 
discoveries  of  the  man  of  science,  the  researches  of  the 
scholar,  the  lore  of  the  past,  all  are  widely  known  through 
romances.  3.  In  these  the  actions  of  imaginary  people  givt 
occasion  for  narrations  of  discoveries  relative  to  men  and 
things.  4.  By  means  of  solid  treatise,  by  oral  lessons,  01 
by  the  exercise  of  elocutionary  powers  such  things  can  rarely 
fa  brought  to  the  tyro,  or  to  any  but  those  whose  duty  it  is  t4 
learn  them. 

REVIEW. 

1.  How  is  initial  I  usually  written  ? 

2.  Give  an  illustration  of  each  of  the  classes  of  outlines  in 

which  it  is  written  differently. 

3.  How  is  final  I  usually  written  ? 

4.  Give  an  illustration  of  each  of  the  classes  of  outlines  in 

which  it  is  written  differently. 

5.  Which  form  of  r  is  employed  initially  f 

6.  Which  form  when  a  vowel  precedes.? 

7.  Write  erudition,  orgie,  Erdes. 

8.  How  is  final  r  written  (a)  when  ending  a  word ;  (5)  whea 

followed  by  a  vowel  ? 

9.  How  is  r  written  when  two  descending  strokes  come 

before  ? 
10.  Write  visor,  bouncer,  roar,  burn,  derision,  bearer. 


131-135  The  Halving  Principle.  61 

CHAPTER    XIV. 
THE    HALVING   PRINCIPLE. 

131.  Light  consonants  are  made  half  their  usual  length 
co   indicate  the  addition  of  t;  thus,      .      ache,   _._  ached, 
<±_  sect ;    ___  Kay,    _  Kate,   Q_  skate ;    ^    pay,   ~\  pate, 
^  plate,  «^  prate,  v  pout ;  X^  bowl,  X-"   bolt,   X^°  bolts, 
'^  bullet,   s^  mow,  ^  moat. 

132.  Heavy  consonants  are  made  half  their  usual  length 
to  indicate  the  addition  of  d;  thus,      \    ebb,    \   ebbed; 

\A  bow,  v  bowed  ;  -7-  guy,  -7-  guide,  -71-  guided;  ^  glide, 
e^  Gride;  <—-  gray,  ^  grade,  <#  grades,;  /'X,  ZM?«,  f^r  lived, 
(^  livid ;  .)  e««e,  .)  ea*«f. 

133.  It  will  be  noticed  from  the  foregoing  examples  that 
a  vowel  coming  before  a  half-length  character  is  read  first, 
the  same  as  before  a  full-length   consonant  ;    as,   'V    Oft, 
'~  act.     A  vowel  coming  after  a  half-length  consonant  is 
read   NEXT  to  the  primary   letter  ;   thus,    |v  tie,    1^  tight, 

—  no.  ^  note. 
i        '    i 

134.  When  a  consonant  is  hooked  finally,   it   may  be 
halved  to  express  the  addition  of  EITHER  t  OR  d;  thus, 
^  paint  or  pained  ;   ^  plant  or  planned ;   J.  lint  or  tinned  ; 
J    tents  or  tends ;  v=  vent  or  vend ;  ^  mounts  or  mounds; 
s>  rent  or  rend ;  ^  puffed,  x>  paved. 

135.  In  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  with  certain  ex- 
ceptions, a  letter  may  be  halved  to  express  the  addition  of 
EITHER  t  OR  d ;  thus,   V^J  between,    \^>.  Bedwin ;   /\  rab- 
bit,   rabid;    c~^\.    credit,     <r~71     crowded;        ^    collaret, 

— <"""'   colored;     J^  disappoint,     \^    despond;    \ ^  back* 

ward,  ^,  forward  (^  wd  contraction  for  -ward);  |~ ,  dock- 
yafd  (^    yd  contraction  for  -yard),    j?    seated,   „{?   suited, 
•? 


62  The  Halving  Principle.  136-139 

136.  The  four  consonants  ^  ^  f~    ~"\  ,  in  addition  to 
being  halved  to  express  the  addition  of  t,  are  also  halved 
and   thickened   to   represent   the    addition    of    d ;     thus, 
^  mate,   ^  made,  ^  aimed,   ^  mode,   [^  tempt,  [^  timid, 
L.   deemed,    _.  neat,    ^,.   need,    cu  sent,    <*,  send,    \^y  felt, 
\y  felled,  S  heart,  S  hard,  ^^  moored. 

137.  The  forms  r  Id  and  "^  rd  are,  however,  used  only 
when  these  consonants  immediately  succeed  each  other,  as 

^  paled,  X_  paired,  '"Y>  mailed,  ^^  marred.  When 
a  vowel  comes  between  l-d,  or  r-d,  these  consonants  must 
be  written  in  full ;  thus,  "V]  pallid,  \/]  parade,  ^f\  mel- 
lowed, , — /I  married. 

138.  Lt  is  written  upwards;    as   "V  lelt,    except   after 
n,  ng,  w,  kw,  when  it  is  written  downward  ;  as   ^-f  knelt, 
/V  ringlet,    j^  dwelt,    ^T  quilt. 

139.  The  consonants  ^~-  mp,  —  ng,  cannot  be  halved  to 
express   the   addition   of    either  t  or  d,  unless   they   are 
hooked,    initially   or  finally;    thus,     ^     impugn,    ^   im- 
pugned, ^  impend,  {**  slumbered,  ^  rampart,    ^    anger, 
^    angered   or   anchored.      The   double  consonants    f~  •  Ir, 

~*\  rr,  cannot  be  halved  for  the  addition  of  t  or  d  under 
any  circumstances.  In  par.  136  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
heavy  half-length  signs  ^  ^  r  ^\  are  allotted  to  md,  nd, 

Id,  and  rd. 

Exercise   44. 

1.  Pet,  pit,  Tate,  taught,  kit,  aft,  east,  shot,  omit,   pot. 

2.  Wit,  await,  light,  alight,  yet,  plot,  crate,  treat,  plight. 

3.  Bed,  aided,  edged,  jade,  goad,  egged,  mead,  annoyed. 

4.  Old,  erred,   blade,   bread,  glade,  broad,   dread,   greed. 

5.  Pound,    fined,    accident,    unbent,     inward,     brickyard. 

6.  Meat,  mud,  night,   Ned,   admit,   doomed,  fillet,   failed. 

7.  Bailed,    ballad  ;    showered,     charade  ;    tarred,    tirade. 

8.  Pelt,    polite,    kilt,  melt,   omelet,   inlet,   runlet,    quillet. 

9.  Impound,    dampened,    lingered,    hungered,    drunkard. 


140-147  The  Halving  Principle.  63 

140.  The  upward  A  must  be  written  in  words  that  contain 
A  halved,  with  or  without  final  circle  or  hook  ;   as,  <f  hat, 
^  hats,  <f'  heat,  <f?  hunt,  <s°.  hints,  g  haft,  &"•  heaved. 

141.  After  the  -tion  hook,  the  stroke  st  may  be  written 
upward   when    it    cannot    be    written    downward  ;   thus, 

.  M  \   excursionist,   /"E\}   liberationist,   .^\2>    Salvationist. 

142.  The  half-length    r   [/]    should   never  be   written 
alone,  nor  with  s  only  [^>]  added.    Write  X]   [not  xf]  rate, 

x^J  [not  x^]  write,  x^j,  [not  ^]  writes.  It  should  gener- 
ally be  used  finally  for  rt,  and  for  rd  when  it  is  not  con- 
venient to  write  ^  ;  thus,'  [,  dart,  v<y  fort,  f~^  lard. 

143.  Two  half-length  strokes,  or  two  strokes  of  unequal 
length,  must  not  be  joined  together  UNLESS  THEY  MAKE  AN 
ANGLE;  thus,   /  cht  must  not  be  joined  to   /  cht  for  chit- 
chat ;  nor   *\.   pr  to  \  pt  in  propped  ;  nor Tc  to  let  in 

tactics,  nor  ^-^  m  to  ^  nt  for  minute.     Detach  the  signs,  or 
write    the    letters    in    full  ;     thus,     t-/-   or      j       chit-chat, 

\.  propped,  L-i  tactics,  '  ^~]  minute.  In  V  ^"or^, 
v_^  named,  etc.,  the  junction  being  evident,  is  allowed. 

144.  Half-sized  t  or  d  immediately  following  the  conso- 
nants t  or  d  is  always  disjoined;  thus,  ||  tided,  |r  dated, 
1.,  treated,  \.  dreaded,   <f$.  hesitated. 

145.  Verbs  written  with  the  half-length  principle  form 
their  past  tense  thus,  \t_fate,  V^_  fated;  /  cfatf,  /chatted; 
f  nod,   r— i   nodded;  *\/  part,  \XI'  parted. 

146.  Verbs  written  by  a  half-length  letter  ending  with 
a  hook  form  their  past  tense  thus,  «v  print,   *^->\.  printed, 
^>  plant,    %    (to  preserve  the  straightness  of  the  stroke) 
planted,  J?   stint,    f  stinted,  c=  acquaint,    ^ — i   acquainted, 
"  grant,   T^-I-  granted,  />  rant,   /**~^   ranted. 

147.  When  a  word  ends  with  £  or  d  followed  by  a  vowel, 
the  letter  must  be  written  in  full,  and  not  indicated  by  the 


64  The  Halving  Principle.  148 

halving  principle  ;   thus,  __/  guilt,   _  ^\_  guilty  ;   \,  dirt, 

l/\    dirty;  C-  loft,  C^  lofty;  ^  fault,   VC_T|.  faulty  , 

^?  mould,   ^f\.  mouldy. 

148.  The  circle  s.  as  already  explained  (par.  62),  is  always 
read  last  when  it  is  written  at  the  end  of  a  word  ;   thus, 

^  pun,  ^  punt,  ^  punts;    J*   join,  </"  joint,  ^  joints  ; 

^A  frown,  ^  front,  ^fronts. 

Exercise  45. 

1.  hate,    height,   hit,   hits,   hind,    huffed,    hounds,    hunts. 

2.  Fashionist,     elocutionist  ;     evolutionist,     revolutionist. 

3.  Wrote,     writ,     rite,     rout,     port,    tart,     lured,     leered. 

4.  Pit-a-pat,   bribed,    tick-tack,    emanate,  numbed,  feared. 

5.  Attitude,      audited,     vegetated,      doubted,      obtruded. 

6.  Fitted,  potted,  jotted,  netted,  rooted,  polluted,  pirated. 

7.  Branded,    grounded,    stunted,    rounded,    unacquainted. 

8.  Fort,  forty  ;  malt,  malty  ;  neat,  natty  ;  loved,  love-day. 

9.  Tin,   tint,   tints  ;    pine,    pint,    pints  ;    shunt,    shunts. 

Exercise  46. 

J^_   called^,    ..7*..  cannot^),  -.  could,    <_  great,    JX.   notf), 
..£.  short(^,   P  told,  1  toward,  J_  that?),  (  without. 


(_L  r^  x,  A  I-    ,  >  ^  N  .  ^ 

^4.*,  .1.  <ra.    ^  '  NV     2.  A   ^v 

\  X,  ,.  I  °  ,  -  -V^  N~\  _,  "  ) 

«,    -    x    '     4    "  *  -       3.  _,.-=-,.. 

^v  s  .  ^  ^  v,  v.  , 


The  Halving  Principle. 
Exercise  46  (continued). 

i  x    ,  «•  .  r\  JL      x  r\  . 


65 


*.  C-*  '  I-  X  K   ,        ^v  N  x  .  \  --  ~  \ 

n  x  v.  .  r^x    i  r  .  _  ,  )  L,N  .  ^ 

^   L-  -  X  .  %,  '    L  -     s  .  ^   l_x 

5-   )     ,    %     x     .     /V    ^    X     P     .     ^     (    • 

1    ^-V  •    H       I  ^-  \      i     Sr     ^ 

>  T  i  p     L  r  x     .\      > 

' 


e.  i  )  ^ 


1. 


"vx      9 


'  A 


L, 


1  f.  Hi 

5 


66  The  Halving  Principle. 

Exercise  47. 

1.  One  kind  of  thrift  is  that  of  not  spending  money  ot 
that  which  is  not  needed  ;  by  this  means  an  amount  is  kept 
ready  for  any  needs  that  arise,  2.  The  thrifty  man  differs 
from  the  miser,  for  the  one  husbands  his  resources  so  that  he 
may  spend  in  the  best  method  lie  can,  while  the  other  is  a 
wretched  fellow  who  covets  and  hoards  riches,  so  that  he 
may  gloat  over  his  wealth.  3.  Money  gained  by  honest 
means,  and  saved  without  stinting  those  who  may  depend  on 
the  earner,  or  niggardly  refusing  to  give  that  which  is  claimed 
by  society,  is  wealth  earned  and  added  to  one's  resources. 
4.  Both  the  progressionist  and  the  protectionist  assent  to 
this.  5.  We  shall  not  le  so  impertinent  as  to  assert  that  cer- 
tain views  on  current  events  prevent  any  man  who  has 
studied  the  fortunes  of  his  fellow  men  from  feeling  sympa- 
thetically disposed  toward  their  efforts  to  make  good  use  of 
funds  obtained  by  skilled  labor.  6.  But  without  a  secure 
State  a  man  might  T)e  robbed  of  his  goods,  and  to  have  such 
a  State  all  muse  pay  their  part.  7.  It  was  in  the  reign  of  the 
first  Edward  that  taxesjfor  a  fixed  amount  were  first  levied 
in  England. 

REVIEW. 

1.  What  description  of  consonants  are  halved  for  t  only, 

and  what  for  d  only  ? 

2.  How  is  a  vowel  read  before  a  half-sized  consonant  ? 

How  after  ? 

3.  What  may  a  consonant  hooked  finally,  and  words  of 

more  than  one  syllable,  be  halved  to  express  ? 

4.  How  is  the  addition  of  t  and  d  to  m,  n,  I,  r,  represented  ? 

5.  When  are  the  halved  forms  Id  and  rd  not  employed  ? 

6.  How  is  It  usually  written,  and  what  are  the  exceptions  ? 

7.  What  are  the  limitations  to  the  halving  of  mp  and  ng  ? 

8.  When  should  the  half-length  upward  rt  not  be  used, 

and  when  is  it  usually  employed  ? 

9.  Tinder  what  circumstances  must  a  full  size  and  a  half 

size  consonant  not  be  joined  ? 
10.  Illustrate  the  rule  by  writing  cooked,  midnight,  fact. 


TABLE  OF  SINGLE  AND  DOUBLE  CONSONANTS.    67 

L  kook.      |     R  kook 

JV  Aoo*. 

jSTi  *«</  *«*<*• 

P 

\ 

Pi      \ 

pr    ' 

pn    \     .  pi\ 

pt     \ 

B 

\ 

bl     \ 

br   \ 

bn    \ 

bf\ 

bd    \ 

T 

ti'r 

tr    1 

tn     -J 

tf  L 

tt      1 

D 

1 

dl     f 

dr    1 

dn     J 

df  I 

dd     1 

CH 

/ 

chl/ 

cbr  / 

chn  y 

chf/ 

cbt   / 

J 

/ 

.11    f 

jr     / 

jn  y 

jf  / 

jd      / 

K 



kl         c_ 

kr    e_ 

kn  -^ 

kf_. 

kt    _ 

G 



gl  — 

gr   e— 

gn   —  , 

gf  — 

gd    _ 

r 

V_ 

fl  ^ 

j«        C1  °N 

f  r    v  A 

fn  Vo- 

ft      V 

V 

k. 

vl    Q.0^ 

vr    ^JA 

vn  Vo 

vd     V. 

TH 

( 

thl  CO 

^Ar   ("  *) 

thn   C 

thi     ( 

TH 

( 

aaCO 

thr  () 

thn  ( 

.... 

tbd  ( 

S,Z 

0)0) 

sn  )  zn  ) 

st  )  zd  ) 

SH 

J 

A16/J? 

shr  ^ 

•***  y  «JAA  j 

shn  cXJ' 

sht  j 

up,down 

down 

down  up 

• 

ZH 

J 

zbr  ^ 

zhn  c^' 

7\\A      J 

M 

^ 

ml  c~^ 

mr  c-x 

mn    /^x> 

/.\\\-\.    ^ 

(mt  ^ 

|md  * 

N 

^_, 

nl    c,^ 

nr    cu^ 

nn    ^~y 

int  s^ 

•    •    • 

\  nd  ^ 

NG 

^  _, 

ngh-<^^ 

nsm  -^^ 

L 

r 

~» 

**o 

!i  j  ^^ 

up,  down 

Id   r     down 

R 

^ 

rn   ^° 

rfa 

, 

up 

ap 

^^ 

-^ 

R 

"^ 

rn    ^ 

rt      -> 
rd      > 

W 

^> 

wn  t^5 

wf  cs? 

wt 

T 

^ 

vt     ^ 

H 

1^ 

VlTI   xr-0 

bf  ^^ 

JO         C 

bt     <r* 

LLJ.    ^^ 

KW    GW    WL    WHL    LR        RR    MPorMBWH 

^  —        ^—         d      up    (j     up     r       down      A  down      ""^           C^ 

68  The  Double- Length  Principle. 

CHAPTER    XV. 

THE  DOUBLE-LENGTH   PRINCIPLE. 

149.  Curved  consonants  are  made  twice  their  usual 
length 'to  indicate  the  addition  of  tr,  dr,  or  ihr  j  thus, 
^C_  flow,  ^_  floater,  /TV,  laugh,  ^\^_  laughter, 
V_  father,  V>  vain,  \^  vendor,  (-  thunder, 
oyster,  ^/  shatter,  s~r^  mother;  <T  >  smoother, 

X^^V  /"""V 

centre   or   sender,      (          lighter,      &         slighter, 
luilder,      ^ — x     loarder. 

•  150.  "When  dr  or  thr  follow  an  initial  I  they  are  expressed 
by  1  *)  and  not  by  doubling  the  I;  thus,  Y*\  older, 
f~3  leader,  f^)  leather.  After/,  eh,  m  also,  dr  is  expressed 
by  1  and  not  by  doubling  ;  thus,  Vn  fodder,  f  shudder, 
*"^|  Modder. 

151.  Straight* consonants  hooked  finally,  or  which  follow 
another  stroke,  are  made  twice  their  usual  length  to  indicate 
the  addition  of  tr  or  dr;  thus,    ^  pain,  ^<  painter,  J  ten, 

•   tender,    ^^    wren,  ^^  render,    <s<?   won,  ^/^  wonder, 
^  yon,   ^  yonder,    tff  Hun,    <f\^  hunter,   ^  rafter, 

neck,    ^-^^  nectar,    /~^~  rector,     |i-  detractor, 

1  

disputer,    k..       debater. 

^**"*+ 

152.  The  character  ^  7/zp  is  doubled  to  express  mpr  or 
mbr;  thus,  U^^  temper,  l> — v.  chamber.     The  character  ng 
is  doubled  to  express  ngkr  or  w^ry   thus,    <_^>   shrinker, 


iSS-^S  The  Double-Length  Principle.  69 

153.  The  hooked  consonants  <rv  mpr,  mbr,  *~s  ngkr,  nggr, 
&TG  generally  more  convenient  for  verbs,  because  they  can 
be  readily  halved  for  the  past  tense  ;  thus,  °-^  scamper, 
o—c-    scampered,    —  ^  cumber,    —  ^    cumbered,    =—  ^^    canker, 
^—^  cankered,  /^~^  linger,  f^*  lingered. 

154.  In  a  few  common  words  it  is  allowable  to  double 
a  letter  to  express  the  addition  of  the  syllable  -ture  ;  thus, 

Xj  feature,  \^  future,    a~^  ---  '  signature,   \  _  ;  picture. 

155.  When  the  present  tense  of  a  verb  is  written  with  the 
d»uble-length  principle,  the  past  tense  is  written  with  the 

half-length   principle  ;    thus,     X.     ponder,     %    pondered, 

•  * 

•  tender,      -^  tendered,  ^  A  -»  encounter,  v-1^3\  encountered, 
£       slander,     <TS    slandered,    a^^'   hinder,     <f?^    hindered, 
^^  —  v  pamper,    \^-^\    pampered. 

156.  When   a  word  ends  with  a  vowel  preceded  by  tr, 
dr,  thr,  or  thr,  these   consonants  must  be  written  and  not 

0  0 

indicated   by  doubling  ;    thus,    x  —  flatter,    ^-i  .  flattery, 

<s^  winter,  <^/-  wintry,  <3-~±-^  sunder,  ^i  sundry, 
\  ___  feather,  \*~*\  feathery.  The  circle  s  at  the  end  of  a 
double-length  character  is  read  last,  as  usual  ;  thus, 
I-  tenders,  V_^  feathers,  —  x~~°  counters. 

Exercise  48. 


e 


TO  The  Double-Length  Principle. 

Exercise  48  (continued). 

*""'.    T_/^x         2-    'I     X 
\   c        /    e          /       T~^^- 

\     \'    • 


",   ,M          r.  Vr,, 


_ 
6. 


5  I 


V 


r   4.. 


Exercise  49. 


1.  Enter,     Easter,     loiter,     shutter,     matter,     mattered. 

2.  Founder,  asunder,  smatter,  cylinder,  Walter,  mentor. 

3.  Palter,    porter,    folder,     charter,     chartered,    herder. 

4.  Letter,  louder  ;  latter,  ladder  ;  fetter,  feeder  ;  evader. 

5.  Shouter,    shedder  ;    mutter,    madder  ;    fitter,     federal. 

6.  Pointer,    tinder,   ranter,   wander,    wandered,    haunter. 

7.  Elector,  gunpowder,  dissector,  pretender,  bookbinder. 

8.  Vamper,  Humber,  jumper,  timber,  belouger. 

9.  Slumber,     slumbered  ;      anger,     angered  ;      entered. 
10.  Flounder,   floundered  ;     director,    directory  ;    fututes. 


The  Double-Length  Principle.  71 

Exercise  50. 

1.  Most  of  the  typewriters  at  present  in  use  Tiad  American 
inventors  and  originators,  and  the  early  promoters  of  these 
valuable  aids  to  authors  of  letters  and  documents  were  of 
American  nationality.  2.  Many  an  inventor  and  thinker 
has  added  first  one  and  then  another  new  device  to  the  older 
models.  3.  These  have  included  a  tabulator  for  tabular 
matter,  and  a  duplicator  for  producing  many  copies  of  the 
same  writing.  4.  The  manipulator,  who  is  known  as  a 
typist,  uses  a  lubricator,  in  other  phrase  an  oil  can,  to  keep 
his  machine  in  proper  order.  5.  To  measure  gas  we  use  a 
meter  ;  to  learn  the  distance  we  travel,  we  refer  to  a  pedo- 
meter or  cyclometer.  6.  A  tube  of  quicksilver  is  an  indi- 
cator of  changes  of  weather. 

REVIEW. 

1.  What  additions  are  expressed  when  ft  curved  consonant 

is  written  double  its  usual  length  ? 

2.  Under  what  restrictions  are  the  same  additions  expressed 

when  a  straight  consonant  is  doubled  ? 

3.  What  do  *~^  and  N-'  express  when  dottbljed  ? 

4.  For  what  class  of  words  are  erx  and  ^-^  most  convenient ; 

explain  why  ? 

5.  What  syllable  is  added  in  a  few  common  words  when  a 

consonant  is  doubled  ? 

6.  In  the  case  of  a  verb  written  with  the  double-length 

principle,  how  is  the  past  tense  expressed  ? 

7.  Write  territory,  votary. 

8.  When  circle  s  is  added  to  a  double-length  character  how 

is  it  read  ? 


72  Vocalization  of  "pi"  and  "  pr"        157-16* 

CHAPTER   XVI. 

VOCALIZATION    OF    PL    AND    PR. 

157.  The  pi  and  pr  series  may  sometimes  be  used  to  ob- 
tain a  good  outline,  even  though  an  accented  vowel  comes 
between  the  two  consonants.     In  such  a  case  the  LONG  dot 
vowels  BETWEEN  the  two  letters  are  expressed  by  a  small 
circle    BEFORE    or    ABOVE    the    consonant   stroke  ;    thus, 
•^   chairman,   ^J^  careless,    r~q9  cashiered,    ^_$  souvenir. 
The  SHORT  dot  vowels  are  indicated  by  a  small  circle  placed 
AFTER  or  UNDER  the  consonant  ;  thus,   L_  dark,    /    gnarl, 

^  German,  <_/"  girl. 

158.  In  cases  where  it  is  inconvenient  to  observe  this 
rule,  the  circle  may  be  written  on  EITHER  side,  for  either  a 
LONG  or  SHORT  vowel  ;  thus,  ^J*~  regard,  ^7^  engineer. 

159.  A  stroke  vowel  or  diphthong  is  struck  THROUGH  the 
consonant  ;  thus,  «-+  school,    ^£~  record.,    L^n   tincture. 

160.  Single  stroke  words  vocalized  in  the  above  ways  are 
halved  for  either  t  or  d ;  thus,  <*•  court. 

161.  When   an  initial   hook   or   circle   would    interfere 
with  a  first-place  vowel  or  diphthong,  or  a  final  hook  or 
circle  with   a   third-place  vowel,  the  vowel-sign   may  be 
written  at  the  BEGINNING   or  END  of  the  consonant  ;  as, 
/>   child,  T^,  dormouse,   *r~r\}  corporation,  Ve-p"  figuration, 
VIT-O"  Jigures. 

162.  It  is  seldom  necessary  to  vocalize  the  pi  and  pr 
series  to  mark  an  unaccented-  vowel  ;   thus,   *X->  permit, 

weal;  but  accented  vowels  may  be  inserted  ;   thus, 
pervert,  "V  pervert. 


Vocalization  of  "//"  and  " /r."  73 

Exercise  51. 

,  \  .  ^  ^> s  •  "7  %  v  j- ' 

l 


2.     I      o          T       V^, 

^•'V-xO  *;.;;;- 

I .  f  < ,  ^  t?         \ 


-  ^  A,  v)  '  ^u,°-  r  4. 
v-  vx.  «r  E-," 


"  n-  4. 


Exercise  52. 

1.  Chaired,    cheerily  ;       charm,    term,    germ,    pilgrim. 

2.  Regarded,  veneer  ;  foreshore,  nurse,  foolscap,  fixture. 
&   Cart,  guard,  cheered,  bold,  curt,  gold,  gird,  partake. 

4.  Norman,    torture,    culture,    dormant,    direct,  childish. 

5.  In  order  to  shorten  the  journey,  Mr  Blackmore  -went  by 
way  of  Turkey,  but  as  to  proceeded  in  a  very  deliberate 
fashion,  we  feel  sure  that  the  experiment  will  not  curtail  it. 

6.  An  energetic  man,   it  may  be   supposed,  should   Kant 
reached  the  court  a  great  deal  sooner.     7.  There  might  then 
have  been  no  murmurs  from  those  who  had  the  courage  to  gay 


M  Vocalization  of  "pi"  and  "  pr." 

that  his  action  showed  -want  of  courtesy.  8.  A  sharp  frost 
had  caused  a  fracture  in  a  culvert,  and  a  road  in  that 
locality  was  flooded. 

REVIEW. 

1.  How  may  the  long  dot  vowels  be  indicated  between  the 

two  letters  of  the  pi  and  pr  series  of  consonants  ? 

2.  How  are  the  short  vowels  expressed  in  the  same  case  ? 

3.  When  the  position  of  the  consonants  renders  it  incon- 

venient to  observe  this  rule,  how  may  the  vowel  then 
be  written  ? 

4.  How  are  the  stroke  vowels  written,  when  occurring  be- 

tween the  letters  of  the  pi  orpr  series  of  consonants  ? 

5.  When  a  first-place  vowel  occurs  between  an  initial  hook 

or  circle  and  the  consonant  to  which  the  hook  or 
circle  is  annexed  ;  and  when  a  third-place  vowel 
occurs  between  a  final  hook  or  circle  and  the  pre- 
ceding consonant,  how  may  these  vowels  be  written  ? 


163-166  "  w "  and  "y "  Diphthongs.  75 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

W  AND    T  DIPHTHONGS. 

163.  When  w  or  y  is  followed  by  any  simple  vowel,  a 
diphthong  is  formed,  which  is  represented  by  a  semi-circle 
written  in  the  same  position  as  the  simple  vowel  ;  thus, 


ah  *i~  aw 
eh  •!-  oh 
ee  .  _  oo 


watt)  yah   °|n   jaw 

•woh  yeh    «!«   yoh 

"woo  yee   „!„   yoo 


The  following  are  examples  of  the  use  of  the  above 
signs  :  /•  zouave,  ^  railway,  /•  seaweed,  >C  chamois, 
<^&5  misquote,  *^%-s  Indiana,  ]^  associate,  ~^~'  yearly, 
Vj^  folio,  A(  youth. 

164.  The  same  signs  written  LIGHT  represent  diphthongs 
formed  of  w  and  y  and  the  SHORT  vowels  ;  thus, 


a    T  6  .  -via 

e     -I-  u  vie 

%          66  w£ 


yd   "i"    y^ 

ye    ui"    yu 


The   following   are   examples   of    the    use    of    the    above 
signs  :    C thwack,  ^   twenty,    \~-*  twinge,   '  "^^\  memoir, 

*\±    password,    £~^~^     Iambus-wool,     °V~  serial,    '(^,  alien, 
•^u   atheist,   \n*   patriot,      |n  piteous. 

165.  It  is  in  practice  rarely  necessary  to  make  any  dis- 
tinction between  light  and  heavy  signs.     It  will  be  seen 
that  the  SIDES  of  the  circle  represent  cp  the  w  diphthongs, 
while   the  lower  and    upper  halves  —3-  represent  the  y 
diphthongs. 

166.  The  right  semicircle  3  representing  waw  or  wo  may 
be  prefixed  to  a  stroke  consonant  where  it  is  convenient ; 
thus,  a      walk,  **|  water}     )   watcher,    J>  washer,   *^  war, 
£^  warp, 


76  "  w "  and  "y "  Diphthongs.  167-168 

167.  The  left  semicircle  '  is  prefixed  to  downward  I,  and 
the  right  semicircle  3  is  prefixed  to  Tc,  g,  m,  mp,  to  represent 
w  only;    thus,     .(£.     William,     .(^    Wilson,     i^_     wake,. 

x_i  wig,  >-^S  woman,  >-sA  wampum.  This  sign  is  always 
-e&djirst,  so  that  when  a  vowel  precedes  w  the  stroke  <^ 
must  be  written,  and  not  the  abbreviation,  thus  ^  awake, 

ijL.  wake. 

168.  At  the  beginning  of  a  word,  the  vowel  aw  may  be 
joined  to  upward  I,  as   •/*"  awl,  v       alter,  v^b  alteration; 
and  the  logogram  aw  (all)  may  be  joined  in  compound 
words  commencing  with  all-  or  al- ;  thus,      vl.  Almighty, 
JM..  already,  ^L  almost,  J^.  all-wise. 


Exercise  53. 

,  __  with(J),   <  when,  ....  whatQ),  >  would,  C will. 

^     J-    ,    <J     ^    /^(     /V^          J*     '    & 


^  \ 

~  ' 

3.    |    o  _ 

X 


\  _, 


c  r  r 


"  w  "  and  "y  "  Diphthongs.  77 

Exercise  53  (continued). 


Z"       o    \»,    ,   ...I.    S" 

~  rt.  .  ^  <-  .  x.  v^  N  \  ,  x  •  ( 
°t  x  .  \  (•  ^  rr  a  )  'oix  x  /  •  H* 
5.  r  )  f  fx  ^  s  /,  .  .  -r  x  x_  c  •  r 

•V      0-6     '        t     I     T=  ''''V         ^    exf 

a.,,  N  v 

"^    -C 


^ 

u 


Exercise  54. 

1.  Eastward,      assuage,      sealing-wax,      tweak,      twinkle. 

2.  Walker,    rope-walk,    reservoir,     soda-water,     workman. 

3.  Fuchsia,     yard,     hosier,     currier,     varying,      carrying. 

4.  Superior,     cameo,     glorious,     hideous,     fume,      value. 

5.  "Wardrobe,        washerwoman,        waterspout,        all-fours. 

6.  Wag,     weekly,     wicked,     wimple,     wombat,     Wilkins. 

7.  When   the   Oriental   heard    the  twang  of  the  guitar,  he 
walked   to  the  palace,  with  the  intention  of  talking  to  the 
musican  who  stood  outside  it.     8.  He  found  the  artist  was 
not  a  strolling  Syrian,  hut  an  Italian,  who  had  made  his  way 
from  Asia,  and  played  appropriate  music  before  audiences 
in  the  streets.     9.  He  seemed  very  youthful,  although  he  had 


78  "  w  "  and  "  y  "  Diphthongs. 

Exercise  64  (continued). 

gained  great  experience  when  he  walked  through  many  beauti 
ful  parts  of  Europe,  and  of  Asia.  10.  He  was  at  one  time 
associated  with  William,  and  was  engaged  in  chariot  races. 
11.  Then  he  practised  assiduously  in  a  gymnasium,  was  very 
abstemious,  and  became  a  noted  athlete.  12.  From  some 
Belgians  he  learned  billiards,  and  the  brilliance  of  his  play 
placed  his  skill  at  a  premium  ;  it  will  be  admitted  the 
Italian  was  a  unique  genius. 

REVIEW. 

1.  Write  the  signs  for  wah,  weh,  wee,  waw,  woh,  woo;  yah, 

yeh,  yee,  yaw,  yoh,  yoo,  in  position  against  the  con- 
sonant t. 

2.  Give  an  illustration  of  the  sign  '  waw  or  wo  joined  to  a 

stroke  consonant. 

3.  Write  Wilkins  and  women  with  the  joined  signs  c  D 

4.  When  may  the  joined  sign  be  used,  and  when  must  the 

consonant  c^  be  employed  ? 

5.  Give  illustrations  of  the  joining  of  aw  and  the  logogram 

aU  initially. 


169-172  Dissyllabic  Diphthongs.  79 

CHAPTER    XVIII. 
DISSYLLABIC    DIPHTHONGS. 

169.  In  addition  to  the  signs  used  for  diphthongs  given 
in  Chapters  V.  and  XVII.,  most  of  which  are  monosyllabic 
(or  one  syllable),  the  following  series  of  angular  characters 
is  employed  for  the  representation  of  dissyllabic  (or  two- 
syllable)  diphthongs  :  — 

*•!  !  !  "*,  \  I 

A  "I  J 

ah-i,        eh-i)         ee-i,        aw-i,        oh-i,         oo-i, 

as  in   s<TX,        ^].         ^-          ^.          ^L.          «V 
sol-fa'ist,    la'ity,    howbe'it,  flaw'y,     sto'ic,      bru'in. 

170.  These  signs  are  written  in  the  same  places  as  the 
long  vowels,  and  may  be  used  to  express  a  long  vowel  fol- 
lowed by  ANY  unaccented  short  vowel  which  may  occur  ; 
thus,   iA  represents    the    diphthong    in  c_  day'ey  or    in 

T)ay'onet;      \    that    in     ^f  real,    /\-   reinstate,    or 

^•1       §  n-i  -^ 

se'um;    ']    that   in    U.     drawer   or    v.    JIaw'y; 

<r\  that   in   ^  No'ah,     y    No' el,   or    7^]  o'olite;      \  that  in 

// 
icw'cZ  or       /  Jew'ish. 
•i  -rj 

171.  Where  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong  is  followed  by  an 
accented  short  vowel,  separate  vowel  signs  are  written,  or 
the  y  series  is  employed.     Compare  the  following  words  : 

poet,    ^        poetic;     •£_     re-elect,     s*Q     re-eligible; 

reinforce,      /^-^-^     re-enter;      t^j       geological, 
geology;     (       theatre,    ^        theatrical;      ^/\     realty, 

^*  *  reality;    \<-  pean,    \^  pidno.> 

172.  When  two  vowels   occur  in  succession,  not  thus 
provided    for,    write    the    separate    vowel    signs  ;     thus, 
A"    Leo,    /^)   Louisa,    "$v*    Ohio,       y*  Messiah,    "f  Isaiah, 
j(  royal,    {,.  Dewey. 


Dissyllabic  Diphthong*. 


Exercise  55. 

-  *~i 


.1  r 


v  c 


5.  ^,  o  V 

.  r 


Exercise  56. 

1.  Naive  ;     obeyer,     sayest,     prosaic  ;     deity,     Beatrice. 

2.  Withdrawer  ;   boa,  Chloe,  mower  ;   Lewis,  ruin,  cruet. 

3.  Gayest,    idea,    theory,    Owen,    deist,   snowy,   Galatea. 

4.  Cruel,    creosote,    druid,    payable,    sower,    mausoleum. 
6.  Coincide,  coincident  ;  shower  (one  who  shows),  showed 

(of  rain). 
6.  Diary,  lion,  riot,  bower,  pious,  empower,  iota,  tower. 


Dissyllabic  Diphthongs.  81 

Exercise  57. 

1.  The  Athenseum  was  the  name  given  originally  to  a 
famous  Roman  school,  which  was  the  pioneer  of  many 
European  institutions  devoted  to  science,  art,  and  literature. 

2.  In  not  a  few  places  the  liberal  arts  would  have  fallen  into 
ruin,  but  for  such  associations,  in  which  men  of  ingenuity 
acted  in  co-operation  or  coalition  with  valued  coadjutors. 

3.  Minerva  was  the  goddess  of  wisdom  in  the  pantheon  of 
Roman  divinities,  and  her  bust  in  heroic  size  figures  on 
structures  erected  in  the  Ionic  style  for  the  promotion  of  the 
arts. 

REVIEW. 

1.  In  what  respect  do  the  dissyllabic  diphthongs  differ  from 

the  monosyllabic  diphthongs  ? 

2.  Give  the  series  of  dissyllabic  diphthongs. 

3.  In  what  position  are  the  dissyllables  written,  and  what 

may  they  be  used  to  express  ? 

4.  What  signs  are  used  when  a  long  vowel  is  followed  by 

an  accented  short  vowel  ? 

5.  "When  two  vowels  occur  in  succession   which  are  not 

provided  for  by  the  diphthongal  signs,  how  are  they 
represented  ? 

6 


83  Prefixes.  WTS 

CHAPTER    XIX. 

.    PREFIXES. 

173.  The  syllable  com-  or  con-  occurring  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  word  is  expressed  by  a  light  dot  written  before 
the    first    consonant  ;    thus,     j    commit,    '~~^\_    community; 

^_    convey,   1 n  contribute. 

174.  When  the  syllable  cog-,  com-,  con-,  or  cum-  comes 
between  two  consonants,  either  in  the  same  or  in  a  preced- 
ing word,  it  is  indicated  by  writing  the  syllable  or  word, 
that  follows  UNDER  or  CLOSE  TO  the  consonant  or  word  that 
precedes  ;  thus,    XLp  recognize;   X>  compose,   |\^  decom- 
pose;   V^    confined,     ^-^     uncon  fined;    ^     incumbent; 

^  in  compliance. 

175.  Inter-,   intro-,   or  enter-  is   generally   expressed   by 
~  nt ;  thus,  ~C       interlock,  -^_  introspect,  -2%,  enterprise. 
The  prefix  may  be  joined  when  this  course  does  not  occasion 
ambiguity  ;  thus,   *L  interdict,  *"]•  entertain. 

176.  Magna-,  magne-,  or  magni-  is   expressed  by  a  dis- 
joined   ^-^  ;  thus,         ^~1    magnanimity,     ^    magnetize, 
^  magnify. 

177.  Self-  is  represented  by  a  disjoined  circle  s;  thus, 

"<"  I  ^ 

^x  self-possessed,  0\r^>   self-defence,   ^    self-conscious. 

178.  In-   before   the   circled   letters   °\     "]    0 —    ^    J , 
is  expressed  by  a  small  hook,  written  in  the  same  direction 
as     the     circle  ;     thus,      ^o    inspiration,     tj    instrument, 

inscribe,    «s^~   inherent,    %_~   inhuman. 


'79  Prefixes.  88 

179.  Except  in  the  word  inhuman  (which  cannot  be  mis- 
taken for  >r-S  human)  and  its  derivatives,  the  small  hook 
for  in  is  never  used  in  negative  words,  that  is,  in  words 
where  in-  wpuld  mean  not.  In  all  such  cases  in-  must  be 
written  with  the  stroke  —  ,  as  <cV  hospitable,  ^-<£\  in- 
hospitable. 

Exercise  58. 


i.  '  y,  .p,  ij.  -  n      \,  ,- 

L,        J\,      )[>      —  ft  V^_>          V_     a-^~t    N     '\ 


_Ax          2.    o     J,  ,     '    o^    J. 

^,     «    *     U     N     -     f  ,     )     V     k    X     o    \ 

I*  «.,  JL    ^  c.  n,  ^ 

-I    .    T    S     c     V^>,      X     P     ^     (, 
^    >^  ,     I     )    ^     %     -     x 

4.  .  \,   (-    ^  '\  c,   +  v  \   •    V7 

°      U  I     .     -e-^  .     ^e 

,    ''          ^      V    V  V.       "I     1 

5.  ,  .  ^V^  \    L   )  -  V,;    V.  o 
•  r^*   s  r 

\  ,     x^  %  ,      O      X*? 

3  .  *v 


84  Prefixes. 

Exercise  58  (continued). 

V,  ,    c    X^,    • 


N     o      91P     T*,      ,    )     T 

\      '  ^  ,    .  v^  <   '  4  Lp  , 

-^-ns 


Exercise  59. 

1.  Competent,   complete,   compass,  compute,  compromise. 

2.  Convince,  condemn,  condense,  congratulate,   Congress. 

3.  Recognition,     recognizer  ;      incompetent,      incomplete. 

4.  Disconsolate,       misconceive,       reconsider,       reconcile. 

5.  Interlude,  intermeddle,  interplead,  intercede,  intersect. 

6.  Introvert,      introspective,      introversion  ;     enterprised. 

7.  Introduce,       interweave,       interrupted,        interchange. 

8.  Magnanimity,     magnificence,     magnified,     magnetized. 

9.  Self-love,        self-righteous,        self-confident  ;       inhibit. 

Exercise  60. 

1.  "Self-praise  is  no  recommendation,"  runs  a  well- 
known  proverb.  2.  We  feel  that  such  praise  is  incongruous 
and  incompatible  to  him  who  feels  with  Tennyson  that  self- 
reverence  and  self-control  lead  life  to  sovereign  power. 
3.  We  do  not  enjoy  intercourse  with  those  whose  self-conceit 
is  irreconcilable  with  their  inconspicuous  abilities.  4.  But 
we  love  to  converse  with  him  who  has  enough  modesty  in  hit 
composition  to  spare  us  constant  references  to  what  he  con- 
siders are  his  own  magnificent  enterprises.  5.  We  do  not 


Prefixes.  85 

Exercise  6O  (continued). 

admire  self-esteem  when  associated  with  self-will,  and  when, 
he  who  shows  it  exhibits  no  circumspection  or  common  sense 
in  his  communications,  is  not  gifted  with  introspection,  but 
manifests  a  stilted  magniloquence.  6.  Such  a  person  is 
likely  to  provoke  interruption,  should  he  address  any  con- 
ference. 

REVIEW. 

1.  How  is  the  prefix  com-  or  con-  expressed  ? 

2.  In  what  position  should  two  consonants  be  placed  to 

express   com-   or    con-    intermediate  ?      What    other 
syllables  are  also  expressed  in  the  same  way  ? 

3.  How  are  the  prefixes  inter-,   magna-,  self-,  etc.,  repre- 

sented ? 
i.  By  what  sign  is  the  prefix  in-  represented,  and  to  what 

consonants  is'  it  prefixed  ? 
5.  When  in-  has  a  negative  signification,  how  is  it  written  ? 


86  Suffixes.  180-183 

CHAPTER    XX. 

SUFFIXES. 

180.  The  suffix  -ing  is  expressed  by  the  stroke  -^,,  an& 
4ngs  by  >«_P  ;  thus,  V^  /acing,  V^p  facings,  Vj_x  evening-, 
s^s  musing,  X\_^  rowing,  NX^""  form/ring,   \^pj9ar£ings 

V  /eeSng,  \>^  pacing,    ^  printing,   x^o-  counting. 

181.  When  the  stroke  is  not  convenient,  -ing  is  expressed 
by  a  light  dot-  at  the  end  of  the  word,  and  -ings  by  a  lighf 
dash  ;  thus,  <j<\  Acting,  <  plotting,  <x  jpfo^ings,   Jv  tying, 

\y'turning,  j>^  twrraings,  ^  adjourning,  ^^  morning, 
<^~^  mornings,  ^r*  engraving,  ^j-?1  engravings,  <^>.  cleans- 
ing, J'  dancing,  "~^  airing,  trf  hatching,  J-  hoeing. 

182.  The  suffixes  -ality,  -ility,  -arity,  etc.,  are  expressed 
by  disjoining  the  preceding  stroke  ;  thus,  V.  ^  formality, 
cr^l^    carnality,      /      geniality,     >*__,   venality;  [/<      dura- 
Ulity,     f-\    stability;     NV/\    barbarity,     NY*    popularity, 
/**     regularity ;    */^  majority,  ^LP  minorities. 

183.  The  sign  v^  is  employed  as  a  contraction  for  -ment, 
when  following  ^— "  »,  ^_P  ns,  or  a  hook,  when  it  will  join 
easily  ;     thus,       ~^^^     imprisonment,     /^'    resentment, 
•^a-,     commencement,      \>*     pavement,      /^^     refinement, 

fcp   achievements. 


184-188  Suffixes.  87 

184.  The   suffix  -mental  or  -mentality    is  expressed  by 
*o  mnt  ;  thus,   "^  fundamental,  '^/_>  regimental  ;     j^,   tra- 
8£rwmental  or  in^rwuientality,    f^   aVisZrwmentalities. 

185.  Generally  -ly  is  expressed  by  /"  ;  thus,    v^x-  poorly, 
4\J^~    heavily,    c^    coarsely,     v~f    nicely,    <J^    greatly. 
Where  it  is  inconvenient  to  join  the  /"  it  may  be  disjoined  ; 
thus,    CV^  friendly,    \j^   confidently,     J?/'  distantly.      It 
is  sometimes  easier  to  combine  the  -ly  with  the  preceding 

stroke   by   means   of  the  initial  hook  ;    thus,    J     deeply, 

'  —  i 
rl    actively. 

186.  The  circle  «  is  used  to  express  -self  and  the  large 
circle  to  denote  -selves;  thus,  (o  Myself  ;  it  is  sometimes 
joined,  as  in  J^L  myself,  s~t>  himself,  (^  themselves. 

187.  To  express  -ship  ^)  is  used,  as  in  ^  ,  stewardship. 
Sometimes  the  character  may  be  joined  ;  thus,   ^  friendship. 

188.  A  disjoined  Vo  is  used  to  express  -fulness;  thus, 
^^  resffulness,    <=—  Vo   carefulness.      A  disjoined  /^°  is 

used  for  -lessness;  thus,  /^K°  Zwflessness,  /(7^°  Zatolessness. 


Exercise  61. 


88  Suffixes 

Exercise  61  (continued). 


.  .  7—  .  "V,   k,  .  \ 


Exercise  62. 

1.  Weeping,    webbing,    eating,    reading,    etching,   edging. 

2.  Hacking,  juggling,  thawing,  terrifying,  vying,  thieving. 

3.  Erring,    missing,    noosing,    letting,     following,    failing. 

4.  Branding,      tending,      accounting,      puffing,      driving. 

5.  Borings,  '    borrowings,      diggings,      longings,     livings. 

6.  Finality,     brutality,     nobility,     singularity,     minority. 

7.  Announcement,  alignment,   rudimental,  sternly,  vainly. 

8.  Oneself,   ourselves.       Write  the  full  consonant  forms  in  : 

herself,  yourself,  yourselves. 

9.  Hardship,         leadership,         playfulness,         hopelessness. 


Suffixes.  89 

Exercise  63. 

i.  A  swaggering  manner,  coarse  jocularity,  and  forced 
conviviality  are  not  compatible  with  real  affability  and  geni- 
aJiuy  of  disposition.  2.  Neither  can  admiration  le  felt  for 
him  who  impudently  or  insolently  forces  himself  and  his 
views  on  our  notice.  3.  "  Know  thyself, "  was  the  advice  of 
a  wise  man,  but  how  few  of  us  are  discerning  enough  to  see 
ourselves  as  others  see  us  ?  4.  Did  we  but  possess  this  valu- 
able learning,  we  could  censure  the  shortcomings  of  others 
without  any  show  of  resentment.  5.  But  such  censorship 
would  not  ~be  agreeable  to  all,  and  few  would  care  to  fearlessly 
exercise  it.  6.  "  Self-deceit  is  the  easiest  of  any, "  runs  the 
proverb,  and  it  is  an  indication  of  extreme  youthfulness  to 
boast  effusively  of  one's  championship  in  scholarship  or  in 
workmanship  over  others.  7.  The  uselessness  of  such  boast- 
ing may  appear  apparent  when  tested.  8.  Thus  the  heed- 
lessness  shown  in  indulging  in  it  is  exposed. 

REVIEW. 

1.  "What  are  the  signs  for  the  suffixes  -ing,  -ings? 

2.  When  is  the  stroke  and  when  the  dot  employed  ? 

8.  How  are  the  suffixes  -aUty,  -ility,  -arity,  etc.,  expressed  ? 

4.  What  sign  is  employed  for  -ment,  and  how  are  -mental 

and  -mentality  indicated  ? 

5.  What  are  the  suffixes  for  -ly,  -self,  -selves,  and  -ship  f 

6.  How  are  -fulness  and  -lessness  expressed  ? 


90  Grammalogues.  189-192 

CHAPTER    XXI. 

GRAMMALOGUES. 

189.  The  list  of  grammalogues  in  pages  92-95  contains  a 
number  of  logograms  additional  to  those  already  given  in 
connection  with  the  exercises.     By  means  of  the  first  table 
in  pages  92  and  93,  in  which  the  signs  are  grouped  pho- 
netically, and  the  directions  furnished  below,  they  may  be 
readily  committed  to  memory.     Alphabetic  characters  are 
ased  to  represent  all  the  grammalogues  except  and,  he,  and 
therefore,  for  which  convenient  signs  are  allocated. 

190.  The  POSITIONS  of  the  logograms,  ABOVE,  ON,  and 
THROUGH  the  line,  are  in  general  determined  by  the  vowels 
contained  in  the  words  ;  and  if  a  word  has  more  than  one 
lyllable,  by  its  accented  vowel.      For  perpendicular  and 
eloping  strokes,  standing  alone,  the  positions  are  : — 

\.  ah,  aw,  a,  o,  I,  oi,  wl  ABOVE  the  line  ;  thus,  at. 

2>.  eh,  oh,  $,  u,  ON  the  line  ;  thus,  .^_  up,  .c-^..  whether. 
3.  ee,  oo,  \,  06,  ow,  u,  THROUGH  the  line  ;  thus,  .... 7—  each. 

191.  Vowel  logograms,  and  horizontal  and  half-sized  con- 
sonants, have  but' TWO  positions  : — 

1.  ah,  aw,  a,  6,  I,  oi,  ay,  wl,  ABOVE  the  line  ;  as, ]__  ah. 

2.  eh,  oh,  e,  u,  ee,  oo,  I,  oo,  u,  ow,  ON  the  line  ;  as,  __N._  toe. 

These  rules  do  not  apply  to  the  irregular  grammalogues  set 
out  in  the  table  on  the  opposite  page. 

192.  It  will  be  noticed  that  in  the  tables  of  grammalogues 
some  words  are  indicated  with  a  hyphen,  as,  (give-ri) ;  or, 
with  a  double  termination,  (as,  important).    The  correspond- 


193-195 


Grammalogues. 


91 


upon 
usual 


ing  logograms  represent  both  give  and  given,  important  and 
importance. 

193.  In  order  to  mark  the  plural  number,  the  possessive 
case  of  a  noun,  or  the  third  person  singular  of  a  verb,  s 
may  be  added  to  a   logogram  ;   thus,    __   good,    _o  goods; 

God,  .7?.  God's  ; come,  o  comes. 

194.  A.  logogram  may  be  used  either  as  a  prefix  or  suffix; 
thus,  ^-jj  afternoon,  H'     undertake,    ;\  hereafter,      I indif- 
ferent. 

195.  Irregular  grammalogues   are   of  two   descriptions, 
niimr-ly, 

1.  Those  of  frequent  occurrence,  written  ox  THE  LINK 
for  -onvenience.     These  are 

<    from 
V^    have 

V.   if 

I  it 

/""  Lord 

Vo  Phonography 

J  shall 

(  think 

2.  Those  which,  in  their  proper  position,  would  clash 
with  (i.e.,  be  mistaken  for)  some  others.     These  are 

.-/—  much  1  _  4...  this 

..?\-  number-ed  S          ...p...  those  1 

O!  oh!  owe 

.^»Si-  over  1 
..™.  particular  1 


I 

advantage 

x- 

are 

\ 

be 

s 

been 

} 

dear 

f 

deliver 

1 

do 

^_ 

for 

)  was 

c^  we 

/  which 

C  will 

~A  your 


any  1 

.IT-  ago,  go  1 

^.  me  1 
^   more  1 


..(...  though  1 

...1..  truth 
_1_  with  1 


92 

GRAMMALOGTJES 

PHONETICALLY   ARRANGED. 

Grammalogues  marked  "  i  "  (first  position)  are  written  above  the  line. 
Those  marked  "3"    (third  position)  are  written  through  the  line. 
Those  not  marked  (second  position   are  written  on  the  line. 

CONSONANTS. 

P 

\ 

happy  1  ;  up  ;  Dut  3 

ks 
kl 

D 

because  1 
call  1;  equal  -ly 

pn 

upon 

1 

e-  called,  1 

kr 

c 

care 

pr 

^ 

principljly  3 

krt 

^ 

according  1 

prt 

^ 

particular  1  ;  oppor- 
tunity 

G 

__ 

go,  ago  1  ;  give-n 

B 

\ 

by,  buy  1  ;  be  ;  to  be  3 

gd 

- 

God  1  ;  good 

bv 

\ 

above 

grt 

e- 

great 

bn 

\ 

been 

r 

v^ 

if 

br 

<\ 

remember-  ed.mem- 

ft 

V. 

after  1 

T 

| 

[ber;  number-ed  3 
at  1  ;  it  ;  out  3 

fir 

^. 

for 

tit 

P 

told 

fr 

*>y 

from 

tr 

1 

truth  ;  true  3 

fn 

V* 

Phonography 

trt 

1 

toward 

V 

v*. 

have 

D 

1 

had  i  ;  do  ;  different-ce  3 

vr 

V. 

over  1  ;  ever-y 

dl 

r 

deliver-ed-y 

vr 
TR 

7 

very;  however  3 
thauk-ed  1  ;  think 

df 
dn 

i 

j 

advantage  ;  difficult  3 
done  ;  down  3 

thr 

5 

through,  threw  3 

dr 

i 

Drl;  dear;  during  3 

TH 

tht 

(( 

though  1  ;  them 
that  1  ;  without 

OH 

much  i  ;  which  ;  each  3 

/ 

• 

ths 

c 

those  1;    this; 

J 

/ 

large  1 

thr 

other 

• 

j 

general 

*i* 

,N 

jnt 

gentleman  1;  gen- 

thr 

' 

their,  there 

[tlemen 

thr 

therefore  3 

E 

can  1  ;  come 

(double  length) 

kt 

-. 

quite  1  ;  could 

S 

) 

so,  us  ;  see,  use  (noun)  3 

knt 

- 

cannot  1  ;  account 

8 

o 

as,  has  1  ;  is,  Lis 

93 

GRAMMALOGUES  PHONETICALLY  ARRANGED. 

st 

0 

first 

VOWELS. 

sprt 

<V 

spirit 

Dash 

f 

and  (up) 

sv 

L 

several 

a 

' 

a,  an 

Z 

) 

was;  use  (verb)  3, 
[whose  3 

ah 

' 

ah! 

KB 

J 

shall,  Shalt 

e 

the 

shrt 

3 

short  1 

ZH 

J 

usual 

eh 

\ 

ehP 

zhr 

J 

pleasure 

0 

of 

M 

*-. 

me,my  1;  him,may 



on 

mt 

^^ 

might  1 

aw 

\ 

all 

ms 

st> 

myself  1  ;  himself 

f 

awe 

mp 

S-*i 

important  1  ;  im- 

[prove-d-ment 

u 

i 

but 

mr 

<r~* 

more,remark-ed  1 

[Mr,  mere 

oh 

.._!._. 

O  !  oh  !  owe 

• 

^~^ 

in,  any  1  ;  no,  know 

Dash 

i 

he 

nt 

*•* 

not  1  ;  nature 

06 

\ 

to 

nd 

w 

hand  1  ;  under 

/ 

should  (up) 

nn 

^.y 

opinion 

oo 

\ 

two,  too 

nr 

<i^> 

nor  1  ;  near 

s 

who 

NO 

^ 

language  1  ;  thing 

DIPHTHONGS. 

L 

r 

Lord 

we 

c 

when 

R 

S 

or  1  ;  your  ;  year  3 

wl 

< 

with 

r 

^ 

are  ;  hour,  our  3 

w6 

> 

what 

rd 

•\ 

word 

woo 

•> 

would 

W 

<^ 

we 

yo 

s\ 

beyond 

WD 

<^> 

one 

yoo 

n 

you 

wl 

c 

will 

l 

V 

I,  eye 

Wh 

<^ 

whether 

ai 

£• 

ay,  aye  (broad  at,  yes) 

whl 

c 

while  1 

ow 

A 

how 

Yt 

<? 

yet 

Wl 

L 

why 

94                        GRAMMALOGUES 

ALPHABETICALLY    ARRANGED. 

A,  an 

could 

\^ 

have 

N, 

above 

1 

dear 

i 

he 

c— 

according 

r 

deliver-ed-y 

^ 

him 

-, 

account 

i 

different. 

s~t> 

himself 

I 

advantage 

i  — 
..-i- 

difficult 

-^ 

hour 

V. 

after    . 

\ 

do 

A 

how 

~~ 

ago 

i 

Doctor 

_^_ 

however 

• 

ah! 

j 

done 

V 

I,  eye 

__ 

v 

if 

Z 

aU 
and  (up) 

i 

down 
during 

v^ 

important 

improve-d-ment 

—•j— 

4. 

_^    ._ 

any 

-••/— 

each 

x_^ 

in 

^, 

are 

• 

eh? 

. 

o 

as,  has 

•- 

equal-ly 

0 

is,  his 

1 

\*_ 

ever-y 

f 

at 

0 

first 

— 

know 

1, 

awe 

^_ 

for 

language 

ay,  aye  (yes) 

•^ 

from 

JL 

large 

\ 

be 

J 

general 

r 

Lord 

y 

because 
been 

J 

gentleman 
gentlemen 

may 

i 

beyond 
but 

give-n 

N 

me,  my 
member 

\. 

by,  buy 

go 

*» 

might 

_ 

c 

call 



God 

~e~\~ 

-~  —  • 

more 

called 

— 

good 

—  —  — 

— 

can 

c- 

great 

Mr,  mere 

~* 

cannot 

JL 

bad 

much 

«=~ 

care 

** 

hand 

™. 

myself 

— 

come 

3L" 

happy 

^ 

nature 

GRAMMALOGUES    ALPHABETICALLY   ARRANGED.     95 

z_^ 

near 

.L. 

short 

N 

upon 

v_x 

no 

' 

should  (up) 

) 

us 

C  

nor 

) 

so 

...).. 

use  (verb) 

'  — 

not 

<N 

spirit 

..).. 

M^(noun) 

-V- 

number-ed 

( 

thank-ed 

J 

usual 

i 

O  !  oh  !  owe 

.<— 

that 

i  -i 

~\ 

very 

N, 

• 

the 

of 

was 

I 

") 

their,  there 

on 

( 

them 

^ 

we 

<^> 

one 

3 

what 

..J— 

therefore 



v_3 

opinion 

/ 

when 

N 

opportunity 

-4- 

these 

^ 

whether 

"^ 

>^  s 

thing 



or 

which 

(   • 

think 

other 

(L. 

while 

this 

-yf— 

our 

s 

who 

....  L 

out 

4 

those 

— 

\ 

whose 

V-._. 

over 

( 

though 

L 

JL 

particular 

* 

through,  threw 

why 

v^ 

Phonography 

\ 

to 

f 

will 

J 

pleasure 

-V 

to  be 

c 

with 

-V 

principally 

X 

p 

told 

( 

without 

_^ 

put 

toward 

^ 

word 

quite 
remark-ed 

.4.. 

true 

•i 

would 

r> 

N 

remember-ed 

1 

truth 

..-^. 

year 

..)... 

see 

\ 

two,  too 

* 

yet 

<c_ 

several 

w 

under 

A 

you 

J 

shall,  shalt 

\ 

up 

"N 

your 

96  Exercise  64. 

The  following  composition  consists  of  Gramtnaloguea  only. 

l.~}B^Jt^«~^'^. 

c  r  -  c  ~  '  v  •  x  i*        •  v  i  < 


X        „  V       -3  L      <T-N       I      v-,      /•      \  j 

-    »]-*    2.      4.  i    .  y  ..}.- 

~    N    x    ^    J    ~    I,    ^    4.    ^    .N.    I     o    x    (    ^p 

^/'v^|C|  X  ol 

...,          .\.    V    ..J...  3.     V     /  ", 

1  '  I,  "  i    J  —  I  \,  v       '  C_  n   C  V 

V^^      J  \  t/    9  ^O       99  '  ^^-  /  ^O         ^~" 

— y— 

^'-/.^.M    ^-    I4..,    ^.1       o    _    ,    ) 


Exercise  64  (continued).  9T 

,   ...)..   I  ,     '    <L    I    *"    x    I  x  7.    I    -     (    )     o 


I        O       .\      J?          .?  V. 

^~,      ^J      „.).. 

.....  C,  ,.-'  .  C  w, 


8.    ,  -  *j> 

{     I,    °    I     o     f     x    >,    x..).-,  _    x..)... 

I,  (T  4.  I  N  ^  N-      9,  ^  ^  ,  \  \, 

V-  •  ""  -v  4.^  C  I  .4...  N  -  ^  ^  ^  .  ^  ^ 

Va  ;  n0  C  i  /       x       10.  c  i  I   4  i  ^  >  V. 

O                                                —       C          »  1                           *  I 

I         .    «\    w     «r-v     J?.,              Vs  o     j  *          11.       I     i 

<^    ..(-  «   ^.     C  »     ._(..    i        «r^  ^?  «.        12.   o*   ' 


Exercise  65. 

Introducing  the  Grammaloguez  in  the  preceding  Table. 
1.  My  dear  C.,  —  One  without  principle  we  cannot  ever 
call  a  gentleman.  2.  If  he  has  no  pleasure  in  the  good  nor 
in  the  true,  we  do  not  think  of  his  nature  as  great.  3.  We 
can,  however,  remark  that  Lord  W.,  General  L.,  and  Mr. 
N.,  are  numbered  as  gentlemen.  4.  Though  there  has  been 
no  particular  opportunity,  these  have  each  and  all  had  an 
eye  to  and  improved  on  any  important  advantage,  and  been 
the  first  to  give  a  good  account  of  it.  5.  We  thank  them, 
and  remember  those  things,  therefore,  because  we  know 
them  to-be  not  a  delivery  of  mere  words.  6.  Oh  1  that  all 
would  do  this,  whether  in  their  opinion  or  not  there  was 
squal  advantage  or  no.  T.  Ah  1  how  different  might  things 
1 


98  Exercise  65  (continued}. 

be  ;  what  differences  could  be  quite  put  out  by  a  more 
happy  spirit,  and  through  the  use  of  words  or  language 
which  should  give  no  care.  8.  Why,  if  we  have  the  will  to 
deliver  it,  in  the  awe  of  God,  this  may  yet  be  so  !  9.  Aye,  of 
a  truth,  he  himself  is  of  this  opinion  ;  for  myself,  I  shall 
use  this  very  language  with  your  doctor.  10.  As  usual,  I 
shall  put  down  every  word  delivered  in  Phonography, 
which  is  of  great  use  in  my  hand.  11.  It  is  quite  usual, 
too,  for  me  to  see  not  several  but  a  very  large  number  of 
those  who  use  it,  and  whose  principal  pleasure  is  to  do  all 
toward  the  improvement  of  others  in  it  when  hear  them, 
according  to  their  opportunity.  12.  It  should  be  remem- 
bered that  much  was  done  during  the  first  year,  ay  and 
beyond,  for  it  is  over  two  years  ago  that  he  told  you  to 
couie  or  go  to  them  when  you  had  any  difficult  tiling. 
lo.  Under,  them  our  members,  in  a  short  while,  I  think, 
after  the  above,  will  equally  imp.'CTe  much.  14.  I  know 
all  will  go  up  with  us  to  thank  him,  at  or  from  whose  hands 
hhs  principally' been  given  so  much,  and  therefore  it  is  of 
importance  that  he  should  be  called  upon  and  thanked. 

REVIEW. 

1.  How  are  the  positions  of  grammalogues  generally  deter- 

mined ? 

2.  When  perpendicular  and  sloping  strokes,  standing  alone, 

are  used  as  grammalogues,  how  are  their  positions 
determined  ? 

3.  How  many,  and  what  positions  have  vowel  logograms 

and  horizontal  consonants  ? 

4.  Why  are  the  Irregular  Grammalogues  of  the  1st  Class  not 

written  in  position  according  to  their  vowels  ? 

5.  Why  are  the  Irregular  Grammalogues  of  the  3d  Class  not 

placed  in  their  proper  position  ? 

6.  Give  some  examples  in  which  s  may  be  added  to  a  logo- 

gram to  express  the  plural,  the  third  person  of  a 
verb,  or  the  possessive  case. 

7.  Give  examples  of  logograms  used  as  prefixes  and  suffixes. 


196-197  Contractions. 


CHAPTER 
CONTRACTIONS. 

196.  In  order  to  give  more  facile  outlines,  certain  medial 
consonants   are   omitted,    as   indicated   below.      In    some 
words  of  this  class,  letters  which  find  a  place  in  the  ordinary 
spelling   are   silent,    and    are   not,    therefore,    represented 
phonographically. 

P  is  omitted  between  m  and  t ;  thus,  NjL.  pumped, 

\_l  plumped,  \A  bumped,  [^  tramped,  L  damped, 
'c^~  stamped,  Ck  thumped,  '  ^  camped. 

P  between  m  and  sh;  thus,  csVb  presumption,  /!—,  re- 
demption, Ji,  assumption. 

T  between  s  and  another  consonant  ;  thus,  ^  post, 

^p  postage,  %>  postage  stamps,  N>P.  post  office,  \,  post- 

^L^ 

pone,    X/    postponement,    'f*  most,    1*     mostly,    ^  honest, 

^f  honestly,  jj  test,  ^<^.  testimony,  errj^  testimonial, 
J^  testament. 

JT  or  G  between  ng  and  t  or  sh ;  thus,  (Hi  distinct, 
\~>  distinctlm,  c-*)  distinguish,  ^  anxious,  *O  sanction, 

"\    sanctity. 

197.  TICK  7%<5. — A  slanting  tick,  joined  to  the  preceding 
character,  and  usually  written  downward,  is  employed  to 
represent  the;   thus,     ^  for   the,       '    in   the,    p    is   the, 
ST-—,  make  the,      |    both  the.     When  it  is  more  convenient, 
the  tick  is  written  upward  ;  thus,  "^  from  the,   \/   above 
th^  \v  before  the,    £  said  the,   *  on  the.     In  order  to  keep 
on  the  distinct  from  v   /,  the  first  stroke  must  be  written, 
sloping.     The  tick  the  must  never  be  used  initially. 


100  Contractions.  198 

198.  PHRASE  Of  the. — The  phrase  of  the  may  be  expressed 
by  writing  the  two  words  which  it  connects  CLOSE  TO  EACH 
OTHER,  and  in  this  way  indicating  that  one  is  "of  the" 
other  ;  thus,  ^vN —  plan  of  the  work,  cn^_p  some  of  the  in' 
dications,  ^^y  result  of  the  measur?,  ^»T\jp^  a  statement 
of  the  actual  condition  of  the  country.  The  method  of  inti- 
mating of  the  cannot  be  mistaken  in  practice  for  this  mode 
of  expressing  con-  or  com-.  When  of  the  is  followed  by  con-, 
write  the  dot  for  con- ;  thus,  ^  nfc  close  of  the  contest.  These 
methods  must  not  be  employed  after  a  dot  or  dash  vowel 
sign,  as  j-  ^,  a  condensed  account,  ^-  <^>  two  of  the  principal 
men,  would  not  be  distinct. 

Exercise    66. 


v%  ^,  '  ^  ~ 

?     x  £  /t~     \     \  0 

^;   )  l| 

(     v         N  s    >    N^. 

4.    >     \*          *-s  Nj 


P  )  4..  v 


Contractions.  101 

Exercise  67* 

1.  Clumped,      jumped,      dumped,       stumped,      lumped. 

2.  Consumption,      exemption,     coemption,     pre-emption. 

3.  Lastly,   wistful,  -waistcoat,   postman,   restless,  tasteful. 

4.  Tincture,       instinct,      defunct,      punctual,       adjunct. 

5.  When-the  rights  of  men  are  considered,  we  are  prompted 
to  ask,  What  is-the   nature   (of  the)   rule   that  men   live 
under  ?     6.  For-the  adjustment   of  affairs,  laws   of  some 
kind  exist,  even  among-the  most  savage  nations  (of  the) 
•world.     7.  From-the  operation   of  these    the  inhabitants 
cannot  claim  to  be  exempt.     8.  But-the  rights  (of  the)  man 
are  judged  by-the  privilege  (of  the)  average  man  to  share 
in-the  making  (of  the)  laws.     9.  Some  favored  countries 
enjoy  a  suffrage  (of  the)  broadest  kind,  and  all  have  a  voice 
iu-the  election  (of  the)  head  (of  the)  state,  and  in-the  fram- 
ing (of  the)  constitution.     10.  In  other  countries,  such  as- 
the   Celestial  Empire,    the   people    have  no  voice  in-the 
management  (of  the)  state.     11.  Under  a  despot  there  is  a 
temptation  to  sweep  away  the  power  (of  the)  state  if  things 
go  ill.     12.  But  under  elective  conditions  all  that  happens 
is  that-the  ministry  (of  the)  day  is  deprived  of  its  functions. 

\      REVIEW. 

1.  When  may  p,  t,  &,  g,  be  omitted  ? 

2.  Write  in  the,  for  the,  on  the,  with,  the,  to  the,  at  the,  and 

the,  from  the,  or  the,  but  the,  is  the,  as  the. 

3.  How  is  the  connective  phrase  of  the  indicated  ? 


102 


Contractions. 


199-200 


CHAPTER    XXIII. 

CONTRACTIONS  (CONTINUED). 

199.  Certain  words  of  frequent  occurrence  are  contracted 
by  the  omission  of  a  portion  of  the  outline  : — 

(a)  By  employing  the  first  two  or  three  strokes  of  the 
outline  only  ;  thus,  \  expect,  expected. 

(6)  In  most  words  ending  in  -action,  -ection,  etc.,  Tc  may  be 
omitted  ;  thus,  \  objection. 

(e)  In  a  few  instances  the  medial  consonant  or  syllable  is 
omitted  ;  thus,  10  passenger. 

(d)  The  hook  n  may  be  attached  to  words,  where  prac- 
ticable, as  a  contraction  for  the  following  word  than; 
thus,  V|  fetter  than. 

200.  In  the  following    list,   contractions  of    a    similar 
character  and  related  words  are  grouped  together  ;  they 
can  thus  be  conveniently  learned  in  sections. 

CONTRACTIONS— ARRANGED   FOR  LEARNING. 

Words  marked  (*)  are  written  above  the  line. 


Altogether  * 
together  >  — 

subject      7 
expect-ed     \ 

rather  or  writer     s' 

Catholic  ~~( 

anything  *  *"" 

unexpected-ly  ^~ 

character  *  ^ 

nothing  v_^/ 
something  a~^ 
everything  ^^ 

arcbitect-ure-al       —  1 

neglect-  ed  *  ^" 

respect-ed  s\ 
destruction    J 
instruction  \j 
objection  ^ 
better  than  \j 

c  Q_ 

characteristic  * 

danger-ous  9     s 
messenger      / 
stranger    \ 
manuscript^^-p-> 

prospect  N? 
object    } 

more  than  *  c 
rather  than  s^ 

transcript  j  —  v 
transfer    1 

Contractions. 

transgress  3-° 

regular  / 

improbable-bly- 

transgression  3-^ 

kingdom  * 

ility  ''~>v 

difficulty  ..[  

knowledge  ^7 

public-sh-ed  \. 

\ 

doctrine    n 

acknowledge-d 

publication  \^ 

u 

domestic  U^_ 

^7  —  *~i 

republic  //-<V 

enlarge-d  ^  V 

magazine  ^  — 

republican  //>< 

especial-ly   <^ 
essential-ly  \^ 

mistake-n  * 

natural-ly     >- 

^  ^t 

remarkable-y  <r\ 
represent-ed  /T\ 

establish-ed-ment    X^ 

never      v. 

representation    /   ^ 

govern-ed-ment       V. 

nevertheless  *^C 

representative   X\> 

immediate-ly  *—* 

next  *~~& 

reverend  s\^ 

^W~ 

notwithstanding   ^r 

satisfaction  f 

impossible  * 

parliament-ary    Nf 

$? 
satisfactory  ^ 

inconsistent    ^P 

peculiar-ity  \  

unsatisfactory     <^ 

inconsistency  "T 

perf  orm-ed  \/V. 

subscribe  %  — 

) 
influence  *   ^"^ 

performance      N/  Vo 

subscription  %-^> 

influenced* 

performer     N/v<r^ 

surprise  *  °\j 

reform-ed  /\^ 

influential  *  *-<J 

/\ 

temperance   U^ 

i 

reformation    '      —  x 

•      a             ,.    1  *.    "  *  C/ 

nnmfluential  * 

^ 

reformer  /^<r^ 

. 

information  *  ^ 
interest-ed  "f  ^f 

phonographer    v» 

unanimity  or 
unanimous  ^~^^ 

disinterested-ness    bo 

phonographic    Va  — 
\ 

unif  orm-ity  S    ' 

practice-d-cal-ly      >  — 

uninterestingv    f 
understand  ^ 

practicable    >—  r^ 
impracticable  * 

whatever    \_ 
whenever  -t-— 

understood  f 

*~\ 

yesterday     <^\ 

irregular  "\_ 

probable-bly-ility    ^v 

Transaction  should  be  written  at  length, 
traded  form  might  clash  with  transgression. 


because  the  co*» 


104  Contractions. 

CONTRACTIONS. 

ALPHABETICALLY  ARRANGED. 
Words  marked  (*)  are  written  above  the  line. 


Acknowledge-d 

impossible  *    ^~*> 

nevertheless  Ac 

altogether  *    ^ 

impracticable  * 

next  ^f> 

nothing  «  —  ^ 

anything  * 

improbable-bly- 

notwithstanding     ^y* 

srchitect-ure-al      —  1 

.  i  .      ^  —  *-\ 

1 

ility        \^ 

Object  S 

Better  than  \ 

inconsistent  "~iP 

objection  ^ 

Catholic    ~{ 

inconsistency  "^T 

Parliament-arj     Nf 

character* 

/ 

influence  * 

peculiar-ity  \  

cflciriict  eristic 

_          i 

influenced  *  "~^" 

perform-ed  XA> 

Danger    b 

influential  *  ~~~<J 

performance     N/\O 

dangerous    s 
•    i 

information  * 

performer  XA*-^ 

destruction      4 

instruction  Tj 

phonographer    V^i 

difficulty  ..{..... 

interest-ed  T    -f 

phonographic    Vo  — 

disinterested-ness    L> 

irregular  "^  — 

practice-d-cal-ly  \^ 

doctrine    \ 
domestic      U^— 
Enlarge-d^-p 
especial-ly   <^ 

Kingdom  * 
knowledge      / 

Magazine    *~*  — 

manuscript     ^^-2  —  \ 

practicable  ^  —  c 
probable-bly  or 
probability  \^ 
prospect  *Nj 

essential-ly  )  

establish-ed-ment    i 

everything   ^_^ 

messenger       / 
mistake-n*     ^_^ 

public-sh-ed  \. 
publication    N. 
Rather  or 

expect-ed      \ 

more  than  *  "" 

writer  ^ 

Govern-ed-ment        V 

Natural-ly  .„«., 

rather  than  s^* 

Immediate  ^^. 

neglect-ed*  ^ 

reform-ed  /V. 

^mediately    -^ 

never     V> 

reformation     *  ^~-~^ 

Contractions.                                 1 

reformer  /^c-^ 

something  <r-^' 

transgression  3-3 

regular  /""" 

stranger  \ 

Unanimity  or 

remarkable-ly          > 

subject    7 

unanimous  f^ 

represent-ed  X\ 

/ 

subscribe  \  — 

understand  ^ 

representation     /  O 

subscription  v° 

understood  Y 

representative     />» 

yv 

surprise  *    %> 

uneipected-ly             N 
uniform-ity  '</*** 

republic  '  \ 

_ 

uninfluent  ial  *  •  v  tx 

republican  /N. 

thankful  *  ^ 

uninteresting 

respect-ed    s*^ 

together    \  

unsatisfactory     ^^* 

Reverend  /X_ 

transcript  j—  N 

Whatever   N^ 

Satisfaction     £ 

transfer    i 

whenever     —c~ 

satisfactory  <r 

transgress    3-° 

Yesterday  <?f 

Exercise    68. 

The  following  Exercise  contains  all  the  Contractions. 

1.             1     "5  >    *—•  '          T^       ~^7                              <r/^ 

106 


Contractions. 
Ezercise  68  (continued). 


v. 


6. 


t 


j 


'    U- 


r  /\,  x,  5  :  .^ 


'  *•  —  I  -  x  /\  3. 

\ 

»  *          8.    o     erf     ) 

U  S>.  "I 

U"       9.   V.   . 

,    t  .    J;   ' 


u    ..S-        7 


L   N  ^ 

5  •  v> 


-U- 


N  ?. 


V-, 


v  T 


Contractions. 
Exercise  68  (continued) 
J—  *          11. 

c 


107 


V  ^-d  ; 


,,    \ 


12. 


\ 


/\     x 

/As. 

V.',  /  \. 

\     ' 


V          • 

^>    i     j    \ 


is. 


14. 
15.    i 

4,    « 


16. 


/   v 


I 

>  (r 


1 


01,0 


108  Contractions. 

Exercise  68  (continued}. 

3-  .  C  ^ 


S 


Exercise  69. 

The  J  'allowing  Exercise  contains  all  the  Contractions. 

1.  "Knowledge  is  power"  is  not  a  proverb  -we  are  in 
danger  of  forgetting,  especially  when  it  is  represented  how 
remarkably  wide  is  its  application  to  everything  we  do. 
2.  Knowledge  which  is  essential  to  our  highest  welfare  should 
never  be  neglected;  nevertheless  it  is  essentially  true  that-the 
instruction  of  reverend  teachers,  and-the  doctrine  they  publish, 
do  not  with  uniformity  influence  irregular  lives  so  greatly  as 
those  interested  could  wish.  8.  Reform  in  this  respect,  and- 
the  reformation  (of  the)  evil,  is-the  natural,  we  may  say  the 
characteristic  and  especial  desire  of  every  sincere  reformer, 
4.  We  need  not  think  it  impossible  in  the  domestic  sphere, 
however  uninfluential,  to  exercise  a  peculiar  influence  for 
good.  5.  This  may  be  found  to  have  influenced  the  character 
of  some  mistaken  one,  and  led  him  to  see  the  mistake  (of  the) 
life  he  was  leading,  and  to  decide  to  do  nothing  for-the 
future  to  which  objection  could  be  taken  that  it  was  incon- 
sistent with  what  is  expected  :  such  conduct  would  not  be 
unexpected^  nor  show  inconsistency.  6.  We  acknowledge  the 
truth  (of  the)  proverb  in  respect  to-the  Government,  and 


Contractions.  109 

Exercise  69  (continued). 

whether-the  established  constitution  is  that  of  a  republic,  with 
a  president  at-the  head  and  republican  institutions,  or  a 
kingdom  with  parliamentary  rule,  the  importance  of  political 
knowledge  to-the  elector  is  readily  understood,  and  all  parties 
are  unanimous  in  their  efforts  (if  not  entirely  disinterested) 
to  establish  it.  7.  The  leaders  (of  the)  party  forming  the 
Government  are  naturally  desirous  that  information  (of  the* 
actions  they  perform,  which  may  contribute  to  its  firmei 
establishment,  should  be  published,  but-the  publication  of  par- 
ticulars of  their  policy  in-the  official  organs  may  be  thought 
uninteresting,  though  not  improbable.  8.  It  may  have, 
indeed,  a  different  reception  from  that  anticipated,  or 
rather,  than  seemed  probable.  9.  Though  this  may,  not  im- 
probably, give  the  reverse  of  satisfaction,  and  be  considered 
unsatisfactory  by  Parliament,  still  one  object  of  representative 
institutions  is  that  those  elected  to  rule  should  give  to  those 
they  represent  the  most,  authentic  information  on  public 
events,  and  this  is  not  impracticable.  10.  If  not  done  im- 
mediately, there  must  be  good  reasons  for  neglecting  the 
immediate  and  regular  publication  of  interesting  news.  1 1 .  Any 
inconsistency,  or  any  difficulty  whatever  in  this  respect,  will 
probably  result  in  dangerous  disputes,  or-the  destruction  alto- 
gether (of  the)  Government.  12.  The  break  up  might  not  be 
immediate,  but  it  is  not  an  improbability  that  loss  of  confi- 
dence in  their  representation  might  lead  supporters  to  trans- 
fer their  allegiance  unexpectedly  at-the  next  opportunity  to 
representatives  promising  more  satisfactory  things.  13.  It  is 
a  peculiarity  of  popular  representation,  as  we  understand  it, 
for  which  we  may  be  thankful,  that-the  desire  (of  the) 
country,  when  expressed  with  temperance  and  unanimity, 
must  be  respected.  14.  Government  in  accordance  with 
public  feeling  is  better  than  the  attempt  to  govern  in  other 
ways.  15.  Notwithstanding  that  this  is  more  than  ever  under- 


J10  Contractions. 

Exercise  69  (continued). 

stood,  yet  it  is  remarkable  that  some  influential  rulers,  rather 
than  make  concessions,  have  faced  the  prospect  of  loss  of 
power.  16.  Those  \v-ho  thus  transgress  feel  the  results  of 
their  transgression;  they  have  performed  badly  ;  they  have 
had  knowledge  with  power,  but,  it  must  be  acknowledged, 
have  not  allowed  it  to  practically  enlarge,  nor  has  it  enlarged 
their  minds,  and-the  immediate  result  has  been  anything  but 
pleasant,  though  something  at  which  even  a  stranger  might 
not  feel  surprise.  17.  "  Knowledge  is  power  "  is  a  practical 
truth  which  an  architect  or  the  performer  of  any  act  of  skill 
recognizes  in  his  performance,  and-the  phonographer  or  short- 
hand writer  acknowledges  in  his  phonographic  pursuits.  18. 
The  latter  knows,  too,  the  importance  of  proper  instruction 
and  practice.  19.  He  knows  that-the  uniform  accuracy  of 
his  transcript  depends  on  his  own  ability.  20.  If  the  manu- 
script is  a  magazine  article  dealing  "with  disinterestedness 
upon  such  a  subject  as-the  Catholic  faith,  or  with  religious 
architecture,  he  may  need  works  of  reference  in  any  diffi- 
culty. 21.  If  he  were  to  subscribe — and  a  small  subscription 
would  suffice — a  messenger  would  bring  them,  whenever  he 
desired  them,  together  with  architectural  drawings  ;  yester- 
day, I  am  told,  he  was  expected  to  do  so.  22.  This  is  a 
more  practicable  way  than  he  would,  in  all  probability,  have 
adopted. 

REVIEW. 

1.  What  general  principle  of  contraction  may  be  employed 

in  words  of  frequent  occurrence  ? 

2.  In  words   ending  in   'action  what   consonant  may  be 

omitted  ? 

3.  Give  an  illustration  of  the  omission  of  the  medial  con- 

sonant. 

4.  What  does  the  hook  n  represent  as  a  contraction  t 


201-205  Phraseography.  Ill 

CHAPTER   XXIV. 
PHRASEOGRAPHY. 

201.  The  phonographic  characters  for  a  common  phrase, 
consisting  of  several  words  naturally  related  to  each  other, 
are  joined  together  and  written  without  lifting  the  pen  ; 
for  example,  ^,    \    may  le  is  written   thus,   -->w     and 

V.  \  I  have  leen,  thus,  ^V.  These  groups  of  joined 
characters  are  known  as  phraseograms,  and  the  employment 
of  this  method  of  writing  is  styled  phraseography.  Phraseo- 
grams should  not  be  made  of  words  that  can  only  be  joined 
with  difficulty,  nor  should  they  be  too  lorg,  or  carry  the 
pen  too  far  from  the  line. 

202.  In   phraseography   /  is  frequently  abbreviated  by 
writing  the  first  stroke  only,  for  example,  <-^_  represents 
lam,  and  ..v~~.  lean. 

203.  Generally,  the  first  logogram  in  a  phrase  must  oc- 
cupy its  proper  position;  thus,^IS»  can  tie,  „ you  can ;  but 

a  logogram  written  in  the  first  position  may  be  raised  or 
lowered  to  accommodate  it  to  the  following  character,  thus 
^\__  I  "had,  _J^_  I  see.  . 

204.  A  logogram  or  phraseogram  may  be  written  over  or 
close  to  a  word  to  express  con-  or  com-;  thus,  ,^v  you  will 
comply,  ^^p  /  am  content,      \*  and  contrive,  °v^'  has  com- 
menced, •J  and  is  content. 

205.  There  or  their  may  be  added  to  a  curved  full-length 

n  C~>v 

logogram  by  doubling  it  ;  thus,\^  for  there,       \  from 
their,  ^ — '  in  their,  ^_  if  there. 

PHRASEOGRAMS. 


V             j 

y 

I  did  not 

*)     I  was 

T       I  do 

v 

I  have 

J    I  shall 

vj  f  I  do  not 

—  •  i  I  had  not 

X 

I  think 

^    I  shall  b« 

112 


Phraseography. 


H^_  I  am 

:_.  o/ 

JL    that  you 

—  I  will 

.."H?-  of  course 

.™T..  that  you  are 

^~t    of  course  it  is 

/     which 

n  —    you  can 

^     to 

A-—  ^  which  you  may 

n-o    you  cannot 

v>     to  you 

//^"  which  you  will 

^-^   to  him 

4  which  cannot 

<V-T-N   you  may 

n^=>   you  must 

^—  ^   to  me 

tczVA 

'v-tr'  you  must  not 

>     to  them 

*]      with  it 

S~    you  will 

and 

/      with  which 

r/"\  you  will  be 

V.    and  have 

(     with  them 

S]    you  will  do 

\     and  it  is 

c      ivhen 

~^    you  are 

....    and  the 

-•  i—  •  wljeri  be  was 

i      he 

x     should 

—  V--  when  it 

I        V,      il,'     1 

••v     should  be 

j    7 

/     ne  tiiiiiKs 

3     would 

4...  should  do 

-,             i  j  *j. 

k     he  was 

r     would  it 

t--^    he  may 
x*~   i        »-ii 

as,  has 

D 
•  j     • 

-^---  would  be 

r      he  will 
!>      he  would 

b     as  it  is 
k   as  it  should  fee 

—^    could  not 

o^"    we 

J2  —  as  well  as 

^    -j     C  do  not 
—    (.  had  not 

c^'  we  are 

™    has  not 

J      did  not 

£/^_  we  have 

o      is 

^,    for  you 

«//^~  we  have  not 

--P--  is  it 

\for  this 

t'^Q^s  we  have  seen 

I     it 

ox     is  not 
/     who 

Vf  or  this 
reason 

[     it  is 

L     who  have 

^~/    in  which 

L     it  is  not 

i     who  would 

(&/  in  this  way 

I 

4^  who  would  not, 

..y^>.  our  own 

p    it  is  said 
*\    it  should  be 

l     » 

•"ir'who  would  be 
JL    that 

)     so  that 
V     they  will 

!i      it  would  be 

_L    that  is 

(Q     this  is 

Phraseography. 
Exercise    70. 

\      \~  '       -,    *~*\  r 

V^,       U-s    X  *•  I      I—  x> 

x  \n 


113 


Y 

i 


114  Phraseography. 

Exercise  70  (continued). 

9-  vv^  c  '     ^  lv  ^j  T    '  D- 

v  .  ^  ,  z,  .  \  <p,  ;  ^  •  \ 
10.  -^  ^  j-  _  i  £.  \  ,  >;  v, 

-  /\  '  -i  v 

k  o  vl- 


r 


Exercise  71. 

1.  You-will-be  interested  when  I-tell-you  we-have-seeu 
Borne  (of  the)  finest  sights  here,  though  you-rnust-not  sup- 
pose we-have-seen  them  all.  2.  It-is-said,  aud-we-think 
it-is-not  improbable,  that-they-will  arrange  excursions,  so- 
that  we-can  climb  at  our-own  convenience  several  (of  the) 
mountain  peaks.  3.  This-is,  of-course,  very  satisfactory, 
and-we  hope  to  see  them  in-their  beauty.  4.  You-will-do 
well  to-come,  if-you-can  ;  it-is  an  opportunity  for  climbing 
which-you-will  hardly  have  again.  5.  "We-can  arrange  for- 
you,  while  you-are  here,  to-stay  in  our  hotel  ;  we-have 
abundant  room.  6.  In-this-way  no-time  will-be  lost  ID 
going  to-you,  and-we-will  see  that-you-are  pleasantly  lodged. 

7.  If-you  have  a  friend  who-would-be  willing  to-come  with 
yon,  and  who-would-not  object  to  climbing,  you-cannot-do 
better-than  bring  him  ;  it-would-be  a  great  delight  to  us 
to-have  his  company  ;  we-are  pleased  to  see  your  friends. 

8.  I-have-seen-the    guide,    and-have    sought    his    opinion 
about-the    excursions.     9.    He-thSnks-the    time    chosen    is 
most  suitable,  and  for-this-reason  alone,  that-the  atmosphere 
is  very  clear  ;  he  says  that-the  trip  is  one  which-cannot  fail 
to-be  pleasant.     10.  Of-  course-it-is  a  great  satisfaction  to 
hear   this,    as-it-is-the    fact,    I-think,    indeed,    it-must-be 


Phraseography.  115 

Exercise  71  (continued). 

admitted,  that  fogs  and  clouds  do-not  add  to-the  pleasures 
of-such  a  trip,  and-the  risk,  as-well-as-the  toil,  is  greater. 

11.  Is-it  not-so  ;  and  has-not-the  guide  spoken  correctly  ? 

12.  He-is    one   \vho-would-not    consciously    mislead,    and 
would-be-the  last  to-do-so  ;  we-have-not-the  slightest  doubt 
he-would.     13.    I-shall-be   greatly   surprised,    and   I-think 
many  of  us  would-be  so  too,  if  guides,  for-their-own  ends, 
or  in-their-own  interest,  gave  bad  advice.     14.  This-is  as- 
it-should-be  ;  they-have  a  reputation  they-must  maintain, 
aud-I-think  I-shall-be  justified  iu-the  confidence  I-have  in 
whnt-is  told-me.     15.  You-may  think  otherwise,  but  you- 
cannot   deny — you-must   admit — that-he-was    right   in-the 
readiness  with-which  he-has  acted  when  any  of-those  in-his 
party  have-been  in  danger  ;  to-him  they  owe  their  safety. 
16.  I-did-not-think  I  should-be  called  on  to  defend  him, 
though  I-shall  always  do  this,  for  I- feel  it-is  a  duty  I  should- 
do,  when-it-seems  needful.    17.  I-do  hope  that-you-will  see 
that,    as-it-is   my   duty,    the    task    is  one   which-you-may 
assist,  and  with-which,  or  in-which,  you-can  feel  sympathy. 
18.    I-shall,    and    I-am-certaiu    he-will-be,    gratified   if  it- 
should-be  so  ;  I-did-not  suppose  it-would-be.     19.  To-them 
and  to  all  who-have  to-do  with-it,  as-well-as  to-him,  would- 
it  prove  a  great  delight  when-it  happened,  and-it-is-certain 
to-do-so  very  soon. 

REVIEW. 

1.  What  is  Phraseography  ? 

2.  State  the  characteristics  of  a  good  phraseogram,  and 

give  a  few  illustrations. 
8.  How  is  J,  in  some  cases,  employed  in  a  phraseogram  ? 

4.  When  logograms  are  united,  which  determines  the  posi- 

tion of  the  outline  ? 

5.  How  may  a  logogram  be  written  in  relation  to  another 

word  so  as  to  indicate  con  or  com  f 

6.  In  what  way  can  there  or  their  be  added  to  a  curved 

logogram  ? 


116  Punctuation,  etc.  306-212 

CHAPTER   XXV. 

PUNCTUATION,    ETC. 

206.  STOPS  are  written  as  usual,  except  the  PERIOD,  for 
which,  as  already  explained,  a  small  cross  is  used  ;  thus,  x 
The   HYPHEN  is  written   thus,    if  ***<.       well-spoken;   the 
DASH  thus,  i—,    The  PARENTHESIS  stroke  should  be  made 
a  little  larger  than  a  doable-length  upright  consonant.     In 
shorthand  correspondence  the  sign  p  may  be  used  to  indi- 
cate that  the  preceding  sentence  is  to  be  taken  humorously; 
and  the  NOTE   OF  INTERROGATION   is   better  represented 
thus  \  and  the  NOTE  OF  EXCLAMATION  thus   \ 

207.  ACCENT  may  be  shown  by  writing  a  small  cross  close 
to  the  vowel  of  the  accented  syllable  ;  thus,    *^  ar'rows, 

r^«  arose ',  /^1t  renew'. 

208.  EMPHASIS  is  marked  by  drawing  one  or  more  lines 
underneath  ;   a  single  line  under  a  single  word  must  be 
made  wave-like,  ,  to  distinguisli  it  from Ic. 

209.  To  MARK  AN  INITIAL  CAPITAL  draw  two  short  lines 
under  the  word  ;  thus,  .  [-£  The  Times,    J>\   Abel. 

210.  FIGURES  are  written  as  usual.     When  one  and  six 
are  written  by  themselves,  form  them  thus,  £,&,  that  they 
may  not  be  mistaken  for  shorthand  characters. 

211.  NOMINAL  CONSONANT. — Initial  letters  should  in  all 
cases  be  written  in  longhand;  as  ^'<^><r~?  J.  E.  Smith.  For 
certain  purposes,  however,  the  phonographic  vowels   can 
be  written  without  consonants,  by  using   I     T  as  outlines 
having  no  specific  values;    thus     I    &,    •[    eh,    T  #,  1   ah-t 
(yes).       The    stroke   vowels    may   be  struck   horizontally 
THROUGH  the  nominal  consonant,  as  T  #,  -|-  $,    I    66. 

212.  FOREIGN  CONSONANTS  AND  VOWELS. — The   Scotch 
guttural  cA,  Irish  gh,  (heard  also  in  German,  Dutch,  Welsh, 


ion^  etc.  H' 

and  other  languages,)  is  written  thus,  _$_  ch:  as  in 
C^  loch  (Scotch,  lake),  (^^^  Loughrea,  f-"*"  Clogher, 
_^  ich  (German,  /),  [_^_  dach  (German,  roof).  The 
"Welsh  II,  (the  whispered  or  breath  form  of  the  English  /, 
like/ and  v,  wh  and  M>,)  by  j^~  II;  thus,  Iff  Llan.  French 
nasal  ^^  ;  French  and  German  vowels  <^  jeune,  ~="|-  Goethe, 

li     d& 

Exercise  72. 

TJ'Hfe  the  following  sentences  in  shorthand  and  punctuate,  Introducing  all 
the  above  eic/m.  Express  emphasis  with  regard  to  words  in  italic,  and 
indicate  accent  in  the  word  printed  in  SMALL  CAPITALS. 

The  characters  employed  in  longhand  writing  are  too 
lengthy  and  complicated  to  admit  of  their  being  written 
witli  neatness  and  expedition  and  most  of  us  have  felt  the  need 
for  some  means  of  bringing  the  operations  of  the  mind  and 
hand  into  closer  correspondence  As  the  English  Review 
once  truly  observed  "Who  that  is  much  in  the  habit  of 
writing  lias  not  often  wished  for  some  means  of  expressing 
by  two  or  three  dashes  of  the  pen  that  which  as  things  are  it 
requires  such  an  outlay  of  time  and  labor  to  commit  to 
paper"  It  is  indeed  most  strange  that  we  who  excel  our 
progenitors  so  far  in  science  literature  and  commerce  should 
continue  to  use  the  mode  of  writing  which  they  have  handed 
down  to  us  with  but  very  slight  changes  in  the  forms  of 
the  letters  though  by  its  complexity  it  makes  handwriting 
so  tedious  What  can  be  spoken  in  one  hour  can  only  be 
written  in  six  but  the  expert  shorthand  writer  is  able  by 
the  use  of  the  winged  forms  of  Phonography  to  keep  pace 
with  the  tongue  In  letter  writing  there  is  a  very  great 
saving  of.  time  when  communications  can  be  written  in 
Phonography  instead. of  in  longhand  and  in  various  forms 
of  composition  from  lengthy  articles  to  PRECIS  writing  the 
system  saves  time  and  effort  •  May  it  prove  its  excellence  to 
the  reader 


118 


Punctuation,  etc. 


Exercise  73. 

The  preceding  exercise  accurately  punctuated.     The  student  should  com 
pare  his  work  with  the  following,  and  correct  any  errors. 


^  r\ 


c  '  -^ 

^-<v_P  \ 


i i 3-2* 4  Method  of  Practice.  319 

CHAPTER    XXVI. 
METHOD   OF   PRACTICE. 

213.  The  student,  having  made  himself  familiar  with  the 
principles   of  the   system   as  presented   in   the  preceding 
pages,  should  take  every  opportunity  to  practise  writing. 
As  much  time,  however,  should  be  spent  in  reading  as  in 
writing  Phonography.     Printed  Phonography  is  better  for 
this   purpose  than   manuscript.      One   or   two    shorthand 
volumes  should  be  read  before  a  rapid  style  of  writing  is 
cultivated,  so  that  it  may  be  formed  on  a  correct  model. 
The  following  is  a  good  method  of  practice  : — Take  a  speci- 
men of  printed  shorthand,  and  read  it  over  two  or  three 
times.     Then  write   it   in  shorthand   from  the  shorthand 
copy,  pronouncing  every  word  aloud  while  writing  it.    Next 
take  the  key  in  the  common  print,  and  write  the  passage  in 
shorthand  without  looking  at  the  printed  shorthand.    Then 
compare  the  written  and  printed  shorthand,  and  eorrect  any 
errors.     Write  the  correct  outline  for  every  word  wrongly 
written  at  first  several  times  on  a  separate  sheet,  or  in  a 
note-book,  filling  a  line  with  each  word,  and  pronouncing 
it  aloud   while  writing  it.     This  practice  should  be  con- 
tinued until  a  correct  style  is  obtained. 

214.  Various  books  and  periodicals  are  published  con- 
taining shorthand  reading  matter  printed  in  the  Corres- 
ponding Style  of  Pitman's  Saorthand,  as  developed  in  the 
preceding  pages  of  this  book.     This  style   of  writing  is 
chiefly  employed  in  correspondence  between  phonographers, 
in  making  extracts  from  books,  and  for  other  purposes  for 
which  longhand   is  generally  used.      The  Corresponding 


120  Method  of  Practice. 

Style  can  be  written  two  or  three  times  as  fast  as  longhand. 
It  is  to  the  practised  reader  more  legible  than  quickly 
written  longhand.  The  following  is  a  list  of  periodicals 
and  books  suitable  for  the  purpose  mentioned  above : — 

PITMAN'S  JOURNAL.  An  American  magazine  for  Isaac  Pitman 
writers.  Published  monthly,  except  July  and  August.  Yearly 
subscription,  50  cents,  postpaid.  Sample  copy  free.  Contains 
twenty-four  or  more  pages  (size,  7-£  x  9|  in.),  including  eight 
columns  of  beautifully  engraved  phonography,  furnishing  invalu- 
able means  for  study  and  practice. 

PITMAN'S  SHORTHAND  WEEKLY.  Subscription  $1.75  per  year ; 
50c.  for  three  months,  postpaid.  Sample  free.  Each  number 
contains  twelve  pages  of  shorthand,  with  illustrations.  Stories 
appear  in  every  issue,  for  which  editions  in  ordinary  print  are 
readily  obtainable  for  use  as  a  key. 

THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  READER,  price  20c.,  contains  a  course  of 
shorthand  reading  exercises,  with  the  key  in  ordinary  print  on  the 
opposite  page. 

TALES  AND  SKETCHES,  by  Washington  Irving,  price  40c.,  cloth 
binding,  50c.,  with  key  in  ordinary  print  at  the  foot  of  each  page. 

SELECT  READINGS,  No.  1,  price  20c.,  containing  selections  from 
Sawthorne,  Dickens,  Goldsmith,  Hugo,  Addison,  etc. 

SELF-CULTURE,  by  John  Stuart  Blackie,  price  40c.,  cloth,  50c. 
•Edition  in  ordinary  print,  which  may  be  used  as  a  key,  price  60c. 

ROBINSON  CRUSOE,  by  Daniel  Defoe,  price  60c.,  cloth,  75c.  THE 
VICAR  OF  WAKEFIELD,  by  Oliver  Goldsmith,  price  50c.,  cloth,  60c. 
GULLIVER'S  VOYAGE  TO  LILLIPUT,  by  Jonathan  Swift,  price  40c., 
cloth  59c.  THE  BATTLE  OF  LIFE,  by  Charles  Dickens,  price  40c., 
cloth,  50c.  Any  of  the  editions  of  these  works  in  ordinary  print 
may  be  used  as  keys. 

THE  BOOK  OF  PSALMS,  price  40c.,  cloth,  50c.  The  text  followed 
is  that  of  the  "Authorized  Version." 

/n  addition  to  the  method  of  exercise  suggested  in  par.  213, 
considerable  advantage  will  be  derived  by  the  student 
from  reading  practice  in  shorthand,  by  means  of  the  above 
Ivorks.  If  possible,  the  student  should  provide  a-  friend 
%ith  a  longhand  edition  of  any  work  selected,  and  get  him 


2 1 5-2 1 6  Method  uf  Practice.  121 

to  check  his  own  reading  from  the  shorthand  volume. 
Tims,  a  considerable  insight  will  be  obtained  into  the 
formation  of  phonographic  outlines  and  phrases,  and  he 
will  also  receive  valuable  training  in  the  reading  of  short- 
hand notes.  When  copying  printed  matter  into  Phono- 
graphy, the  student  is  recommended  to  refer  to  "The 
Shorthand  Dictionary"  (price,  $1.50)  in  the  case  of 
doubtful  outlines.  The  Dictionary,  however,  should  not 
be  used  to  save  the  learner  the  trouble  of  thinking  how  the 
word  should  be  written. 

215.  It  must  be  remembered  that  the  saving  of  time  and 
great  ease  in  writing  are  not  secured  by  using  hooked, 
grouped,  or  half-sized  letters  on  all  possible  occasions.     A 
long  and  flowing  outline  is  better  than  one  that  is  short 
but   cramped,    with  joinings    that    check   the   pen.     For 
instance,  the  outline  '"]'    minute  (sixty  seconds)  is  briefer 
to  the  eye  than  '      ]  minute,  but  is  not  so  quickly  written  : 
and  the  two  strokes  in   f    mental  take  more  time  than  the 
three  strokes  in  ^^f  mental.     The  rule  for  choosing  out- 
lines should  be  SHARP  ANGLES,  FORWARD;  and,  if  possible, 
avoid  cross  curves  and  obtuse  angles. 

216.  As  in  rapid  writing  from  dictation  it  is  impossible 
to  insert  many  vowels,  and  as  the  ability  to  follow  a  public 
speaker  is  the  goal  to  which  every  photographer  should 
aspire,  the  student,  as  soon  as  he  can  write  with  accuracy, 
should  accustom  himself  to  write  only  the  outlines  or  con- 
sonants of  words,  and  go  over  his  work  a  second  time  to 
insert  vowels.     This  will  train  his  hand  to  reporting,  and 
accustom  him  to  read  unvocalized  Phonography.      When 
he  can  write  with  accuracy  and  fluency,  and  should  it  be 
his  desire  to  enter  the  ranks  of  Court  or  Legislative  report- 
ing, he  may  proceed  to  the  study  of  the  Reporting  Style  of 
Isaac  Pitman's  Shorthand. 


Shorthana. 


SHORTHAND. 

Exercise    74. 


2. 


v 


4.     , 


u.  J_,  ^. 


•n : 

J  x      3.     I,     v    * 


',  .  ^  ) 

,  V. 


„  , 


*> 


\ 


V 


11. 


i  r-f 


Shorthand. 


\  -  ^  )  ;  1 


4. 


26 


. 

C    '    V, 

-  9. 


4- 


*  i3- 


X          1 


10. 


9 

x      16, 


Shorthand. 


V  ^  X,  .\  k  C  A  ' 

17.    .    ^    ^     X-    ^     /     1 


N 


V  ' 


v  t  N  1 


c   . 


. 


x      22-       '    1588 


Shorthand. 


125 


23. 

•x. . ( 

24.    „    ^_ 


]  '  -  u  v 

.N  x-^    • 

^  V       V 


;    L 


-r  ^ 


26. 


N.. 

j 


•.  % 


L 


28.      L       I     ,    N,  ( 

'   ;'  - 

»    v    cTA  )      \-tf    r^°  -,       )    i 

a    '  t  ^  . ,  vvv  »  ^ «    »•  ^ 


NV 


U.    N 
vL 


126 


•»£_P      *     <v 


30.        — ^>     \ 


Shorthand. 

,  1.  "  <  r 

<   ^    <^ 


V.  )  L* 

•'V 


32. 


33.    m    o 
\     A, 


1783x          34. 


1     -     s 
">~ 


f  \  N,  )  N-,  .     L, 


. 


7       ,    .- 


36. 


35. 
—  1  '    ' 


,    X 


j  , 


Shorthand. 


37. 


>  i. 


V 


40. 


>  v  v, 


U 


V/s~--'       i        «\  A       .  / 

Lp  ,  <5--  --»°  ,       X/     YL        <^    </  » 

.-  8r  o   vrx    43. 


44.  .     0 

,  k  U  ^  > 


128 


Shorthand. 


XV.,  . 


() 


46. 


x       47 


-f       ., 


i  x-  1  -S. 


49. 


': 


48. 


L 

— 
J 


x       50.    o_p    1844 


i       ^ 


0 


,  \ 


.  X, 


217-219  Writing  in  Position.  129 


CHAPTER    XXVII. 
WRITING    IX  'POSITION. 

217.  When   -writing   rapidly   it    is   impossible   to   insert 
manj-  vowels.     This  has  been  recognized  throughout,  and 
the  rules  of  the  system  have  been  formulated,   as  far  as 
possible,  with  a  view  to  the  indication  of  the  vowels  when 
they  are  omitted.     Thus,  for  example,  it  is  provided  that 
where  there  is  an  initial  vowel  there  must  be  an  initial 
stroke    consonant,    as  in   the   words     ") ask,      \^   espy, 

"Y~  assail,  etc.  And,  in  the  same  way,  where  there  is  a 
final  vowel  there  must  also  be  a  final  stroke  consonant, 
as  in  the  words  ^]  racy,  ,-^.ix  money,  etc.  In  these  and 
similar  words  the  presence  of  an  initial  or  final  vowel  is 
indicated  by  the  outline  of  the  word,  without  actually 
writing  the  vowel  sign.  Further  instances  of  a  like  nature 
will  readily  occur  to  the  student,  in  connection  with  the 
rules  for  the  writing  of  upward  and  downward  I  and  r. 

218.  In  addition  to  the  foregoing  methods  of  vowel  sig- 
nification, there  is  the  writing  of  consonantal  outlines  in 
position,  by  which  it  is  possible  to  indicate  the  vowel  or  the 
principal  vowel  in  a  word.     As  there  are  three  positions  in 
which  to  place  the  vowels  when  inserted,  so  there  are  three 
positions  in  which  to  place  the  consonantal  outlines  when 
the  vowels  are  omitted.     The  positions  are  named  reflec- 
tively first  position,  second  position,  and  third  position  ;  the 
first  being  abote  the  line,  the  second  on  the  line,  and  the 
third  through  the  line  ;  thus,  1,  _[_  ;  2,  ;  3,  _i     . 

219.  When  the  vowel  or  principal  vowel  in  a  word  is  a 

9 


130  Writing  in  Position.  220-224 

first-place  vowel,  the  outline  for  the  word  is  written  in  the 
first  position,  above  the  line  ;  thus,  _J  gaudy,  .  L_  dock, 
_Ja_  daughter,  —/m  carry,  L_hr.  laugh. 

220.  When  the  vowel  or  principal  vowel  in  a  word  is  a 
second-place  vowel,  the  outline  for  the  word  is  written  in 
the  second  position,  on  the  line  ;  thus,  ^\    code}  V^/  fairy, 
...ti...  debtor,  (\^  loaf. 

221.  When  the  vowel  or  principal  vowel  in  a  word  is  a 
third-place  vowel,  the  outline  for  the  word  is  written  in  the 
third  position,  through  the  line  ;  thus,  _7TL  keyed.,  \^  fury, 
-Vjv-  feeder,  -^^-  curious,  (--^  leaf. 

222.  In  words  consisting  of  a  horizontal  letter  preceded 
or  followed  by  an  upright  or  sloping  letter,  the  latter  deter- 
mines the  position  of  the  outline,  the  horizontal  letter  being 

raised  or  lowered  as  required  ;  thus,  .j^  pack,  \ peck, 

\..... .pick;  ,H\  cap,  TIN,,  cape,  ^\    keep.     Derivative  words 

should   commence  in  the   same  position  as  the   primary 
word  ;  thus,   c—  care,  ^\-  careful,  ^^  anyone,  ^<^^_,  any- 
where, ]!l^|  anybody,  — </>  no  one,  — (_^^  nowhere,  ^^  nobody. 

223.  There  is  no  third  position  for  words  whose  outlines 
consist  of  horizontal  letters  only,  or  of  half-sized  letters 
only,  or  of  horizontal  letters  joined  to  half-sized  letters. 
When  the  vowel  or  principal  vowel   in  such  words  is  a 
third-place  vowel,   the   outline   is  written    in   the   second 
position,  on  the  line  ;  thus,  ^d  sank,  <^ —  sunk,  <i_, —  sink; 
J£-^M  standing,    1    tendered,    \    splintered}   ^C..   gallant, 
— r  colt,  — f  kilt ;  ..O...  matted,  O   mated,  *~~]   meted. 

224.  Words  in  which  the  diphthong  i  is  accented  are 
written  in  the  first  position ;  as,  JL    higher,  .^f  guidance. 
Where  the  diphthong  ow  is  accented,  the  outline  of  the 
word  is  written  in  the  third  position  ;  as,  j\^  prowl. 


225-227  Writing  in  Position.  131 

225.  Double-length  PERPENDICULAR  strokes  and  straight 
SLOPING  downstrokes  take  only  the  third  position,  THROUGH 
the  line  ;    as,    \^.  ponder,     -^.  plunder,    .-\--  pounder, 

J\          o  o  o 

...  tender,    ...I.  asunder.     A  double-length  CURVED  slop- 
J 
ing  stroke,  or  a  straight  upstroke,  can  be  written  in  the 

three  positions  ;  as,  jv_.  father,  \,~_  fetter,   V.     .  future; 

L.....  latter,  /_.  letter,  ,/^Z.  litter;  ^2.  wander,  <^2.  wonder, 
.^/>..  winter. 

226.  In  words  which  commence  with  a  first-place  vowel, 
the  insertion  of  the  initial  vowel  will  usually  afford  the 
greatest  facility  in  reading.     But  the  initial  vowel  need  not 
be  written  in  words  like   ^  arise,  ..___„{_  orderly,  _£—.  ask, 
where  it  is  indicated  by  the  first  consonant.     It  should, 
however,  be  written  in  such  words  as  'N>   apposite  (to  dis- 
tinguish the  outline  from    „£  opposite),  \  address  (to  dis- 
tinguish it  from  \  dress),  1^   administration  (to  distinguish 
it  from   l-5s>  demonstration).     It  is  sometimes  necessary  also, 
for  the  sake  of  distinction,  to  insert  a  final  vowel  in  words 
where  the  vowel  cannot  be  indicated  by  the  form  of  the  last 
consonant  ;   as,    (^\     lady,   .  ..^ns  monarchy,    ^^-^  enemy, 

_  extricate.  The  student  will  meet  with  other  instances 
where  there  is  a  liability  of  clashing,  unless  a  vowel  is 
inserted.  Experience  only  will  guide  him  in  this  matter, 
but  he  should  rather  err  on  the  side  of  free  vocalization 
than  run  the  risk  of  illegibility. 

227.  The  rules  as  to  position  are  not  applicable  to  such 
words  as  have  outlines  of  their  own,  which  are  readily  recog- 
nized by  their  distinctive  consonant  skeleton  form,  because 
the  inconvenience  in  writing  words  like  dogmatic,  Washing' 
ton,  etc.,  in  the  first  position,  and  discipline,  Pittslurg,  etc., 
in  the  third  position,  in  accordance  with  their  accented 


132  Writing  in  Position. 

vowels,  would  not  be  compensated   by  greater    ease    in 
reading. 

Exercise    75. 

The  words  in  italic  are  to  be  written  in  position,  above,  on,  or 
through  the  line  ;  words  not  in  italic  are  Grammalogues  ( Cor- 
responding Style).  This  and  the  following  Exercises  should  be 
practised  until  they  can  be  written  at  90  or  100  words  per 
minute.  The  mark  \  indicates  a  division  of  thirty  words, 
and  will  be  found  helpful  to  the  dictator  when  reading  at  a 
given  rate  per  minute. 

If  you  wish  to  write  at  a  high  rate,  you  must  read  and 
master  the  rules  so  as  to  follow  them  fully,  and  be  able  to 
apply  them  on  all  |  occasions.  I  feel  that  you  cannot  fail  to 
fall  into  the  true  and  proper  way  if  you  will  only  try.  The 
race  is  to  the  sure  and  not  to  the  |  strong.  Do  not  tarry  by 
the  way.  Remember  the  fable  of  the  feeble  tortoise  that  out- 
stripped the  hare.  Master  one  tiling  at  a  time,  and  you  are 
sure  to  win.  \  Set  apart  for  study  a  small  portion  of  each 
day.  Have  patience;  "  Pome  was  not  built  in  a  day."  High 
hills  grow  less  as  we  ascend  them.  That  which  is  |  lightly 
got  is  little  valued.  If  you  would  get  gold,  you  must  dig 
deeply:  it  is  not  got  on  the  surface.  Neither  can  you  enter 
on  the  possession  of  learning  \  without  some  opposition.  If 
you  would  obtain  a  high  position,  you  must  not  be  beaten  by 
what  is  difficult.  Let  your  letters  be  neat  and  light ;  a  large 
and  heavy  \  style  wastes  time.  Still  you  must  not  write  too 
small.  The  best  plan  is  to  copy  the  plain  models  in  print. 
Take  care  that  your  outlines  are  w;eZ£  spaced.  Crowded  \  writ- 
ing is  not  easy  to  ra«Z.  Ta&e  possession  of  these  /a'nfo  with- 
out opposition.  They  are  meant  for  you.  It  is  my  intention 
to  make  you  a  good  writer.  Keep  your  |  outlines  near  the 
/i/ze.  Do  not  lean  too  heavily  on  the  <fes&.  JTiep  your  «?mf 
up  and  res£  on  the  middle  of  the  arm.  This  is  a  matter  upon 


Writing  in  Position.  133 

Exercise  75  (continued). 

which  |  you  will  do  well  to  ponder  with  care.  The  line  upon 
which  you  write  is  a  royal  road  along  which  even  a  steel  pen 
can  travel  in  fine  style.  It  |  is  pleasing  to  watch  a  pen  fly 
after  a  good  speaker.  See  how  it  keeps  pace  with  the  steady 
flow  of  words,  and  stops  at  a  momentary  pause.  Marie  how 
|  the  light  step  increases  to  a  trot,  breaks  to  a  canter,  loiters, 
makes  another  pause  ;  and  then,  as  if  suddenly  taking  leave  of 
reason,  goes  racing  away  in  a  wiao1  |  mood,  with  Zmps  and 
bounds,  for  sweei  Zi/Is,  Zi&0  a  hunted  deer  before  the  hounds.  I 
daresay  that  you  will  sww'fe  at  my  choice  of  simile,  but  somd 
Jay  you  |  will,  if  you  choose,  know  the  ^'oys  of  the  chase. 
(400  words.) 

Exercise  76. 

To  00  written  in  position.     The  vowels  marled  in  italic  should 

be  inserted. 

We  should  neither  accept  any  theories  nor  adopt  any 
views,  however  voluble  the  advocates  of  such  may  be,  except 
we  are  convinced  that  they  are  authorized,  and  have  been 
tested  |  and  attested  by  those  upon  whose  veracity  we  can 
rely,  or  unless  our  own  reason  approves  of  them  and  we 
have  ample  proof  that  though  they  may  have  some  defects, 
|  their  adoption  will  be  valuable  to  us  in  the  main,  that  we 
may  employ  them  to  the  benefit  of  ourselves  and  others,  and 
that  they  will  be  readily  available  on  |  occasions  of  neces- 
sity. No  matter  how  apposite  the  arguments  may  appear 
which  are  adduced  to  move  us  from  an  opposite  opinion,  we 
should  be  as  adamant  in  the  face  of  |  any  demand  upon  the 
feelings,  which  our  reason  does  not  sanction.  Thus,  any 
attempt  to  tempt  us  to  foolish  actions  will  only  end.  in  the 
failure  of  the  tempter.  We  |  have  been  endowed  with 
mental  faculties  far  and  away  above  those  with  which  the 
lower  animals  are  endued,  in  order  that  we  may  protect 


184  Writing  in  Position. 

Exercise  76  (continued). 

ourselves  from  our  enemies,  and  may  |  add  to  our  happiness. 
It  is  a  fact,  however,  that  such  is  the  effect  of  persuasion 
upon  some  persons  of  weak  will  that  they  become  as  mere 
wax  in  the  |  hands  of  those  who  would  lure  them  to  ruin. 
With  such  people  it  seems  only  necessary  for  a  fluent  rogue 
to  advance  an  alluring  prospect  of  an  affluent  position  at  j 
little  cost,  and  they  fall  at  once,  without  a  defence,  into 
the  trap  set  for  them.  Is  not  this  the  secret  of  almost  every 
successful  fraud  we  have  heard  or  |  read  of  in  any  nation  ? 
There  are,  alas,  too  many  persons  who  make  it  their  voca- 
tion or  avocation  in  life  to  dupe  others  less  able  than  them» 
selves.  They  have  no  |  feelings  of  honor  or  else  would 
not  prey  on  the  failings  of  those  around.  They  despise 
veracity,  and  their  greed  for  gold  amounts  almost  to  vorac- 
ity.. To  obtain  possession  of  (  wealth  they  make  light  of 
every  opposition,  and  are  slow  to  admit  themselves  beaten. 
They  are  averse  to  honest  labor,  and  yet  they  spare  no  pains 
to  become  versed  in  |  the  cunning  arts  necessary  to  extract 
money  from  their  victims,  and  to  extricate  themselves  from 
the  consequences  of  their  illegal  actions.  They  devise  a 
plot,  and,  under  the  semblance  of  |  advice,  they  operate  on 
the  greed  and  credulity  of  ignorant  persons,  and  having 
thrown  them  off  their  guard,  lead  them  into  foolish  adven- 
tures. Truly  "A  fool  and  his  money  are  |  easily  parted." 
We  should  not  attach  too  much  importance  to  a  scheme 
because  it  is  introduced  with  a  flourish  of  fair  words,  nor 
should  we  touch  any  speculative  affair  without  j  first  sub- 
jecting it  to  an  accurate  examination.  If  we  could  only 
examine  the  annual  returns  of  failures  and  analyze  their 
causes,  we  should  find  that  many  are  attributable  to  an  | 
utter  absence  of  judgment  in  the  conduct  of  business,  and 
an  over-confidence  in  the  nicety  and  honesty  of  others.  (500) 


Names  of  States 

NAMES   OF   STATES 

Alabama,  Ala. 
Alaska,  Alaska 
Arizona,  Ariz. 
Arkansas,  Ark. 
California,  Cal. 


and  Territories. 
AND  TERRITORIES. 


135 


/ 


Colorado,  Colo. 
Connecticut,  Conn. 

Delaware,  Del. 

District  of  Columbia.D.C.  J 

^N          A  Ui_/^ 

Florida,  Fla. 
Georgia,    Ga. 
Idaho,  Idaho  V 
Illinois,  111.  ^> 
Indiana,  Ind.    v^^ 
Iowa,  Iowa  Y/s 
Kansas,  Kaus.  — v_£> 
Kentucky,  Ky.  -^ — 
Louisiana,  La.  i   \_^ 
Maine.   /TS 
Maryland,  Md.    s—/ 
Massachusetts,    Mass. 
Michigan,  Mich.    -2, 
Minnesota,  Minn.         I 
Mississippi,  Miss. 
Missouri,  Mo. 


Montana,  Mont. 
Nebraska,  Nebr. 
Nevada,  Nev.  V. 

NewHampshire,N.H. 
New  Jersey,  N.  J. 


NewMexico.N.Mex.- 

New  York,  N.  Y. 

North  Carolina,  N.C. 

North  Dakota,  N.Dak.^  l_ . 

Ohio,  Ohio  "7* 
Okla.  —/^L. 
Oregon,  Oregon 
Pennsylvania,   Pa. 
Rhode  Island,  R.  I. 
South  Carolina,  S.C. 

South  Dakota,  S.  Dak....(L  L, 

hi 

Texas,  Tex.  |_Q 
Utah,  Utah  /I 
Vermont,  Vt.    c\o 
Virginia,  Va.  y 

Washington,  Wash. 

West  Virginia,  W.  Va.cX  ^S 

Wisconsin,  Wis. 
Wyoming,  Wyo. 


136 


Names  of  Fifty  Principal  Cities. 


FIFTY  PRINCIPAL  CITIES  ARRANGED  ACCORDING 
TO    POPULATION.— CENSUS  OF  1900. 


New  York  (N.  Y.) 
Chicago  (111.)   J  _ 
Philadelphia  (Pa.) 
St.  Louis  (Mo.)  f 
Boston  (Mass.) 
Baltimore  (Md.) 
Cleveland  (Ohio) 
Buffalo  (N.  Y.) 
San  Francisco  (Cal.)  ~_n 
Cincinnati  (Ohio) 
Pittsburg  (Pa.)  \/~" 
New  Orleans  (La.)  — < 
Detroit  (Mich.)   ^ 
Milwaukee  (Wis.) 
Washington  (D.  C.) 
Newark  (N.  J.) 
Jersey  City  (N.  J.) 
Louisville  (Ky.) 

Minneapolis  (Minn.) 
Providence  (R.  I.) 


Indianapolis  (Ind.) 
Kansas  City  (Mo.)       | 
St.  Paul  (Minn.) 
Rochester  (N.  Y.) 
Denver  (Colo.) 


Toledo  (Ohio)    Y\- 
Allegheny  (Pa.)  L- 
Columbus  (Ohio) 
Worcester  (Mass.)  ^ 
Syracuse  (N.  Y.) 
New  Haven  (Conn.) 
Paterson  (N.  J.) 
Fall  River  (Ma»s.) 
St.  Joseph  (Mo.) 


Omaha  (Neb.)  ^ 
Los  Angeles  (Oal.) 
Memphis  (Tenn.) 
Scranton  ( 
Lowell  (Mass.) 
Albany  (N.  Y.) 
Cambridge  (Mass.) 
Portland  (Ore.) 
Atlanta  (Ga.) 
Grand  Rapids  (Mich.) 
Dayton  (Ohio) 
Richmond  (Va.) 
Nashville  (Tenn.) 
Seattle  (Wash.) 
Hartford  (Conn.)  \ 
Reading  (Pa.) 


"^ 


Business  Letters. 


BUSINESS   LETTERS.* 

1. 
MR.  EDWARD  ATKINSON,  New  York  City. 

Dear  Sir:— Your  favor  of  the  21st  inst.  received,  and 
contents  carefully  noted.  We  thank  you  very  much  for 
your  prompt  reply  to  our  communication  and  trust  we  may 
secure  someone  at  an  early  day. 

Thanking  you  for  your  kindness,  we  are, 

Yours  truly,  (50) 

2. 
MR.  BEVERLY  H.  GILBERT,  Chicago,  111. 

Dear  Sir  : — We  received  the  books  forwarded  yesterday, 
and  enclose  herewith  remittance  in  payment. 

Thanking  you  for  your  very  prompt  attention  to  the  order, 
and  hoping  that  we  may  be  able  to  do  something  for  you 
in  the  future,  we  are, 

Very  truly  yours,  (50) 


MESSRS.  J.  Goss  &  SONS,  Race  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Gentlemen : — We  beg  to  return  you  herewith  your  remit- 
tance received  this  morning,  since  you  neglected  to  endorse 
the  money  order  in  our  favor,  and  therefore  we  cannot  re- 
ceipt your  bill. 

Kindly  give  attention  at  your  convenience  and  oblige, 

Yours  very  truly,  (50) 

4. 
MR.  M.  H.  DAVIS,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

Dear  Sir: — Your  courteous  favor  of  the  23d  inst.  duly 
received,  and  we  have  to  thank  you  for  the  enclosed  cor- 
respondence with  two  prospective  students.  We  are  writ- 
ing them  very  fully  to-day,  and  hope  to  enroll  them  later  on. 

Yours  very  truly,  (50) 


*  For  additional  practice,  "Easiness  Correspondence  In  Shorthand,  No.  2." 
te  recommended.  The  work  is  Keyed  in  ordinary  type,  and  the  matter  di 
tided  into  sections  for  speeding.  40  pp.  Price,  25  cents. 


138  Business  Letters. 

5. 
MESSRS.  PLATT  &  JOYCE,  Boston,  Mass. 

Gentlemen : — Wishing  to  subscribe  for  the  weekly  Pho- 
netic Journal,  I  would  like  to  get  your  club  rates  for  say,  six 
or  one  dozen  copies,  for  six  months.  Please  state  when  the 
volume  commences. 

This  information  at  an  early  date  will  greatly  oblige, 

Yours  truly,  (50) 

6. 
MR.  CHAS.  E.  SMITH,  Baltimore,  Md. 

Dear  Sir  : — Referring  to  your  inquiry  regarding  discount, 
we  beg  to  say  that  while  our  list  is  absolutely  net,  we  will 
allow  you  our  export  cash  discount  of  2£  per  cent.,  ten 
days.  We  would  be  pleased  to  receive  your  order,  and 
remain,  Yours  truly,  (50) 

7. 
MB.  L.  R.  ROBERTS,  100  Main  St.,  Cleveland,  Ohio. 

Dear  Sir: — By  direction  of 'the  Librarian  of  Congress,  I 
have  the  honor  to  enclose  you  copy  of  record  for  copyright 
No.  2,286,  of  1901,  under  the  seal  of  this  office  and  with 
the  revenue  stamp  properly  affixed. 

Your  remittance  of  fifty  cents  has  been  appropriated  as 
fee  for  same.  Respectfully,  (60) 

8. 
MR.  C.  K.  COVERT,  Buffalo,  N.  Y. 

Dear  Sir  : — I  enclose  you  herewith  bill  for  subscription  to 
Billing's  Monthly  Guide. 

May  I  ask  you  to  kindly  remit  check,  if  convenient,  for 
the  amount,  as  this  will  obviate  a  call  by  our  collectors, 
who  are  paid  by  salary,  and  not  by  commission  on  collections. 

This  will  be  duly  appreciated. 

Yours  very  truly,  (60) 

9. 
MR.  HENRY  A.  SIMS,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 

Dear  Sir  : — Mr.  William  Wood  has  been  employed  in  this 
office  during  the  last  three  months  as  stenographer  and  type- 
writer, and  he  resigned  his  position  voluntarily.  His  work 
as  stenographer  has  been  rapid  and  careful,  and  his  work 
on  the  typewriter  extremely  neat. 

Trusting  this  information  will  be  satisfactory,  we  are, 

Yours  truly,  (60) 


Business  Letters.  139 

10. 
MESSRS.  BROWN  &  SAWYER,  Cincinnati,  Ohio. 

Gentlemen : — Our  canvasser  made  arrangements  with  you 
recently  for  the  insertion  of  extra  matter  in  connection  with 
your  name  in  our  Lowe's  (formerly  Wilkinson's)  Business 
Directory.  At  that  time  your  address  was  given  as  stated 
above. 

If  you  intend  moving,  please  return  this,  with  your  new 
address,  on  or  before  March  15th  ;  if  you  remaiu  in  same 
place  no  answer  is  required. 

Respectfully  yours,  (70) 

11. 
MR.  A.  C.  BRILL,  Pittsburg,  Pa. 

Dear  Sir : — We  have  your  very  kind  favor  of  the  21st 
inst.  asking  for  an  experienced  teacher  of  shorthand.  We 
have  four  such  teachers  who  are  open  for  desirable  positions 
— Hopper,  Lyons,  Davis,  and  Lane.  Do  you  wish  to  refer 
these  names  to  Mr.  Somers  yourself,  or  do  you  wish  us  to 
ask  them  to  make  application  ? 

Thanking  you,  we  are, 

Very  truly  yours,  (70) 

12. 
MESSRS.  EDWARD  KENT  &  Co.,  New  Orleans,  La. 

Gentlemen  : — We  take  pleasure  in  announcing  that  we  are 
now  in  our  new  place  of  business  at  140  Fifth  Avenue.  The 
part  of  this  new  building  we  occupy,  was  built  especially 
for  a  photo-engraving  plant,  from  designs  furnished  by  us. 
It  is  up-to-date  in  every  detail. 

We  trust  that  you  will  place  your  business  with  us. 

Yours  very  truly,  (70) 

13. 
MR.  C.  A.  PERKINS,  Detroit,  Mich. 

Dear  Sir: — In  reply  to  your  postal  of  the  4th  inst.,  the 
apartments  may  be  seen  every  weekday  from  9  A.M.  to  6  P.M., 
or,  if  you  cannot  make  it  convenient  to  call  in  the  after- 
noon, please  hand  the  enclosed  card  to  the  gateman,  and  he 
will  show  them  to  you  in  the  morning,  and  give  you  the 
desired  information. 

Yours  respectfully,  (80) 


140  business  Letters. 

14. 
MESSRS.  ISAAC  PITMAN  &  SONS,  New  York,  N.  Y. 

Gentlemen: — Replying  to  your  letter  of  the  12th  inst.,  I 
wo" Id  state  that  while  the  paper  in  "Fono"  Series  No.  5 
note-book  is  of  excellent  quality,  the  books  used  in  the 
Executive  Mansion  are  furnished  through  the  Government 
Printing  Office,  and  are  made  especially  to  meet  the  require- 
ments of  this  office  as  to  size,  stiffness  of  covers,  and  other 
details. 

Thanking  you  for  your  courtesy,  believe  me, 

Very  truly  yours,  (80) 

15. 
MR.  A.  W.  SPENCER,  Milwaukee,  Wis. 

Dear  Sir: — We  can  furnish  letter-headings  and  letters 
with  autograph  signature,  like  this  one,  5,000  at  $3.40  ; 
10,000  at  $5.57.  This  ought  to  interest  you.  We  were 
pioneers  as  producers  of  fac-simile  letters,  and  now  make 
them  by  four  methods,  giving,  when  desired,  the  press- 
copied  effect.  The  prices  vary  with  the  method  employed. 
This  was  produced  by  the  cheapest  method. 

Shall  we  call  on  you  ?  Yours  very  truly,  (80) 

16. 
MR.  JAMES  L.  HOOPER,  50  New  York  Ave.,  Washington,  D.  C. 

Dear  Sir: — In  compliance  with  your  request  of  yesterday's 
date,  we  enclose  herewith  bill  for  subscription  to  The 
Black  Cat.  We  have  begun  the  same  with  our  November, 
1901,  issue,  as  the  former  subscription  expired  with  the 
October,  1901,  number.  One  copy  each  of  the  November 
and  December  issues  have  been  mailed  to-day. 

We  wish  to  thank  you  for  continued  interest  in  our 
paper,  and  remain,  Very  respectfully,  (80) 

17. 
MESSRS.  T.  H.  HART  &  Co.,  Newark,  N.  J. 

Gentlemen: — Replying  to  your  favor  of  the  20th  inst.,  I 
would  say  that  another  edition  of  my  book  has  not  been 
printed  since  our  correspondence  regarding  advertising. 
Having  contracted  for  the  production  of  one  of  my  operas 
during  the  coming  season,  I  have  been  compelled  to  devote 
all  of  my  time  and  attention  to  its  completion,  and  there- 
fore have  had  no  time  that  I  could  give  to  the  pamphlet. 

Yours  very  truly,  j(SOV 


Business  Letters.  141 

18. 
THE  JAMES  R.  TOWEK  Co.,  Jersey  City,  N.  J. 

Gentlemen: — Referring  to  our  letter  of  the  26th  inst.,  we 
would  ask  if  you  do  not  wish  us  to  send  you  a  Safety  Fire 
Bucket  Tank  on  approval,  which  you  may  return  without 
expense  if  for  any  reason  you  do  not  adopt  it. 

We  make  you  the  above  proposition  knowing  the  Safety 
Fire  Bucket  Tank  is  the  very  best  fire  protection  obtainable, 
and  we  want  to  convince  you.  Yours  truly,  (80) 

19. 
MR.  J.  H.  WALKER,  Louisville,  Ky. 

Dear  Sir : — Replying  to  yours  of  the  7th,  we  beg  to  say 
that  the  export  discount  on  our  Advanced  Album  is  ex- 
tremely small.  These  books  are  made  abroad,  and  upon 
which  we  have  to  pay  a  duty,  consequently  we  cannot  dp 
any  better  for  you  than  15$. 

If  these  terms  are  satisfactory,  we  shall  be  pleased  to 
send  you  the  Album.  Yours  truly,  (80) 

20. 
MR.  GEORGE  H.  REED,  Minneapolis,  Minn. 

Dear  Sir : — Replying  to  your  esteemed  favor  of  the  15th 
inst.,  we  wish  to  call  attention  to  the  Morton  Building, 
110-116  James  Street,  where  we  are  offering  particularly 
desirable  offices  at  moderate  rents.  Owing  to  the  interior 
arrangement,  we  are  prepared  to  offer  unusually  light 
offices  of  the  desired  size,  singly  or  otherwise,  which  will 
be  sub-divided  to  suit  your  special  requirements. 

We  have  an  office  on  the  premises. 

Very  truly  yours,  (80) 

21. 
MESSRS.  JOHN  WII/LARD  &  Co.,  Providence,  R.  I. 

Gentlemen : — After  sending  you  the  cut  of  Sir  Isaac  Pitman 
some  time  ago  we  had  occasion  to  use  it  again  in  book 
form,  as  we  were  getting  out  a  dictionary  of  distinguished 
educators.  By  mistake  of  the  engraver  the  picture  was 
made  full  size,  instead  of  circular  size  as  ordered.  The  en- 
graver billed  it  to  us  at  $2.40.  I  thought  possibly  you 
might  be  able  to  use  it.  Yours  very  truly,  (80) 


142  Business  Letters. 

22. 
MESSRS.  SCOTT  &  SCOTT,  Indianapolis,  Ind. 

Gentlemen : — The  copy  of  letter  enclosed  is  interesting  in 
that  it  constitutes  one  of  the  largest  advertising  orders  ever 
placed  in  a  periodical  by  a  tourist  agency.  Its  special 
strength  lies  in  the  fact  that  it  is  the  result  of  trial  and  testing. 

Remember  that  Henry  Gaze  &  Sons'  advertising  can  only 
be  of  interest  to  people  of  means. 

Is  this  the  sort  of  families  you  want  to  reach  ? 

Very  truly  yours,  (90) 

23. 
THE  HOME  PUBLISHING  Co.,  Kansas  City,  Mo. 

Gentlemen: — The  "Sun "desires  to  receive  all  of  your 
publications  and  announcements  as  issued. 

In  every  department  of  learning  and  letters,  competent 
critics  have  been  retained  as  reviewers.  Every  Thursday  a 
page  will  be  devoted  to  books  and  book  news. 

It  is  the  intention  of  the  "  Sun  "  to  review  all  books,  irre- 
spective of  language  or  subject,  that  are  worthy  of  notice, 
and  early  editorial  copies  and  particulars  regarding  them 
will  be  appreciated. 

To  insure  prompt  attention,  communications  upon  literary 
matters  should  be  addressed  to  Dr.  Guv  Carleton  Lee,  The 
Sun  Building.  Very  trulj  yours,  (100) 

24. 

MR.  S.  A.  LUCAS,  St.  Paul,  Minn. 

Dear  Sir: — Your  several  communications  in  regard  to 
teachers,  duly  to  hand,  and  we  are  communicating  with 
them  as  soon  as  received.  We  thank  you  very  much  for 
your  kind  attention,  and  trust  we  shall  be  able  to  secure 
the  services  of  a  first-class  man  at  an  early  date.  We  regret 
very  much  that  Prof.  Holmes  is  obliged  to  leave  us,  as  he 
has  in  every  way  rendered  valuable  service,  and  is  a  first- 
class  teacher.  Should  he  recover,  a  position  will  always  be 
open  to  him  here.  With  best  wishes, 

Yours  truly,  (100) 

25. 
MESSRS.  M.  R.  PERRY  &  Co.,  Rochester,  N.  Y. 

Gentlemen : — You  will  notice  on  page  26  of  the  February 
number  of  "Foreign  Trade"  that  the  write-up  that  you 
were  given  in  the  January  number  is  repeated. 


Business  Letters.  148 

As  you  have  not  sent  any  letters  to  be  translated  since  the 
first  issue,  I  take  it  that  you  have  not  been  receiving  many 
inquiries,  which  I  regret  very  much.  I  think  you  will  un- 
doubtedly be  benefited  by  this  second  reading  notice, 
although  it  is  the  same  as  the  other. 

Trusting  to  be  of  some  benefit  to  you,  I  remain, 

Yours  truly,  (100) 

26. 
MR.  E.  KELLET,  Denver,  Colo. 

Dear  Sir : — Through  the  courtesy  of  those  interested  in 
and  helping  to  sustain  Grand  Opera  and  the  higher  arts,  we 
have  the  pleasure  of  presenting  its  well-wishers  with  a  per- 
manent souvenir,  namely  a  hand-proof,  etched  photogravure 
of  the  great  master  Verdi,  which  at  this  time  will  be  espe- 
cially appropriate,  together  with  full  detailed  information  of 
our  plans  for  the  future.  Our  object  is  the  creation  of  a 
more  universal  interest  in  the  establishment  of  schools,  in 
which  the  subject  can  be  pursued  as  it  is  in  all  European 
countries.  Yours  very  sincerely,  (100| 

27. 

MESSRS.  PETERS  &  BURR,  Toledo,  Ohio. 

Gentlemen: — Replying  to  your  favor  of  the  12th  inst.,  we 
beg  to  say  there  has  been  a  little  delay  in  getting  the  Busi- 
ness Atlas  out,  as  we  have  had  to  wait  for  the  last  census 
figures,  which  we  were  anxious  to  have  in  the  new  work. 
Everything  is  going  now  with  a  rush,  and  we  expect  to 
deliver  the  atlas  next  week.  We  will  keep  in  mind  your 
urgent  need  of  a  copy,  and  see  that  your  order  is  filled  from 
the  first  lot  received.  Hoping  this  will  be  satisfactory,  we 
are,  Yours  truly,  (100) 

28. 
MESSRS.  L.  P.  HARPER  &  SONS,  Allegheny,  Pa. 

Gentlemen  : — In  accordance  with  our  promise  to  your  Mr. 
Hayues,  we  have  looked  up  the  matter  having  to  do  with 
the  ten  per  cent,  increase  on  your  work,  and  find  that  you 
are  correct  in  saying  that  the  ten  per  cent,  was  not  applied 
to  the  value  of  the  paper.  We  have,  therefore,  made  you 
a  credit  upon  your  bill  of  Dec.  31st,  which  we  enclose  here- 
with. We  figure  the  credit  in  detail,  and  hope  that  it  will 
be  clea*  to  you,  and  satisfactory.  With  best  wishes,  we  are, 
Yours  very  truly,  (100) 


144  Business  Letters. 

29. 
MR.  C.  S.  AUSTIN,  Columbus,  Ohio. 

Dear  Sir : — We  return  you  herewith  the  outline  of  the 
work  offered  to  us,  and  would  say  that  \ve  have  discussed 
the  matter  with  Mr.  Payne.  We  feel  that  we  ought  to  see 
the  proof  sheets  of  the  book  before  coming  to  any  decision. 
We  do  not  feel  justified  in  making  an  o'ffer  on  so  slight  a 
basis  for  judgnr  Jit  as  this  outline  affords. 

If  you  will  furnish  us  -with  proof  sheets  and  give  us  time 
to  reach  a  decision,  we  shall  be  glad  to  consider  the  matter 
with  care.  Yours  very  truly,  (100) 

30. 

MESSRS.  JAMES  F.  THOMPSON  &  Co.,  Worcester,  Mass. 

Gentlemen : — Of  course  you  know  that  for  nearly  sixty 
years  the  New  York  Weekly  Tribune  has  held  first  position 
in  the  United  States  as  a  national  family  newspaper  for 
farmers  who  keep  abreast  with  the  times,  and  in  touch  with 
the  latest  farming  methods  and  improvements. 

The  Tii- Weekly  Tribune  is  an  infant  only  a  little  over  a 
year  old,  but  with  a  regular  circulation  of  over  30,000 
copies  among  the  best  people  in  small  towns  and  villages, 
mainly  in  the  Middle  and  Eastern  States.  The  price  for 
one  insertion  of  an  advertisement  in  both  editions  is  seventy 
cents  per  line.  Write  for  estimate  on  additional  insertions, 
and  other  information. 

Very  truly  yours,  (120) 

31. 

MRS.  S.  B.  NOBLE,   Syracuse,  N.  Y. 

Dear  Madam : — Early  last  month  we  wrote  you  about 
renewing  your  subscription  to  Home  Needlework  Magazine, 
which  expired  with  the  issue  of  October,  1901.  You  are 
one  of  the  few  who  have  probably  not  had  time  to  see  to 
this  matter.  If  possible,  we  will  appreciate  your  sending 
your  renewal  on  receipt  of  this  letter,  so  that  your  name 
can  occupy  the  same  position  on  our  mailing  list.  This 
will  insure  your  receiving  each  number  as  published.  The 
January  number  will  be  sent  you  as  soon  as  you  return  the 
Coin  Carrier.  Trusting  to  hear  from  you,  we  are, 

(HO) 


*zS-229  Speed  Practice.  148 


CHAPTER   XXVIII. 

SPEED  PRACTICE. 

228.  In  the  succeeding  chapters  the  art  of  Phonography 
is  adapted  to  the  practical  needs  of  the  shorthand  amanuen- 
sis of  reporter  through  the  employment  of  three  principal 
methods  of  abbreviation,  by  which  the  Corresponding  Style 
is  converted  into  the  Reporting  Style,  the  latter  being  that 
employed  for  recording  verbatim  the  utterances  of  speakers 
or  dictators.     The  methods  just  referred  to  may  be  briefly 
enumerated  and  described  as  under  ;  they  are  dealt  with 
fully  in  the  order  mentioned  in  the  following  pages  : — 

i.  CONTRACTIONS.  The  principle  employed  in  the  Corre- 
sponding Style  is  extended  to  many  words  of  comparatively 
frequent  occurrence,  which  would  otherwise  require  long 
outlines  for  their  expression. 

ii.  PHRASEOGRAPHY.  By  a  development  of  this  principle, 
a  number  of  phraseograraa  are  contracted  by  the  employment 
of  the  same  method  for  similar  phrases. 

iii.  INTERSECTION.  An  outline  or  a  portion  of  an  outline 
written  through  another  is  termed  an  intersection,  and  by 
this  means  distinctive  forms  of  great  brevity  are  obtained 
for  long  titles,  etc. 

229.  The  employment  of  the  methods  just  described,  in- 
dispensable as  they  are,  will  not  alone  enable  the  student  to 
attain  to  the  speed  needful  in  order  to  report  an  average 
speaker.     In  the  acquirement  of  shorthand  speed,  the  most 
important  factor  is  PRACTICE.     This  should,  at    the  outset, 
take  the  form  of  note-taking  from  the  reading  of  another 
person  at  a  rate  which  will  enable  the  writer  to  record  every 

10 


146  Speed  Practice.  230-232 

word  that  is  uttered.  As  the  note-taker  becomes  more  dex- 
terous, or,  in  other  words,  increases  his  speed,  the  reader 
can  quicken  his  rate  of  utterance,  and  the  stenographer  will 
thus  gradually  attain  to  a  higher  speed  of  writing. 

230.  Speed  practice  should  be  taken  up  concurrently  with 
the  study  of  the  following  chapters,  and,  as  each  is  mas- 
tered, the  exercises  should  be  written  from  dictation  and 
corrected  by  the  aid  of  the  Key.  The  exercises  should  be 
taken  down  several  times  from  dictation,  until  they  can  be 
written  with  absolute  accuracy.  A  difficulty  is  at  times  ex- 
perienced in  finding  a  friend  willing  to  devote  an  hour  daily 
to  dictation,  which  is  the  amount  of  practice  that  the  note- 
taker  should  endeavor  to  obtain.  But  an  intelligent  person 
may,  without  much  difficulty,  be  induced  to  undertake  the 
duty  for  a  suitable  remuneration,  or  several  students  may 
arrange  to  avail  themselves  of  the  services  of  a  reader.  In 
almost  every  city  or  town  a  business  college  or  stenographers' 
association  will  be  found,  at  which  there  are  suitable  facili- 
ties for  dictation  practice  at  various  rates  of  speed. 

281.  In  choosing  matter  for  dictation  practice,  regard 
should  be  paid  to  the  particular  purpose  for  which  the  art 
is  being  acquired.  A  book  of  commercial  letters  and  busi- 
ness forms  will  provide  the  most  advantageous  practice  for 
the  shorthand  amanuensis  ;  the  private  secretary  should 
select  such  works  as  are  likely  to  prove  useful  in  his  daily 
work  ;  and  the  young  reporter  should  follow  the  dictation 
of  speeches,  lectures,  and  parliamentary  debates.  In  this 
way  the  beginner  will  accustom  himself  to  the  language  ho 
will  hear  when  professionally  engaged;  but  outside  these 
particular  requirements,  he  would  do  well  to  make  his  prac- 
tice as  varied  as  possible. 

232.  In  note-taking,  the  writing  should  not  be  too  large ; 
and  outlines  that  retard  the  hand,  and  therefore  lead  to  loss 
of  time,  should  be  avoided.  No  exact  size  of  the  short- 


233-234  Speed  Practice.  147 

hand  characters  can  be  prescribed  for  all.  No  one  style  of 
•writing  suits  all  alike  ;  some  find  it  easier  to  write  the 
characters  small  and  neatly,  while  others,  with  a  freer  hand, 
are  more  at  ease  in  writing  large,  and  with  less  regard  to 
exactness  of  outline.  There  is  a  general  tendency  among 
beginners  to  increase  the  size  of  their  outlines  as  they 
increase  their  speed,  and  to  run  into  an  awkward  and 
"sprawling"  style.  This  tendency  should  be  resisted. 
'The  writer,  if  he  is  careful,  will  soon  ascertain  what  size 
suits  his  style  best,  but,  as  a  general  rule,  it  may  be  said 
that  the  lines  of  a  note-book  5  inches  wide  should  not  con- 
tain less  than  an  average  of  twelve  words,  or  more  than  an 
average  of  twenty. 

233.  The  mind  and  the  hand  of  the  student  should  be 
constantly  engaged  in  forming  and  writing  outlines,  and  as 
they  are  mentally  conceived  the  hand  can  trace  them  on 
imaginary   paper.     The    following  plan   has  been   recom- 
mended for  this  kind  of  practice : — Take  any  interesting 
book,  and  with  a  blunt-pointed  piece  of  wood,  or  the  end 
of  a  penholder,  trace  the  shorthand  outlines  for  the  words 
as  they  are  read,  under  them  or  on  the  opposite  page.     A 
better  plan  is  to  take  a  book,  the  pages  of  which  have  a 
wide  margin,  and,  while  reading,  write  the  words  in  short- 
hand on  the  margin  of  either  side,  or  under  the  lines,  plac- 
ing a  tick  in  the  margin  whenever  a  difficult  word  occurs, 
and  consulting  the  Shorthand  Dictionary  afterwards.    Books 
with  widely  spaced  print,  and  lines  between  to  write  on, 
can  be  obtained,  and  are  a  considerable  help  in  acquiring 
speed. 

234.  From   the   beginning   of  his   speed   practice,  the 
student  should  strictly  avoid  a  careless  and  inaccurate  style 
of  writing  ;  slovenliness  in  note-taking  will  result  in  either 
illegibility  or  inaccuracy,  which  cannot  but  prove  a  serious 
drawback  to  the  successful  use  of  shorthand.     In  longhand 


148  Speed  Practice.  235 

writing,  if  a  scrawling,  careless  style  is  adopted,  the  result 
is  illegible  writing,  and  the  same  result  follows  in  short- 
hand. The  student  should  cultivate  the  ability  to  read  his 
notes  with  readiness  and  accuracy.  It  is  a  good  practice  to 
read  over  systematically  to  the  dictator  a  considerable  por- 
tion of  the  notes  which  have  been  written  a  day  or  two 
before,  taking  careful  note  of  any  divergencies  from  the 
dictated  text,  and  their  cause.  Occasionally,  portions  of 
the  notes  should  be  written  out  in  longhand,  or  typewritten, 
in  order  to  test  the  student's  ability  in  accuracy  and  facility 
in  transcription.  The  reading  of  shorthand  printed  in  the 
Reporting  Style  is  most  essential,  in  order  that  the  student 
may  gain  a  wide  familiarity  with  outlines. 

235.  The  average  rate  of  speed  of  public  speakers  is  120 
words  per  minute,  but  some  speeches,  especially  those 
delivered  to  large  audiences,  do  not  greatly  exceed  through- 
out an  average  of  100  or  110  words  per  minute.  On  the 
other  hand,  a  speed  from  160  to  180  words  per  minute  is 
not  unusual  in  public  speaking,  and  a  written  address  is 
occasionally  uttere'd  very  rapidly.  When  a  note-taker  is  able 
to  write  from  dictation  at  the  rate  of  from  80  to  100  words 
per  minute,  he  should  avail  himself  of  all  opportunities 
possible  of  taking  notes  of  the  utterances  of  deliberate 
speakers.  He  cannot  expect  nor  should  he  attempt  to  take 
a  full  note  of  an  address  delivered  at  a  rate  beyond  his 
powers.  He  should,  however,  carefully  note  down  as  many 
complete  sentences  of  what  he  hears  as  he  can,  taking  care 
to  write  legibly  so  that  he  may  be  able  without  difficulty  to 
read  his  notes  afterwards.  He  should,  from  the  outset  of 
his  reporting  practice,  be  careful  to  follow  the  speaker's 
train  of  thought  while  recording  his  words,  remembering 
that  the  taking  of  notes  in  an  unintelligent  and  mechanical 
fashion  cannot  but  result  in  unsatisfactory,  and  it  may  be 
unintelligible  reports.  In  his  early  reporting  practice, 


236  Writing  Materials.  14? 

when  endeavoring  to  take  down  as  much  as  he  can  of  the 
speaker's  words,  the  note-taker  should  endeavor,  as  far  as 
possible,  to  secure  the  more  important  passages  in  the  dis- 
course, such  as  would  be  required  if  he  were  preparing  for 
the  press  a  condensation  of  the  speech  or  address.  He  wilP 
find  himself  at  the  beginning  of  his  practice  frequently 
unable  to  take  down  all  the  words  in  a  very  long  sentence. 
He  should  endeavor,  in  such  a  case,  to  secure  the  essential 
parts  of  it,  so  that  he  may  have  a  note  of  the  general  drift 
of  the  speaker's  remarks.  Beginners  in  note-taking  are  apt 
to  be  disconcerted  at  finding  themselves  writing  many 
sentences  behind  the  speaker.  This  is  inevitable  ;  but  by 
practice  the  mind  of  the  expert  reporter  will  retain  and  the 
hand  record  accurately  some  fifteen  or  twenty  words  behind 
the  speaker.  This  is  a  very  common  emergency  in  the  case 
of  irregular  or  rapid  speakers,  and  the  writer  must  train 
himself  to  deal  with  it.  If  his  first  efforts  are  not  particu- 
larly successful,  he  should  not  be  discouraged.  By  perse- 
verance difficulties  of  various  kinds  will  be  overcome,  and 
the  phonographer  will  soon  find  that  the  task  of  reporting 
a  speaker  is  a  stimulating  and  agreeable  intellectual  effort. 

WRITING  MATERIALS. 

236.  The  importance  of  proper  writing  materials  for  note- 
takiiig  cannot  be  over-estimated.  Xo  shorthand  writer 
should  ever  trust  to  chance  supplies  of  pencils,  pens,  ink,  or 
paper,  but  should  make  a  careful  selection,  and  take  care  to 
be  well  equipped  for  any  professional  work  he  may  under- 
take. For  most  descriptions  of  note-taking  the  pen  is  more 
suitable  than  the  pencil,  on  account  of  the  permanence  and 
superior  legibility  of  the  notes,  both  important  considera- 
tions when  the  transcript  is  undertaken.  A  suitable  pen  is 
'also  far  less  fatiguing  than  a  pencil,  a  great  advantage  when 


150  Writing  Materials.  *37 

writing  for  a  lengthened  period.  But,  as  it  sometimes  hap- 
pens that  the  use  of  a  pen  is  undesirable  or  impossible,  the 
reporter  should  accustom  himself  occasionally  to  report  with 
a  pencil.  In  order  to  be  prepared  for  any  unforeseen  diffi- 
culty or  accident,  the  phonographer  should  never  be  -with- 
out a  case  of  thoroughly  good  lead  pencils,  sharpened  ready 
for  immediate  use.  The  pencil  should  be  used  in  preference 
to  the  pen  for  note-taking  in  the  open  air,  or  when  writing 
in  semi-darkness,  as  at  illustrated  lectures.  These  remarks 
apply  chiefly  to  professional  reporting  ;  for  all  ordinary  work 
in  business  offices,  either  the  pen  or  pencil  may  be  used. 

237.  Fountain  pens  have  come  into  general  use  among 
court,  legislative,  and  other  reporters.  Several  excellent 
styles  are-now  on  the  market,  but  the  shorthand  writer  needs 
to  be  cautioned  against  the  many  cheap  ones  which  are  worse 
than  useless  for  shorthand  writing.  The  fountain  pen  should 
be  provided  with  a  thoroughly  strong  and  flexible  nib. 
During  rapid  note-taking  the  strain  on  a  nib  is  very  consid- 
erable. If  it  is  stiff  and  unyielding,  the  labor  of  note-taking 
is  seriously  increased,  and,  on  the  other  hand,  if  it  is  not 
a  strong  pen,  it  may  speedily  become  useless.  For  these 
reasons  a  fountain  pen  with  a  gold  nib  only  should  be  used, 
and  the  writer  who  has  one  thoroughly  suited  to  his  hand 
will  possess  the  best  writing  instrument  it  is  possible  to 
have.  Some  shorthand  writers  prefer  an  ordinary  penholder 
with  gold  nib,  and  a  pocket  inkstand,  and,  where  they  are 
always  certain  of  the  accommodation  of  a  table,  the  arrange- 
ment is  a  good  one.  Here  again  a  word  of  caution  may  be 
given  as  to  inkstands,  many  pocket  inkstands  being  entirely 
unsuited  for  constant  use.  For  note-taking,  paper  with  a 
smooth,  hard  surface,  not  too  highly  glazed,  will  be  found 
most  suitable.  The  elastic  bound  books  which  open  flat  on 
the  desk  are  the  best,  though  the  note-books  bound  in  the 


238  Writing  Materials.  151 

customary  way  are  suitable  for  ordinary  work.  The  phonog- 
rapher  may  write  steadily  on  the  knee  by  placing  a  board 
about  sixteen  or  eighteen  inches  long,  five  inches  broad,  and. 
f-inch  thick,  under  his  reporting  book.  This  portable  writ- 
ing desk  supports  the  weight  of  the  upper  half  of  the  note- 
book when  open,  which,  otherwise,  drops  inconveniently 
over  the  knee. 

238.  Difficulty  and  loss  of  time  are  sometimes  experienced 
in  turning  over  the  leaves  of  note-books.  The  following 
method  may  be  usefully  adopted  : — "  While  writing  on  the 
upper  half  of  the  leaf,  introduce  the  second  finger  of  the  left 
hand  between  it  and  the  next  leaf,  keeping  the  leaf  which 
is  being  written  on  steady  by  the  first  finger  and  thumb. 
"While  writing  on  the  lower  part  of  the  page  move  the  leaf 
by  degrees,  till  it  is  about  half  way  up  the  book  ;  when  it 
is  convenient,  lift  up  the  first  finger  and  thumb,  and  the 
leaf  will  turn  over  almost  by  itself.  This  is  the  best  plan 
when  writing  on  a  desk  or  table.  When  writing  on  the 
knee,  the  first  finger  should  be  introduced  instead  of  the 
second,  and  the  leaf  be  moved  up  only  about  two  inches. 
The  finger  should  be  introduced  at  the  first  pause  the  speaker 
makes,  or  at  any  other  convenient  opportunity  that  presents 
itself."  Other  shorthand  writers  adopt  another  method  of 
turning  the  leaves.  They  take  hold  of  the  bottom  left-hand 
corner  of  the  leaf  with  the  finger  and  thumb,  and  on  reach- 
ing the  bottom  line  the  leaf  is  lifted  and  turned  over.  Some 
reporters  prefer  a  reporting  book  that  opens  like  a  printed 
book,  when  there  is  less  difficulty  in  turning  over  the  leaves 
with  the  left  hand.  Whichever  form  of  book  is  used,  the 
writer  should  confine  himself  to  one  side  of  the  paper  till 
the  end  of  the  book  is  reached,  and  then,  turning  it  over, 
begin  at  the  other  end,  and  write  in  the  same  manner  on 
the  blank  pages. 


152  Transcription.  239 

TRANSCRIPTION. 

239.  When  it  is  not  convenient  to  make  a  transcription  of 
one's  notes  on  a  typewriter,  a  stenographer  should  be  able 
to  make  a  verbatim  transcript  of  his  notes  with  his  pen  at 
the  rate  of  from  20  to  30  words  per  minute.  The  secret  of 
writing  longhand  rapidly  and  legibly  is  to  move  the  whole 
hand  with  each  stroke  of  the  pen.  Nearly  all  persons  use 
the  little  finger  as  a  fixed  prop,  and  in  forming  the  letters 
move  only  the  first  two  fingers  and  thumb  ;  when  the  fingers 
will  stretch  uo  further  the  hand  is  shifted  over  a  space  of 
from  half-an-inch  to  an  inch,  three  or  four  letters  are  written, 
and  the  hand  is  again  moved.  The  hand  thus  makes  a  series 
of  jumps,  and,  unless  slowly  executed,  the  writing  generally 
shows  great  irregularity  in  the  distance  and  inclination  of 
the  letters.  To  write  rapidly,  and  at  the  same  time  well, 
the  arm,  hand,  and  fingers  should  move  simultaneously. 
The  middle  of  the  forearm  should  rest  lightly  on  the  table 
or  desk  ;  and  the  hand,  resting  lightly  on  the  end  of  the 
outside  edge  of  the  little  finger,  should  glide  over  the  sur- 
face of  the  paper  as  each  letter  is  formed.  The  wrist  must 
not  touch  either  the  paper  or  the  desk.  The  pen  should 
not  be  held  firmly,  nor  be  lifted  until  each  word  is  finished, 
and  the  writer  should  seek  to  acquire  such  a  command  of 
hand  that  he  could,  if  needful,  write  a  whole  line  of  words 
(except  the  dotting  of  i,  j,)  without  taking  the  pen  off  the 
paper.  By  using  a  typewriter,  ah  expert  operator  can  pro- 
duce his  transcript  at  a  much  more  rapid  rate  than  by  the 
pen.  Still  better  results  may  be  attained  by  dictating  notes 
to  an  expert  operator. 


240  Significant  Marks.  153 

CHAPTER  XXIX. 

SIGNIFICANT  MARKS. 

240.  In  taking  notes  of  a  speaker,  the  employment  of 
certain  significant  marks  will  be  found  necessary  or  desira- 
ble, in  order  to  facilitate  the  production  of  a  correct 
verbatim  transcript  or  a  good  condensed  report ;  or  to 
prevent  misunderstanding.  The  use  of  these  signs  is 
described  below : 

MISHEARINGS,  ETC. — When  a  word  has  not  been  heard  dis- 
tinctly, and  the  shorthand  writer  is  uncertain  whether  he  has 
written  the  right  one  or  not,  a  circle  should  be  drawn  round  the 
character,  or  a  cross  ( x )  placed  under  it.  When  the  note- taker 
has  failed  to  hear  a  word,  the  omission  should  be  indicated  by  a 
caret  (....,..)  placed  under  the  line.  Should  a  portion  of  a  sen- 
tence be  so  lost,  the  same  sign  should  be  employed,  and  a  space 
left  blank  corresponding  to  the  amount  omitted.  Or  the  long- 
hand letters  n  h  (not  heard)  may  be  written. 

ERRORS. — In  cases  where  a  reporter  has  failed  to  secure  a 
correct  note  of  a  sentence,  this  may  be  indicated  by  an  inclined 
oval,  thus  Q  (nought  or  nothing).  When  it  is  noticed  that 
the  speaker  has  fallen  into  an  error,  the  mark  X  should  be 
made  on  the  left-hand  margin  of  the  note-book. 

REFERENCE  MARKS. — When  verbatim  notes  of  a  speech  are 
taken,  but  only  a  condensed  report  is  required,  a  perpendicu- 
lar stroke  should  be  made  in  the  left-hand  margin  of  the  note- 
book to  indicate  an  important  sentence  or  passage  which  it  is 
desirable  to  incorporate  in  the  summary.  The  end  of  a  speech 
or  the  completion  of  a  portion  of  a  discourse  may  be  indicated 
by  two  strokes,  thus  II  When  the  reporter  suspends  note- 
taking,  but  the  speaker  proceeds,  the  longhand  letters  Ic  8 
(continued  speaking)  may  be  written. 

QUOTATIONS,  ETC. — Quotations  from  well-known  sources,  such 
as  the  Bible  or  Shakspere,  familiar  to  the  reporter,  need  not 


154  Significant  Marks. 

be  written  fully  if  time  presses.  It  will  suffice  to  write  the 
commencing  and  concluding  words  with  quotation  marks  and 

a  long  dash  between;  thus,  "  The  quality  of  mercy  

seasons  justice."  A  long  dash  may  be  used  to  denote  the 
repetition  of  certain  words  by  a  speaker,  instead  of  writing 
them  each  time,  as  in  the  familiar  passage,  "  Whatsoever  things 
are  true, honest, just,'"  etc. 

EXAMINATION  OF  WITNESSES. — In  reporting  the  examination 
of  witnesses  by  questions  and  answers,  the  name  of  each 
•witness  should  be  written  in  longhand.  The  name  of  the 
original  examiner  may  be  written  in  shorthand  before  the 
first  question.  It  need  not  be  repeated  until  he  resumes 
the  examination  after  some  one  has  intervened.  Should  the 
judge  intervene  at  any  stage  of  the  proceeding  write  /  before 
the  first  question  only.  In  like  manner,  whenever  the  opposing 
counsel  intervenes,  write  his  name  before  the  first  question. 
Whenever  documents  or  other  articles,  termed  exhibits,  are 
admitted  it  is  usual  to  mark  them  Exhibit  1,  or  Exhibit  A, 
and  so  on.  If  both  of  the  opposing  parties  introduce  exhibits, 
it  is  a  good  plan  for  the  sake  of  greater  distinctness  to 
designate  the  exhibits  on  one  side  by  numbers,  and  those  on 
the  other  side  by  letters.  Should  an  exhibit  be  read,  write  in 
shorthand  the  word  "read"  either  in  parentheses  or  draw  a 
circle  around  it. 

APPLAUSE,  DISSENT,  ETC. — The  following  words,  descriptive 
of  the  approbation  or  dissent  of  an  audience,  should  be  en- 
closed by  the  reporter  between  large  parentheses : — .._S,  hear, 
-As—  hear,  hear,  ._  no,  ^^/  no,  no,  o_a/  sensation, 
.._2..  applause,  /  chair,  .?.  cheers,  /'A.  laughter, 
\^ — "  uproar,  ^  hisses.  The  adjective,  or  adjectives,  de- 
scriptive of  the  kind  of  applause  must  be  written  after  the 
first  word.  Feu*  example,  what  would  be  described  as  loud 
and  continued  applause  would  be  written  _^o_/1  L- <  in  re- 
porting, for  the  note-taker  would  not  know  that  the  applause 
was  continued  till  it  had  lasted  for  some  time. 


241-244  Figures.  155 

FIGURES. 

241.  Figures  occurring  in  speeches  or  matter  dictated 
should  be  represented  by  the  note-taker  in  the   ordinary 
Arabic  numerals,   in   preference  to  shorthand   characters, 
for  although  the  latter  may,  in  some  cases,  represent  the 
numbers  more  briefly,  the  great  distinctiveness  of  figures 
in  a  mass  of  shorthand  notes  is  extremely  helpful  when 
reading  them,  or  when  searching  for  a  particular  passage. 
But  in  taking  down  round  figures,  the  proper  shorthand 
sign,  or  an  abbreviation,  may  be  employed  with  advantage 
to  record  the  notation. 

242.  Instead  of  writing  a  string  of  noughts,  the  number 
represented  by  them  should  be  expressed    in   shorthand. 
In   reporting,    the    following    shorthand    letters,    written 
in  the  second  or  third  position  close  to  the  figures,  will 

be   found   useful  :  ^^    hundred  or  hundredth*,  f    thousand* 
^_s   hundred  thousand,   ^-^  million,   ^^-^  hundred  million, 

\     billion;    as,    4^    400;    3(     3,000;    5^    500,000; 
3^-v  3,000,000  ;  7  ^^  700,000,000  ;  1  \  oneUllion. 

243.  In   round   numbers,   the  principal   monetary  units 
may  be  expressed  by  the  addition  of  a  shorthand  charac- 
ter for  dollars,  francs,  pounds,  rupees,  etc.,  either  joined  or 
close  to  that  used  to  represent  hundred,  thousand,  million^ 
etc.     For  example,  150  C      represents  $150,000;  250  C    > 

250,000/r.;  170   L    ,£170,000;  190   (^> ,    Us.  190,000. 

244.  In   sermon    reporting   the     Book   or   Epistle,    the 
Chapter,    and   the   Verse   in   quotations   from    the    Bible 
may  be   indicated   as  follows  : — Place  the   figure  for  the 
Book  or  Epistle  in  the  first  position,  for  the  Chapter  in 
the    second    position,    and    for    the    Verse  in   the   third 
position:     thus,      ^"^~^~C_£.    •*         By     this     method    the 
book,   chapter  and  verse   may    be   written  in   any   order 
by  means  of  figures  only,  without   danger  of  ambiguity. 


156     Compounds  of  "  Here,"  "  There,"  "  Where."    245 

COMPOUNDS     OF     HERE,     THERE,      WHERE. 

245.    Write    the    compound  words    here,    there,    where, 
joined  to 

at,         to,  of,  with,  in,         on,     thus: 

Here       ^       ^\        ~\^  '^' 
There 


Where 

Exercise  77. 

The  area  of  North  and  South  America  is  in  round  figures 
nearly  15  million  (15,  000,  000)  square  miles  ;  that  of  the  United 
States  4  million  (4,000,000)  ;  of  Europe  nearly  4  million 
(4,000,000)  ;  of  Asia  17  million  (17,000,000)  ;  of  Africa  12 
million  (12,000,000)  ;  and  of  Australia  and  the  oceanic  isles 
between  3  million  (3,000,000)  and  4  million  (4,000,000).  There 
are  between  1  hundred  (100)  and  2  hundred  (200)  countries 
in  the  world,  either  independent  or  tributary.  The  largest 
country  in  Europe  is  Russia,  with  an  area  of  about  2,  1  hundred 
thousand  (2,100,000)  square  miles.  In  Asia  the  Russian  pos- 
sessions cover  an  area  of  between  6  million  (6,000,000)  and  7 
million  (7,000,000)  square  miles.  It  is  estimated  that  there  are 
now  in  the  world  170  thousand  (170,000)  miles  of  ocean  tele- 
graphic cables,  and  662  thousand  (662,000)  miles  of  land  lines. 
The  year's  expenditure  of  the  United  States  Government  ranges 
between  $6  hundred  million  ($600,000,000)  and  $7  hundred 
million  ($700,000,000).  India  has  a  public  debt  of  Rs.  113 
million  (Rs.  113,000,000)  in  that  country  and  £125  million 
(£125,000,000)  in  England.  The  principal  English  law  officer 
has  a  salary  of  £10  thousand  (£10,000).  France  has  the 
heaviest  National  Debt  in  the  world,  in  round  figures  1,025 
million  fr.  (1,025,000,000  fr.). 

The  preacher's  text  was  taken  from  1  St.  John,  1,  9,  10. 
Thereon  he  preached  an  eloquent  sermon,  wherewith  all  were 
pleased,  and  whereat  our  friends  were  edified.  In  the  course 
thereof  he  referred  to  the  following  passages  :  —  Isaiah,  49,  6  ; 
1  John  2,  8  ;  Luke  19,  14  ;  Acts  13,  46  ;  and  Romans  8,  15  ; 
wherein  he  saw  suitable  illustrations,  and  ivhereon,  he  said,  we 
might  all  meditate  with  advantage.  Meditation,  he  declared, 
was  much  too  rare  ;  yet  the  use  thereof  would  certainly  be  fol- 
lowed by  improvement,  and  thereto  we  should  constantly  aim 


246 


Negative  Prefixes. 


157 


Exercise    77   (continued). 

He  knew  whereof  he  spoke,  and  whereto  his  counsel  led.  Hereon 
he  was  very  earnest  ;  hereto  and  herein  his  exhortation  was 
frequent,  flereatsome  were  surprised,  and  hereof  often  spoke; 
herewith  a  few  were  impressed,  but  therewith  or  thereat  others 
were  indifferent.  Hitherto,  it  was  said,  he  had  not  succeeded 
as  a  preacher,  whereat  all  were  surprised,  for  therein,  it  seemed, 
lay  his  great  power. 

NEGATIVE   PREFIXES. 

246.  Negatives  of  words  that  begin  with  I,  m,  n,  are 
distinguished  from  the  positive  by  repeating  the  first  con- 
sonant ;  for  example, 

legal 

illegal 

legible 

illegible  > 

logical  fj 

illogical  r    J _ 

material 


necessary 
immaterial  .o^ITT^...  unnecessary 

Negatives  of  words  commencing  with  r  generally  follow 
the  rule  for  upward   and   downward  r,  without  repeating 
the  first  consonant  ;  as, 
resolute  ^> 

irresolute  "V 


moral  dl_ 

immoral  * 
mortal  ^"~ 
immortal 
noxious 
innoxious 


removable 


resistible 

irresistible 
relevant 


^ 


irremovable     ^"V^  irrelevant 

When  this  rule  cannot  be  observed,  repeat  r;  as, 
^  rational,  ~\?  irrational.  The  same  method  may 
be  adopted  to  distinguish  words  like  /J  radiance, 
irradiance. 


158  Negative  Prefixes. 

Exercise  78. 

It  has  been  justly  said  that  if  the  English  language  were  a 
perfect  one,  every  positive  term  would  nave  a  negative  term 
exactly  corresponding  to  it,  so  that  all  adjectives  |  and  nouns 
would  be  in  pairs.  Just  as  liberal  has  its  negative  illiberal ; 
mature,  immature  ;  named,  unnamed ;  nerved,  unnerved ;  re- 
presssible,  irrepressible  ;  reducible,  irreducible  ;  and  so  on,  with 
innumerable  other  words ;  |  so  blue  should  have  its  negative 
non-blue  ;  paper,  non-paper  ;  and  so  on.  The  absence  of  such 
negatives,  however,  is  quite  immaterial,  and  has  probably  been 
unnoticed  by  most  |  people,  because  the  words  would  be  rarely 
used.  Hence,  the  dictionaries  contain  only  the  common  pairs, 
such  as  limitable,  illimitable;  legitimate,  illegitimate  ;  measur- 
able, immeasurable  ;  movable,  immovable;  natural,  unnatural; 
religious,  irreligious;  \  refutable,  irrefutable;  and  so  forth.  Its 
imperfections  notwithstanding,  the  English  language  is  a  noble 
one,  and  its  growth,  and  the  changes  it  has  undergone,  with  the 
particular  periods  of  their  |  introduction,  are  worthy  of  study  by 
all,  and  indeed  necessary  to  some  professions.  It  is,  perhaps, 
unnecessary  to  dwell  on  the  necessity  of  such  a  study  to  the 
reporter,  if  |  he  would  escape  the  reproach  of  sometimes  making 
a  faulty  transcript,  and  would  aspire  to  the  reputation  of  being 
an  irreproachable  writer.  Very  little  reflection  will  show  how 
necessary  it  |  is  that  the  shorthand  writer  should  possess  a  good 
vocabulary.  He  is,  morally,  if  not  legally,  answerable  to  the 
speaker  whose  words  he  is  taking  down,  as  well  as  to  |  the 
reader  for  whom  they  are  to  be  transcribed,  and  it  might  easily 
be  pronounced  immoral  and,  perhaps,  illegal  for  him  to  mis- 
represent the  language  used.  The  irradiant  words  of  |  the 
eloquent  speaker  are  reflected,  as  it  were,  by  the  pen  of  the 
writer,  and  their  radiance  should  not  be  dimmed  through  any 
fault  of  his.  Such  a  statement,  indeed,  |  is  quite  unanswerable. 
Sometimes  the  reporter  has  to  reconcile  the.  apparently  irrecon- 
cilable, by  rightly  interpreting  the  meaning  of  the  speaker,  when 
his  words  do  not  make  that  meaning  clear.  How  |  often  would 
a  speaker's  mind  remain  uninterpreted  were  it  not  for  the 
reporter!  It  is  a  necessary  fiction  of  the  law  that  every  subject, 
literate  and  illiterate,  is  aware  of  |  what  is  legal  and  what  illegal, 
and  though  it  is  morally  impossible  that  all  should  know  this, 
yet  ignorance  will  not  excuse  an  illegal  or  immoral  act.  The 
conclusion,  therefore,  |  is  irresistible  that  apart  from  its  inherent 
interest — and  it  cannot  be  uninteresting  to  anyone — the  study 
of  his  native  language  is  essential  to  the  reporter.  He  should 
devote  manure  |  thought  to  the  methodical  treatment  of  negative 
words,  since  an  immethodical  representation  of  such  words 
would  infallibly  end  in  mistakes  which  would  be  set  down  to 
ignorance  or  immature  judgment.  [  (450) 


247'248  Reporting  Grammalogues,  159 

CHAPTER  XXX. 
REPORTING  GRAMMALOGUES. 

247.  The  extended  list    of  grammalogues  given   in  the 
tables   on   the   four  following    pages,    includes   all   those 
employed   in   the  Corresponding  Style  which   have    been 
already  mastered  by  the   student.     The  majority  of  the 
•additional   grammalogues   consist    of    unvocalized   single 
stroke  outlines,   that  express  all   the   consonants   of  the 
word,    WRITTEN     IN     POSITION.       There     are,    however, 
twenty-eight  signs  which  need  to  be  memorized  ;  ten  of 
these   are   irregular.      Of  the    last  named   the   following 
are  placed   OUT   OP   POSITION   as    regards    their  accented 
vowels,  namely,   approve,  met,  most,   oicing,  sent  and  thus, 
in  order  to  prevent  their  clashing  with  prove,  meet,  must, 
thing,    send,    and    this.     The   grammalogues   house  and  ye 
are    written   on   the  line   for   convenience,    and   own   and 
young  are  written  under  the  line  (the  ends  of  the  letters 
touching  it)  to  distinguisli  them  from  no  and  thing.     The 
remaining  eighteen  having  contracted  forms  are  belief-ve, 
Christian-ity,  generation,  glory-ify-fied,   holy,  itself,  larger, 
liberty,    ought,    religion,    religious,    Saviour,    Scripture,    sig- 
nify,   speak,    special,    strength,    whither.     A    list    of    the 
above  is  set  out  on  page  164,  and  must  be  learned  by  the 
student,   who  should    make    himself    thoroughly    familiar 
with  the  full  list  of  Reporting  Grammalogues  by  writing 
them  several  times. 

248.  The   past  tense  of    a    verb  expressed    by    a   logo- 
gram,  or   by   a    contracted  outline,  may  usually  be  writ- 
ten   in   the    same   way   as    the    present    tense  ;  thus,  the 
logogram    *\     br,    may     represent     both     remember    and 
remembered.     But  when  it  is  necessary  to  specially  repre- 
sent the  past    tense    d   may  be  added  separately,  or  the 
word  may  be  written  in  full  ;  thus,  c_|    or   c_/v  glori- 
fied.      Logograms   that   represent   the   whole   of  the    con- 
sonants in  a  word,  are  shortened  for  the  past  tense  ;  as, 

f  tell,   F  told. 


160  Reporting  Grammalogues. 

REPORTING    GRAMMALOGUES 
ARRANGED  PHONETICALLY. 

CONSONANTS. 
\  1  happy,  2  up,  3  put 
\  1  happen,  2  upon 
^  1  happened 
\  1  apply 

\  3  principle,  principal-ly 
°\  1  particular,  2  opportu- 
*\»  1  approve 


\  1  by,  buy,  2  be,  3  to  be 
\,  2  above 
\  2  been 

\  2  able,  3  belief,  believe-d 
^  2  build-ing,  able  to 
\  1  liberty,  2  member,   re- 
member-ed,  3  nuraber-ed 

|   1  at,  2  it,  3  out 
I    3  itself 

f  1  at  all,  2  tell,  3  till 
P  2  told,  till  it 
1  2  truth,  3  true 
1  1  tried,  2  toward,  trade 
(,   3  out  of 

|   1  had,  2  do,  3  different- 
I  2  did  [-ence 

[  2  advantage,  3  difficult 
J  2  done,  3  down 
J  t  had  not,  do  not,  don't, 
f  2  deliver-ed-y    [2  did  not 
1  1  Dr,  2  dear,  3  during 

/  1  much,  2  which,  3  each 

/  2  which  have 

P  1  child 

7  2  chair,  3  cheer 

/  1  large 

/  3  religious 

J  2  general-ly,  3  religion 

</  1  gentleman,  2  gentlemen 

/  1  larger 

I  2  generation 


—  1  can,  2  come 

-  1  quite,  2  could 

— °  1  because 

~=  1  cannot,  2  account 

^-  1  call,  2  equal- ly 

=-  1  called,  2  cold,  equalled 

=—  1  Christian,  Christianity, 

2  care 
=-    1    accordiug,    according    to, 

cart,  2  cared 


—  1  go,  ago,  2  give-n 
-  1  God,  2  good 
<=—  2  glory,  glorif  y-ied 
=-  2  gold 
e-  1  guard,  2  great 

^  1  half,  2  if 

^  1  after,  2  if  it 

Va  1  often,  2  Phonography 

^2  for 

">  2  from  _ 

^  2  have 

^s  2  heaven 

^  1  over,  2  ever-y 

">  2  very,  3  however 

^L3  evil 

(  1  thank-ed,  2  think, 

(  1  thought  [3  youth 

*)  3  through,  threw 

9  2  third 


(  1  though,  thy,  2  them, 

they 

(   1  that,  2  without 
(,  1  those,  thyself,   2  this, 

3  thus,  these,  youths 
(5  2  themselves 
(,    3  within 
(  2  other 

2  there,  their,  they  are 

3  therefore 


) 


Reporting  Grammalogues. 


161 


0  1  has,  as,  2  his,  is 

)  2  so,  us,  3  see,  use  (noun) 

0  1  as  is  (his,  or  has),  has 

his,  Ik  M  (or  his),  his  is 
o  2  first 

\  2  special-ly,  3  speak 
<^  2  spirit 

1  2  strength 
""  1  Scripture 
°-  2  secret 

<*—  1  signify-ied-ficant 

"•o  1  significance 

^_  2  several,  Saviour 

"^  1  sent 

<u  2  send 

<y-  2  somewhat 

)  2  was,  3  whose,  use  (verb) 

J  2  shall,  shalt,  3  wish 
J  3  sure 
!>  1  short 

J  2  usual-ly ;  J)  2  pleasure 

— - 1  me,  my,  2  him,  may 
~  1  might,  met,  2  meet-ing 
--6  1  myself,  2  himself 
^=>  1  most,  2  must 
'-s  1  important-ance,  2  im- 

prove-ed-ment 
•"«>  2  improvements 
-5  2  may  not,  amount 
^  1  more,  remark-ed, 

2  Mr,  mere 


^  1  in,  any,  2  no,  know,3  own 

~  1  not,  2  nature 

^  1  hand,  2  under 

^  2  nation 

v_?  2  opinion 

^  1  nor,  2  near 


1  language,    owing, 
2  thing,  3  young 


f  2  Lord 

r  1  light,  2  let 


-^  2  are,  3  our,  hour 

~~M  or,  2  your,  3  year 

"Mart 

~>  1  yard,  2  word 


eX  2  we,  way,  away 
cs  2  wait,  weight 
o"2  one 

oo  1  want,  2  went,  won't 
<T  2  will,  well 


whether,  3  whither 
1  while 


<f  2  yet 
2  yes 


2  holy 
2  house 


VOWELS. 

DOTS,  a,  an,  •  the,  ah !  .  eh? 

\  i  / 

DASHES.       of,        on,        and 

\       I  s 

all,  0,  oh !  owe,  awe,  ought 

s  to,  I  but,  /  should 
s  two,  too,  i  he,  x  who 

12 


DIPHTHONGS. 


I,  eye,   aye  (yes),  A  how,    why, 


with,   c  when,    what,   3  would, 


beyond,  «  you. 


162 


Reporting  Grammaiogues. 
REPORTING    GRAMMALOGUES. 

ABBANGED     ALPHABETICALLY. 


A  or  an  ._  1 

cheer  .-?..  3 

hand  ,^_  1 

able   \  2 

child  ._/!.  1 

happen      J  1 

able  to    s.  2 

Christian  ^7.  1 

happened  .j>.  1 

above  \>  2 

Christianity    e~  1 

happy  \  1 

according  _!L  1 

cold  t_  2 

has    °  1 

according  to  H.  1 

come    2 

has  his  .2.  1 

account  -3  2 

could     _    2 

have  ^  2 

advantage      I  2 

Dear  1   2 

he    i  2 

after  .^  1 

deliver-ed-y    1    2 

heaven  9  V^.,  2 

ago          1 

did    I    2 

high    Z.  1 

ah!.Ll 

did  not    J   2 

him    ^  2 

all  ±.  1 

difference  —  1_  3 

himself  -r>  2 

amount    ^>  2 

different    -|-  3 

his    o  2 

an  _'_  1 

difficult    -!-  3 

his  is    O  2 

and  .  '...  1 

do           1    2 

holy   rf^2 

any  ^_  1 

do  not  JL*  1 

hour  ^:.  3 

apply  ..S_  * 

Doctor     ..!_  1 

house   a-"   2 

approve  .^Nj_  1 

done      J    2 

how    A   2 

art  Jj_  1 

down  —  J-  3 

however  .5\  3 

are    x-  2 

during  .--]--  3 

I    v   1 

as  ..!.  1 

Each  _/-3 

if  '\.2 

as  has  _9_  1 

ehP   .  2 

if  it   v.  2 

as  his    °_  1 

equal-ly    ,      2 

importance  .^.  1 

as  is    ,    01 

equalled  c_  2 

important  ..C1..  1 

at       1      1 

ever-y  ^  2 

improve    ^  2 

at  all    J_l 

evil  ..Q_.  3 

improved    x^  2 

away    cX  2 

eye    v   1 

improvement    /^  2 

awe  ..'.  1 

f'irst    o  2 

improvements    x-s  2 

ave  (yes)    *   1 

for  <L  2 

in  JT!  1 

Be  <2 

from  °N  2 

is  o  2 

because  JlfL  1 

General    7  2 

is  as   o  2 

been   \>  2 

generally    7  2 

is  his  ,    O  2 

belief  .  V  3 

generation     £  2 

it        1    2 

believe  .5^_  3 

gentleman  J_  1 

itself  -(,-  3 

believed   _5v-  3 

gentlemen    ,/   2 

Know    v_^  2 

beyond    "   1 

give-n    2 

Language  ,  .!!^L  1 

build   s/2 

glorified    ,      2 

large     „  ./...  1 

building    <\  2 

glorifv    c  2 

larger  .Z.  1 

but      i    2 
by,  buy     \  1 
Call   —  1 

glory    c  —  2 
go  .~  1 
God    ~  1 

let  r  2^ 
libertv  „>:  1 
light  "£.  1 

called  !l  1 

gold   ^  2 

Lord  r  2 

can  1 

good   _  2 

May   ^  2 

cannot  .3  1 

great   e-  2 

may  not    -r>  2 

care    c  —  2 

guard   ,  .!T_  1 

me  -^..-  1 

cared   c-  2 

Had      I.  1 

meet   /-^  2 

cart  .!L  .1 

had  not     J   1 

meeting   ^  2 

chair      /   2 

half       Ji  1 

member  *S  2 

Reporting  Grammalogues. 


163 


mere   r-»  2 

secret   -r-  2 

trade    1  2 

met  .2.  1 

see  _.)_3 

tried  ..L  1 

might  .21  1 

send    <u  2 

true    „  4_3 

more  .flT.  1 

sent  .a'..  1 

truth  1   2 

most  .C?..  1 

several  ^.  2 

two    \  2 

Mr   ^2, 

shall  ^  2 

Under  ^  2 

much     ./.  1 

shalt  J  2 

up    \2 

must    /-Q  2 

short    ..-i  1 

upon     \  2 

my  ..d  1 

should    /   2 

us       )  2 

myself  ..C?.  I 

significant  .±T.  1 

use  (noun)   _.)_.3 

Nation    ^_3  2 

significance  .^s.  1 

use  (verb)  ...)_  3 

nature    ~  2 

signify-ied      _^~  1 

usual-ly  ^  2 

near  c_^  2 

so                )  2 

Very  "S  2 

no    —  2 

somewhat  <rs  2 

Wait   •  2 

nor  ±±  1 

speak   X-3 

want      £.  1 

not  .M  1 

special-ly  ^  2 

was     )  2 

number-ed  -V.  3 

spirit   °s  2o 

way    «X  2 

O  ..!„  1 

strength     1    2 

we    &s  2 

of  .2.1 

sure    n  ..  J?_.  3 

weight   </  2 

often    Vo    1 

Tell    1    2   , 

well   C  2 

oh   JL  1 

thank-ed  .i.  1 

went    &o  2 

on  ..!..  1 

that  _L  1 

what  JL  1 

one    </>  2 

the   .  2  ,. 

when  c    2 

opinion    ^a   2 

their       /  2 

whether  .  c/  2 

opportunity      <\  2 
or                 .  J  1 

them  (2         , 
themselves  (>  t)  2 

which     /  2 
which  ^  hare   I  2 

other    (   2 

there             /   2 

while  y~  1 

ought  .JL  1 

therefore  ..!)-  3 

whither  ^^.3 

our  ..^f.  3 

these.  4-  3  ' 

who    /  2 

out  _|_  3 

they         A  2 

whose  _.)..  3 

out  of  „  .-.(,-  3 
over   .._:  1 

they  are    '  2 
thing  /  ^'  2 

why  .""  1 

will   tT2 

owe  .JL  1 

think  C   2 

wish.-.y'..  3 

owing  ..™.  1 

third     9   2 

with  _c._  1 

own    ,....,.  3 

this  4.2 

within  .-(..  3 

Particular  .^.  1 

those  .5.1  / 

without    <  2 

Phonography  Vj  2 

though      _L  1 

won't   <*  2 

pleasure   J)    2 

thought   ..<..  1 

word    -\  2 

'principal-ly  ..%.  3 

through,  threw  -')-  3 

would    5  2 

principle  .5\..  3 

thus  ....4-  3 

Yard  ..>  1 

put  .  v  3 

thy  JLl, 

ye   ^  2 

Quite    1 
Religion  -J—  3 

thyself    &.  1 
till  _f_8 

year  -T\  3 
yes   e*1  2 

religious  ..-/--  3 

till  it    P    2 

yet  s  2 

remark-ed  ..d  1 

to    s  2 

you    /•.  2 

remember  *\  2 

to  be  ..\   3 

young  ^y.  3 

remembered  *\  2 

told    P  2 

your    ^\  2 

Saviour  ^_  2 

too    \  2 

youth  ._(..  3 

Scripture   ^1.  1 

toward    1    2 

youths  -(,-  3 

164 


Reporting  Grammalogues. 

(To  be  memorized  ;  see  par.  247.) 

_  sent 

^    signify-ied 
3.     speak 


J\>   approve 

met 

...Sv..  .  belief-ve-ed 
~   Christian-ity 

_  ought 

(j    generation 

^^    owing 

c  glory-ify-fied 

own 

cr"    holy 

.../....  religion 

tf*0   house 
._(....  itself 
7     larger 

..-/._  religious 
C_    Saviour 
Scripture 

J\_  liberty 

special 
strength 
thus 
x...  whither 

-^    ye 
young 


Exercise  79. 

Including  all  the  Grammalogues  given  in  the  above  list. 

If  you  wish  to  prove  to  others  your  belief  in  the  things  which 
you  approve,  whether  they  be  of  a  religious,  political,  or  scien- 
tific nature,  it  is  most  essential  that  |  you  speak  distinctly,  and 
with  a  true  apprehension  of  the  meaning  of  what  you  say  ;  other- 
wise, your  argument  will  be  wanting  in  strength,  and  your  words 
will  fail  to  signify  \  all  that  you  intend  them  to  convey.  You 
will  readily  own  that  you  should  endeavor  to  express  youi- 
thoughts  so  that  you  may  be  understood  without  special  effort  on 
the  |  part  of  your  listeners.  This  is  a  duty  owing  to  those  whom 
you  invite  to  hear  you.  How  many  a  good  and  holy  cause  is 
lost  through  faulty  presentation  !  How  |  often  has  the  cause  of 
liberty  been  weakened  by  the  bad  delivery  of  those  who  were 
sent  to  strengthen  it!  The  Christian  religion  itself  sometimes 
loses  where  it  ought  to  |  gain,  through  the  speaker's  inability  to 
clothe  his  thoughts  in  suitable  language,  and  to  speak  on  Christi- 
anity with  clearness,  strength,  and  grace.  Who  has  not  occa- 
sionally heard  a  beautiful  passage  |  of  holy  Scripture,  perhaps  the 
words  of  the  Saviour  himself,  distorted  from  what  they  signified 
by  incorrect  reading?  Have  we  not  all  admired  the  elocutionist, 
who  speaks  so  that  his  |  words  are  carried  over  a  larger  area 
than  an  untrained  speaker  could  hope  to  reach?  Who  has  not 
heard  the  speaker  whose  voice  itself  added  strength  to  his  logic, 
and  |  enabled  him  to  lead  his  audience  ivhither  he  would  ? 
Thus  it  is  believed  to  have  been  with  Lord  Chatham,  the  glory 


Reporting  Grammalogues.  166 

of  his  generation  and  the  champion  of  liberty,  whose  |  yoice  had 
such  strength  that  when  he  desired  to  speak  with  special  effect 
he  had  only  to  raise  the  tone,  and  the  House  shook  with  its  peal. 
And  do  you  |  imagine,  ye  young  students,  that  Chatham  ob- 
tained his  power  of  oratory  without  trouble  or  pains  ?  Can  you 
believe  that  he  met  with  no  difficulty  in  acquiring  the  ability 
which  brought  |  him  fame  and  glorified  him?  Not  so.  He 
studied  long  and  hard  to  acquire  that  command  of  language 
which  enabled  him  to  signify  his  own  thoughts  with  precision, 
and  afterwards  |  contributed  to  glorify  his  name.  It  is  most 
likely  that  few  men  ever  went  through  a  larger  amount  of 
drudgery  than  he  did  to  fit  himself  as  a  public  speaker.  |  The 
leading  principles  of  liberty,  religion,  government,  etc.,  were 
all  studied  to  this  end.  Thus  was  he  able  "  list'ning  Senates 
to  command."  So  it  ought  to  be  your  special  aim  |  to  cultivate 
the  strength  of  will  to  imitate  him  in  this  particular  respect, 
that  you  may  become,  if  not  a  brilliant,  at  least  an  effective 
speaker  and  an  elegant  reader.  |  (450) 

Exercise  80. 

The  following  Exercise  consists  entirely  of  Reporting  Gramma- 
logues, the  whole  list  being  introduced. 

The  General  was  of  opinion  that  in  our  generation — aye, 
during  this  year — there  had  been  no  true  liberty  to  think  as  one 
would  wish,  to  deliver  or  use  the  |  mere  language  of  truth,  or, 
in  short,  to  do  what  thought  and  word  signified.  But  the  Doctor 
had  quite  a  different  belief,  and  was  able  to  speak  out  according 
as  |  he  thought  he  ought.  Therefore,  he  did  not  wait,  nor  think 
that  he  was  under  any  care  not  to  speak,  happen  what  might. 
He  thanked  the  other' for  the  opportunity  ;  |  he  was  sure  that 
we  had  not  an  equal  but  a  larger  liberty  ;  yes,  and  that  we 
generally  use  it  well.  So,  according  to  his  opinion,  the  other 
did  not  |  remember,  or  give  half  the  importance  he  ought,  to 
an  important  particular.  Every  nation,  though  not  all  equally, 
tried  to  do  what  was  good  for  the  young,  and  the  child  |  was 
cared  for  as  in  no  generation  of  which  we  have  any  account 
He  remarked,  too,  that  it  was  very  significant  that  our  young 
have  the  opportunity  of  improvement  which  |  it  cannot  but  be  a 
pleasure  to  think  of,  because  by  it  we  build,  or  are  building,  a 
great  nation.  Through  improvements  which  have  come  in  use, 
we  number  our  |  youths,  or  they  are  able  to  be  numbered,  with 
those  who  themselves  are  given  this  advantage  ;  in  itself  a  most 
important  thing  for  our  youth.  If  so  much  has  been  |  done, 
though  in  a  different  way  somewhat  to  that  we  should  specially 
glory  in  or  have  glorified,  the  Doctor  thought  we  should  ese  in 
it  a  true  wish  for  more  |  light,  so  that  this  generation  might 


166  Reporting  Grammalogues. 

generally  be  remembered  for  the  good  done  in  it  beyond,  out 
of,  and  above  any  other,  tillit,  in  short,  was  not  equalled  or  | 
improved  on  by  any.  As  for  liberty  to  speak  as  one  would 
•wish,  he  believed  that  usually  no  meeting  of  gentlemen  would 
believe  it  to  be  at  all  difficult  when  |  they  met  to  signify  their 
opinion  on  any  principle  of  importance,  or  on  Christianity,  or 
religion  generally,  in  language  of  awe  that  a  gentleman  may  or 
should  apply.  Mr.  B.  |  was  in  the  chair  at  a  large  meeting  a 
short  while  ago,  and  himself  delivered  a  very  happy  remark  on 
trade  and  on  gold,  the  nature  of  which  must  have  |  weight  with 
any  or  all  who  would  see  the  trade  of  his  or  their  own  nation 
improve  over  that  of  any  other,  to  the  genei'al  advantage.  An 
account  of  this  |  delivery  we  owe  to  Phonography.  His  is  a 
happy  way  ;  as  is  usual,  he  put  every  one  there  in  good  spirit, 
and  all  would  give  him  a  cheer  ;  though  it  |  was  thought  the 
meeting  was  a  cold  one,  all  went  well.  As  has  been  remarked, 
he  did  not  at  first  think  it  of  weight  or  significance,  that  several 
of  those  |  who  thought  evil  of  him — it  may  have  been  a  third 
of  them — often  tried  in  secret  with  much  art,  out  of  an  evil  wish, 
to  put  in  quite  a  |  different  light  (and  that  no  good  one)  all  he 
happened  to  tell  them  to  believe.  But  I  know  myself  that  within 
or  near  a  year  from  that  meeting,  he  had  |  to  be  on  his  guard 
toward  them,  owing  to  their  want  of  truth  when  they  had  the 
opportunity  to  meet  and  speak  in  a  special  way  of  his  religious 
opinion,  |  and  of  all  that  he  was  believed  to  know  of  what 
Scripture  has  told  us  of  God,  of  the  Saviour,  the  Holy  Spirit,  the 
Christian  religion,  and  of  heaven.  We  |  do  not  approve  of  those 
who  thus  speak,  and  however  high  the  amount  of  weight  these 
gentlemen  themselves  may,  as  a  usual  thing,  happen  to  have, 
we  cannnot  ever  let  |  their  want  of  truth  go  without  a  word  to 
signify  our  difference.  Oh !  that  each  had  the  strength  to  do 
according  to  this.  Ah!  is  it  true  he  had  not?  |  Eh?  If  so, 
he  is  as  evil  as  they  are  themselves,  and  therefore  while  he  is 
thus  it  is  his  will,  or  by  his  own  wish,  and  we  must  send  |  or  go 
down  to  him.  He  shall  be  sent  away  upon  the  first  opportunity, 
whether  he  will  or  no,  and  whither  thyself  shall  not  or  may  not 
know,  or  be  |  able  to  meet  him  till  he  has  his  cart,  and  is  called 
on  to  go  from  the  yard.  As  his  has  not  been  a  happy  nature, 
or  one  which  improved,  |  ye  must  not  glorify  him  to  me.  After 
what  has  happened,  your  s'pirit  should  thank  the  hand  by  whose 
strength  it  is  that  you  may  not  go  to  or  call  |  on  him.  How  can 
you  do  other  at  all  ?  Yet  if  it  had  not  been  so,  and  he  could 
come  up  to  you,  why  should  I  think  that  my  eye  |  would  in  that 
hour,  and  in  my  house,  see  you  two,  till  it  had  happened?  Aye, 
as  thy  principal,  out  of  a  wish  to  improve  every  member,  and 
in  particular  |  these  dear  to  me,  I  won't  think  so,  my  Lord.  (850) 


249-252  Reporting  Contractions.  167 

;  CHAPTER  XXXI. 
REPORTING  CONTRACTIONS.—  SECTION  1. 

249.  The  contractions  which  follow  have  been  arranged 
in  classes,  as  far  as  possible,  for  convenience  in  learning. 
Thus,  all  words  with  a  similar  ending  have  been  grouped 
together,  as  N^s»  perspective.  *\    productive,  etc. 

250.  As    already   stated    (par.    199),   words    ending  in 
-action,  -ection,  etc.,  are  contracted  by  omitting  the  *;  and 
adding    the    hook    -tion  to    the    preceding    stroke;   thus, 

Ni      abstraction. 

251.  "Words   ending   in    -active,    -ective,    etc.,    are    con- 
tracted by  omitting  the  k  and  t,  and  adding  the  hook  v 
to    the  preceding   stroke  ;    thus,    \      abstractive.      In   a 

few  words  the  t  only  is  omitted,  as  ~  '  executive.  It  will 
be  seen  that,  as  a  rule,  the  consonants  forming  the  con- 
traction occupy  the  position,  with  regard  to  the  line, 
they  would  occupy  if  the  word  were  written  in  full  ;  thus, 
antagonist,  ^__  (^—  <j>)  indignation. 


252.    When  «V  follows    mn,    it    may   be  written   thus, 
l~   administrate,  /^  remonstrate. 

CONTRACTIONS.  —ARRANGED   FOB  LEARNING. 

Words  marked  (*)  are  written  above  the  line. 


Perspective 
productive  "N 
prospective 
obstructive 


objective 


subjective       7 


instructive 
destructive 
respective 
respectively 


a 


168                       Reporting  ( 

Contractions. 

irrespective     X^ 

efficient-cy-ly    \^J 

retrospective  /«Si 

inefticient-cy-ly    ""V^ 

defective    u—s 

suiBcient-cy-ly    ^—^ 

executive*  

insuflicient-cy-ly  ^~t^_J 

prerogative  *V 

observation  ""V^ 

abstraction     si 

preservation  CS8X 

obstruction      »| 

constitution-al-ly  J 

subjection    ^ 

unconstitutionally     g 

construction  \j 

professional     N 

jurisdiction     °f 

cross-examine-d     (  *  c-0- 

u  ^ 

cross-examination  ) 

jurisprudence    </^ 

1 

prejudice-cial      > 

degeneration     ) 

substantial     y 

regeneration  ^ 

unsubstantial       ~^_^ 

description    \,  — 

controversy-sial    J 

generalization  </ 

commercial* 

organize-d  "X-, 

financial     V>  

organization      ~X-  « 

circumstance  <f 

imperfect-ion    ''~<\> 

circumstantial    i^gJ 

indignaSon  — 

passenger      y 

inscribe-d* 

transcribe         J—  v 

inscription*    9~^. 

transcription  o  —  \. 

insignificance*  ^-^ 

transmission    J-^ 

insignificant*  . 

transubstantiation  1 

signification*  ...... 

proficiency-ly    "Nr^ 

inspect-ed-tion  ^x 

deficienr_    L-J 

uj 

insubordinate-tion  >~N 

Reporting  Contractions.  169 

Exercise  81. 

To  produce  a  modern  newspaper  requires  very  great  powers 
of  organization,  observation,  description,  and  generalization,  if 
it  is  to  be  productive  of  that  measure  of  commercial  and  finan- 
cial success  which  |  those  who  organize  and  finance  it  natur- 
ally expect  it  to  be,  and  which  is,  so  to  speak,  the  objective  to 
be  kept  constantly  in  view  by  the  management  or  executive,  j 
Indeed,  merely  subjective  notions  must  be  kept  in  complete  sub- 
jection, and  it  should  be  the  prerogative  of  the  executive  to  in- 
sist upon  this.  It  is  not  sufficient,  therefore,  for  the  |  editor  or 
manager  to  be  proficient  {^professional  skill ;  he  must  not  be 
deficient,  defective,  or  in  any  way  imperfect  in  the  power  of 
governing  those  subject  to  him.  Any  |  imperfection  or  deficiency 
in  this  respect  would  render  impossible  the  preservation  of  dis- 
cipline and  the  prompt  removal  of  an  inefficient  or  insubordinate 
member  of  the  staff,  whose  influence,  though  insignificant  \  in 
itself  and  insufficient  to  do  much  harm,  might  yet  be  sufficient  to 
mar  the  efficiency  of  others  and  to  incite  them  to  insubordination. 
Degeneration  among  officials  is  not  unfrequently  |  the  result  of 
an  act,  the  signification  of  which  has  been  entirely  mistaken,  and 
the  apparent  insignificance  of  which  has  led  to  its  total  neglect. 
Regeneration  in  such  circumstances  is  |  always  more  difficult 
than  construction  or  reconstruction.  One  feels  indignant,  and 
there  is  reason  for  the  indignation,  when  one  considers  that  a 
periodical  inspection,  with,  perhaps,  a  circumstantial  cross- 
examination,  |  would  have  discovered  the  obstructive  person 
whose  actions  have  led  to  obstruction  by  others  and  the  intro- 
duction of  a  possibly  destructive  misunderstanding.  Retrospec- 
tive wisdom,  however,  is  much  more  common  than  |  prospec- 
tive or  perspective  wisdom.  It  is  interesting  and  instructive 
to  notice  how  many  people  are  wise  after  the  event,  and  what 
genius  is  sometimes  displayed  on  retrospective  plans.  .These 
statements  |  may  appear  controversial,  but  they  are  not  so  in 
reality;  they  are  intended  to  show  that  while  the  literary  side  of 
the  newspaper  must  have  adequate  attention,  so  that  nothing  | 
shall  be  transcribed  and  printed,  the  transcription  and  printing 
of  which  would  be  prejudicial  to  the  interests  which  the  paper 


170  Reporting  Contractions. 

Exercise  81  (continued). 

represents,  yet,  at  the  same  time,  commercial  and  financial  con- 
siderations |  must  not  be  considered  mere  abstractions,  since,  if 
there  is  not  a  substantial  return  in  these  respects,  the  production 
of  the  paper  must  soon  cease.  The  newspaper  should  not  be  | 
simply  a  medium  for  the  transmission  of  commercial,  financial, 
and  professional  news,  however  circumstantial  the  respective 
accounts  may  be.  That  would  be  au  insignificant  part  to 
play,  restricting  the  high  |  ends  for  which  the  journal  was 
established.  Such  a  restriction  would  mean  a  degeneration  of 
the  influence  of  the  press,  as  a  very  brief  retrospection  would 
show.  No,,  the  newspaper  |  must  be  instructive;  it  must  edu- 
cate public  opinion  on  all  questions  affecting  the  constitution;  it 
must  condemn  any  unconstitutional  organization  which  might 
be  prejudicial  to  the  peace  of  the  state,  |  and  it  must  express 
indignation  at  any  attempt  toward  the  restriction  of  the  consti- 
tutional privileges  of  the  people.  Questions  of  jurisdiction, 
jurisprudence,  controversy  on  various  subjects,  the  rights  of 
passengers,  \  and  similar  topics  must  respectively  be  treated, 
irrespective  of  all  personal  prejudice.  Doctrines  of  religion, 
however,  such  as  transubstantiation,  are  not  always  desirable 
subjectsforcora/rot'ersy,  as  the  result  may  |  be  illusive  or  unsub- 
stantial. Asa  final  observation,  correspondents  should  inscribe 
their  names  and  addresses  on  their  communications,  and  the 
inscription  should  be  readilyread  by  those  who  inspect  it.  |  (570) 


Reporting  Contractions. 


171 


REPORTING    CONTRACTIONS— SECTION   2. 


ARRANGED    FOR    LEARNING. 


Archbishop    < 


Calvinism 
ecclesiastic-al 
episcopal-ian 
evangelical 

Methodism*      

nonconformist        ^ 
nonconformity       V_ 
Presbyterian-ism    <Sy« 
benevolen* 


celestial  C* 
covenant      V^ 
dignig-fied  L 
example*     T^. 
unexampled* 
henceforth 
holiness 


1 


metropolitan 
misdemeanour 
orthodox-y    ^\ 
philanthropy-ic  V/° 
philanthropist 
resignation 
resurrection 
selfish-ness     J 
unselfish-ness  ~^f 
tabernacle        L 
thanksgiving    (j_ 
cabinet     \ 
capable      \ 
incapable  ^      \ 
Captain*       JH^ 
lieutenancy  f) 
Lieutenant- Col.   /" 


non-commis-   I 
sioned  officer  f 


melancholy 

U  K. 


\  majesty 


/ 


172  Reporting 

plenipotentiary   \ 
administrator   \~y 
administratrix  l-^   ^ 
executor  — S 
executrix   — Q-° 
demonstrate   J-T» 
remonstrate  /^ 
ministry       ] 

mortgage-d*  

arbitration     •] 
plaintiff   % 
defendant    I 
tribunal    L 
appointment*  J_^L 
disappointment  1 


Contractions. 


entertainment     i_, 
contentment  U> 
January  £_, 
February 
September 
November 
December   \~^ 
discliarge-d    Jo 
displeasure      | 
dissimilar  cr^ 
distinguish-ed 
extinguish-ed 
relinquish-ed 


Exercise  82. 

Ecclesiastical  matters  cannot  be  ignored  in  a  newspaper. 
Mention  must  be  made,  for  example,  of  the  death  of  an  Episco- 
palian dignitary,  such  as  an  archbishop,  and  the  claims  to  the  | 
vacant  appointment  of  a  dignified  ecclesiastic,  distinguished  for 
his  benevolence,  benignity,  and  dignify,  and  likely,  therefore,  to 
dignify  the  office  and  to  act  in  a  benignant  manner,  are  some- 
times urged.  |  Controversial  subjects,  however,  such  as  the 
differences  between  Episcopalian,  Presbyterian,  Baptist,  and 
other  Nonconformist  or  Evangelical  denominations,  on  such 
points  as  baptism,  transubstantiation,  the  atonement,  the  resur- 
rection of  the  body,  |  regeneration  and  the  best  means  for  its 
attainment,  what  is  or  is  not  antagonistic  to  orthodoxy  and 
holiness,  the  transmission  of  sin,  national  degeneration,  the 
nature  of  the  celestial  spirits,  |  and  similar  subjects  are  usually 


Reporting  Contractions.  173 

Exercise   88  (continued). 

avoided  in  newspapers,  for  the  sufficient  reason  that  they  would 
not  be  treated  with  efficiency.  It  would  be  melancholy  to  see 
Presbyterianism  or  Calvinism,  Methodism,  \  or  various  forms 
of  Nonconformity,  because  in  certain  respects  dissimilar,  en- 
gaged in  newspapei*  warfare.  Philanthropy  would  not  be 
encouraged  by  it  and  philanthropic  work  would  certainly  suffer 
if  it  were  |  not  altogether  extinguished.  Many  an  unselfish 
philanthropistwould  remonstrate  and  express  \i\sdisappointment 
and  displeasure  at  such  selfish  conduct,  which  he  would  regard  as 
almost  a  misdemeanor,  and  to  demonstrate  \  bis  dissatisfaction 
he  might  insist  upon  a  resignation  from  many  charitable  com- 
mittees, and  henceforth  refuse  to  discharge,  or  relinquish  duties 
which  had  previously  given  him  much  satisfaction  and  content- 
ment. The  |  London  newspaper  press  invariably  notices  a  high- 
class  entertainment,  or  a  trial  in  which  either  the  plaintiff  or  de- 
fendant is  a  well-known  member  of  society.  Military  appoint- 
ments also  receive  |  a  full  share  of  attention,  especially  in  the  case 
of  a  non-commissioned  officer  being  promoted  to  a  lieutenancy,  or 
receiving  a  decoration  at  the  hands  of  the  lieutertant-colonel  or  | 
captain  of  his  regiment,  for  conspicuous  or  unexampled  bravery. 
The  movements  of  rulers,  whether  of  His  Majesty  the  King,  or 
the  President,  and  of  the  members  of  the  Ministry  or  |  Cabinet, 
and  the  plenipotentiaries  abroad,  are  notified  daily  in  the  metro- 
politan press.  It  is  sometimes  asserted  that  newspaper  reporters 
seem  to  have  entered  into  an  organized  covenant  not  to  report,  | 
or  but  inefficiently  to  notice  services  and  sermons.  But  surely  the 
religious  press  is  capable  of  dealing  with  these,  and  not  incapable 
of  recording  a  thanksgiving  service  or  sermon  at  |  a  tabernacle! 
The  legal  reports  include  notices  of  cases  involving  the  appoint- 
ment of  an  administrator  or  administratrix;  settlements  by 
arbitration  ;  actions  brought  by  an  executor  or  executrix  for  the 
recovery  |  of  debts  owing  to  the  estate  ;  mortgage  disputes,  and- 
appeals  to  the  highest  tribunal  in  the  land.  The  circulation  of 
some  newspapers  varies  considerably  at  times,  and  may  be 
larger  |  in  January  and  February  than  in  September,  November, 
or  December.  (460) 


Reporting  Contractions 


REPORTING     CONTRACTIONS— SECTION    3. 


ARRANGED    FOR    LEARNING. 


Advertise-d-ment     J 
agriculture-al* 
antagonist-ic-ism*  .^T. 
applicabjfity  \  _ 
aristocratic-acy    ^ 
assembly"*1  )•— 
esquire        ) 
astonish-ed-ment*  *•. 


certificate 
contingency 
democra^J. 
enthusiasm-ast-astic    A 
exchequer   ~f 
expenditure  —  S> 
expensive     S> 
extemporaneous    ~[U 
extraordinary         L 
extravagant-ance      \ 
familiar-ity 
friendship     T> 
impregnable  /^ 


imperturbable  *"* 
inconsiderate      \, 
indefatigable     S 
indenture  -  —  - 
independent-ce*  .. 
indescribable 
indispensably 
indiscriminate 
individual*      __  .. 
inform-ed 
informer 
intelligence 
intelligent  ~ 
intelligible 
intemperance 
investment 
journalism     /- 
magneticsm*    C 
manufacture-d 
manufacturer 
mathematic-s-al      ( 


V 


Reporting  Contractions. 


175 


mathematician 

mechanic-al    <—^> 

obscurity  % — 

original         /J 

perpendicular  \/\ 

perpetual-ly 

preliminary 

proportion-ed 

proportionate-ly 

recognizance 

repugnant-ce 


responsible-ility 
revenue  /\. 
sensibly 
singular 
subservient 
substitute    >p 
superscribe-d     a — 
superscription  °V-3 

suspect-ed  )       ^ 
suspicious  )       °x 

unquestionable-y         »f 
wonderful-ly 


Exercise  83. 

It  may  appear  singular  and  even  extraordinary  to  the  indi- 
vidual unacquainted  with  jvurnalism,  but  it  is  unquestionably 
true  that  the  circulation  of  a  newspaper  depends  almost  as  much 
upon  the  |  advertisements  it  obtains  as  upon  the  intelligence  it 
gives.  On  the  other  hand,  the  advertisements  are  the  result  of 
good  circulation.  In  fact,  they  are  indispensable  to  each  other, 
and  |  it  may  be  said  that  each  is  subservient  to  the  other.  The 
expenditure  must,  of  course,  be  proportionate  to  the  revenue,  and 
those  responsible  for  the  commercial  department  are  sensible  \ 
that  a  perpetual  watch  must  be  kept  upon  this,  to  prevent  ex- 
travagance and  an  indiscriminate  or  unnecessary  outlay  of  any 
kind,  or  the  paper,  instead  of  being  a  profitable  investment,  \ 
would  become  a  source  of  pecuniary  loss.  Such  a  contingency 
must  be  avoided  by  all  possible  means.  It  is  familiar  knowl- 
edge toeveryone  acquainted  with  newspapers  that  many  original 
articles  |  appear  which  are  the  work  of  authors  who  have,  in 
many  instances,  a  wonderful  familiarity  with  their  subjects. 
Though  not  aristocratic  in  the  ordinary  sense,  they  belong  to 
the  aristocracy  \  of  letters,  and  their  superscription  is  sufficient 
guarantee  that  the  articles  are  above  suspicion.  The  influence 
of  these  men  is  quite  magnetic,  and  even  their  extemporaneous 
utterances  frequently  excite  the  |  astonishment  and  enthusiasm 


176  Reporting  Contractions. 


Exercise  83  (continued). 

of  the  most  intelligent  assemblies;  they  are  more  intelligible  and 
more  generally  applicable  to  every-day  circumstances  than  the 
labored  harangues  of  less  gifted  speakers.  It  is  not  |  easy  to 
find  substitutes  for  men  of  such  distinguished  ability.  Familiar- 
ity with  a  subject,  however,  only  conies  from  long  preliminary 
training  and  laborious  study,  and  eminent  writers,  no  matter 
how  |  enthusiastic  they  may  be  in  the  pursuit  of  knowledge,  and 
however  repugnant  to  the  idea  of  associating  learning  with  mere 
trade,  have  yet  sufficient  commercial  instinct  to  require  payment 
in  |  proportion  to  the  value  of  their  work,  and  they  decline  to 
superscribe  an  article  without  the  prospect  of  payment.  They 
unquestionably  impress  their  independence  upon  their  work,  and 
no  intelligent  \  individual  will  assert  that  payment  for  such  ser- 
vices is  an  extravagant  expenditure.  Notwithstanding  the  im- 
provements made  by  manufacturers  of  printing  presses,  both  m 
the  mechanical  construction  of  the  machines  themselves  |  and  in 
their  manufacture,  the  process  of  printing  a  newspaper  is  an 
expensive  one.  A  mathematician  would  probably  be  able  to 
inform  us  with  mathematical  exactitude  what  would  be  the  | 
eost  of  producing  a  single  issue,  but  he  would  have  to  include 
the  expenditure  incurred  in  advertising  the  paper  in  all  places 
where  men  assemble  together,  whether  for  friendship  or  |  busi- 
ness; the  expense  of  obtaining  intelligence  on  such  varied  topics 
as  agriculture  and  agricultural  implements ;  mathematics;  mag- 
netism; Exchequer  Bills;  indentures;  intemperance  and  its 
cure;  democracy  and  the  democratic  party ;  the  |  extraordinary 
proportions  of  a  leaning  tower  which  inclines  greatly  from  the 
perpendicular;  and  the  almost  indescribable  antagonism  which 
is  constantly  displayed  by  persons  of  an  antagonistic  nature,  or 
of  extreme  |  sensibility,  conducing  to  inconsiderate  or  suspicious 
actions,  better  left  to  sink  into  obscurity.  The  result  of  such  an 
inquiry  would  probably  astonish  the  inquirer,  who  would  no 
longer  be  astonished  \  that  such  indefatigable  efforts  are  made 
by  newspaper  agents  to  increase  the  number  of  their  subscribers 
and  to  induce  them  to  advertise  as  well  as  subscribe.  The  agent 
is  sometimes  |  suspected  of  being  an  informer,  and  in  spite  of 
his  repugnance  he  has  to  preserve  an  imperturbable  good  humor 
which  must  be  almost  impregnable.  Last  December  a  manufac- 
turer was  summoned  |  for  assaulting  a  mechanic,  and  though 
he  produced  a  certificate  as  to  character,  the  magistrate,  William 
Brown,  Esq.,  bound  him  over  in  his  own  recognizances  to 
appear  when  called  upon.  |  (600) 


Abs.-dig.   LIST  OF  CONTRACTED  WORDS.      17? 
ARRANGED   ALPHABETICALLY. 

The  following  list  contains  all  the  Contracted  Words 
employed  in  the  Corresponding  and  Reporting  Styles  : — 


Abstraction     »i 

acknowledge-d 

administrator 

administratrix 

advertise-d-ment  J 

agriculture-al  .H^r. 

altogether  _!^_. 

antagoijist-ic-isni  J^ 
anything   ±±T 
applicable-ility  ^  — 
appointment  _^.. 
arbitration     «). 
architect-ure-al     *-i 
aristocratic-acy  "^ 
archbishop    -^L 
assemble-  d-y  K 
astonish-ed-ment  ..]== 
at^ment  L 


baptize-d-st-sm 
benevolent-ce    ' 
benig^    V_~ 
better  than    Ni 
cabinet  ~N 
Calvinism  ^~V 
capable      \ 
captain  ZH 
catholic  ~( 
celestial  f* 


^\ 


certificate   o\_ 
character  !LH!! 
characteristic 
circumstance  <f 
circumstantial  t_^ 

commercial  

constitution-al-ly  J 
construction  \j 
contentment  LD 
contingency    L^ 
controversy-sial   3 
covenant      V^ 

cross-examine-d     "^ 
ci-oss-examination  ) 

danger    I 
dangerous      7 
December  J-> 

defective   t—a 
defendant    I 
deficient-cy    L-^ 
degeneration    J 
democra^  V-+ — 
demonstrate    UB 
description    L— 
destruction    <| 
destructive          <| 
difficulty  _[.__. 
dignig-fied    L 


178 


List  of  Contracted  Words. 


dis.-inf. 


disappointment    <L-, 

extravagant-ance      \ 

discharge-d  f 

familiar-ity  ^^^-^ 

disinterested-ness    kp 

February   ^^ 

displeasure      \ 

financial  V^_- 

dissimilar    cK 

friendship      J 

distinguish-ed    r" 

generalization  ,/ 

doctrine    \ 

govern-ed-ment      ^ 

domestic      U»— 

henceforth   <f^^~ 

ecclesiastic-al       j 

holiness  <^~" 

eflicient-cy-ly  ^  —  J 

immediate  ^-^ 

enlarge-d     r  *+* 

immediately  s-~S~ 

entertainment    *~l» 

imperfect-ion  ^^» 

enthusiasm-ast-astic     \ 

impossible     ^ 

episcopal-ian  \— 

impracticable  I!T^i. 

especial-ly    I 

impregnable   '~*N  — 

esquire    1— 

imperturbable  -^v^ 

essential-ly    \_, 

improbable-bly-ility 

establish-ed-ment    ^ 

incapable 

evangelical  ^-^ 

inconsiderate      U 

everything  ^-^^ 

inconsistent     ^ 

example  

inconsistency     ^ 

exchequer     / 

indefatigable  ^ 

executive  

indenture    ~~ 

executor   W 

independent-ce    ^^ 

executrix  —  o_o 

indescribable  ""^"X 

expect-ed  "~*^ 

indigna&n  — 

expenditure    ~^> 

indiscriminate  ^1— 

expensive       «> 

indispensabl^    "% 

extemporaneous  ~t-* 

individual  J^:.. 

extinguish-ed  ~t^ 

inefficient-cy-ly  ^^-^ 

extraordinary  ~~\ 

influence  ._±L 

inf.-obj.             List  of  Contracted  Words. 

influenced  .  !^... 

magnet-?0     '  

influential  ^&L 

majesty      / 

inform-ed  "~V. 

manufacture-  d     ^ 

informer  'fc"Ve-» 

manufacturer   "  ^V. 

information  _±L 

manuscript  ^-^ 

inscribe-d  ^H~. 

mathematic-s-al      ^ 

inscription    9~.... 

mathematician     S 

insignificance  

u 

mechanic-al  /~x^ 

insignificant  ^L 

melancholy  ^-/" 

inspect-ed-tion  ^\ 

messenger      / 

instruction   U 

Methodism  

instructive  I 

metropolitan  ~/\ 

insubordinate-tion  ^ 

ministry    ^ 

insufficient-cy-ly      >-^ 

misdemeanour       | 

intelligence  J 

mistake  ^T.. 

intelligent  "? 

mistaken  ^Z. 

intelligible   7 

more  than  

intemperance   ^"Us 

mortgage-d  ^IZ 

interest-ed  "f    *f 

natural-ly  ...»...- 

investment  ^"V> 

^—<— 
neglect-ed      

irregular  "^  — 

never  >~"V 

irrespective  ~\^ 

nevertheless  ^ 

January    L^ 

next    ^" 

journalism    J-~- 

non-commis-     ^ 

jurisdiction  <^ 

sioned  officer   ^°^^ 

jurisprudence  <<^ 

nonconformist     ^ 

kingdom  Z!^ 

nonconformity     V. 

knowledge    ^1 

nothing  -^^ 

lieutenancy  f] 

notwithstanding    ^f* 

lieutenant-col.    f~** 

November  "~V- 

magazine  ^  — 

object   S 

179 


180 


List  of  Contracted  Words. 


obj.-res. 


objection    N 
objective  S 
obscurity     V- 
observation   V 
obstruction  *% 
obstructive  /  "^ 
organize-d  "\-, 
organization  ~^-e 
original    "/ 
orthodox-y    'A 
Parliament-ary  ° 
passenger    \    . 
peculiar-ity     \  _ 
perform-  ed    \A- 
performs-ance 
performer  \A 
perpendicular 
perpetual-ly  X 
perspective 
philanthropy-ic 
philanthropist 
phonographer  V 
phonographic  V^^ 
plaintiff    ^> 
plenipotentiary 
practice-d-cal-ly 
practicable   ^—  t 
prejudice-cial 
preliminary 
prerogative 
Presbyterian-ism  % 


preservation  *V 
probable-bly-ility  \ 
productive  ^ 
professional  N 
proficient-cy-ly 
proportion-ed  * 
proportionate-ly 
prospect  N^ 
prospective    "N^ 
public-sh-ed  \ 
publication  \ 
rather  ^^ 
rather  than  ,/" 
recognizance  /    ^ 
reform-ed  /V. 
reformation  /V. 
reformer  /^—^ 
regeneration    ^t 
regular  / 
relinquish-ed  ^O 
remarkable-ly  e~ts 
remonstrate  /^ 
represent-ed  /\ 
representation  /^> 
representative  /\> 
republic  /\^ 
republican 
repugnant-ce 
resignation   S 
respect-ed   A, 
respective  /\ 


res.-yes. 

respectively 
responsible-ility    ^ 
resurrection  / 
retrospective       \^ 
revenue  /^- 
reverend  /V. 
satisfaction   £ 
satisfactory    £* 
selfish-ness    -^ 
sensibility  ^ 
September    ^ 

{^^ 

signification  ...3L. 
singular  <t> — 
something 
stranger 
subject  S 
subjection  ^ 
subjective       S 
subscribe    V- 
subscription   V° 
subsei*vient   "S^ 
substantial-ly   N> 
substitute    "Sp 
sufficient-cy-ly 
superscribe-d  V- 
superscription  'V 
surprise  ._?... 

suspect-ed"^  j 
suspicious  )    \ 

tabernacle     L 
temperance   l~* 


List  of  Contracted  Words. 


181 


thankful 
thanksgiving 

together    > — 
• 
transcribe   *• 

transcript  A- 
transcription 
transfer    1 
transgress   3-° 
transgression   3-^ 
transmission   ]~^> 
transubstantiation 
tribunal  1 

unanimity  or    s*-~- 
unanimous 

uh  constitution  al-ly 
understand  "f 
understood  *f 
unexampled  HZ^l 
unexpected-ly 
uniform-ity-ly 
uninfluential 
uninteresting       f 
unquestkmable-y 
unsatisfactory   "~J 
unselfish-ness    ~^f 
unsubstantial 
whatever   v. 
whenever  _<u. — 
wonderful-ly 
writer    s^ 
yesterday    <M 


Advanced  Phraseography .  253*256 


CHAPTER  XXXII. 

ADVANCED   PHRASEOGRAPHY.— SECTION  1. 

253.  The  student  has  already  been  introduced  to  simple 
phraseography  in  Chapter  XXIV.,  and,  if  he  has  followed 
the  instructions  there  given,  he  will  have  acquired  a  knowl- 
edge of  many  useful  phraseograms.     He  may  now,  there- 
fore, proceed  with  the  study  of  more  advanced  phrasing, 
and  in  doing  so  it  will  be  better  for  him  to  master  the  prin- 
ciples employed  in  the  construction  of  the  phraseograms, 
rather  than  attempt  to  commit  the  lists  to 'memory.     In- 
deed, the  following  lists  are  merely  suggestive  of  hundreds 
of  similar  phrases  which  may  be  written  in  accordance  with 
the  principles  here  given.    Special  attention  will,  of  course, 
be  paid  to  those  phrases  which  will  be  specially  useful  to 
the  student. 

254.  The  halving  principle  is  employed  in  phraseogra- 
phy to  express  the  addition  of  not  or  it;  thus,  ~^~  I  will, 
_^._  /  will  not ;  ~-^  you  are,    «/?    you  are  not ;    \^_     if, 
vo  if  it  is;   ^-^     if  it  ~be;  ^^  if  ifbe  not. 

255.  The  double-length  principle  is  similarly  employed 
to  express   the    addition    of   there   or   their;   thus,    \    I 
think,      [      I  think   there   is;  _^_  and   in,  _C±^f  and  in 
their  opinion. 

256.  The  large  initial   circle   is   prefixed   to    logograms 
as   a  contraction  for  as  we;   thus,    ^  as   we  think.     The 
large   circle   is  also  used  initially  to  express  the  word  as 
and  the  s  with  which  a  following  word  may  commence  ; 
thus,   c^"*<*      as  soon  as  possible;  and  medially  and  finally 


. 257~26i  Advanced  Phraseography.  183 

to  represent  the  two  s's  in  such  phrases  as  XD  in  th^ 
subject,  (3  this  is. 

257.  The  hook  n  is  frequently  employed  in  phrases  to 
express  than;  thus,  s^  rather  than,  *^>  sooner  than, 
f*^-*^  longer  than. 

258:  The  letter  r  is  omitted  in  a  number  of  phrases  of 
frequent  occurrence  ;  as  ^_  in  (r)egard  (to),  ^~\  in 
(r)espect  (to).  Other  consonants  are  sometimes  omitted, 
especially  when  the  last  consonant  of  the  first  word  is 
the  same  as  the  first  consonant  of  the  next  ;  as  in 
._^  Pri(rri)e  Minister,  ..J?Z:±.  in  the  same  (m)anner. 

259.  Unimportant  words,   such   as  the,   of,  or,  etc.,  may 
be  omitted  from    many  phraseograms.      Such    words   are 
generally  necessary  to  the  sense  of  the  phrase,  and  where 
they   must   be    read  they   need    not   be   written,  if  their 
omission    renders    the    phraseogram    more    facile  ;    thus, 
^a_  for  (the)  sake  (of),   ^^  in   (the)   way    (of),      v»    two 
(or)  three,   __P._  side  by  side,  Vo     face  to  face. 

260.  A    large  number  of   phrases    are   abbreviated   by 
intersection,  that  is,  the  writing  of  some  prominent  con- 
sonant in  the  phrase   through  a  preceding   or  following 
stroke.     This  principle  is  especially    applicable   to   com- 
mon  business  phrases  and  to  titles.      For  example,    [    (t) 
is  used   to   represent  among   others    the    word   attention, 
and    |    (d)  the  word   department ;   thus,    "Vf"  early  atten- 
tion,    "H^    special  attention,  /^4.    life  department,  f*    silk 
department. 

261.  In  the  following  lists  the  phraseograms  have  been 
arranged,   as  far  as  possible,  in  classes,   according  to  the 
principles    upon    which    they    have    been    formed.     The 
exercises  which  follow   should   be  written  from  dictation 
until  they  can  be  taken  down  with  ease  and  rapidity : — 


184 


Advanced  Phraseography. 
PHRASES  (HALVING  PRINCIPLE). 


\ 


I  am 

•>'-&-'    you  must  not 

I  am  not 

n~      you  should  not 

I  can 

-v^  you  should  not  be 

I  cannot 

"-x      you  were 

I  cannot  be 

"^      you  were  not 

I  cannot  do 

</~     you  will 

(  I  cannot  say 
(  I  cannot  see 

I  had 

(  I  had  not 
C  I  do  not 

I  did  not 
I  hope  you  will 
'  I  hope  you  will  not 

rf      you  will  not 
^_      as  if 
^^"...^s,  if  it  were 
...y...    by  which 
—  -\—    by  which  it  was 
—V-    if  it  does 
Vo      if  it  is 

I  may  be 

^£L,     if  it  is  not 

I  may  not  be 

°\,^     in  which  it  has  appeared 

I  shall  not 

<^      of  which  it  has  been 

I  shall  not  be 
I  trust 

^\    of  which  it  must  be 
i-       at  any  rate 

I  trust  not 

fcS      at  all  events 

I  was 

l2     at  all  times 

I  was  not 

.a^>.    at  some  time 

you  can 
you  cannot 

..l^C^.at  the  same  time 
^TT  —  •>  for  some  time 

you  may 

^W—s  from  time  to  time 

you  may  not 

Advanced  Phraseography.  185 


Exercise  84. 

My-dear-Sir: — For-some-time  past  I-have-been  unable  to- 
•write  to-you  as  I-have  desired  and-as  I-promised  you  when  you- 
-were  here.  I-hope-  |  you-will-not-be  annoyed  at-my  apparent 
neglect.  You-should-not-be,  and-I-am-sure  you-will-not-be 
when  you-are  aware  (of  the)  reason  for-my  |  silence.  I-have-no- 
-doubt  you-will-remember  that  I-was-not  well  previous  to-your 
visit,  but  I-ara-sorry  to-tell-you  I-have-been  under-the  care  |  of 
Dr.  Brown  ever-since-the  day  you  left.  Indeed,  you-were-not 

fone  more-than  an  hour  when  I-had  to-send  for-the  physician, 
•do-not-know  |  what  caused  my  illness;  I-cannot-say  that  I-am 
aware  of  anything  to-which-it-mav-be  due.  I-know  of  nothing  to- 
-which-it-can-be  traced.  At-  |  all-events,  it-has-been  very  severe, 
and,  for-some-time,  my  recovery  was  considered  hopeless.  Of- 
-course,  I-am-not  yet  6ut-of-the  wood,  and  I-must-not  |  boast, 
but  I-think  I-am  fairly  on-the  road  to  complete  recovery.  You- 
-will-be-sorry  to-learn  that  I-am-not  yet  strong  enough  to-leave 
my  room,  |  but-you-must-not  suppose  that  I-am  in  danger.  I- 
-trust  I-sliall-be-able-to-make  an  effort  to  visit  you  some-time 
during-the  coming  month.  At-  |  any-rate,  I-am  hoping  so.  I- 
-have  heard  that-you-were  injured  slightly  in-the  railway  acci- 
dent last  Friday.  Is-this-true  ?  I-trust-not.  If-it-is,  you-  |  are-not 
likely  to  be  improved  by-my-letter.  If-it-is-not,  you-will  pardon 
my  mentioning  the  report.  In-any-case,  you-might  send  me 
word,and-if-  I  you-cansparethetime,perhapsyou-willcomeover 
on-Monday.  If-you-cannot  arrange  this,  please  inform  me  from- 
-time-to-time  how  you-are  getting  on  with-  |  the  new  business, to 
-which-it-appears  you-are  devoting  yourself.  If-it-be  as  succes- 
ful  as  you-were  inclined-to-think  you -will-be  veryfortunate,and- 
-if-it-  1  be-not  quite  so  profitable  as  you  hoped,  it-will  still  have 
proved  an  interesting  experiment.  "  At-all-events,  it-was  well 
worthatrial.  At-the-same-time,you-  |  should-notwork  toohard. 
If-you  do  you-must-not  be  surprised  -to-find  your  health  giving 
way.  I-have-no-doubt  (of  the)  ultimate  success  of-your  patent,  | 
and-if-it-were  necessary,  I-could  arrange  to  invest  a  considerable 
amount  in-the  business.  I-cannot-do  anything  in-the-matter  (of 
the)  shares  you  spoke  about  until  |  I-have-seen  you  again.  I- 
-cannot-see  that-there-is  any  hurry  about-the  affair.  If-it-does 
happen  that-the  shares  are  all  taken-up  before  I-make  |  applica- 
tion I-shall  not  mind  very-much.  I-am-trusting,  however,  that- 
-you-will-be-able-to  pay  me  a  visit  on-Monday  and  explain  mat- 
ters. Yours  truly,  THOMAS  MAKIN.  |  (510) 


186 


Advanced  Phraseography. 


ADVANCED    PHRASEOGRAPHY— SECTION  2 


PHBASES    (DOUBLE-LENGTH   AND   "Sw.") 


\ 


I  have 

I  have  their 

I  think 

I  think  there  will  be 

I  see 

I  see  there  is 

I  wish 

I  wish  there  were 

I  am  sure 

I  am  sure  there  is 

I  know 

I  know  there  is  (or  has) 

know  there  is  not 
v^ — '  ^  I  know  there  will  be 
eX\^  we  have  their 
^*~X  before  there  (or  their) 
V.        for  there 
V^f °r  their  own 
v^«   for  their  sake 
>    from  their 


if  there 

if  there  is 
V_o    if  there  is  to  be 

in  their 

...on  their  opinion 

!^rr^77.in  their  case 
^TTTlbin  their  statement 
(        though  there  is 

<S-- whenever  there  (or  their\ 

frf..    as  soon  as 

as  soon  as  possible 
as  soon  as  we  can 
\      as  soon  as  they 
6      on  this  subject 
.?T-_    as  we  can 
.??...    as  we  cannot 
^_      as  we  have 
-Q-...^.as  well  as  can  be 
°.!.\  as  well  as  possible 
,S£.    as  well  as  usual 


Advanced  Phraseography.  187 


Exercise  85. 

I-know-there-has-been  a  great-deal  said,  as-well-as  written, 
aoout-the  interest  attaching  to-the  study  of  phrase  and  fable,  but 
I-know-there-has-not-  |  been  sufficient  said,  in-view  (of  the)  im- 
portance  (of  the)  matter,  and-I-know-there- will-be  a  great-deal- 
-raore  both  said  and  written  before-the  subject  is  exhausted.  I 
Whenever-there-is  a  subject  of  interest  to-the  general  reader,  and 
.  a  desire  expressed  for  information  upon-it,  there-will-be-found 
someone  ready  and  willing  to  obtain  the  |  necessary  knowl- 
edge and  impart  it  to-others.  As-we-have-seen,  too,  the  work 
is  generally  executed  as-well-as-possible,  that-is,  as-well-as-it- 
-can-be,and-  |  the  results  made  knownas-soon-as-possible.  This- 
-is  a  great  convenience  to-most  of  us,  as-we-have-not  time  to 
devote  to  research  in-these-subjects.  I-  |  think-there-is  room, 
indeed,  I-am-sure-there-is  room  for-something-more  on-the-sub- 
ject  I-have-mentioned  before  it-can-be-said  that-the  public  is 
tired  |  of-it.  There-are-some  people,  however,  who  know  very- 
-little(of  the)  origin  and  meaning  of-manypeculiarexpressionsof 
frequent  occurrence.  For-their-sake,  for-their-satisfaction  and- 
|  pleasure,  as-well-as  for-the  educational  advantage  it-would  be 
to-them,  I-wish-there-were-some  means  of  bringing  before-their 
notice  some  (of  the)  books  already  published  |  on-this-subject. 
I-know-there-is  a  difference  of  opinion,  however,  on  almost  all- 
-questions,  and- if -there-be  any  of-my  readers  who  doubt  the 
benefit  to  be  |  derived  from  such  a  study  as  I-have  referred  to, 
and-if-they  assert  that,  in-their-opinion,  it-would-be  a  waste  of- 
-time  as-well-as  money  to  |  procure  such  books,  I-ask-them,  for- 
-their-own-sake  and  for-the-sake-of  others  in-their-position,  who- 
-may  look  at  (the)  matter  from-their  point-(of)-view,  |  to-con- 
sider-the  following- points  as  carefully  and  as-soon-as-possible: 
— How  often  do  we  come  across  such  phrases  as  "  toad  eater," 
"  salted  accounts,  "etc.,  and  though  their  meaning,  |  from-their 
position  in-the  sentence,  may-be  pretty  clear,  should-we  not- 
-have  some  difficulty  in  saying  how  they  came  to-have-their 
present  signification  ?  Have- we  not  all  |  occasionally  read  some 
phrase,  or  heard  some  allusion  which-we  did-not-understand, 
and-have-we  not  sometimes  lost  the  beauty  of  a  passage  through 
our  want  of  knowledge  ?  I-  |  think-there-will-be  few  who-will 
dissent.  If-there-were  no  other  reason,  therefore,  than  this, 
it-should-be  sufficient  to-prove-the  necessity  for-such  a  study 
as  |  I-have  recommended.  But,  as-we-can  readily  see,  these 
phrases  are  interesting  for-their-own-sake,and-in-their-case,  the 
time  devoted  to-study  will-be  well-spent.  |  (480) 


188 


Advanced  Phraseography. 


ADVANCED    PHRASEOGRAPKY— SECTION  3. 

.x^t-     I  am  glad  N3       every  circumstance 

~*\.  I  am  very  glad  ^>        un<jer  the  circumstances 

I  am  certain  that  you  are 

V     I  am  confident 

~*|  I  am  inclined  to  think 
JLJ..     I  will  consider 

....J^^-.I  will  consider  the  matter 

<j        it  is  considered 
\^$  fully  considered 

\     further  considered 
<^^^ 

\  further  consideration 

u 

^~z>v      must  be  considered 

i ' 
<L     shall  be  considered 


—  1 

4 


•*C      shall  be  taken  into 

L)  consideration 

which  will  be  considered 

which  will  be  taken 

into  consideration 

into  consideration 
take  (taken)  into 

v  conuideration 

J          after  due  consideration 

in  consequence  of 

necessary  consequence  of 

I/  on  the  contrary 

y  and  the  contrary 

~=>  in  connection  with 

cf  all  circumstances 


T 


peculiar  circumstances 

^-±D  peculiar  circum- 

6tan<-es  of  the  cas 

\-      I  have  concluded 
we  have  concluded 
that  conclusion 

satisfactory  conclusion 
unsatisfactory  conclusion 

having  regard  to 
with  regard  to 
with  respect  to 
in  relation  to 
"£      with  relation  to 
^~\o    in  reference  to 
t/\o    with  reference  to 

</^*f>      with  reference  to  which 

*""\  in  reply  to 

X^  I  have  received 

^^  we  have  received 

\s^  and  in  this  manner 

L-T_S  and  in  like  manner 

and  in  the  same  manner 

in  such  a  manner  as 


Advanced  Phraseography.  189 

Exercise  86. 

Money  has-been  denned  to  be  desire  capitalized,  and-as-far-as 
J-am-concerned,  I-am-content  to  accept  this  definition.  1-have 
thought  of-it  in-all-raanner-  |  of-ways,  and-I-have  come  to-the 
conclusion,  after  due-consideration  of-every-circumstance  in- 
connection-with  the  subject,  that-the  definition  is  satisfactory. 
1-am-confident  that-if-  |  you-will-consider-the  matter  you-wil'l, 
as  a  necessary-conseqence,  come  to-the-same-conclusion.  In  a 
genuine  inquiry,  the  conclusion  is-not  arrived  at  without  some- 
-coiisideration  of  |  opposite  views.  On-the-contrary,  those  views 
must-be-considered  if-  we-are  to-come  to  a  satisfactory-conclusion 
on-the-subject.  Having-regard,  therefore,  to-the  interesting 
nature  (of  |  the)  question  before  us,  it-will-be  agreed  that-it 
deserves  to  be  fully-considered  and  looked  at  from  every  point- 
-(of)-view.  It  demands  that  everything  that  can-be-  |  said  in- 
-relation-to  it  shall-be-considered,and-that  anything  which-may, 
in-any-way,  help  us  to  an  opinion  shall-be-taken-into-considera- 
tion,  indeed,  must-be-taken-  |  into-consideration.  Limited 
space,  however.forbids  my  enlarging  upon-the  question  in-such- 
-a-manner-as  might  be-done  under  ordinary-circumstances,  so- 
-that,  under-the-circumstances,I-must-be-  |  content  to-leave  out 
some-considerations,  with-regard-to-which  a-great-deal  might 
be-said,  and-in-respect-to  which  there-might,  perhaps,  be  a 
difference  of  opinion.  Let-  |  us-consider  a  few  points,  and-I- 
-shall-be-content  to  leave-thef urther-consideration  (of  the)  ques- 
tion to-the  reader.  A  great  writer,  speaking  with-reference-to- 
-this-subject  |  of-money,  points  out  that  with-regard-to  a  future 
exchange  money  is,  as-it-were,  our  security.  For,  he  says,  it-is- 
-necessary  that-he  who  brings  it  should-  |  be-able-to  get  what-he 
wants.  If-the  reader  will-take-into-consideration  the  full  mean- 
ing (of  the)  last  sentence,  he-will-see  that  "  what-he  wants"  is 
but  |  another-way  of  saying  "what-he  desires."  Again,  with- 
-respect-to  coined  money,  another  authority  declares  that-it -is  a 
kind  of  bill  or  order  payable  at-the  will  (of  |  the)  bearer.  In- 
-like-manner,  still  another  writer  states  that  a  coin  may-be-con- 
sidered  as  a  bill  upon  all-the  tradesmen  in-the  neighborhood. 
That-is,  if  I-have-  |  received  a  coin  for  services  rendered  to 
somebody  else  I-can-have,  in  return,  anything  I-desire  which- 
-is  equal  in  value  to-it.  In-relation-to  this-point,  a  |  fourth 
authority  says  money  is  a  warrant  which  gives-the  bearer  the 
right  to  draw  from  society when-he  desires  services  according-to- 
-the  value  (of  the)  coin.  In-reply-  |  to  similar  questions  in- 
-regard-to-the  nature  of-money  various  other  writers  have 
answeredin-the-same-manner,  so-that  I-have-concluded  that- 
the  definition  referred  to  is  |  tolerablyaccurate,  and-having-re- 
-gard-to-the  evidence  it-cannot-be-said  that  I-have  come  to  an 
unsatisfactory-conclusion.  (50O 


190  Advanced  Phraseography. 

ADVANCED    PHRASEOGRAPHY.— SECTIOX  4. 


J^ 


—a-a    again  and  again 
I L      deeper  and  deeper 
f^°       less  and  less 
f^  [    more  and  more 
more  or  less 
north  and  south 

wrong 

sooner  or  later 
at  the  present  day 
all  the  way 
by  the  way 

over  the  world 
parts  oi  the  world 
what  is  the  matter 
TX       for  the  first  time 
°N>       short  space  of  time 
from  first  to  last 
in  the  first  instance 
in  the  first  place 
3  in  the  second  place 
in  the  third  place 


in  the  last  place 

in  the  next  place 
on  the  one  hand 
on  the  other  hand 
on  the  other  side 
on  the  part  of 
.as  a  matter  of  course 
.as  a  matter  of  fact 
in  fact 

in  point  of  fact 
^ — 1     facts  of  the  case 

fact  of  the  matter 

s 

.  able  to  make 
<^       I  shall  be  glad  to  know 


we  shall  be  glad  to  bear 

do  you  mean  to  say 
vj>      to  a  great  extent 
~~f9     in  a  great  measure 
c/       'one  another 
^\     between  them 

(Omit  hook  n  in  similar  phrases). 

Exercise  87. 

At-the-present-time  great  attention  is  paid  to-the  exploration 
(of  the)  North-and-South  poles  (of  the)  earth  by  explorers  of  all 
nations;  between-thera  they-have  added  |  much  to  geographical 
knowledge,  and-in-a-great-measure  investigators  at-the-present- 
-day  know  as-much  about  these  regions  in-point-of-fact  as-is  of 


Advanced  Phraseography.  191 

scientific  value.  But  |  sooner-or-later  sentiment  rather-than 
science  will-be  gratified  by-the  discovery  and  publication  all- 
'Over-the- world  of-every  secret  of-these  untrodden  regions.  All- 
•parts-of-the-  |  world  are  becoming,  in-fact,  more-and-inore  well- 
-known,  so-that  we-shall-soon  regard  it  as-a-matter-of-course 
that  blanks  on-our  maps  will  grow  less-  |  and-less,  till  in  a  short- 
-space-of-timethey-willdisappearaltogether.  Somemay exclaim, 
"Do-you-mean-to-say  that  at-the-present-time  we  may,  as-a-  | 
-matter-of-fact,  look  to-the  time  when  discoveries  will  no  longer 
add  to-our  knowledge  (of  the)  geography  (of  the)  world,  in-which 
from  first-to-last,  we-have-  |  been  so  much  interested  ?  We- 
-shall-be-glad-to  hear  when  such  may-be  looked  for."  In-reply, 
attention  may-be-called  to-the  facts-of-the-case,  and,  by-  |  way- 
-of-illu=tiation,  Africa  may-be  pointed  to.  For-many  years  past 
explorers  have  plunged  deeper-and-deeper  into-the  hidden  reces- 
ses (of  the)  Dark  Continent,  and,  whether  right-or-  |  wrong,  they 
subjugate  the  savage  inhabitants  in  a  more-or-less  complete 
fashion.  Africa  is-now  divided  among-the  European  powers, 
and  exploration  was  carried  out  to-a-great-extent  |  in-the-last- 
-years  (of  the)  Nineteenth  century,  so-that-we-are-able-to-make 
a  vary  complete  map  (of  the)  whole  continent.  Someone  may  say 
"I  shall-be-glad  |  to-know  if-the  recent  action  (of  the)  Powers 
has  oeen  beneficial ;  again-and-again  we  hear  of-much  done  on- 
-the-part-of-many  (of  the)  civilized  nations  between-  |  which 
Africa  is  divided  and  at  which  humanity  is  horrified."  But 
when-we  ask  what-is-the-matter  complained  of,  and  inquire  into 
it,  it-must-be  borne  in  mind  |  that-it-is-not  worse-than  what  sav- 
age tribes  practise  among-themselves,  or  towards-one-another  ; 
though,  by-the-way,  we-do-not  for  a  moment  defend  wanton 
barbarity  on-  |  the-part-of  civilized  man  towards  savages  who, 
for-the-first-time,  come  under  his  control.  Unhappily,  this-is 
always  more-or-less  an  incident  (of  the)  contact  of  civiliz'ed  |  and 
savage  man.  If-we-cannot  see  all-the-way  to  a  better  state  of 
things  we-may  at-least  anticipate  some  (of  the)  advantages 
which  civilization  should  in-the  |  end  be-able-to  bestow,  on-the- 
-one-hand  on-the  native  population,  and  on-the-other-hand,  or 
on-the-other-side,  on  itself.  In-the-first-place,  or  |  in  the  first- 
-instance,  exploration  affords  a  healthy  subject  of  interest  for-the 
more  adventurous  spirits  of  all  nations,  and  adds  additional 
chapters  of  interest  to-the  story  (of  the)  |  world.  In-the-second- 
-place,  new  markets  are  opened  for  commerce,  and-new  fields 
for-the-exercise  of  philanthropy.  In-the-third-place,  regions  are 
opened  up  which-may-become  |  of-much  value  as  an  outlet  for- 
-the  overgrown  population  of-other  regions.  In-the-next-place, 
or-in-the-last-place,  colonization  is  a  hopeful  part  of  that-onward 
|  march  of  humanity  in-which  all  have-the  deepest  interest.  (580) 


192 


Business  Phrases  and  Contractions. 


CHAPTER    XXXIII. 

BUSINESS    PHRASES    AND     CONTRACTIONS. 
SECTION  l. 


I  am  in  receipt  of 

your  letter 

I  am  in  receipt  of 

your  favor 

I  am  in  receipt  of 

your  esteemed  favor 

I  am  directed 

I  am  directed  to  state 

I  am  directed  to 

inform  you 

I  am  instructed 

I  am  instructed  to  state 

I  am  instructed  to 

inform  you 

I  am  requested 

I  am  requested  to  state 

I  am  requested  to 

inform  you 

I  am  surprised 

I  am  rather  surprised 

I  am  much  obliged 

I  bee  to  acknowledge 
rei  eipt  of  your  letter 


I  beg  to  call  attention 
(or  your  attention) 

I  beg  to  enclose 


I  beg  to  enclose 

herewith 
I  beg  to  inform  you 

I  enclose  account 
I  enclose  cheque 
I  enclose  invoice 

^    ^~f        I  enclose  herewith 
v"^~< — 14       I  enclose  statement 

_<_£          enclosed  letter 

"""^so        enclosed  please  find 

^~2       I  can  assure  you 

*$  I  do  not  understand 

v\>-/^~      I  have  to  acknowledge 
receipt  of  yoar  letter 

VI  have  to  call  attention 
(or  your  attention) 

^-V_A  I  have  to  inform  you 

V_n 

^^       I  have  the  honor 

'V,  I  have  the  pleasure 

\f        I  hope  you  will 

V\n/P        I  hope  you  are  satisfied 

I  regard 

I  regret 


Business  Phrases  and  Contractions. 


193 


I  regret  to  state 

^V 

you  will  be  surprised 

we  are  in  a  position 

,/N^ 

yon  will  be  glad  to  know 

we  are  much  obliged 

"^1 

your  consideration 

to  you 

"N 

your  favor 

we  respectfully  reqneit 

V_ 

"""Jw-v 

your  esteemed  favor 

we  are  surprised 

vl 

yours  faithfully 

we  beg  to  quote 

^^_ 

faithfully  yours 

you  are  at  liberty 

X- 

yours  obediently 

you  may  as  well 
you  may  consider 

^ 

"V 
>\ 

your  obedient  servant 
yours  respectfully 

you  must  consider 

yours  truly 

Exercise  87a. 

Dear  Sir : — I-am-in-receipt-of-your-letter  (of  the)  24th,  and  I- 
regret-to-state  that  I-am-unable  to-give  you-the  information 
you  require.  I-  |  can-assure-you  I  should-be-pleased  to-do-so 
if-it-were-possible.  I-am-surprised  to-hear  from-you  that-the 
funds  of-your  society  are  in-such  |  a  bad  way.  I-regard-the 
objects  (of  the)  society  as  most  praiseworthy,  and  I-cannot- 
-understand  how  it-is  that  public  support  should  be  withheld. 
I  enclose  check  for  |  ten  dollars  as  a  subscription,  and-shall-be- 
-glad  to-give-the-same-amount  next  year.  I-am-much-obliged 
-to-you  for-the  copy  (of  the)  report.  Yours  truly.  |  (120) 


Exercise  88. 

Dear  Sir: — I-am-instructedby-my-Boardtoask-youwhen-the- 
•amount  owing  to-them  by-your  Company  is  likely  to  be  paid. 
I-am-requested  also  to  |  point-out  to-you  that-this-account  is 
considerably  overdue,  and-I-am-directed-to-inform-you  that  if 
payment  is-not  made  on  or  before  Saturday  next,  proceedings 
will-  |  be  taken  without  further  delay.  I-enclose  statement-of- 
•account  once-more,  and  I-hope-you-will-do  all  in-your power  to- 
•render  legal  measures  unnecessary.  Your-obedient-servant.  | 

(90) 


194  Business  Phrases  and  Contractions. 


Exercise  89. 

Dear  Sir : — I-beg-to-acknowledge-receipt-of-your-letter  (ol 
the)  4th  jnst.,  and-in-accordance-with  your-request  I-have-the- 
pleasure  to  enclose-herewith  copy  (of  the)  |  paper  referred  to.  I- 
-am-glad-to-hear  that-you-were  at-the  meeting,  and-I-hope-you- 
-are-satisfied  with-the-result.  I-am-rather-surprised  that-the 
local- 1  pressdidnot give  more  prominenceto-one-or-two  speeches 
which-were,  in-my-opinion,  valuable  contributions  to  a  question 
of  vital  interest  at  (the)  present-time.  With-regard-  |  to  ray-own 
paper,I-beg-to-call-your-attention  to-the  factthatthoughagood- 
rdeal  was  said  upon-it,  no-one  ventured  to  contradict  the  state- 
ments made  |  with-reference-to-the-duties  of  accountants  and 
auditors.  You-will-see  from-the-enclosed-letter  that  I-had 
ample  reasons  for-my  assertions.  You-are-at-liberty  to-make  | 
any  use  you  think  proper  (of  the)  paper.  You-may-consider 
it-is-worth  publishing.  If  so,  I-think-you-might  send  a  copy 
to  all-the-members.  .Faithfully-yours.  |  (18(h 


Exercise  90. 

Gentlemen  : — We-are-much-obliged-to-you  for-your  inquiry, 
and-have-the-pleasure  to  enclose-herewith  patterns  and-prices 
(of  the)  cloths  referred  to.  We-respectf  ully-request  an  examina- 
tion |  and-comparison  of-our  goods  with-those  of  any  other  mak- 
ers,and-we-have-no-doubt  (of  the)result,knowing,as-we-do,that- 
-we-are-in-a-position  to-  |  manufacture  cloths  (of  the)  highest 
quality  and  to-quote  terms  at-least  as  favorable  as  anyone. 
"We-are-surprised  to-learn  that  our  representative  has-not  called- 
-upon  you,  and-  |  we-will  instruct  him  to-do-so  in-the  future. 
With-regard-to-the  special  cloth  you-require  for-the-Govern- 
ment  contract,  we-beg- to-quote  you  one  dollar  per  |  yard,  and-we- 
-can  guarantee  absolute  satisfaction  if-you  place-the  order  with 
us  in  due  course.  We-beg-to-call-your-attention,  also,  to-the  en- 
closed |  samples  of  fancy  linings,  which-we-are  manufacturing 
for-the  coming  season,  and-which-we-are-able-to  offer  at-the 
exceedingly  low-prices  marked  on-the  patterns.  If-you-  |  are- 
-in-the  market  for-this-class  of-goods,  we-feel  sure'  that-you- 
-cannot-do  better-than  give  these  samples  your-consideration. 
We-have  a  large  stock  (of  the)  |  goods  ready  for  delivery,  and- 
-we-hope-you-will-be-able-to  favor  us  with  an  order.  Your- 
-esteemed-favors  will  at-all-times  command  our  prompt  atten- 
tion. Yours-respect fully.  |  (240) 


Business  Phrases  and  Contractions. 


195 


BUSINESS    PHRASES    AND    CONTRACTIONS. 

SECTION  2. 


in  reply  (to) 

in  reply  to  your  letter 
In  reply  to  your  favor 

in  reply  to  your 

esteemed  favor 

in  your  reply 

yt/^~~      referring  to  your 

letter 

>    referring  to  your 
favor 
referring  to  our 
letter 

S^~\e   referring  to  our 

.                                          invoice 

^s^      by  first  post 

in  your  reply  to 

my  letter 

^^     by  next  post 

in  my  letter 
copy  of  my  last 

letter 

VXa      by  return  of  post 

your  last  letter 
registered  letter 
early  reply 

early  consideration 

i^v'X      by  parcel  post 
°~\       postal  order 
\s^6     by  wire  at  once 

early  attention 
early  convenience 
at  your  earliest 

convenience 
as  soon  as  convenient 

as  soon  as  ready 
referring  to  yours 

.^?|        by  goods  train 

\  81         by  passenger  train 

my  attention  has 

^t_                              been  called 
x-yk        necessary  attention 

v_£>/      necessary  ar- 

raugemenU 

7*v-  —  ^  we  will  arrange 
the  matter 

196 


Business  Phrases  and  Contractions. 


^ 

best  attention 

V? 

X 

best  of  my  ability 

v\ 

Vx 

best  of  our  ability 

NV^ 

best  of  your  ability 

L 

V 

best  of  their  ability 

~c 

s, 

best  quality 

Vq£ 

1 

X 

best  price 

3^ 

\_o 

best  terms 

N^ 

rt. 

lowest  terms 

-v^ 

\s 

best  finish 

^ 

best  thanks 

vl 

M 

balance  due 

M 

balance  sheet 
balance  (of)  youi 

account 
payment  of  account 

statement  of  account 

account  sales 
bill  of  exchange 
stock  exchange 
in  exchange 
bill  of  lading 
under  bill  of  sale 
underwriters 
ordinary  rates 


Exercise  91. 

Dear  Sirs: — In-reply-to-your-letter  of  yesterday,  we-beg-ta 
-state  that-the  bill-of-lading  and-the  bill-of-exchange  were  for. 
warded  to-you  by-first-post  |  on  Tuesday-morning  last,  in  regis- 
tered-letter, addressed  as  usual,  and-we-are-surprised  that-they 
have-not  reached  you.  We-will  make  inquiries  here,  and  in-the- 
meantime,  if-  |  you-receive-the  letter  kindly  inform  us  by-wire- 
-at-once.  Referring  to-our-letter  (of  the)  27th  ult.,  and  your- 
-  reply  to  same,  we-have  written  the  works,  |  pressing  them  to- 
-give  early-attention  to-the-matter  and  to-make-the  necessary - 
-arrangements  for  forwarding  the  goods  to-the  finishers  as-soon- 
•as-ready.  We-have-instructed  the  |  latter  to-give-the  material 
the  best  finish,  and-we-have-no-doubt  they-will-do-so.  We-have- 
-also  mentioned  your  complaint  as-to-the  finish  (of  the)  last  | 
consignment,  and  we-are-assured  that  special  care  will-be  taken 
to-prevent  a  repetition  (of  the)  mistake  in-the  future.  In- 
-accordance-with  your- request,  we  have-the-pleasu re  |  to  enclose 
statement-of-account  up  to-the  30th  ult.,  and-we-trustyou  will- 
-find  this  quite  in-order.  Our  Mr.  Ralphs  \vill-be-in-your  town 
on-Wednesday  |  next,  and-will  give  you  a  call.  We-have-sent- 
-you  by-parcel-post  a  copy  of-our  new  pattern  book,  and-we- 
-shall-be-glad  to-receive-your  kind  |  orders  for  any  (of  the) 
materials  named  therein.  Very-truly-yours.  (250) 


Business  Phrases  and  Contractions.  197 

Exercise  92. 

Dear  Sir: — In-reply-to-your-favor  (of  the)  16th  inst.,  we- 
-regret  that- we-cannot  undertake-the  responsibility  of  adopting 
your  suggestions  with-regard-to-the  machine.  We-are  |  willing 
to-execute  the  repairs  to-the  best-of-our-ability,  and-on-the 
lowest-terms  possible,  but  as  we  stated  in  our  last-letter,  the 
methods  you  propose  would  |  be  attended  with  great  risk  to-the 
rider.  If-you  decide  to-leave-the-matter  to  us  you-might  inform 
usby-return-of-post,and-we-willputthe  |  work  in-hand  at-once, 
so-as-to-be-able-to  despatch  the  machine  by-goods-train  on- 
-Saturday.  We  need  hardly  say  that-we  pay  the  best-price  for  | 
all-the-materials  we  use,  and-we  guarantee  them  to  be  (of  the) 
best-quality  obtainable.  Referring-to-your-letter  (of  the)  9th 
inst.,  we-have-done  our  best  to  |  induce-the  carriers  to-quote 
special-rates  for-the-goods  consigned  to-you,  but-they  decline  to- 
-make  any  reduction  on-the  ordinary-rates  unless-the  traffic  is 
considerably  increased.  |  With-reference-to-our  statement-of- 
-account  for  last  quarter,  we-beg-to-call-your-attention  to-the 
fact  that-the  balance-due  has-not  yet  been  received,  and-we-  | 
-will-thank-you  for  a  check  or  postal-order  for-the-amount  at- 
-your-earliest-convenience.  We-shall  give  early-consideration 
to-your  inquiries  for-the  special  tandem,  and-will-  |  forward  the 
specification  desired  as-soon-as-convenient.  Yours-faithfully. 

(250) 


please  forward 
according  to 

agreement 

according  to  their 


198  Business  Phrases  and  Contractions. 
BUSINESS    PHRASES    AND    CONTRACTIONS. 

SECTION  3. 

f^0  first  cost 

fct  a*  nr8^  cos^ 

0— D  first-class 

"    |  first  quality 

0*~£  first  instant 

^~\  first  notice 

"^^  first  instalment 

C^  last  week 

4 this  week 

o> —  next  week 

L..  ,™L  last  montb 
^~^-*y  Monday  morning 

b  Tuesday  afternoon 

f/^f,  Wednesday  evening 

%o^  please  quote  us 

%»  please  let  us  know 

"NO  please  let  me  know 

So,  please  note 

>Q_>I  please  inform  us 


s 

1      s 

^^j 

h 


additional  ex- 
pense 

additional  cost 
board  of  directors 

directors'  meeting 

directors'  report 
declare  a  dividend 

deliver  imme- 
diately 

discount  for  cash 

financial  affairs 

from  the  last  re- 
port 

further  particulars 


statement  j          Q_? 

Exercise  93. 


goods  not  to  hand 
not  yet  to  hand 
just  possible 
just  received 

make  an  appointment 

makers  up 
trade  price 
trade  mark 
trades  union 


Gentlemen: — Please-quote-us  your-lowest-price,   f.o.b.  Chi- 
cago, for  forty  tons  of  soda  crystals,  first-quality,  in  casks 


Business  Phrases  and  Contractions.  199 

about  4  cwt.  each,  and  say  if-these  could-  |  be  delivered  to-our 
order  at  the  Union  Station  by  Tuesday-evening  or  Wednesday- 
-afternoon  at-the  latest.  Referring-to-your-invoice  (of  the) 
first-instant,  please-note  that-these-  |  goods  are-not  yet  to  hand. 
We-have  inquired  (of  the)  railway  officials  here,  and  according- 
-to-their-stateraent  the  goods  have-not-been  handed  to-thera. 
Please-let-us-  |  know  by-return-of-post  when  and  by-which  rail- 
way line  these-goods  were  forwarded.  We-expected  to-receive- 
-them  at-the-end  of-last-week.  According-to-agreement  we- 1  !. 
-are-obliged  to-make  delivery  (of  the)  first-instalment  some 
day  this-week,  so-that  you-will-see  that-the  delay  is  likely  td- 
-cause  some  trouble,  and  we-trust  |  you-will  give-the-matter 
your  immediate-attention.  Yours-truly.  (160) 

Exercise  94. 

Dear  Sir: — I  brought  your-letter  before- the  Board-of-Directors 
at-their  meeting  yesterday,  but  after  some  discussion  they-were- 
-obliged  fc>  postponefurther-consideration  (of  the)  matter  until  | 
the  next  Directors'-meeting.which- will-be  held-on-the  last  Tues- 
day-afternoon of -this  month.  I-think-the  Directors  would-be- 
-gfad  if-you  would  kindly  set  forth  your-  |  proposals  more  fully 
than  is  done  in-your-letter.  The  first  cost  (of  the)  material  is 
very  low,but-the  question  (of  the) additional-cost  of-preparing  it 
for-sale,  |  and-the  additional-expense  which-will-probably  be  in- 
curred in  advertising  it  is  sure  to-be  taken-into-consideration  by- 
-the-Directors,and-if-they  had  your  estimate  of  what-  |  the  total 
expenditure  is  likely  to  amount  to,  it-would-no-doubt  help  them 
in  coming  to  a  decision.  If-you-will  make-an-appointment  for- 
-some  day  next-week  |  I-shall-be-glad-to  see-you,  and  it-is  just- 
-possible'that  I-may-be-able-to-give  you  some  further-particu- 
lars. Meanwhile,  I-have-the-pleasure  to  enclose  |  copy  (of  the) 
Directors'-Report  published  last  month.  Yours-faithfully.  (190) 

Exercise  95. 

Dear  Sir : — We-have-pleasure  in  enclosing-herewith  price-list 
of-our  Felt  Hats,  and-we-shall-be-pleased  to  receive-your  kind 
orders  for  any  (of  the)  lines  mentioned.  |  We  specially  desire 
to-call-your-attention  to-the  fact  that  not-only  do  all-our  hats 
bear  our  well-known  trade-mark  as  a  guarantee  of -quality,  but 
that  |  in-addition-tp-this  the  label  (of  the)  "  Hatters'  Trades'- 
•Union  "  is  placed  inside-the  band,  as  proof  that- we  pay  the  fiill 
trade-price  for-the  labor  we  employ.  |  \Ve-may  add  that,  in- 
•view  (of  the)  approaching  holiday  season,  orders  should-be- 
-placed  not  later  than-the  middle  of  next  month,  so-as-to  avoid 
possible  delay.  "We  |  allow  an  extra  2%%  discount-for-cash. 
Trusting  to-receive-the-f  avor  of -your  esteemed  commands  which 
shall-have  our  best-attention,  we  are,  Yours-respectfully.  | 

(150) 


200 


Law  Phrases. 


CHAPTER  XXXIV. 

LAW  PHRASES. 

-TV. 

Actual  damage 

(itr-^"    Central  Criminal  Court 

X 

affidavit  and  order 

0/v-s_p     circumstantial  evidence 

1 

°\B-      Circuit  Court 

articles  of  agreement 

P         City  Court 

*~* 

as  to  the  matters 

~\— 
^~~J/      Common  jury 

V—b 

as  to  these  matters 

'~~T^       Common  law 

V-, 

as  to  those  matters 

~~~c     "^       County  Clerk 

>c 

Bankruptcy  Court 

County  Court 

X, 

before  him 

~\s       County  Treasurer 

X, 

before  me 

\^_y       Counsel  for  the  defense 

^-1^cr\ 

being  duly  sworn 

—          Counsel  for  the  defend- 

1          0 

t           ant 

X 

beneficial  estate 

—  ^        Counsel  for  the  plaintiff 

beneficial  interest 

\^      Counsel  for  the  prisoner 

~l 

—  1\_     Counsel  for  the  prosecu- 

»             tion 

v£ 

bill  of  sale 

<rAV^D     Court  of  Appeals 

Scv               >< 

breach   of   promise    of 

^-^ 

marriage 

C~X'        Court  of  Bankruptcy 

_\- 

by  this  action 

„.   s-£     Court  of  Claims 

>.. 

by  this  court 

CT—  |       Court  of  Equity 

Vr 

'H          Court  of  General   Ses- 

X- 

Called  for  the  defendant 

Ji,             sions 

% 

Called  for  the  plaintiff 

</         Court  of  Justice 

^A, 

Called  in  his  own  behalf 

^~      Court  of  Record 

Law  Phrases. 

201 

•s 

Court   of    Special   Ses- 
sions. 

X 

for  this  action 

^x 

criminal  jurisprudence 

v 

for  this  court 

c^~° 

cross  examination 

\r 

't 

Deed  of  settlement 

L 

General  term 

\ 

deed  of  trust 

fs 

gentlemen  of  the  jury 

k^ 

defendant's  testimony 

/ 

goods  and  chattels 

k 

direct  evidence 

~\>-A 

government  securities 

w>= 

direct  examination 

V 

Grand  Jury 

L 

District  Attorney 

,-C^ 

gross  receipts 
Habeas  Corpus 

j 

District  Court 

•N- 

heirs,  executors,  admin- 

T- 

%£J_P 

istrators,  and  assigns 

do  yon  mean  to  say 

i\  f. 

heirs,  executors,  admin- 

o— Y£  —  p 

istrators,  or  assigns 

u^ 

documentary  evidence 

v/ 

If  Your  Honor  please 

T 

Ecclesiastical  Court 

"1 

in  this  action 

'V, 

employer's  liability 

^ 

in  this  court 

"H, 

equity  of  redemption 

^^^\ 

in  witness  whereof 

s. 

Federal  Court 

n- 

interlocutory  decree 

fee  simple 

^5- 

international  law 

v^ 

fiduciary  capacity 

J( 

Joint  stock   " 

b^ 

final  decree 

4- 

joint  clock  company 

\ 

for  defendant 

i 

judicial  sale 

^ 

for  plaintiff 

L 

Judgment  for  plaintiff 

202 


Law  Phrases. 


( 

Judgment  for  defendant 

L       motion  denied 

•4 

Justice  of  the  peace 

"^v      Municipal  Court 

/^\, 

Last  will  and  testament 

my  learned  friend 

_/n    , 

learned  counsel  for  the 

v_x  —  v—i    Next  of  kin 

1C—* 

'     defense 

/"I 

learned  counsel  for  the 

^s^      No,  sir 

r 

defendant 

S-I>\ 

^~^> 

learned  counsel  for  the 

^\    notary  public 

' 

plaintiff 

N 

-^-v 

f  learned  counsel  for  the 
prisoner 

</         Objection  sustained 

__x  —  % 

learned  counsel  for  the 

prosecution 

objected  to  by  plaintiff 

(1 

learned  judge 

p=S 

legal  estate 

objected  to  by  defendant 

fc 

letters  of  administration 

^~V      offered  in  evidence 

V-^D 

^-^-^    official  receiver 

/r 

letters  patent 
letters  testamentary 

C          of  this  action 
(r_^>      of  this  agreement 

£Jbf 

life  estate 

^_        of  this  court 

-A 

Malice  prepense 
manslaughter 

C             on  the  other  side  of  the 

L«        case 

'—t 

*V    /^>-£"D    onthefollowinggroundi 

/^_P 

marine  insurance 

' 

/J-.^       originating  summons 

> 

may  it  please  the  court 
may     it     please    Your 

\^         Party  of  the  first  part 

<£-' 

onor 

N^o^       Party  of  the  second  part 

memorandum  of  agree- 

-v— <  » 

ment 

Patent  office 

7* 

motion  to  dismiss 

oT> 

\,    -         peculiar    circumstance! 

^•^^^l 

motion  granted 

^nlo         of  the  case 

rebutting  testimony 
re-cross  examination 
reversionary  interest 
._....      right  of  way 

Special  jury 
special  license 
state  whether  or  not 

summary  proceedings 
Superior  Court 


Law  Phrases. 

penal  offense 
personal  estate 

Petit  jury 

plaintiff's  case 
plaintiff's  counsel 
plaintiff's  testimony 
plaintiff's  witnesses 

\f*~    Police  Court 

power  of  attorney 
preliminary  injunction 
prisoner  at  the  bar 
Quit  claim 
Real  estate 


f 

\_ 

er^—  (, 


yr 
/xV 
•/\- 


V. 
O^\ 


"  ** 
^s 


203 

Supreme  Court 
Surrogate's  Court 
sworn  and  examined 
Tax  deed 

that  this  action 

that  this  court 

testimony  of  the  defend- 
ant 

testimony  of  the  plaintiff 
trust  funds 

UnderthecircumstanceB 
of  the  case 

Verdict  for  the  defend- 
ant 

verdict  for  the  plaintiff 
verdict  of  the  jury 

voluntary  conveyance 
Ward  of  the  Court 
warrant  of  attorney 
what  is  your  business 

where  do  yon  reside 

where  is  your  place  of 
business 

will  and  testament 
without  prejudice 

wrongful  possession 
Yes,  sir 
Your  Honor 


204  Legal  Correspondence. 

CHAPTER    XXXV. 

LEGAL   CORRESPONDENCE. 

1. 

MESSKS.  W.  C.  BENNETT  &  SON,  Decker  Bldg.,  New  York. 

Gentlemen  : — A  recent  act  of  the  Legislature  of  this  State 
provides,  in  substance,  that  it  is  unlawful  for  any  person 
or  persons  to  carry  on  business  under  a  firm  or  corporate 
name  that  does  not  express  the  name  of  at  least  one  of  the 
persons  owning  or  carrying  on  the  same,  unless  a  proper 
certificate  be  filed. 

This  law  is  so  little  known,  and  the  results  of  non-com- 
pliance so  far-reaching,  that  we  have  taken  the  liberty  of 
notifying,  in  addition  to  our  regular  clients,  others  similarly 
situated,  whose  names  have  been  brought  to  our  attention. 
Respectfully  yours,  (108) 

2. 
MR.  JAMES  L.  BEAN,  100  Randolph  St.,  Chicago,  111. 

Dear  Sir: — Your  letter  of  July  15th  duly  received.  We 
have  not  as  yet  examined  Charles  Spencer  in  supplementary 
proceedings.  We  shall,  however,  obtain  an  order  and 
cause  him  to  be  examined.  The  very  fact  that  he  is  em- 
ployed as  an  excise  inspector,  leads  us  to  suppose  that  the 
judgment  cannot  be  collected.  We  cannot,  as  you  un- 
doubtedly are  aware,  levy  upon  his  salary,  and  therefore  the 
prospects  are  not  very  bright  for  a  collection. 

Very  truly  yours,  (87) 

3. 
MR.  C.  F.  MORSE,  Houston,  Texas. 

Dear  Sir  : — We  note  yours  of  the  9th  ult. ,  but  have  under 
date  of  March  28th  a  letter  from  S.  T.  Brown,  stating  that 
our  notice  that  we  hold  an  account  against  him  is  a  surprise, 
as  he  had  paid  it  in  full  to  you  last  fall,  and  has  your 
receipt  for  same.  Accordingly,  after  conference  with  our 
clients,  we  find  that  the  account  was  sent  to  you  and  that 
it  was  returned  unpaid.  We  now  hold  their  draft  on  you 
for  the  amount,  which  they  have  instructed  us  to  collect  at 
once.  Before  adopting  any  summary  measures,  however, 
we  deem  it  but  fair  to  apprise  you  of  the  condition  of  affairs 


Legal  Correspondence.  205 

with  a  view  of  adjustment  by  you,  as  we  do  not  desire 
to  liarin  you. 

We  hope,  therefore,  you  will  favor  us  with  a  remittance, 
unless  you  can  furnish  us  with  evidence  of  an  error. 

Yours  respectfully,  (155) 

4. 
MR.  S.  L.  BARNES,  Jacksonville,  Fla. 

Dear  Sir  : — I  hand  you  forthwith  for  collection  an  amount 
against  Mr.  Frederick  Mason  of  your  city.  The  bill  was 
contracted  under  curious  circumstances,  and  may  possibly 
cause  an  opportunity  for  arresting  him  if  he  comes  this  way, 
on  the  ground  of  obtaining  goods  under  false  pretences  ; 
but  as  he  is  outside  of  the  jurisdiction  of  this  State,  I  send 
the  bill  to  you  to  collect,  if  you  can  find  that  he  has  any- 
thing from  which  you  can  realize. 

The  amount  is  less  two  percent,  discount  for  cash,  which 
of  course  will  not  be  allowed  under  the  circumstances  if 
we  can  make  the  money.  Yet  at  the  same  time  we  would 
readily  compromise  to  anything  which  you  may  in  your 
judgment  deem  reasonable.  Yours  truly,  .(133) 

5. 
MR.  A.  J.  STEWART,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 

Dear  Sir : — We  enclose  you  $50.00  in  regard  to  claims  25 
and  27,  and  beg  to  call  your  attention  to  the  bank  upon 
which  all  your  collections  are  made.  We  pay  bank's  usual 
exchange  and,  as  we  deal  very  exclusively  with  banks,  our 
correspondents  are  all  very  well  satisfied  with  these  terms. 
We  trust  you  will  hereafter  be  willing  to  attend  to  our  col- 
lections at  similar  rates.  Having  recently  established  these 
offices  to  handle  western  collections,  we  trust  to  have  con- 
siderable business  with  you  from  time  to  time,  and  desire, 
if  possible,  to  have  an  understanding  at  the  outset  regard- 
ing the  rate  upon  which  our  business  will  be  transacted. 

Trusting  this  will  be  satisfactory,  we  are, 

Yours  very  truly,  (126) 

6. 
MR.  E.  N.  PATERSON,  Covington,  Ky. 

Dear  Sir : — I -return  you  herewith  all  the  papers  in  claim 
No.  155,  and  beg  to  advise  you  that  Mr.  Jackson  had  nothing 
whatever  to  do  with  this  claim  of  J.  L.  Harris,  with  the  ex- 


206  Legal  Correspondence. 

ception  of  the  first  expense  bill  covering  fourteen  boxes  of 
prunes.  I  would  hereby  state  tkat  the  amount  of  this  ex- 
pense bill,  for  which  Mr.  Jackson  is  responsible,  is  based  on 
twenty  cents  per  one  hundred  pounds,  and  is  included  in 
the  amount  for  which  he  settles,  to  wit,  35,626  pounds,  and 
for  which  I  send  you  check  duly  certified. 

Yours  truly,  (101) 

7. 
Mr.  LEONARD  THORN,  100  Broadway,  New  York. 

Dear  Sir: — Early  in  the  week  we  procured  an  order  for 
the  examination  of  Charles  Stevens  in  supplementary  pro- 
ceedings upon  the  judgment  obtained  by  you.  The  order 
was  returnable  this  A.M.  at  10.30.  We  attended  at  the 
examination,  and  after  proceeding  with  the  same  for  an 
hour,  Mr.  James  agreed  that,  if  the  examination  was  ad- 
journed for  a  month,  he  would,  within  a  week,  send  me 
a  check  for  $75  on  account,  and  shortly  thereafter  settle 
the  judgment.  Your  Mr.  Johnson  informed  us  that  if  tl-c 
matter  could  be  finally  closed,  a  concession  would  be  made 
to  Mr.  James  upon  the  amount  evidenced  by  the  judgment, 
and  in  order  to  procure  a  settlement  of  the  same,  we  com- 
municated that  fact  to  him.  As  soon  as  the  check  is  received, 
we  will  forward  it. 

I  return  to  town  this  A.M.,  and  have  not  as  yet  received 
anything  by  way  of  information  that  is  important,  in  regard 
to  Mr.  Smith. 

I  telephoned  this  morning  to  Judge  Gilbert,  and  he  ans- 
wered that  Mr.  Smith  had  written  him  a  letter  saying  that 
he  was  ill,  and  asking  him  to  come  to  the  house,  which  he 
refused  to  do.  He  further  says  that  he  expects  to  see  him 
on  Monday.  Yours  very  truly,  (217) 

8. 
MR.  D.  M.  HENDRICKS,  Topeka,  Kansas. 

Dear  Sir: — Your  favor  received,  and  I  beg  to  thank  you 
for  accepting  my  proposition  to  undertake  the  recovery  of 
that  property  for  one-half  I  may  obtain.  I  herewith  enclose 
a  contract  and  power  of  attorney  authorizing  me  to  act. 
Kindly  sign  the  same  before  a  Notary  or  Clerk  of  the  Court, 
and  return  to  me  and  oblige. 

I  have  instructed  that  proceedings  should  be  taken  at 
once  to  recover  the  property.  I  do  not  know  that  I  can 


Legal  Correspondence.  207 

succeed,  but  I  will  do  the  best  I  can.     You  will  get  one-half 
of  whatever  is  realized. 

Your  prompt  attention  will  oblige. 

Yours  very  truly,         (HO) 
9. 
MESSRS.  J.  L.  BALL  &  Co.,  Cleveland,  Ohio. 

Gentlemen : — Under  separate  cover  I  send  you  a  copy  of 
the  School  laws  of  Nebraska,  and  call  your  particular  at- 
tention to  subdivision  18,  "Text-books  and  Supplies."  It 
is  my  purpose  to  enforce  strictly  all  the  provisions  of  this 
act,  and  at  this  time  I  desire  to  call  your  particular  atten- 
tion to  sections  2,  6,  7  and  8.  I  herewith  reject  all  bonds 
now  on  file  in  this  office  under  the  provisions  of  section  2 
of  this  act,  and  ask  that  a  new  Guaranty  Bond  be  filed,  with 
me  in  accordance  with  the  provisions  of  this  section  and 
act,  and  also  the  sworn  statement  of  lowest  prices,  etc. 

I  feel  impelled  to  demand  a  Guaranty  Bond,  because  a 
personal  bond  would  be  worthless  to  the  State  without 
resident  freeholders  as  securities,  and  it  would  be  a  great 
inconvenience  and  source  of  much  trouble  to  the  school- 
book  publishers  to  secure  resident  freeholders  as  securities. 

I  enclose  blank  forms  of  contract  that  have  been  and  will 
continue  to  be  furnished  by  this  department  in  accordance 
with  the  provisions  of  section  7.  Yours  very  truly,  (191) 

10. 
MR.  J.  P.  HUNTER,  Atlanta,  Ga. 

Dear  Sir : — We  received  your  proxy  to  Mr.  Bell  by  mail 
in  due  course.  "We  held  the  meeting  this  afternoon,  and 
everything  went  through  all  right.  I  shall  send  you  certi- 
ficate of  incorporation  by  Monday  or  Tuesday. 

As  soon  as  you  can,  please  send  me  statement  of  how 
much  stock  was  contributed  by  each  party  in  the  Martin 
Co.,  also  description  of  land  belonging  to  that  company.  I 
understand  that  160,000  shares  is  to  be  developed  stock, 
and  that  you  are  to  contribute  80,000,  and  Martin,  James 
and  Goss  are  to  contribute  80,000. 

Mr.  Goss  instructed  me  to  buy  books  for  the  Lake  Co., 
the  same  as  you  bought  for  the  Martin,  and  they  instructed 
me  to  send  my  bill  for  fees,  books  and  other  items  to  you, 
which  I  will  do  after  I  have  paid  for  the  books. 

Yours  truly,  (145) 


208  Legal  Correspondence. 

11. 
MESSRS.  ISAAC  PITMAN  &  SONS, 

31  Union  Square,  New  York  City. 

Gentlemen : — On  October  22d  last,  1901,  the  above  num- 
bered proposal  bond  was  executed  at  your  request  for 
furnishing  and  delivering  books  for  the  High  Schools  and 
School  Libraries  of  the  Boroughs  of  Manhattan  and  the 
Bronx  for  the  Board  of  Education,  City  of  New  York. 

When  you  were  last  in  here  you  stated  that  contract  for 
the  above  named  supplies  was  awarded  to  you,  but  the 
Board  of  Education  had  not  advised  you  to  call  and  execute 
contract  bonds  for  same.  Will  you  kindly  advise  us  how 
the  matter  stands,  and  oblige,  Yours  truly,  (108) 

12. 
MRS.  J.  R.  REEVES,  Boston,  Mass. 

Dear  Madam: — The  administrator  and  administratrix  of 
the  defendant  acknowledge  the  circumstance  that  they 
have  advertised  in  a  commercial  paper  for  the  last  week  of 
December  the  goods,  chattels  and  credits  of  the  plaintiff, 
both  domestic  and  otherwise,  in  the  establishment  of  the 
deceased  individual.  The  character  of  the  goods  was  alto- 
gether satisfactory,  several  articles  naturally  bringing  high 
prices,  and  probably  the  prospects  for  the  heirs  of  the  de- 
ceased are  rather  more  than  expected,  especially  owing  to 
the  essential  facts  that  the  executor  and  executrix  will 
mortgage  the  property.  The  indenture  of  mortgage  will 
immediately  be  executed,  and,  inasmuch  as  the  architecture 
is  of  the  old  Catholic  style  and  not  original,  will  fetch  a 
good  price,  and  we  have  no  doubt  will  surprise  the  under- 
signed, for  which  we  should  be  thankful.  We  understand, 
or  rather  understood,  that  a  welcome  subscription  for  the 
stranger  by  several  revered,  respected  and  popular  gentle- 
men is  to  be  made.  And  to  our  knowledge  there  is  no  ob- 
jection or  reason  why  we  ourselves  should  not  perform  some 
kind  act,  the  performance  of  which  in  this  peculiar  case, 
notwithstanding  the  mistake  made  by  the  majority,  will 
meet  with  great  satisfaction.  They  say  the  eldest  child 
comes  of  age  in  ( September.  This  subject,  together  with 
whatever  follows^  and  whenever  it  may  happen,  will  give 
the  administrator  no  trouble  in  the  regular  course  of 
things.  Yours  respectfully,  (231) 


Lfgal  Forms.  209 


CHAPTER  XXXVI. 

LEGAL  FORMS.* 

BY  HENRY  W.  THORXE, 
Counselor-at-Law  and  Official  Court  Stenographer,  Johnstown,  N.  Y. 

A  law  stenographer  must  possess  expertness  in  writing 
and  reading  shorthand.  This  can  only  be  attained  by  regu- 
lar and  prolonged  practice.  Knowledge  of  correct  phono- 
graphic outlines  is  not,  alone,  sufficient.  Such  a  one  must 
understand  the  meaning  of  the  subject-matter  reported. 
This  conduces  to  speed  of  writing,  and  is  absolutely  neces- 
sary to  impromptu  reading  of  rapidly  written  notes. 

While  writing  from  dictation  is  the  most  •  practicable 
method  of  gaining  stenographic  speed,  yet  the  learner 
should  not  restrict  himself  to  that.  He  should  attempt  to 
report  all  kinds  of  human  utterance:  speeches,  sermons, 
public  meetings,  judicial  proceedings,  conversations,  etc. 

The  best  rate  of  dictation  is  that  which  forces  the  writer 
to  the  highest  speed  at  which  distinct  outlines  can  be 
formed.  When  following  a  speaker,  for  practice,  writing 
beyond  legible  speed  should  not  be  tried.  Better  omit  por- 
tions than  strive  to  catch  every  word  and  thereby  risk 
acquiring  a  sprawling  style  of  shorthand. 

Small  characters,  compactly  written,  are  preferable  to 
their  opposites,  are  easier  to  read,  and  conduce  to  speed. 

Practice  notes  should  be  transcribed,  and  the  transcript 
carefully  compared  with  the  original,  when  possible.  All 
shorthand  made  by  the  learner  should  be  repeatedly  read, 
doubtful  outlines  assiduously  studied  and  deciphered,  and 
erroneous  ones  corrected  and  memorized. 

Law  stenographers,  especially  those  employed  in  court 
before  juries,  should  be  able  to  instantly  refer  to,  and  read 

*  Condensed  from  "Pitman's  Twentieth  Century  Business  Dictation  and 
Legal  Forms."  Fourth  edition.  Revised  and  enlarged.  272  pages.  Price, 
stiff  boards,  T5c.;  cloth,  $1.00. 

14 


210  Legal  Forms. 

without  balk  or  hitch,  any  part  of  the  notes  of  a  tria\. 
Sometimes  it  is  necessary  to  read  to  the  jury  large  portions 
of  hastily  written  notes  of  testimony. 

Most  stenographers  use  pen  and  ink  for  law  reporting. 
At  least  two  reasons  for  this  usage  exist:  First,  shorthand 
notes  of  judicial  proceedings  are  required,  by  law,  to  be 
preserved  for  a  specified  period ;  these  constitute  an  official 
record,  and  this  should  be  durably  made;  ink,  better  than 
pencil,  notes  meet  this  requirement;  second,  the  gliding  of 
a  gold  pen  over  properly  finished  paper  is  supposed  to  cre- 
ate the  minimum  degree  of  friction;  and,  third,  greater 
manual  dexterity  is  believed  to  be  possible  with  a  flexible 
gold  pen  than  with  any  other  writing  implement.  A  "light 
hand  " — that  is,  the  application  of  the  least  possible  pres- 
sure— in  the  making  of  the  mystic  strokes,  circles,  dots  and 
dashes,  is  generally  conceded  to  be  favorable  to  increase  of 
speed,  and  a  deterrent  to  so-called  pen-paralysis,  or  writer's 
cramp. 

The  majority  of  law  reporters  use  specially  prepared 
reporting  paper,  with  marginal  and  horizontal  ruling.  A 
few  refuse  to  use  any  but  unruled  paper.  Some  practitioners 
use  loose  sheets  of  reporting  paper,  while  a  large  number 
prefer  the  elastic-bound  reporting  note-books.  One  advan- 
tage of  unbound  sheets  is  that  the  notes  comprising  each 
case  may,  at  its  conclusion,  be  fastened  together  in  book- 
form,  properly  endorsed,  and  filed  away  for  preservation.  In 
case  the  reporter  desires  to  dictate  to  more  than  one  amanu- 
ensis from  different  parts  of  his  notes,  loose  sheets  are  per- 
haps more  convenient. 

Experienced  law  stenographers  use  few  phrases.  These 
seldom  exceed  three  words.  The  phrasing  principle  is  usu- 
ally limited  to  what  is  known  as  "  natural"  phrases,  which, 
broadly  speaking,  means  combinations  of  such  words  as  are 
frequently  grouped  in  ordinary  speech. 

Special  phrases  are  sometimes  adopted.  These  grow  out 
of  the  peculiar  nature  of  the  subject-matter  reported.  For 
instance,  in  legal  form  No.  25.  the  phrase  "  liquor-tax-law" 
was  coined  for  that  particular  case.  It  would,  undoubtedly, 
be  legible  in  that  case,  while  in  general  use  it  might  not  be 
decipherable. 

Names  of  persons  and  places  when  first  occurring  should 
be  written  in  longhand  if  time  permit;  if  not,  in  shorthand, 


Legal  Forms.  211 

and  then  in  longhand  at  the  first  opportunity.  Thereafter, 
they  may  be  -written  in  shorthand.  This  applies  to  the 
names  of  witnesses  when  called  and  sworn.  These  should 
be  written  in  longhand,  followed  by  the  words  (in  short- 
hand) "for  plaintiff  "or  "  defendant,"  as  the  case  may  be, 
but,  at  all  events,  designating  the  party  in  whose  behalf  the 
witness  is  sworn. 

No  system  of  shorthand  numerals  has  yet  been  devised 
which  has  given  universal  satisfaction.  While,  in  some 
instances,  law  reporters  have  successfully  utilized  short- 
hand for  this  purpose,  yet  the  Arabic  figures  continue  prime 
favorites.  The  latter  are  often  helpful  in  finding  desired 
parts  of  testimony.  In  a  mass  of  shorthand  characters,  they 
are  conspicuous  markers  of  particular  sections  of  the  ex- 
amination of  witnesses. 

Exhibits  are  documents  and  things  produced  in  court, 
sometimes  merely  for  the  purpose  of  identification,  but 
usually  to  be  offered  in  evidence  by  litigants.  They  may 
range  from  a  simple  receipt  for  money  paid  to  the  elaborate 
and  intricate  model  of  a  railway  locomotive.  They  take  the 
name  of  the  party  who  offers  them  in  evidence,  as  "Pl'ff's 
Ex.  A.,"  "  DefVsEx.  No.  1,"  and  are  marked  accordingly, 
the  word  "exhibit  "  being  shortened  to  "Ex." 

It  is  customary  for  referees,  in  proceedings  before  them, 
to  mark  the  exhibits,  while  upon  trials  in  court,  before 
judge  and  jury,  this  duty  devolves  upon  the  stenographer. 

Some  stenographers  mark  all  exhibits  offered  in  evidence 
by  the  plaintiff,  alphabetically,  as  "PFff's  Ex.  A.,"  etc., 
and  those  offered  by  the  defendant,  numerically,  as  "Def't's 
Ex.  No.  1,"  etc. ;  while  others  mark  all  exhibits,  by  whom- 
soever introduced,  by  numbers,  commencing  the  first  with 
"Ex.  1,"  and  continuing  consecutively  with  succeeding 
exhibits.  Legal  form  No.  27  exemplifies  the  method  of 
doing  this. 

Rubber  stamps,  containing  everything  necessary  to  place 
upon  the  exhibit,  except  its  letter  or  number,  are  sometimes 
used.  This  constitutes  a  time  and  labor-saving  device. 

A  temporary  index  of  the  lettering  or  numbering  (or  both) 
of  exhibits,  and  of  the  numbers  of  the  pages  at  which  the 
various  examinations  of  witnesses  commence,  is  a  valuable 
aid  to  promptly  finding  parts  of  the  proceedings  called  fo» 
during  a  trial. 


212  Legal  Forms. 

MISCELLANEOUS  LEGAL  DOCUMENTS. 

AFFIDAVIT. 

(No.  1.) 

State  of  New  York     ) 
County  of  New  York  J 

John  Spencer,  being  duly  sworn,  deposes  and  says  :  That 
on  the  fourth  day  of  April,  1895,  he  resided  at  the  City  of 
Johnstown,  in  said  State,  and  that  at  that  time  one  Thomas 
Case  also  resided  at  said  City.  Deponent  further  says  : 
That  he  was  well  acquainted  with  said  Case  until  the  time 
of  his  death,  which  occurred  on  the  day  aforesaid  ;  that 
previous  to  that  time,  the  said  Case  informed  the  deponent 
that  he,  said  Case,  was  the  only  son  of  Joseph  Case,  of  Mil- 
waukee, in  the  State  of  Wisconsin.  Deponent  further  says : 
That  said  Case,  at  the  time  of  his  death,  was  about  forty 
years  old  ;  that  said  Case  had  light  hair  and  eyes  and  weighed 
about  one  hundred  and  eighty  pounds.  Deponent  further 
says:  That  he  is  ready  to  testify  to  the  foregoing  matters 
whenever  called  upon  to  do  so  ;  that  deponent's  age  is 
seventy-three  and  that  he  now  resides  at  New  Rochelle  ip 
said  State  of  New  York. 

Subscribed  and  sworn  to  before  me  )        T^T,W  «JT«J 
this  6th  day  of  April,  1898.          \ 
JOHN  NOWILL, 

Notary  Public, 

New  York  County,  N.  Y. 

CERTIFICATE    OF   ACKNOWLEDGMENT — NEW   YORK. 

(No.  2.) 

State  of  New  York     )  gg 
County  of  New  York  \     ' 

On  this  sixth  day  of  January,  one  thousand  nine  hundred 
and  one,  before  me,  the  subscriber,  personally  came  Henry 
Harrison,  George  Morse  and  James  Johnson,  to  me  known-, 
and  known  to  me  to  be  the  same  persons  described  in,  and 
who  executed,  the  within    [or  foregoing]  instrument,  and 
they  severally  acknowledged  that  they  executed  the  same. 
WILLIAM  H.  DUNLOP, 
Notary  Public, 

New  York  County,  N.  Y. 


Legal  Forms.  213 

WILL. 

(No.  3.) 

IN  THE  NAME  OF  GOD,  AMEN.  I,  Sophia  Rosamond,  of  the- 
Village  of  Greenpoint,  in  the  County  of  Sullivan,  and  State 
of  New  York,  widow,  of  the  age  of  forty  years  and  upwards, 
and  being  of  sound,  disposing  mind  and  memory,  do  hereby 
make,  publish,  and  declare  this  to  be  my  last  will  and  tes- 
tament, that  is  to  say  : 

FIRST.  I  direct  that  all  my  just  debts  and  funeral  ex- 
penses be  first  paid  and  fully  satisfied. 

SECOND.  I  give  and  devise  the  real  property,  now  occupied 
by  me  as  my  present  residence,  unto  my  beloved  son,  John 
Rosamond,  absolutely  and  forever. 

THIRD.  I  give,  devise  and  bequeath  all  the  rest,  residue 
and  remainder  of  my  estate,  both  real  and  personal,  of  every 
name  and  nature,  and  wheresover  situate,  unto  my  son, 
Charles  Rosamond,  of  St.  Johnsville,  Montgomery  County, 

LASTLY,  I  nominate,  constitute  and  appoint  my  said  son, 
John  Rosamond,  to  be  the  executor  of  this  my  last  will  and 
testament,  hereby  revoking  all  former  wills  by  me  made. 

IN  WITNESS  WHEREOF,  I  have  hereunto  set  my  hand  this. 
26th  day  of  November,  1900. 

SOPHIA  ROSAMOND.* 


The  above  instrument,  consisting  of  one  sheet,  was,  at  the 
date  thereof,  subscribed  by  Sophia  Rosamond,  the  testatrix 
named  in  the  foregoing  will,  in  the  presence  of  us  and  each 
of  us  ;  and,  at  the  time  of  making  such  subscription,  the 
above  instrument  was  declared  by  the  said  testatrix  to  be 
her  last  will  and  testament,  and  each  of  us,  at  the  request 
of  said  testatrix,  and  in  her  presence,  and  in  the  presence 
of  each  other,  signed  our  names  as  witnesses  thereto,  at  the 
end  of  the  will. 

JAMES  BINGHAM,  residing  at  Greenpoint,  Sullivan  County, 
N.  Y. 

ADDISON  TORT,  residing  at  Greenpoint,  Sullivan  County, 
N.  Y. 

*  It  is  not  necessary  to  affix  a  seal  to  a  will. 


214  Legal  Forms. 

NOTICE   TO   CREDITORS. 

(No.  4.) 

In  pursuance  of  an  order  of  Hon.  J.  Keck,  county  judge 
of  Fulton  Count}',  notice  is  hereby  given  to  all  persons  hav- 
ing claims  against  Dennis  Moon,  lately  doing  business  in 
the  city  of  Johnstown,  N.  Y.,  to  present  the  same,  with  the 
vouchers  therefor,  duly  verified,  to  the  subscriber,  assignee 
for  the  benefit  of  the  creditors  of  said  Dennis  Moon,  at  the 
office  of  said  assignee,  No.  89  West  Main  Street,  in  the  city 
of  Johnstown,  N.  Y.,  on  or  before  the  31st  day  of  December, 
1901. 

Dated  Johnstown,  N.  Y.,  the  3d  day  of  January,  1901. 

ANNA  CASPEH, 

SENECA   SHARP,  Assignee. 

Attorney  for  Assignee, 
No.  49  West  Main  Street,  Johnstown,  N.  Y. 

BOND. 

(No.  5.) 

KNOW    ALL    MEN    BY    THESE     PRESENTS,   that    WC,    JkniCS 

Jackson  of  the  City  of  Boston,  in  the  County  of  Suffolk  and 
Commonwealth  of  Massachusetts,  as  principal,  and  William 
Belding  and  Charles  Robertson,  both  of  the  same  place,  as 
sureties,  are  held  and  firmly  bound  unto  Peter  Harding,  of 
the  City  of  Johnstown,  in  the  County  of  Fulton  and  State 
of  New  York,  in  the  sum  of  four  thousand  dollars  ($4.000), 
gold  coin  of  the  United  States  of  America,  to  be  paid  to  the 
said  Peter  Harding,  his  executors,  administrators,  or  as- 
signs ;  for  which  payment,  well  and  truly  to  be  made,  we 
bind  ourselves,  our  heirs,  executors  and  administrators, 
jointly  and  severally,  firmly  by  these  presents.  Sealed  with 
our  seals  and  dated  the  tenth  day  of  December,  one  thou- 
sand nine  hundred. 

The  condition  of  this  obligation  is  such  that,  if  the  above 
bounden  James  Jackson,  his  heirs,  executors,  or  adminis- 
trators, shall  well  and  truly  pay,  or  cause  to  be  paid,  unto 
the  said  Peter  Harding,  his  executors,  administrators  or 
assigns,  the  just  and  full  sum  of  four  thousand  dollars 
($4,000),  in  gold  coin  of  the  United  States,  of  the  present 


Legal  Forms.  215 

standard  of  weight  and  fineness,  in  nine  months  from  the 
date  hereof,  with  interest  thereon,  at  the  rate  of  five  per 
cent,  per  annum,  without  fraud  or  delay,  then  the  preceding 
obligation  to  be  void,  otherwise  to  remain  in  full  force  and 
virtue. 

JAMES  JACKSON.  (Seal) 

In  presence  of  WILLIAM  BELDING.       (Seal) 

JOHN  DOE.  CHARLES  ROBERTSON.  (Seal) 

AGREEMENT.* 

(No.  6.) 

THIS  AGREEMENT,  made  this  tenth  day  of  December,  iii 
the  year  nineteen  hundred,  between  Ernest  Bowdish  and 
Fred.  A.  Bowdish,  composing  the  co-partnership  firm  of 
Bowdish  Brothers,  residing  and  doing  business  at  the  City 
of  Johnstown,  in  the  County  of  Fulton  and  State  of  New 
York,  parties  of  the  first  part,  and  John  Potts,  of  the  same 
place,  party  of  the  second  part,  WITNESSETH  :  That  said 
parties  of  the  first  part  agree  to  furnish  and  set  complete, 
according  to  the  specification  hereto  annexed  and  marked 
Exhibit  A  and  the  drawings  also  hereto  annexed  and 
marked  Exhibit  B,  both  of  which  are  made  part  hereof, 
upon  a  foundation  to  be  provided  by  said  party  of  the  second 
part,  iu  his  plot  in  the  grounds  of  the  Johnstown  Cemetery 
Association,  in  Johnstown  aforesaid,  a  monument  which  is 
to  be  of  the  best  quality  of  granite  known  as  the  best 
medium  Dark  Barre  granite,  and  each  and  every  part  and 
portion  thereof  shall  come  from  the  same  quarry,  and  be  of 
the  same  kind  and  quality  of  the  best  medium  Dark  Barre 
granite  ;  and,  in  consideration  of  the  faithful  performance 
of  the  foregoing  agreement  by  the  said  parties  of  the  first 
part,  the  said  party  of  the  second  part  agrees  to  pay  the 
sum  of  one  thousand  dollars  ($  1,000), t  when  this  agreement 
shall  have  been  performed  to  the  entire  satisfaction  of  the 
said  party  of  the  second  part,  but  not  before  the  expiration 
of  sixty  days  from  and  after  the  entire  completion  of  the 
work  herein  provided  for  and  performance  of  this  agreement. 

And  it  is  expressly  understood  and  agreed  by  the  parties 

*  In  law,  practically  synonymous  with  "  contract."  These  words  are  used 
interchangeably. 

tit  is  well  to  write  amounts  in  full,  followed  by  flsmres  in  parenthesis. 
This  i#  technically  known  as  the  "  consideration  "  of  the  agreement. 


216  Legal  Forms. 

hereto  that  the  payment  of  the  whole,  or  any  part,  of  the  said 
sum  of  money,  or  the  permitting  by  said  party  of  the  second 
part  of  the  erection  of  said  monument,  or  any  other  act  upon 
the  part  of  the  said  party  of  the  second  part,  shall  not  be 
considered,  or  construed,  as  an  acceptance,  in  whole  or  in 
part,  of  the  performance  of  this  agreement  on  the  part  ol, 
or  by,  the  said  parties  of  the  first  part,  until  one  year  shall 
have  elapsed  from  and  after  the  date  of  the  actual  erection 
of  said  monument  upon  said  cemetery  lot,  and  the  comple- 
tion of  all  work  in  connection  therewith  to  the  entire  satis- 
faction of  the  said  party  of  the  second  part  as  aforesaid  ; 
and  said  party  of  the  second  part  shall  have  the  privilege 
at  any  time,  within  the  said  period  of  one  year,  to  reject 
and  refuse  to  accept  said  monument,  and  all,  or  any  part  of, 
the  labor  upon,  or  all,  or  any,  of  the  material  used  in,  said 
monument,  on  account  of  the  non-compliance  of  the  parties 
of  the  first  part  with  this  agreement,  or  any  of  the  terms 
thereof,  or  with  said  specification  and  drawing,  or  either 
thereof,  or  any  part  of  either  thereof,  or  on  account  of  the 
imperfect  performance,  or  non-performance,  by  the  parties 
of  the  first  part  of  this  agreement  in  any  of  its  particulars, 
upon  written  notice  of  such  rejection  or  non-acceptance,  or 
both,  to  the  said  parties  of  the  first  part ;  and,  in  case  of 
such  rejection  or  non-acceptance,  said  party  of  the  second 
part  shall  be  entitled  to  recover  back  the  sums  of  money 
paid  to  the  parties  of  the.  first  part  for,  or  on  account  of, 
said  monument;  and,  in  that  event,  the  parties  of  the  first 
part  shall  remove  the  same  from  the  said  cemetery  lot  of 
the  party  of  the  second  part,  and  restore  the  said  cemetery 
lot  to  the  same  condition  in  which  it  was  at  the  time  of  the 
commencement  of  operations  thereon  for  the  erection  of 
said  monument,  at  the  cost  and  expense  of  the  parties  of 
the  first  part;  and,  in  case  of  the  refusal  of  the  parties  of 
the  first  part  so  to  do,  the  party  of  the  second  part  may 
cause  the  same  to  be  done  at  the  cost  and  expense  of  the 
parties  of  the  first  part. 

And  as  a  part  of  the  consideration  of  this  agreement  the 
parties  of  the  first  part  hereby  covenant  and  agree  that, 
in  case  the  party  of  the  second  part  shall  purchase,  or  con- 
tract to  purchase,  the  marker  or  index  stone  now  set  upon 
his  said  cemetery  lot,  they  will  and  shall  cut,  dress  and 
hammer  the  entire  surface  of  said  marker  or  index  stone  so 


Legal  Forms.  217 

that  the  same  shall  be  fine  and  smooth  and  be  of  the  best 
"twelve-cut"  work,  and  polish  or  hammer  the  letters 
thereon,  at  the  option  of  the  party  of  the  second  part." 

It  is  also  expressly  understood  and  agreed,  by  and  be- 
tween the  parties  hereto,  that  all  the  provisions,  state- 
ments and  requirements,  contained  in,  and  every  part  of 
said  specification  Exhibit  A,  and  of  said  drawing  Exhibit 
B,  respectively,  shall  be  treated  as  a  part  hereof,  and  the 
same  shall  be  binding  upon  the  parties  hereto,  and  shall 
bind  them  the  same  as  if  the  same  were  incorporated  in  the 
body  of  this  agreement,  for  all  the  purposes  of  this  agree- 
ment. 

IN  WITNESS  WHEREOF  the  parties  hereto  have  hereunto 
set  their  hands  and  seals  the  day  first  above  written. 

In  nresence  of  ERNEST  BOWDISH.     (Seal)* 

FRED.  A.  BOWDISH.  (Seal) 
JOHN  POTTS.    (Seal) 

GENERAL,  MUTUAL,  RELEASE. 

(No.  7.) 

THIS  INDENTURE,  made  this  fourteenth  day  of  Decem- 
ber, A.D.  1900,  between  John  Fudge,  of  Fonda,  Mont- 
gomery County,  and  State  of  New  York,  of  the  one  part, 
and  Theodore  B.  Catchem,  of  Fultonville,  in  the  County 
and  State  aforesaid,  of  the  other  part,  WITNESSETH:  That 
the  said  John  Fudge  and  Theodore  B.  Catchem  have  this 
day  canceled  and  delivered  up  to  the  other  certain  cov- 
enants, bonds,  notes,  and  written  contracts  upon  which  he 
claimed  to  have  demands  on  the  other;  the  said  claims  and 
instruments  so  canceled  and  delivered  up  being  supposed 
and  intended  to  be  all  the  claims  and  evidence  of  claims  by 
either  of  the  parties  hereto  on  the  other.  And,  in  considera- 
tion thereof,  each  of  them,  the  said  John  Fudge  and  Theodore 
B.  Catchem,  does  hereby,  for  himself  and  his  legal  representa- 
tives, release"  and  absolutely  and  forever  discharge  the  other 
of  and  from  all  claims  and  demands,  actions,  causes  of  action, 
of  every  name  and  nature,  so  that  neither  of  them  shall  have 
any  claim  on  the  other,  directly  or  indirectly,  on  any  con- 

*  In  many  States  wafer  seals  are  unnecessary,  in  such  States  the  word 
"seal,"  or  the  letters  "L.S."  (meaning  place  of  the  seal),  following  the  sig- 
nature, being  feufflcient.  See  signatures,  form  No.  7. 


218  Legal  Forms. 

tract,  or  supposed  liability,  or  thing  undertaken,  done,  or 
omitted  to  be  done,  from  the  beginning  of  the  world  to 
this  day. 

IN  WITNESS  WHEREOF,  the  said  parties  have  hereto  inter- 
changeably set  their  hands  and  seals,  the  day  and  year  first 
above  written. 

In  presence  of  JOHN  FUDGE.  (L.S.) 

GEORGE  JENKINS.     THEODORE  B.  CATCHEM.  (L.S.) 

CERTIFICATE  OF  ACKNOWLEDGMENT — ILLINOIS. 

(No,  8.) 

State  of  Illinois 
County  of  Cook 

On  this  sixth  day  of  June,  one  thousand  eight  hundred 
and  ninety-six,  before  me,  William  H.  Dunlop,  a  notary 
public  in  and  for  the  County  of  Cook,  residing  therein, 
duly  commissioned  and  sworn,  personally  appeared  Henry 
Harrison,  George  Morse  and  James  Johnson,  personally 
known  to  me  to  be  the  same  persons  whose  names  are  sub- 
scribed to  the  within  instrument,  and  they,  severally,  duly 
acknowledged  to  me  that  they  executed  the  same. 

IN  WITNESS  WHEREOF,  I  have  hereunto  set  my  hand  and 
affixed  my  official  seal,  at  my  office  in  the  City  of  Chicago, 
County  of  Cook,  the  day  and  year  in  this  certificate  first 
above  written.  AVILLIAM  H.  DUNLOP, 

(L.S.)  Notary  Public, 

111  and  for  the  County  of  Cook,  State  of  Illinois. 

NOTICE  TO  TENANT. 

(No.  9.) 

Take  notice,  that  you  are  justly  indebted  unto  me  in  the 
sum  of  twenty  dollars  for  rent  of  the  following  described 
premises,  to  wit:  All  the  second  floor  of  the  building  owned 
by  me  and  known  and' designated  as  No.  4  South  Touikins 
Avenue,  in  the  City  of  Rochester,  Monroe  County  and 
State  of  New  York,  ten  dollars  of  which  said  sum  of  rent 
became,  and  was,  due  and  payable  on  November  1,  1900. 
and  ten  dollars  of  which  said  sum  of  rent  became,  and  was, 
due  and  payable  on  December  1st,  1900,  which  said  sum  of 
twenty  dollars  rent  you  are  required  to  pay  to  me,  on  or 


Legal  Forms.  219 

before  the  expiration  of  three  clays  from  the  clay  of  the  ser- 
vice of  this  notice,  or  surrender  up  the  possession  of  the 
above-described  premises  to  me;  in  default  of  which  I  shall 
proceed,  under  the  statute,  to  recover  the  possession 
thereof. 

Dated  at  Rochester,  N.  Y.,  this  3d  day  of  December,  1900. 

PAUL  JONES, 

To  TIMOTHY  THOMPSON,  Landlord. 

Tenant. 

LEGAL  PAPERS  IN  ACTIONS. 
SUMMONS. 
(No.  10.) 

NEW  YORK  SUPREME  COURT. 

Trial  desired  in  Fulton  County. 


SAMUEL  BAKER, 

Plaintiff,* 
against^ 
JOSEPH  MOONEY  et  aZ.,J 

Defend  ants.§ 


To  the  above  named  defendants: 

You  are  hereby  summoned  to  answer  the  complaint  in 
this  action,  and  to  serve  a  copy  of  your  answer  on  the  plain- 
tiff's attorney  within  twenty  days  after  the  service  of  this 
summons,  exclusive  of  the  day  of  service,  and  in  case  of 
your  failure  to  appear,  or  answer,  judgment  will  be  taken 
against  you  by  default  for  the  relief  demanded  in  the  com- 
plaint. 

Dated,  December  2,  1900. 

JAME?   MORRIS, 

Plaintiff's  Attorney. 

Office  Address  and  (49  "West  Main  Street, 
Post-Office  Address  \  Johnstown,  N.  Y. 

*  Abbreviation:  "Prff." 

t"  Against"   is    often    abbreviated  to  "Ag'st."    Sometimes  its  Latin 
equivalent  versus  (abbreviation  "vs.")  is  used, 
i  el  alia—  Latin,  meaning  "  and  others." 
§  Abbreviation:  "Def'ts." 


220  Legal  Forms. 

DEMURRER. 

(No.  11.) 
Fol.  1*  SUPREME  COURT.     FULTON  COUNTY. 


LEONHARD  CHERRY  and  } 
JOHN  HENRY  MARTIN, 

against  f 

CHARLES  BUNCE. 

The  defendant,  Charles  Bunce,  demurs  to  the 
complaint  herein,  and  for  the  grounds  of  his  de- 
murrer states,  that  it  appears,  upon  the  face  of  the 
complaint,  that  there  is  a  misjoinder  of  parties 
plaintiff,  in  that  the  plaintiff,  John  Henry  Martin, 
is  improperly  joined  with  the  other  plaintiff,  be- 
cause he  is  shown  to  have  no  cause  of  action 
jointly  with  him,  but  that  the  sole  cause  of  action 
set  forth  in  the  complaint  is  shown  to  be  in  the 
"  2  other  plaintiff,  Leonhard  Cherry,  exclusive  of  said 
John  Henry  Martin. 

Dated,  January  10,  1901. 

RUDOLPH  SOUTH, 

Defendant's  Attorney, 
Office  Address  and  )  50  West  Main  Street, 
Post-Office  Address  f  Johnstown,  N.  Y. 

NOTICE   OF   PENDENCY   OF   ACTION. 

(No.  12.) 
Fol.  *  SUPREME  COURT.     FULTON  COUNTY. 

JOSEPH  KEPLEH,  ^ 

against 

WILLIAM   DOBBS,  Jr.,  ALBERT   MOORE,  MICHAEL   I 
L.  FUNK,  WILLIAM  BATES,   JOHN  A.   STARK  and 
JAMES  BUSH.  \ 

To  the  Clerk  of  the  County  of  Fulton  : 

Sir: — Notice  is  hereby  given  that  an  action  lias 
been  commenced,  and  is  now  pending  in  this  court, 

*  Fol.  Abbreviation  for  "  Folio."  Certain  legal  documents  are  required 
by  the  rules  of  practice  to  be  foliod — i.e.,  commencing  with  the  first  word, 
every  hundred  words  are  numbered  consecutively  in  the  margin  as  shown  in 
above  form.  In  practice,  it  is  customary  to  place  the  folio  opposite  each 
tenth  line,  ditto  marks  being  used  after  the  first,  instead  of  the  word,  "folio. v 


Legal  Forms.  221 

by  the  above-named  plaintiff  against  the  above- 
named  defendants,  the  object  of  which  action  is  to 
foreclose  a  mechanic's  lien,  a  notice  of  which  lien 
was  duly  filed  in  the  office  of  the  clerk  of  the 
Fol.  2  County  of  Fulton  on  the  2d  day  of  December,  1897. 
The  real  property  affected  by  such  lien  is  described 
as  follows,  viz. : 

All  that  tract  or  parcel  of  land  situate  in  the  city 
of  Johnstown,  County  of  Fulton  and  State  of  New 
York,  designated  as  lot  No.  seventy-one  (71)  upon 
a  map  or  plot  of  land  commonly  known  and  called 
"Kensington  Place,"  as  laid  out  upon  a  map  or 
plot  made  by  C.  Fiske,  C.  E.,  and.  filed  in  the  office 
of  the  clerk  of  the  County  of  Fulton  on  the  2d  day 
of  December,  1895,  and  being  the  same  premises 
conveyed  by  "William  T.  -Brown  and  others  to 
said  defendants  William  Dobbs,  Jr.,  and  John  A. 
"  3  Stark,  by  deed  dated  May  19,  1896,  which  deed 
was  recorded  in  said  clerk's  office,  May  23,  1896, 
in  book  of  deeds  No.  98  at  page  65,  and  also 
the  same  premises  described  in  a  contract  for  the 
conveyance  thereof  made  by  said  defendants  Albert 
Moore  and  Michael  L.  Funk  to  said  defendant 
William  Bates,  dated  Oct.  19,  1897,  and  filed  and 
recorded  in  said  clerk's  office,  October  20,  1897,in 
book  of  deeds  No.  101  at  page  42. 
Dated,  December  27,  1897. 

WILLIAM  BALCOM, 

Plaintiff's  Attorney, 
Office   Address    and  )  Johnstown, 
Post-Office  Address*  \       Fulton  Co.,  N.  Y. 
To  the  Clerk  of  the  County  of  Fulton  :— You  are 
hereby  directed  to  index  the  foregoing  notice  to, 
and  in  the  nauieo  of,  the  defendants  William  Dobbs, 
Jr.,  Albert  Moore,  Michael  L.  Funk,  William  Bates 
and  John  A.  Stark  in  the  above-entitled  action. 
WILLIAM  BALCOM, 

Plaintiff's  Attorney, 
Office  Address  and  )  Johnstown, 
Post-Office  Address  j       Fulton  Co.,  N.  Y. 

*  The  rules  of  practice  require  the  attorney  to  state  his  office  and  poet- 
"fflce  address. 


222  Legal  Forms. 

COMPLAINT.  * 

(No.  13.) 
Fol.  1  SUPREME  COURT.     FULTON  COUNTY. 


LEONHARD  CHERRY  aud  j 
JOHN  HENRY  MARTIN, 

against  C 

CHARLES  BUNCE.  ) 

The  above-named  plaintiffs,  for  a  complaint  aud 
cause  of  action  herein  against  the  above-named  de- 
fendant, respectfully  shows  to  the  court  and 
alleges  : 

That  heretofore,  and  on  the  21st  day  of  Septem- 
ber, 1900,  at  the  city  of  Gloversville,  Fulton 
County,  N.  Y.',  the  plaintiff  Cherry,  at  the  request 
of  the  defendant,  sold  and  delivered  to  him  certain 
goods,  wares  and  merchandise,  consisting  of  gloves 
and  mittens,  of  the  kinds,-  styles,  qualities  and 
quantities,  and  at  the  agreed  prices  next  herein- 

"  2  after  specifically  set  forth,  viz. :  twelve  dozens  of 
gentlemen's  outseam  one-button  gloves  at  the 
agreed  price  of  nine  dollars  per  dozen,  and  seven 
dozens  of  ladies'  overseam  seven-hooked  gloves  at 
the  agreed  price  of  eight  dollars  and  fifty  cents  per 
dozen,  amounting  in  the  aggregate  to  the  sum  of 
one  hundred  and  sixty-seven  dollars  aud  fifty  cents. 
That  by  the  terms  of  the  sale  of  said  goods,  wares 
and  merchandise,  the  purchase  price  thereof,  viz. : 
the  said  sum  of  $167.50  became,  and  was,  due  and 
payable  on  the  22d  day  of  .November,  1900,  no  part 

5'  3  of  which  has  been  paid,  and  there  is  now  justly  due 
and  owing  the  plaintiffs  by  the  defendant  the  said 
sum  of  $167.50,  with  interest  thereon  from  the  22d 
day  of  November,  1900. 

WHEREFORE  the  plaintiffs  demand  judgment 
against  the  defendant  for  the  sum  of  one  hundred 

*  "Complaint."  In  some  States,  and  in  the  United  States  courts,  this 
paper  is  known  as  Bill  or  Declaration.  It  contains  a  statement  of  facte 
which  constitute  the  canse,  or  causes,  nnnn  which  a  person  founds  hie 
risht  to  maintain  a  lawsuit. 


Legal  Forms. 

and  sixty-seven  dollars  and  fifty  cents,  with  interest 
thereon  from  November  22,  1900,  besides  the  costs 
and  disbursements  of  this  action. 

HENRY  W.  BALCOM, 

Plaintiff's  Attorney. 

Office  Address  and  )    No.  49  West  Main  Street, 
Post-Office  Address  \       '  Johnstown, 

Fulton  Co.,  N.  Y. 
State  of  Xew  York  *  ) 
County  of  Fulton       J 

Leonhard  Cherry,  being  duly  sworn,  says  :  That 
he  is  one  of  the  plaintiffs  in  the  above-entitled  ac- 
tion ;  that  he  has  read  the  foregoing  complaint 
Fol.  4  and  knows  the  contents  thereof,  and  that  the  same 
is  true  to  his  own  knowledge,  except  as  to  the 
matters  therein  stated  to  be  alleged  on  information 
and  belief,  and  that,  as  to  those  matters,  he  believes 
it  to  be  true. 

Subscribed  and  sworn  to  before  me  /  T  -, 

this  29th  day  of  December,  1900.   \  LEONHARD  CHERRY. 
MAJENDIE  JOHNSTON, 

Notary  Public,  Fulton  Co.,  N.  Y. 

ANSWER. f 

(No.  14.) 
Fol.  1  SUPREME  COURT.     FULTON  COUNTY. 


LEONHARD   CHERRY  and  ] 
JOHN  HENRY  MARTIN, 

against  C 

CHARLES  BUNCE. 

The  above-named  defendant,  for  an  answer  to  the 
complaint  herein  of  the  above-named  plaintiff. 

First  :  Denies  each  and  every  allegation  in  said 
complaint  contained. 

*  This  is  known  as  an  affidavit  of  verification.  It  does  not  necessarily 
form  part  of  the  complaint,  as  the  latter  may  be  used,  in  certain  cases,  with- 
out being  sworn  to. 

t  "Answer."  This  is  the  instrument  by  which  a  person  who  is  sued  sets 
forth  facts  which  are  claimed  to  constitute  a  legal  defense  why  the  person 
gnins:  him  should  not  obtain  the  relief  sousrht.  The  language  of  this  instru- 
ment, as  well  as  the  complaint  (see  preceding  form),  necessarily  varies 
according  to  the  circumstances  out  of  which  the  litigation  springs. 


224  Legal  Forms. 

Second  :  For  a  further  and  separate  answer  to  the 
complaint  herein,  the  defendant  alleges  that,  here- 
tofore, and  on  or  about  the  10th  day  of  December, 
1900,  the  plaintiff  and  this  defendant  fully  ac- 
counted to  and  with  each  other  as  to  the  cause  of 
action  set  forth  in  the  complaint  herein,  and  also  as 
to  all  moneys,  accounts  and  matters  of  difference  then, 
and  previous  thereto,  existing  between  them  ;  and, 
on  the  day  last  mentioned,  stated  the  account  then 
Fol.  2  between  them,  and  that,  upon  said  last  mentioned 
date,  there  was  found  due  and  owing,  upon  account 
of  all  said  moneys,  accounts  and  matters,  from  this 
defendant  to  said  plaintiff,  the  sum  of  fifty  dollars, 
which  said  sum  of  fifty  dollars,  this  defendant,  on 
said  last  mentioned  date,  paid  to  said  plaintiff,  who 
received  the  same  in  full  satisfaction  and  discharge 
of  all  claims  and  demands  then  existing  in  favor  of 
said  plaintiff  against  this  defendant. 

WHEREFORE,  the  defendant  demands  judgment 
against  the  said  plaintiff  that  the  complaint  herein 
be  dismissed,  with  the  costs  and  disbursements  of 
"    3  this  action. 

RUDOLPH  SOUTH, 

Defendant's  Attorney, 
Office  Address  and   \  50  West  Main  Street, 


Post-Office  Address  f         Johnstown,  N.  Y. 

State  of  New  York  ? 
County  of  Fulton    \ 

Charles  Bunce,  being  duly  sworn,  says  :  That  he 
is  the  defendant  in  the  above-entitled  action  ;  that 
he  has  read  the  foregoing  answer  and  knows  the 
contents  thereof,  and  that  the  same  is  true  to  his 
own  knowledge,  except  as  to  the  matters  therein 
stated  to  be  alleged  on  his  information  and  belief, 
and  that,  as  to  those  matters,  he  believes  it  to 
be  true. 

Subscribed  and  sworn  to  before  me  )  ~,    . 
this  2d  day  of  February,  1901.       \  CHARLES 
JEROME  BILLINGTON, 

Notary  Public,  Fulton  Co.,  N.  Y. 


262 


Intersected  Words. 


CHAPTER  XXXVII. 
INTERSECTED  WORDS. 

262.  The  practice  of  intersection,  or  the  writing  of  one 
stroke  consonant  through  another,  is  of  great  utility  in 
providing  the  writer  with  brief,  distinctive,  and  easily 
written  forms  for  the  titles  of  public  companies,  officials, 
the  names  of  political  parties,  frequently  occurring  col- 
loquial phrases,  etc.,  all  of  which  are  usually  uttered  with 
more  than  ordinary  rapidity  by  dictators  or  public  speakers. 
A  knowledge  of  the  principle  of  intersection,  as  set  forth  in 
the  following  phrases,  will  enable  the  student  to  devise  simi- 
lar contractions  for  any  very  long  or  otherwise  awkward 
phrase  which  is  common  to  the  profession  or  business  in 
which  he  may  be  engaged.  When  the  direction  of  the 
strokes  will  not  allow  of  intersection,  the  second  letter 
may  be  written  close  to  or  under  the  first. 

P  is  employed  to  represent  party  in  such  phrases  as  : 


Republican  party 
Democratic  party 
Free  Soil  party 
Independent  party 


Liberal  party 
People's  party 
Populist  party 
Prohibition  party 


Labor  party  ^\       political  party 

D  is  employed  to  represent  department  in  phrases  like  : 

. — r  j         Agricultural    depart- 
ment 

Fire  department 


<- — /T      Inquiry  department 
f^C      Legal  department 
^JjJ-      Life  department 
Medical  department 
Navy  department 


Passenger  department 
Police  department 
\i      •  Post-Offlce  department 

Purchasing  department 


$ 

* 


226  Intersected  Words. 

R  may  be  used  to  represent  railroad  or  railway  ;  thus: 


Grand  Trunk  R.  R. 
Illinois  Central  R.  R. 
New  York  Central  R.  R. 


\s  Northern  Pacific  R.  R. 
Nl^O<C  Pennsylvania  R.R. 
C/Vsout 


thern  Pacific  R.  R. 


is  used  to  represent  society  ;  as  : 


;^4-  Agricultural  society 
"V    Bible  society 
j\^    Humane  society 
Medical  society 


^->VMissionary  society 
V^-Phonographic  society 
[^    Temperance  society 
I).     Tract  society 


K  is  employed  to  represent  company  in  titles  like : 

^ 

& 


American  Bank  Note  Co. 
American  Express  Co. 
-P   American  News  Co. 


Adama  Express  Co. 
James  Smith  &  Co. 
National  Express  Co. 


New  York  Life  Ins.  Co 

Standard  Oil  Co. 


Steamship  Co. 
Transportation  Co. 

United  States  Ex. 
Union  Trust  Co. 


T  is  employed  to  represent  committee ;  as: 


-  ^k, 
[I 


Claims  committee 
Entertainment  committee 
Executive  committee 


VJj>Finauce  committee 
a^    House  committee 
_L/     Judiciary  committee 


Association  may  be  represented  in   phrases  by  the   circle 
s  and  -tion  hook;  thus: 


•••-^Bar  association 
Sp     Building  association 
/— «•    Improvement  association 


>-*   \i  Mutual  aid  association 
Savings  association 
Temperance  association 


Miscellaneous  Intersected  Phrases  and  Contractions,   22? 

MISCELLANEOUS 'INTERSECTED  PHRASES  AND 
CONTRACTIONS. 


..7T?.. 

Act  of  Assembly 

7 
-4^-            High-water  mark 

Act  of  Congress 

o^\^       House   of     Representa- 

u 

Assembly  chamber 

cT                     tives 
fc~\_      Local  traffic 

!^—  <f° 

Atlantic  coast  line 

~\  T      *             T 

j_^~ 

at  owner's  risk 

«T»             Major  Jones 

s~  —  K        matter  of  form 

^ 

—at  sender's  risk 

>> 

g  vf 

cv                  Member  of  Congress 

vX" 

Bill  of  lading 

1 

.  board  of  directors 

*\^/7           Member  of  Legislature 
S\             Mutual  Life  Ins.  Co. 

capital  punishment 

"a" 

:~  f 

Capt.    Caxton 

V.  j-s        Official  stenographer 

Chamber  of  Commerce 

\/^~        Palace  car 

y 

City  bank 

\l              Phonetic  Journal 

-fs^ 

Citv  and  county  of  New- 
York 

°y            Postmaster-General 

p 

City,  Courty,  and  State 

'  President  of  the  U.  8. 

—  ^£-- 

or'  New  York 

^LP 

ef-^ 

Col.  Dixon 

<\/~  =      Professor  Morgan 

p 

Constitution  of  the  U.  S. 

C^.             Quinquennial  valuation 

—  f 

Custom  House 

o_xf           Secretaiy  of  State 

1 

*/        Secretary  of  War 

^J 

Equitable    Life    Assur- 
ance Society 

Senate  chamber 

vq- 

Farmer's      Loan      and 
Trust  Co. 

/•         Stock  Exchange 

s 

General  Manager 

vP            United  States 

General  Scofield 

V^D            Vice-President 

L^_ 

German-American     In- 
surance Co. 

t/<ra>         Ways  and  Means 

!28  CHAPTER  XXXVIll. 

LIST  OF  SIMILAR  WORDS, 

DISTINGUISHED   BY  A   DIFFERENCE   OF   OUTLINE. 

W\«*  tico  or  thrre  vordi  appear  under  one  outline,  they  are  diftinguithed  by 
petition,  marked  by  Jiffuret.  Vowelt,  and  the  prefix  com  or  con,  marked 
in  Italic,  thould  be  interted,  even  in  Reporting. 

ptbl     /\,   1   compatible  ;     2  potable ;     3  computable  ; 

J^     pitiable 

N ^  v 

ptk  optic ;     ]      poetic 

ptns    '^_P   1  aptness;      [      pettiness 

ptrf  v/V^  petrify;      4     putrefy 

"NO 
ptrfkshn  -y^-—^   petrifaction;       \^__^  putrefaction 

ptrn   \  patron;    ^^  pattern 

pier  \ —  1  packer ;  2  pecker ;       ^ — \  epicure 

pstr    N   1  compositor ;    2  pastry ;     jV/  pasture,  posture 

pshnt     p  passionate ;    V/^  patient 

pnr  \_^  2  opener ;  NX— ^\  pioneer ;    \^^  penury 

pljr     y  pledger ;    f     plagiary ;  N//    pillager 

plsd    N>  1  placid ;  \O  1  palsied ;  2  palisade ;  3  pellucid 

plsmn  \-s  placeman;   \f*s~*  policeman 

prps  \S\>  1  porpoise ;  2  purpose ;    X^  perhaps,  propose 

prprt  NS  appropriate ;       \y1  property ;   ^i  propriety} 

X/^V  purport 
prprshn  NX^  appropriation ;  ^\^>  preparation 

prtTc  "\ pai-take  ;   \/ —    1  operatic ;  2  portico 

prtv    \^_  comparative ;   N/i   operative 
prtnd  \   pretend ;  X^'  portend 

prtr    ^"v   aperture ;     ^]    portray ;      \^        operator ; 
x  porter ;   ^/^'~x  parterre 


List  of  Similar   Words.  229 

prch  ^>  2  approach ;  3  preach ;  \^  1  purch ;  2  perch, 

porch 
ptf>%N  proffer ;\/ prefer;  X/^N porphyry,  periphery 

prvd  %    provide  ;   '^  pervade 

prst  NV.    poorest;  \/  3  purest;  "vf  pursuit 

.prsto  %-  prosecute ;  ^V^"  persecute 

prskshn  "\^>  prosecution ;  \^~=>  persecution      . 

prsr  *\~.    oppressor;     ^.x    piercer;    \S^ peruser; 

\/) 
^  ^  pursuer 

prsn  Nj^  2  person ;  3  prison ;  NVJJ*"X  1  parson ;  2  compari- 
son; 3  Parisian 

present,   personate  ;    N/^    pursuant 
parcel,  parsley ;   \/*     parasol,  perusal 
Prussia  ;  \^  perish,  Persia 

oppression,  Prussian ;  \S*  portion,  appor- 
tion, Persian 

prmnnt  ^V--^^    1  prominent ;  3  (rather  than  2,  to  pre- 
vent clashing  with  the  previous  word)  perman- 
ent; °^_^,  pre-eminent 
prns   ^N       3  poorness;  \/^~s>   3  pureness 

prnss     o  princes ;     ^    princess 

prls  \X      1  paralyze ;  2  perilous 

btf"\     beautify;      \^    beatify 

blsm   \-~^  blossom ;  "V*5^  balsam 

brb     \^  bribe ;   \/\  barb 

brbr  ^\  briber ;     ^^7  bribery ;    vV  Barbary 

brk  *\ 2  break,  broke ;   3  brick,  brook ;    \/       bark, 

Irkr  'X —  breaker,  broker ;  \S      barker  [barrack 

brth  *>     1  broth;  2  breath;  V(  birth 


230  List  of  Similar  Words. 

brl    *V  barley;    \f    barrel,    burial;    ^-«y"    barely; 

\X      barilla 
tnr  |_^    1  tanner;  2  tenor;  3  tuner;  L^v  tenure 

trtr    h  2  traitor ;  3  treater ;  ^-x   Tartar ;    'U.    torture ; 

\/\/  territory,  Tartary 

trst     \  1  contrast ;  2  traced,  trust ;     \   3  truest 
trshn     \j  attrition,  contrition ;     y>    contortion,  tertian ; 

\?  iteration 
dtr  *\  1  daughter,  auditor ;  2  debtor ;  3  doubter ;  *~\  editor. 

I       1  awditory  dietary ;  2  deter ;  3  detour 
dtrmnt  *\    detriment-al ;    K^  determined 

dfns    k_p     advance,  defence,  deafness ;    I         defiance, 

diaphanous 
dfr  \    2  defray ;  3  differ ;  \^  2  defer ;  3  devour ;  L     defier 

—  I  ^ 

dvrs     J     divers,  adverse ;    \f  diverse,  divorce 

dstn  \  destine ;  V    destiny ;  p    destination ;  \^  distinction 

dss  \  disease,  disuse  (v.) ;  Ji  disuse  (n.)  •  I  1  diocese; 
dsst  4  diseased ;  \  deceased ;  p  desist  [3  decease 
dltr  \^  adulteiy  ;  rl  idolatry  ;  *r  idolater; 

Y      adulator,  dilwter 

jnt  f^  giant ;   /  agent ;  jnts  (^  giants ;   £-1  giantess 
jntl  i-  genteel,  gentle,  gently ;    j^-  Gentile 
Mrs      \  actors,  actress ;       k  cateress ;       [/?    cauterize 
kvlr     ^-  1  caviller ;  ~     *-v  cavalier 
kskrt  — o-  execrate ;    — Q-^  excoriate 
kskrshn  — o-^   excursion,  execration;      r*   ?  excoriation 
kips  c    \o  eclipse ;  _j^\>  collapse 
kltr  c     \     clatter  ;        L      culture 


List  of  Similar   Words.  231 

1  clock  ;  2  cloak,  click ;  — f      colic,  calico 
1  climb ;  2  claim,  acclaim ;    7^   column,  culm 
1  climate ;  7T  calumet ;     ^  calamity 

culminate ;    ~£~ — i  calumniate 
corporal ;  "^V-f  corporeal 

krt  =~   1  accord,  cart ;  2  court ;  /    1  carat",  accurate ; 

2 curate;  — /I  charta;   c    I    cruet 

krtr  c~]    1  carter ;    2  Creator,  crater ; ^  curator ; 

L  creature,  courtier ;  ^~\^    criteria 
krdns    J  credence  ;  ""    -  1  accordance 
krj     I    courage ;  — //  carnage 

grdn  ^^  1  garden ;    *\J  1  guardian,  Gordian ;  2  guerdon 
gvnt   c— ^    l    granite ;     — /~    garnet 
fktr  ^ — n  factor;          \.  factory 
ford  V^  favoured;    V^  favourite 
fnrl  \jtf  funereal ;   \y-  funeral 
frtn  V^-'  fortune ;  S  frighten ;  VXl  fourteen 
frm  ^.       1  farm,  form,  conform ;  2  firm,  cowfinn,  affirm ; 

\^/^^  f  oinim 

frns  V/°  ferns,  cowference ;  ^~x       fairness 
frwrd  ^  foi-ward;    CX)  froward 

vlshn  vJ°  1  violation;  2  volition,  evolution;   V  eowvulsion 
vlns  \J**  1  violence ;   V  vileness  [2  verity 

vrt    ^.  convert ;     vx  avert ;   ^i    virtue ;   v/|  1  variety ; 
sprt  <\  spirit ;    \/    support,  suppurate ;    ^  separate 
std  f  2  stead,  staid;  3  steed,  stood;     [   steady,  study; 

P  1  sighted ;  2  seated,  suited 
stshn  J*  1  citation  ;  2  station ;       f  situation 


14  R. 


^ 


232  List  of  Similar   Words. 

str     J    oyster,    Easter;    ^    austere,  astir;    \    astray, 
Austria ;    ^  estuary 

sdrt  \,    considerate;  1  considered 

sst  )  assist ;   9  consist ;    )  essayist ;     «r    society,  siesta 

snt  ^  1  sent  (to  distinguish  it  from  the  present  tense 
<±,    send,  written  on  the  line) 

sntr  Q-^f]  sentry ;       |X    century 

sltr  ^lX    solitary,   conciliatory;     &|    sultry; 
€^~  psaltery,  salutary 

mpsJint(d)  /-v^  impassioned ;  /-s^""  impatient 

0m  ^^  1  many,  my  own ;  2  money 

mnstr  s-^y    1  monster ;  2  minster,  minister ;    "  |    min- 
istry ;  ^    IX  monastei-y 

mrdr  <?—^  murder ;    s**/\  marauder 

mrdrs  <?~~-t>  murders ;        \  murderous,  murderess 

ndfnt  v~U'indefinite ;     s-\i  undefined 

njns     i__p  ingenious ;     l*\  ingenuous 

nvdftjbl  v^\v    unavoidable ;        ^1    inevitable 

Ibrt  r*  laboured  ;    XV  elaborate 


Ikl  (~  local;  f~~       1  likely;  2  luckily 

— X9  .X^' 

Irnd   f       learned  (verb)  ;    r        leamed  (adj.) 
rtsns  X|j_p  i  righteousness,  riotowsness  ;  2  reticence 
rgrt  /*~   regard;  .XH  regret 
rsm   /^    3  resume;    /0-%    3  reassume 

9  ,  S> 

rsrs  ^  racers,  resource ;  ^5^^  i-acehorse 
rust  x^  3  rinsed;    "")    earnest 
hmn  /-^    1  Hymen,  human;  2  humane 
hind  ^  HoUand ;    ^Highland;    <^r  Holy  Land 
hrn    \  1  horn ;    3   hereon ;    \__,    1    horny ;    3   herein ; 
eron ;  <g^~'  heroine 


List  of  Similar  Words.  233 


Exercise  96. 

[Introducing  words  in  the  preceding  list  from  compatible  to 
parterre  (p.  230).] 

It  is  not  compatible  with  reason  that  men  should  make  them- 
selves pitiable  by  indulgence  in  potable  poisons,  for  the  sake  of 
passing  pleasure,  yet  the  number  who  thus  err  is  |  not  comput- 
able. The  results  of  such  a  habit  are  deplorable.  The  optic 
nerve  is  weakened,  and  the  once  pellucid  eye  is  dimmed  ;  all 
poetic  sensibility  is  deadened  ;  the  face,  formerly  |  placid,  is 
wrinkled  and  worn  ;  the  hand,  which  used  to  be  strong  enough 
to  tear  down  a,  palisade,  is  now  palsied  and  nerveless  ;  there  is 
an  aptness  to  exhibit^e^mess  |  of  temper,  with  passionate  out- 
bursts of  anger,  where  patient  forbearance  had  previously  been 
the  rule.  The  whole  pattern  of  life  is  changed  when  a  man 
becomes  a  patron  of  the  |  places  where  the  poison  is  retailed. 
All  appetite  for  ordinary  food  is  lost,  and  the  victim  (perhaps  a 
packer  in  a  store,  or  a  compositor  on  the  daily  press)  becomes  |  a 
mere  pecker,  a  kind  of  epicure,  whose  palate  must  be  tickled 
•with pastry,  whose  very  posture  at  table  must  be  studied,  and 
for  whom  no  pasture  could  produce  meat  |  of  sufficient  tender- 
ness. He  may,  perhaps,  become  a  pledger,  a  plagiary,  or  even 
the  pillager  of  a  porpoise  skin  from  some  placeman  or  police- 
man,  for  the  purpose,  of  obtaining  means  |  to  purchase  the  poison 
he  desires.  True,  he  may  propose  to  return  the  property  upon 
an  appropriate  occasion,  when  he  comes  back  to  the  paths  of 
propriety,  but  his  preparation  \  for  the  appropriation  of  an- 
other's property  would  belie  the  purport  of  his  words,  and  none 
would  believe  him.  It  is  ot  comparative  insignificance  whether 
a  man  be  an  operative  in  |  a  factory,  a  porter  on  the  railway, 
an  operator  in  a  telegraph  office,  the  designer  of  a  parterre  in 
the  park,  or  of  a  beautiful  portico  in  the  city — he  |  cannot  par- 
take of  the  poisons  referred  to  without  danger.  He  may  be  the 
principal  in  an  operatic  company,  or  an  artist  able  to  portray 
nature  with  the  utmost  fidelity — indulgence  |  is  equally  dan- 
gerous for  him.  It  is  useless  to  pretend  that  the  beginning  of 
the  habit  does  not  portend  the  end.  It  is,  as  it  were,  an  aper- 
ture that  soon  |  expands,  and  it  is  frequently  the  opener,  or 
pioneer  of  the  road  that  leads  to  penury.  Worst  of  all,  it  may 
petrify  the  heart,  and  there  will  be  petrifaction  where  I  there 
should  be  benefaction.  Universal  excess  would  undoubtedly 
destroy  or  putrefy  society,  and  general  putrefaction  would  end 
in  total  annihilation.  (410) 


234  List  of  Similar  Words. 

Exercise  97. 

[Introducing  words  in  the  preceding  list  from  approach  to 

birth  (p.  231).] 

Any  story  may  preach  a  lesson  if  we  approach  its  perusal 
properly,  but  we  only  parch  up  our  minds  if  we  perch  ourselves 
upon  a  high  horse  at  what  may  |  be  called  the  porch  or  entrance 
to  the  story,  and  prefer  to  gallop  through  it  without  pausing  to 
accept  the  lessons  which  the  author  may  proffer.  Thus  we  miss 
the  |  beauty  of  the  porphyry  while  we  measure  the  periphery  of 
the  figure  drawn  upon  it.  In  the  pursuit  of  recreation  or 
knowledge  we  should  provide  ourselves  with  a  plan  and  |  should 
decline  to  allow  the  interest  which  may  pervade  even  the  poorest 
story  to  draw  us  from  the  prosecution  of  our  plan,  which  we 
should  prosecute  with  the  ambition — the  |  purest  of  all  ambi- 
tions |  of  making  ourselves  better  men  and  women.  Whether 
it  be  a  story  of  oppression  and  persecution  by  a  Prussian  or  a 
Persian,  or  an  attempt  by  |  some  person  to  personate  or  perse- 
cute a  Parisian  parson  and  cast  him  into  prison  ;  whether  the 
narrative  be  remarkable  for  excellence  or  poorness  ;  whether 
&  portion  ot  the  scene  be  |  laid  in  Prussia  or  in  Persia — it  mat- 
ters not  ;  we  should  have  the  object  of  our  reading  ever  present, 
and,  as  pursuant  with  this  object,  we  should  apportion  some 
time  |  to  a  comparison  of  the  characters  and  the  pureness  of 
their  motives  of  action.  Otherwise,  our  reading  is  perilous 
and  we  may  paralyze  our  good  taste,  if,  indeed,  it  does  |  not 
perish  entirely.  With  the  object  of  self-improvement  ever 
prominent  in  his  mind,  the  peruser  of  books  becomes  a  pursuer 
of  knowledge,  and  the  history  of  the  oppressor  and  |  piercer  of 
human  ,hearts  may  thus  be  read  with  permanent  and  preSmi- 
nent  advantage.  We  beatify  the  hero  who  would  brook  no  op- 
position ;  who  would  even  beautify  virtue  ;  who  refused  the  | 
bribe  of  the  briber  and  despised  his  bribery  ;  and  we  condemn 
the  villain  from  Barbary,  whose  heart  was  like  a  brick  or  a 
stone  ;  who  broke  faith  with  the  princess  \  and  sold  the  princes 
to  their  enemies  ;  who  would  break  his  word  as  lightly  as  he 
would  blow  upon  a  cup  of  parsley  broth;  who  regarded  a  prom- 
ise as  mere  |  breath,  which  died  in  the  moment  of  its  birth. 
Whether  he  be  a  broker  or  &  parcel  carrier  ;  whether  he  live  in 
a  barrack  or  a  palace,  the  reader  may  |  gather  a  blossom  from 
every  story,  and  obtain  a  balsam  for  the  wounds  caused,  it  may 
be,  by  the  barb  of  jealousy.  But  he  must  strip  off  the  outer 
bark  \  if  he  would  find  the  kernel  ;  he  must  open  the  parasol 
if  he  would  learn  its  construction.  Not  every  barker  is  a  good 
watcher,  nor  every  talker  a  wise  man.  |  (450) 


List  of  Similar  Words.  235 

Exercise  98. 

[Introducing  words  in  the  preceding  list  from  barley  to 
culture  (p.  232).] 

Poor  Brown,  the  tenor  vocalist  and  piano  tuner,  who  had  the 
tenure  of  the  shop  in  Long  Avenue,  died  to-day.  Last  Wednes- 
day week  he  was  passing  with  his  uncle,  the  |  tanner,  between 
ti  sack  of  barley  and  a  barrel  of  barilla  outside  a  store,  and  cut 
his  hand  on  a  screw  in  the  barrel.  The  wound  was  barely 
visible  at  |  first,  and  he  thought  it  would  be  no  detriment  to 
him,  so  he  resisted  every  advance  made  by  his  friends  that  he 
should  see  Dr.  Jackson,  urging  the  doctor  s  deafness  \  as  a  de- 
fence. The  pain,  however,  broke  down  his  defiance,  and  he 
determined  to  wait  no  longer.  Meanwhile,  a  kind  of  diapha- 
nous skin  had  formed,  the  flesh  was  diseased  and  |  the  doctor 
had  to  excoriate  the  wound.  The  pain  of  the  excoriation  caused 
Brown  to  make  fearful  contortions.  It  appears  the  friction  or 
attrition  of  his  glove  had  inflamed  the  |  wound  and  caused 
blood  poisoning.  He  now  expressed  his  contrition,  with  much 
iteration,  for  his  neglect.  The  doctor  did  his  best  to  arrest  the 
disease,  and  Brown  tried  to  use  |  the  hand,  but  the  pain  forced 
him  to  desist,  and  he  was  obliged  to  disuse  the  limb,  which, 
from  disuse,  became  quite  powerless.  A  sort  of  tertian  fever 
set  in,  |  and  the  poor  fellow  died  to-day.  The  news  of  his  de- 
cease has  been  sent  all  over  the  diocese.  Alas  !  who  knows 
what  fate  may  destine  for  one  ?  Who  can  foretell  |  his  own  des- 
tiny ?  But,  at  least,  we  know  our  destination,  and  should 
strive  to  reach  it.  The  burial  takes  place  on  Wednesday,  and 
will  be  attended  by  myself  and  my  |  daughter ;  the  city  audi- 
tor, who  was  a  debtor  of  Brown's,  and,  by  the  bye,  a  doubter  of 
his  musical  ability  ;  the  editor  of  the  local  newspaper,  a  man 
whose  auditory  \  senses  are  not  keen,  and  who  is  obliged  to 
follow  a  dietary  to  deter  the  increase  of  the  trouble  ;  the  lead- 
ing actress  and  all  the  actors  from  the  local  theatre  ;  |  Mrs. 
Gray,  the  cateress,  who  wanted  Brown  to  cauterize  the  wound 
which  caused  his  death  ;  and  others  of  the  most  diverse  opin- 
ions, holding  divers  views  on  all  questions  except  the  |  merits 
of  Brown,  and  having  in  some  instances  expressed  adverse 
judgments  upon  each  other's  work.  But  Brown  was  such  a 
gentle,  good  fellow,  with  so  genteel  an  air,  and  he  |  dealt  so 
gently  with  the  failings  of  others,  that  he  was  a  favorite  with 
all,  Hebrew  or  Gentile,  Tartar  from  Tartary,  or  Indian  from 
the  native  territory.  He  was  no  I  adulator  or  diluteroi  truth, 
but  he  distinguished  between  the  idolater  and  his  idolatry,  and 
could  be  kind  to  the  one  while  he  would  execrate  the  other. 


236  List  of  Similar  Words. 

His  execration  of  |  what  he  thought  idolatry  would  not  prevent 
him  accompanying  the  idolater  on  an  excursion.  The  idle 
clatter  of  bigots  could  not  disturb  a  man  of  his  culture,  and  I 
have  |  seen  him  chatting  as  heartily  with  the  giantess  and 
giants  in  a  show  as  he  would  with  the  agent  of  a  powerful 
company.  Poor  fellow  !  he  was  no  caviller.  He  |  was  not  a 
traitor  or  a  common  treater,  and  he  would  have  suffered  torture 
rather  than  betray  a  trust.  A  contrast  has  been  traced  by  a 
giant  between  his  distinction  \  and  nobility,  and  the  adultery 
of  the  cavalier  which  led  to  a  divorce.  The  sad  accident 
caused  an  eclipse  of  his  powers,  followed  too  soon  by  an  utter 
collapse.  The  |  truest  estimate  of  the  character  of  the  deceased 
may  be  formed  from  the  fact  that  however  men  might  differ 
from  one  another  and  be  ready  almost  to  devour  one  another  | 
in  argument,  they  would  always  defer  to  him,  for  he  was  a  de- 
fier  of  bad  temper.  It  is  proposed  to  defray  the  funeral  ex- 
penses by  public  subscription.  The  procession  will  |  have  to 
make  a  detour  to  avoid  the  busiest  streets.  (640) 

Exercise  99. 

[Introducing  words  in  the  preceding  list  from  clock  to 
situation  (p.  233).] 

At  four  o'clock  the  officer  took  his  cloak,  and  the  click  of  his 
revolver  showed  that  he  expected  opposition  if  not  a  calamity 
on  the  climb  up  the  hill  before  |  his  column  could  claim  victory, 
or  acclaim  their  triumph  over  the  calico  dressed  warriors  on  the 
crest  of  the  eminence.  Accurate  preparations  had  been  made  at 
a  conference  the  night  |  before,  so  that  the  attack  might  accord 
with  that  made  at  other  points,  and  it  was  only  after  all  was 
arranged  that  he  threw  himself  among  the  ferns  in  the  |  ammu- 
nition cart  that  served  as  a  tent  and  thought  he  might  in  fair- 
ness court  a  little  sleep.  In  accordance  with  his  orders  he  was 
aroused  at  four  by  the  corporal,  \  who  was  guardian  over  the 
garden  where  the  cart  stood,  and  he  prepared  for  his  attempt 
to  cut  the  Gordian  knot  which  faced  him,  and  for  which  he 
hoped  to  |  receive  promotion  as  a  guerdon.  The  climate  had 
told  on  the  troops.  Food  was  scarce,  and  the  men  often  chewed 
the  culm  from  the  grass  to  save  them  from  colic.  \  They  hoped 
the  coming  fight  would  culminate  in  victory,  and  that  they 
might  smoke  the  calumet  of  peace  again.  They  did  not  calum- 
niate their  foes,  whose  courage  was  undoubted  and  |  whose 
carriage  was  noble.  Nor  did  they  give  credence  to  the  charges 
of  vileness  and  violence  made  against  the  enemy.  As  Corporal 
Blake  said,  they  did  not  mind  corporeal  foes.  |  and  why  should 
they  fear  immaterial  things  ?  It  was  useless  to  wear  funereal 


List  of  Similar  Words.  237 

faces  even  at  their  own  funeral ;  they  knew  the  fortune  of  war, 
and  why  frighten  themselves  with  |  mere  rumors  ?  He  had 
gone  through  fourteen  engagements  unharmed,  and  he  affirmed 
his  firm  conviction  that  this  would  form  no  exception.  His 
dream  the  night  before  seemed  to  confirm  his  |  belief  that  he 
would  yet  retire  to  a  farm  and  conform  to  the  civil  law  as  he 
had  to  the  military.  He  might  even  be  heard  in  the  national 
forum,  |  and  who  knew  but  what  he  might  become  a  factor  and 
•  own  a  factory  ?  In  no  way  forward  or  froward,  Blake  was 
favored  by  the  officers  and  a  favorite  of  |  the  men.  He  was 
steady,  fond  of  study,  and  had  a  spirit  that  would  support  him 
in  any  station  or  situation.  He  read  an  order  as  if  it  were  a  | 
citation.  When  Private  Wood's  wound  began  to  suppurate, 
and  they  had  to  separate  him  from  the  rest,  it  was  staid  Blake 
who  stood  by  him  and  acted  in  the  stead  \  of  a  nurse.  A  man 
of  verity,  he  showed  his  virtue  in  a  variety  of  ways,  and  if  he 
could  not  convert  a  bad  tempered  man  he  could  always  avert  \ 
his  wrath.  Keen  sighted  and  a  fine  rider,  he  was  best  suited 
when  seated  on  his  steed,  where  he  sat  firm  as  a  granite  rock. 
He  wore  an  eighteen  carat  \  gold  ring,  set  with  a  garnet,  which, 
with  a  silver  cruet,  had  been  given  him  by  his  cousin,  a  curate. 
Blake's  opinions  were  the  criteria  to  which  the  men  appealed. 
|  They  recognized  in  him  a  creature  above  themselves.  They 
had  heard  him  talk  of  evolution,  personal  volition,  the  attri- 
butes of  the  Creator,  and  the  effects  of  a  violation  of  His  | 
laws  ;  of  the  convulsion  of  the  crater  of  Vesuvius,  and  Magna 
Charta.  -He  seemed  to  know  the  duties  of  a  curator,  a  cour- 
tier, and  even  those  of  a  carter.  Such  |  was  Corporal  Blake, 
the  first  to  climb  the  hill,  and,  alas  !  the  first  to  fall.  The  vic- 
tory was  won,  but  his  spirit  had  fled  ere  the  column  paused 
for" rest.  |  (600) 

Exercise   100. 

[Introducing  words  in  the  preceding  list  from  oyster  to 
heroine  (p.  234).] 

Dear  Walter,  |  I  sent  you  this  morning  a  copy  of  our  local 
paper  containing  an  elaborate  but  not  labored  article  on  "Society 
in  the  Twelfth  Century."  Please  send  it  to  |  Mr.  Brown  when 
you  have  read  it.  The  essayist,  who  is  both  ingenious  and 
ingenuous,  was  luckily  engaged  by  the  proprietors  as  likely  to 
increase  the  circulation  of  the  paper,  |.and  I  learned  yesterday 
that  since  his  series  of  learned  articles  commenced  the  circula- 
tion has  trebled.  It  is  inevitable  that  some  readers  should 
express  dissatisfaction  with  the  articles.  That  is  |  unavoid- 
able. There  are  some  who  would  prefer  an  article  on  a  favorite 
racehorse,  or  on  the  great  racers  of  the  past ;  or  a  life  of  some 


238  &st  of  Similar  Words. 

marauder  who  was  hanged  |  for  murder,  with  a  detailed  list  of 
the  murders  he  committed  during  his  murderous  career  ;  and 
if  the  article  dealt  with  a  murderess  such  readers  would  enjoy 
it  all  the  |  more.  But  those  who  regard  the  newspaper  as  a 
resource  which  will  help  them  to  sound  knowledge  would  regret 
the  discontinuance  of  articles  such  as  the  one  I  have  sent  \  you. 
The  author  appears  to  be  an  austere,  impatient  man,  and  cer' 
tainly  his  style  is  occasionally  quite  impassioned  ;  but  his  man- 
ner is  very  conciliatory.  He  is  astir  every  morning  at  |  six, 
and,  cold  or  sultry,  he  takes  a  solitary  walk,  like  a  sentry,  down 
by  the  estuary,  which  has,  he  says,  a  salutary  effect  upon  him 
and  makes  him  enjoy  |  his  siesta  at  noon.  He  has  travelled  a 
good  deal  in  the  Holy  Land,  and  would  not  go  astray  in  any 
country  in  the  world.  He  boasts  the  possession  of  |  an  ancient 
psaltery,  given  him  by  some  friends  in  Austria,  whom  he  visits 
every  Easter.  His  duties  on  the  paper  are  somewhat  indefinite 
and  undefined,  but  they  consist  mainly  of  |  contributing  essays 
on  history  and  literature,  though  he  is  expected  to  assist  the 
editor  when  required.  He  is  a  very  considerate  man,  and  his 
etyle  is  considered  excellent.  He  is  |  very  humane,  with  strong 
human  feelings,  and  endeavors  to  advance  in  righteousness 
everyday.  He  is  remarkable  for  his  reticence  and  his  abhor- 
rence of  riotousness  of  every  kind.  It  is  |  my  own  opinion,  and 
the  opinion  of  many  .others,  that  he  will  make  both  money  and 
fame  in  the  profession  he  has  chosen.  I  hear  he  is  to  take  up  | 
the  yoke  of  Hymen  next  week.  The  lady  is  a  Miss  Holland, 
daughter  of  a  horny  handed  son  of  toil,  and  he  met  her  during 
a  Highland  tour  last  summer.  |  She  was,  by  the  way,  the 
heroine  of  quite  a  romantic  adventure  in  a  search  for  herons' 
eggs.  But  herein  lies  a  story  which  I  will  resume  when  I  see  | 
you.  Suffice  it  to  say  that  hereon  rests  the  beginning  of  the 
affection  which  is  to  be  finally  cemented  next  week.  1  think 
the  finest  thing  in  the  article  I  |  have  sent  you  is  the  descrip- 
tion of  the  departure  of  the  pilgrims  for  the  Holy  Land.  They 
all  wear  the  pilgrim's  badge — a  shell,  not  unlike  the  shell  of 
an  |  oyster — and  there  are  representatives  of  every  class.  There 
is  the  old  minister  from  some  famed  minster,  anxious  to  crown 
his  ministry  by  a  visit  to  the  holy  places  ;  and  |  there  too,  it 
may  be,  is  one  who  has  been  a  veritable  monster,  but  is  now 
earnest  in  his  repentance  and  eager  to  reassume  his  position  in 
the  world,  with  |  his  conscience  freed,  cleansed,  or  rinsed,  as  it 
were,  from  the  stains  of  his  past  life.  A  horn  is  sounded,  and 
the  pilgrims'  ship  passes  slowly  away  past  the  monastery.  \  I 
commend  the  whole  article  to  your  earnest  study,  my  dear 
Walter,  and  I  shall  be  glad  to  resume  the  subject  when  I  see 
you.  Yours  very  truly,  PHILIP  SHAW.  |  (630) 


263-265  Shorthand  in  Practice.  239 

CHAPTER    XXXIX. 
SHORTHAND    IN    PRACTICE. 

263.  The  student  who  has  worked  through  the  preced- 
iLg  instruction  and  exercises  with  diligence  and  care,  and 
has  at  the  same  time  practised  note-taking  from  dictation, 
will  now  have  attained  to  a  correct  style,  together  with  a 
certain  proficiency  in  speed,  which  he  should  have  no  diffi- 
culty in  increasing  by  further  practice.  . 

264.  As  the  art  of  shorthand  is  generally  acquired  for 
use  in  some  special  occupation,  various  books  have  been 
prepared  by  the  publishers  of  the  present  work  with  a  view 
to  furnishing  assistance  to  the  phouographer  when  entering 
on  a  particular  course  of  practical  employment.    Shorthand 
is  largely  used  in  the  commercial,  the  railroad,  or  the  law- 
yer's office,  and  is  a  sine  qua  non  in  the  office  of  the  profes- 
sional shorthand  writer.     For  appointments  as  secretaries 
to  politicians,  military  men,  scientists,  authors,  and  others, 
shorthand    ability   is   usually   expected,  and  many  similar 
fields  of  labor,  in  which  the  art  is  in  daily  employment, 
might  be  mentioned.    Skill  in  the  kindred  art  of  typewriting 
is  also  very  generally  required  in  connection  with  the  occu- 
pations mentioned  above  ;  this  is,  indeed,  now  so  generally 
recognized,  that  it  is  unnecessary  to  do  more  than  allude  to 
it  here. 

265.  The  following  descriptive  notes  on  the  special  fea- 
tures of  the  books,  etc.,  referred  to  above  will,  we  think, 
prove  useful : 

READING  PRACTICE.  In  addition  to  Pitman's  Journal  and 
Pitman's  Shorthand  Weekly,  which  contain  a  large  variety  of 
reading  matter  in  the  different  styles  of  phonography,  there  are 
a  varietv  of  works  issued  in  engraved  shorthand,  particulars 
of  which  will  be  found  in  the  catalogue  at  the  end  of  this 
volume. 


240  Shorthand  in  Practice. 

WRITING  PRACTICE.  For  dictation  practice,  BUSINESS  COR- 
RESPONDENCE IN  SHORTHAND,  No.  2,  price  25c. ;  REPORTING  Ex- 
ERCISES,  price  20c.,  an  additional  set  of  exercises  on  the  list  in 
this  book  ;  GRADUATED  DICTATION  BOOKS,  with  counted  matter, 
price  lOc.  each  ;  PITMAN'S  TWENTIETH  CENTURY  BUSINESS  DIC- 
TATION AND  LEGAL  FORMS  'in  ordinary  type),  price,  stiff  boards 
and  cloth  back,  75c. ;  cloth,  $1.00  •  PITMAN'S  PROGRESSIVE  DIC- 
TATOR, price,  cloth  gilt,  85c.,  with  other  works  described  in 
the  catalogue,  are  recommended. 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK,  price  40c.;  cloth,  50c.  The 
principles  of  phraseography  are  fully  treated,  and  about  two 
thousand  examples  of  general  phrases  are  given,  with  guidance 
for  making  an  unlimited  number. 

LEGAL  PHRASE  BOOK,  price  20c.  Contains  a  large  collection 
of  legal  phrases,  in  addition  to  those  given  in  this  work  ;  RAIL- 
WAY PHRASE  BOOK,  price  20c.  A  valuable  collection  of  phrases 
used  in  railroad  correspondence. 

INSTRUCTION  IN  LEGAL  WORK.  (In  ordinary  type.)  By 
Henry  W.  Thome.  For  court  stenographers  and  law  students, 
price  25c. 

PHONOGRAPHIC  OUTLINES  OF  MEDICAL  TERMS,  price  75c. 
Comprises  a  large  collection  of  shorthand  forms  for  medical 
terms,  and  is  of  especial  value  to  all  engaged  in  medical  or 
similar  work. 

TECHNICAL  REPORTING,  price  50c. ;  cloth,  60c.  Includes 
instruction  on  technical  reporting,  with  forms  for  mechanical, 
medical,  and  other  terms  ;  a  system  of  contractions  in  connec- 
tion with  figure  reporting ;  Latin  quotations,  and  French 
phrases. 

REPORTER'S  ASSISTANT,  price  50c. ;  cloth,  60c.  Contains  all 
unvocalized  outlines  which  represent  more  than  one  word, 
together  with  guidance  for  discovering  the  correct  word  repre- 
sented by  any  given  outline  in  shorthand  notes ;  and  shows 
the  different  outlines  employed  for  similar  words. 

ISAAC  PITMAN'S  SHORTHAND  DICTIONARY  (Ninth  Edition, 
revised  and  enlarged),  cloth,  gilt,  $1.50;  full  roan,  $1.75. 
Contains  the  approved  shorthand  forms  for  60,000  words  and 
6,000  proper  names,  with  type  key. 

SHORTHAND  TEACHER'S  HAND-BOOK,  price,  cloth,  60c.  20th 
Century  Edition.  Revised  to  date.  Contains  valuable  bints 


»66  Shorthand  in  Practice.  241 

and  practical  guidance  on  every  point  connected  with  the  art 
of  teaching,  and  should  be  the  companion  of  every  teacher. 
The  Western  Penman  (Cedar  Rapids,  Iowa)  says  :  "Contains 
exceptionally  good  matter.  The  hints  and  methods,  while  in 
accordance  with  well  known  pedagogical  principles,  are  so 
clearly  stated  in  a  matter  of  fact  way,  that  they  appear  rather 
as  talks  from  some  practical  teacher." 

A  PRACTICAL  CotTRSE  IN  TOUCH  TYPEWRITING.  Seventh 
edition,  revised  and  enlarged,  50c.,  cloth,  75c.  The  design  of 
this  work  is  to  teach  touch  typewriting  in  such  a  way  that  the 
student  will  have  an  absolute  command  of  every  key  on  the 
keyboard,  and  be  able  to  strike  any  key  more  readily  without 
looking  than  would  be  the  case  with  the  aid  of  sight.  A  chart 
containing  Keyboard  and  Diagrams,  in  five  colors,  accompanies 
each  copy.  Contains  specimens  of  actual  Business  Letters, 
Legal  Forms,  Specifications,  etc.  Published  for  single  or 
double  Keyboard  machines. 

SHORTHAND  XOTE-BOORS.  It  is  essential,  whether  writing 
for  practice  or  in  actual  work,  that  note-books  containing 
paper  of  a  superior  quality  be  used.  The  "Fono"  series  of 
note-books,  ranging  in  price  from  5c.  upwards,  and  in  size  from 
a  page  4  in.  x  6£  in.  to  5£  in.  x  8^  in.,  contain  only  best  quality 
of  paper,  and  will  be  found  the  most  suitable  for  all  kinds 
of  shorthand  work ;  for  complete  list,  see  catalogue. 

266.  In  most  offices  -where  the  shorthand  writer  is  en- 
gaged, he  will  probably  find  some  reference  books.  But  he 
will  soon  discover  that  it  is  needful  to  have  on  his  own 
bookshelf,  or  in  his  desk,  certain  books  of-  reference  for  his 
individual  use.  The  most  indispensable  work  is  un- 
doubtedly a  good  English  Dictionary,  and  the  STANDARD 
DICTIONARY  can  be  highly  recommended.  Next  in  im- 
portance, if  his  work  is  of  a  literary  character,  will  be  a 
guide  to  all  proper  names  in  biography,  geography, 
mythology,  etc.,  and  "  The  Century  Cyclopedia  of  Names" 
will  prove  most  serviceable.  In  place  of  this  comprehensive 
work,  a  good  biographical  dictionary  and  a  gazetteer  are 
necessary.  Should  an  encyclopaedia  be  preferred,  the 
latest  edition  of  Nelson's  Perpetual  Loose-Leaf  Encyclopaedia 
will  cover  all  requirements. 
16 


242         SPEECH  OF  PATRICK  HENRY. 


J   i   /    1   .    <r^x      i  J 
"I"       '       / '  \  >.^_ 

s    .       $r          /        0       ON  (~— P   V         J> 

<TVT  ,       <  /    x     v^  v_    V->v^x     .     J    N^  <r 

I- — N 

p  v    a 

>         x       V, — ^^\     ,         | 

<*s_ 

*^~^  .^. 
Hx 

^.^    ^ 

Q^^X        I  ~^  y  d 

.^.  ~ 


'-e 


1 


Reporting  Exercises.  243 

CHAPTER    XL. 

SPEECH   OF  PATRICK  HENRY. 

Delivered  before  the  Virginia,  House  of  Burgesses  in  March, 
1775.  This  speech  is  considered  one  of  the  great  Masterpiece* 
of  American  Oratory. 

[856  words.] 
(For  Shorthand  see  opposite  page.) 

No  man,  Mr.  President,  thinks  more  highly  than  I  do  of 
the  patriotism,  as  well  as  abilities,  of  the  very  worthy  gen- 
tlemen who  have  just  addressed  the  House.  But  different 
men  often  see  the  same  subjects  in  different  lights  ;  and, 
therefore,  I  hope  it  will  not  be  thought  disrespectful  to 
those  gentlemen  if,  entertaining  as  I  do,  opinions  of  a 
character  opposite  to  theirs,  I  should  speak  forth  my 
sentiments  freely,  and  without  reserve.  This  is  no  time 
for  ceremony.  The  question  before  the  House  is  one  of 
awful  moment  to  this  country.  For  my  own  part,  I  con- 
sidei  it  as  nothing  less  than  a  question  of  freedom  or 
slavery.  And  in  proportion  to  the  magnitude  of  the  subject, 
ought  to  be  the  freedom  of  debate.  It  is  only  in  this  way 
that  we  can  hope  to  arrive  at  truth,  and  fulfill  the  great 
responsibility  which  we  hold  to  God  and  our  country. 
Should  I  keep  back  my  opinions  at  such  a  time,  through 
fear  of  giving  offence,  I  should  consider  myself  as  guilty  of 
treason  toward  my  country,  and  of  an  act  of  •  disloyalty 
toward  the  majesty  of  heaven,  which  I  revere  above  all 
earthly  kings.  Mr.  President  :  It  is  natural  to  man  to 
indulge  in  the  illusion  of  hope.  We  are  apt  to  shut  our 
eyes  against  a  painful  truth,  and  listen  to  the  song  of  that 
siren,  until  she  transforms  us  into  beasts.  Is  this  the  part 
of  wise  men  engaged  in  a  great  and  arduous  struggle  for 
liberty  ?  Are  we  disposed  to  be  of  the  number  of  those 
who,  having  eyes,  see  not  ;  and  having  ears,  hear  not 
tr.e  tilings  which  so  nearly  "concern  our  temporal  salva- 
tion ?  For  my  part,  whatever  anguish  of  spirit  it  may 
cost,  I  am  willing  to  know  the  whole  truth  ;  to  know  the 
worst,  and  to  provide  for  it.  I  have  but  one  lamp  by 
which  my  feet  are  guided  ;  and  that  is  the  lamp  of  experi- 
ence. I  know  of  no  way  of  judging  of  the  future  but  by 
the  past,  and  judging  by  the  past,  I  wish  to  know  what 


244 


SPEECH  OF  PATRICK  HENEY. 


I 


\  .L.? 


S 


I 


^^v:-'  ^ 


\ 


~    "Wo 

v  ' 


~  ^    --  ,    )x 

•  /  -  .  Y^ 

.    )x       . 


Speech  of  Patrick  Henry.  245 

there  has  been  in  the  conduct  of  the  British  ministry  for  the 
last  ten  years,  to  justify  those  hopes  with  which  gentlemen 
have  been  pleased  to  solace  themselves  and  the  House  ?  Is  it 
that  insidious  smile  with  which  our  petition  has  been  lately 
received  ?  trust  it  not,  Sir,  it  will  prove  a  snare  to  your  feet. 
Suffer  not  yourselves  to  be  betrayed  with  a  kiss.  Ask  your- 
selves how  this  gracious  reception  of  our  petition  comports 
with  those  warlike  preparations  which  cover  our  waters  and 
darken  our  land.  Are  fleets  and  armies  necessary  to  a  work 
of  love  and  reconciliation  ?  have  we  shown  ourselves  so  un- 
willing to  be  reconciled,  that  force  must  be  called  in  to  win 
back  our  love  ?  Let  us  not  deceive  ourselves,  Sir;  these  are  the 
implements  of  war  and  subjugation — the  last  arguments  to 
which  kings  resort.  .  .  .  They  tell  us,  Sir,  that  we  are 
weak — unable  to  cope  with  so  formidable  an  adversary. 
But  when  shall  we  be  stronger  ?  will  it  be  the  next  week 
or  the  next  year  ?  will  it  be  when  we  are  totally  disarmed, 
and  when  a  British  guard  shall  be  stationed  in  every  house 
shall  we  gather  strength  by  irresolution  and  inaction  ?  Shall 
we  acquire  the  means  of  effectual  resistance  by  lying 
supinely  on  our  backs,  and  hugging  the  delusive  phantom  of 
hope,  until  our  enemies  have  bound  us  hand  and  foot  ? 

Sir,  we  are  not  %veak,  if  we  make  a  proper  use  of  those 
means  which  the  God  of  nature  hath  placed  in  our  power. 
Three  millions  of  people  armed  in  the  holy  cause  of  liberty, 
and  in  such  a  country  as  that  which  we  possess,  are  invin- 
cible by  any  force  which  any  enemy  can  send  against  us. 
Besides,  Sir,  we  shall  not  fight  our  battles  alone.  There  is  a 
just  God  who  presides  over  the  destinies  of  nations,  and  who 
will  raise  up  friends  to  fight  our  battles  for  us.  The  battle, 


246  INDUSTRY   AND   HAPPINESS. 

°\  Q,   >L:C;     I    > 


C 

w  .y!     L  -P  ^  -V  T"  ?    1 

.  )  1 

V  I,  ^  !    ^  '  '  ^  C  ^  L_; 
^  _  *r-.^  VX—  ^  I! 

INDUSTRY  AND   HAPPINESS. 
* 

,  r 


v-<- 

V-°e  X>. 


x  a  X  / 


•Industry  and  Happiness.  247 

Sir,  is  not  to  the  strong  alone  ;  it  is  to  the  vigilant,  the 
active,  the  brave.  Beside,  Sir,  we  have  no  election.  If  we 
were  base  enough  to  desire  it,  it  is  now  too  late  to  retire 
from  the  contest.  There  is  no  retreat,  but  in  submission 
and  slavery  !  Our  chains  are  forged.  Their  clanking  may 
be  heard  on  the  plains  of  Boston  !  The  war  is  inevitable 
— and  let  it  come  !  I  repeat  it,  Sir,  let  it  come  !  !  It  is 
vain,  Sir,  to  extenuate  the  matter.  Gentlemen  may  cry, 
peace,  peace — but  there  is  no  peace.  The  war  is  actually 
begun  !  The  next  gale  that  sweeps  from  the  north  will 
bring  to  our  ears  the  clash  of  resounding  arms  !  Our  brethren 
are  already  in  the  field  I  why  stand  we  here  idle  ?  What  is 
it  that  gentlemen  wish  ?  what  would  they  have  ?  Is  life  so 
dear,  or  peace  so  sweet,  as  to  be  purchased  at  the  price  of 
chains  and  slavery  ?  Forbid  it,  Almighty  God  !  I  know, 
not  what  course  others  may  take  ;  but  as  for  me — give 
me  liberty  or  give  me  death  ! 

INDUSTRY  AND   HAPPINESS. 

[1093  words.] 

Health  is  the  platform  on  which  all  happiness  must  be 
built.  Good  appetite,  good  digestion,  and  good  sleep  are 
elements  of  health,  and  industry  confers  them.  As  use 
polishes  metal,  so  labor  the  faculties,  until  the  body  per- 
forms its  unimpeded  functions  with  elastic  cheerfulness  and 
hearty  enjoyment.  Buoyant  spirits  are  an  element  of  happi- 
ness, and  activity  produces  them  ;  but  they  fly  away  from 
sluggishness.  Men's  spirits  are  like  water,  which  sparkles 
when  it  runs,  but  stagnates  in  still  pools,  and  is  mantled 
with  green,  and  breeds  corruption  and  filth.  The  applause 
of  conscience,  the  self-respect  of  pride,  the  consciousness 


248  INDUSTRY   AND   HAPPINESS. 

\      ^         •     ^ — ^_-/    /    \  > 

If  \  *f)  I 


<\ 


O 


\     J^,  ,_=,  ^y°  { 

'    6 — s    ' — '*—*'     ' 

-H  \  G  <: 


;  V. 


A 


JL  ^*   " 

V- 


Industry  and  Happiness.  249 

of  independence,  a  manly  joy  of  usefulness,  the  consent  of 
every  faculty  of  the  mind  to  one's  occupation,  and  their 
gratification  in  it — these  constitute  a  happiness  superior  to 
the  fever-flashes  of  vice  in  its  brightest  moments.  After  an 
experience  of  ages,  which  has  taught  nothing  from  this, 
men  should  have  learned  that  satisfaction  is  not  the  product 
of  excess,  or  of  indolence,  or  of  riches  ;  but  of  industry, 
temperance,  and  usefulness.  Every  village  has  instances 
which  ought  to  teach  young  men  that  he  who  goes  aside 
from  the  simplicity  of  Nature,  and  the  purity  of  virtue,  to 
wallow  in  excesses,  carousals,  and  surfeits,  at  length  misses 
the  errand  of  his  life  ;  and,  sinking  with  shattered  body 
prematurely  to  a  dishonored  grave,  mourns  that  he  mistook 
exhilaration  for  satisfaction,  and  abandoned  the  very  home 
of  happiness  when  he  forsook  the  labors  of  useful  Industry. 
The  poor  man  with  Industry  is  happier  than  the  rich  man 
in  Idleness  ;  for  labor  makes  the  one  more  manly,  and 
riches  unmans  the  other.  The  slave  is  often  happier  than 
the  master,  who  is  nearer  undone  by  license  than  his  vassal 
by  toil.  Luxurious  couches — plushy  carpets  from  Oriental 
looms — pillows  of  eider-down — carriages  contrived  with 
cushions  and  springs  to  make  motion  imperceptible — is  the 
indolent  master  of  these  as  happy  as  the  slave  that  wove  the 
carpet,  the  Indian  who  hunted  the  northern  flock,  or  the 
servant  who  drives  the  pampered  steeds  ?  Let  those  who 
envy  the  gay  revels  of  city  idlers,  and  pine  for  their  mas- 
querades, their  routs,  and  their  operas,  experience  for  a  week 
the  lassitude  of  their  satiety,  the  unarousable  torpor  ef 
their  life  when  not  under  a  fiery  stimulus,  their  desperate 
ennui  and. restless  somnolency;  they  would  gladly  flee  from 
their  haunts  as  from  a  land  of  cursed  enchantment. 


250 


INDUSTRY   AND   HAPPINESS. 


"-3 


>  / 
7  °  /",  \ 

/ 


V 


. 


\ 


N      S      <^-  X      < 

—  ^        _ 

r  •/  <  r 


Industry  and  Happiness.  251 

Industry  gives  character  and  credit  to  the  young.  The 
reputable  portions  of  society  have  maxims  of  prudence,  by 
which  the  young  are  judged  and  admitted  to  their  good 
opinion.  Does  he  regard  his  word  ?  Is  he  industrious  f  Is 
ke  economical  ?  Is  he  free  from  immoral  habits  f  The  answer 
which  a  young  man's  conduct  gives  to  these  questions, 
settles  his  reception  among  good  men.  Experience  has 
shown  that  the  other  good  qualities  of  veracity,  frugality, 
and  modesty  are  apt  to  be  associated  with  industry.  A 
prudent  man  would  scarcely  be  persuaded  that  a  listless, 
lounging  fellow  would  be  economical  or  trustworthy.  An 
employer  would  judge  wisely,  that  where  there  was  little 
regard  for  time,  or  for  occupation,  there  would  be  as  little, 
upon  temptation,  for  honesty  or  veracity.  Pilferings  of  the 
till  and  robberies  are  fit  deeds  for  idle  clerks  and  lazy 
apprentices.  Industry  and  knavery  are  sometimes  found 
associated  ;  but  men  wonder  at  it  as  at  a  strange  thing. 
The  epithets  of  society  which  betoken  its  experience  are  all 
in  favor  of  Industry.  Thus,  the  terms  "  a  hard-working 
man,"  "an  industrious  man,"  "a  laborious  artisan,"  are 
employed  to  mean,  an  honest  man,  a  trustworthy  man. 

I  may  here,  as  well  as  anywhere,  impart  the  secret  of  what 
is  called  good  and  bad  luck.  There  are  men  who  bemoan  in  the 
poverty  of  a  wretched  old  age  that  luck  forever  ran  against 
them.  One,  with  a  good  profession,  lost  his  luck  in  the  river 
where  he  idled  away  his  time  a-fishing  when  he  should  have 
been  in  the  office.  Another,  with  a  good  trade,  perpetually 
burnt  up  his  luck  by  his  hot  temper,  which  provoked  all  his 
employees  to  leave  him.  Another,  with  a  lucrative  business, 


252 

r 


INDUSTRY   AND  HAPPINESS. 

\  s^  yj  1      b  v.  .  x 


T  A£U  %  °  f 

r  \r 


, 


U 


\ 


V. 


I        \  ^ 

U    \  , 


T 


r 


\ 


Industry  and  Happiness.  253 

lost  his  luck  by  amazing  diligence  at  everything  but  his 
business.  Another,  who  steadily  followed  his  trade,  ho 
steadily  followed  his  bottle.  Another,  who  was  honest  and 
constant  to  his  work,  erred  by  perpetual  misjudgments — he 
lacked  discretion.  Hundreds  lose  their  luck  by  indorsing, 
by  sanguine  speculations,  by  trusting  fraudulent  men,  and 
by  dishonest  gains.  A  man  never  has  good  luck  who  has  a 
bad  wife.  I  never  knew  an  early-rising,  hard-working,  pru- 
dent man,  careful  of  his  earnings,  and  strictly  honest,  who 
complained  of  bad  luck.  A  good  character,  good  habits, 
and  iron  industry  are  impregnable  to  the  assaults  of  all 
the  ill  luck  that  fools  ever  dreamed  of.  But  when  I  see  a 
tatterdemalion  creeping  out  of  a  groggery  late  in  the  fore- 
noon with  his  hands  stuck  into  his  pockets,  the  rim  of  his 
hat  turned  up,  and  the  crown  knocked  in,  I  know  he  has 
had  bad  luck — for  the  worst  of  all  luck  is  to  be  a  sluggard, 
a  knave,  or  a  tippler. 

Industry  is  a  substitute  for  Genius.  Where  one  or  more 
faculties  exist  in  the  highest  state  of  development  and  ac- 
tivity— as  the  faculty  of  music  in  Mozart — invention  in  Ful- 
ton— ideality  in  Milton — we  call  their  possessor  a  genius. 
But  a  genius  is  usually  understood  to  be  a  creature  of  such 
rare  faculty  of  mind  that  he  can  do  anything  without  labor. 
According  to  the  popular  notion,  he  learns  without  study, 
and  knows  without  learning.  He  is  eloquent  without  prep- 
aration, exact  without  calculation,  and  profound  without 
reflection.  While  ordinary  men  toil  for  knowledge  by  read- 
ing, by  comparison,  and  by  minute  research,  a  genius  is 
supposed  to  receive  it  as  the  mind  receives  dreams.  His 
mind  is  like  a  vast  cathedral,  through  whose  colored  win- 
dows the  sunlight  streams,  painting  the  aisles  with  the 
varied  colors  of  brilliant  pictures. — Henry  Ward  JSeecTier. 


254 


PAPER  MONEY. 


Jt2i  <^  x  \ 


ivs.fi,  -,uv^> 

l         ^y   K       v_y  ^»  N/I^N  .  "cx\     ..r?.A   x 

v  V     v        -      '  •> 

< 

> 

X 

^  ^  x^ 

J  '"^~"  x  '^" 

-x.   x    ]s~\  ,  y~^ 

(     ^~   J...V^.;     6,     . 
>        J    \^      "^C  x 

'  c  —  <• 


. 

i    \ 


w:,  , 
.D.,  ^., 
*  f~*\+  w: 


Paper  Money.       .  255 

PAPER    MONEY. 

[653  words.] 

The  Paper  Money  of  the  United  States  is  in  the  form  of 
promissory  notes  of  two  kinds,  namely  :  Convertible  or  Coin 
Notes,  and  Inconvertible  Notes.  The  former  consists  of  Gold 
Certificates,  Silver  Certificates,  and  Treasury  Notes.  A 
Gold  Certificate  is  a  note  or  bill  containing  a  declaration  to 
the  effect  that  there  has  been  deposited  in  the  United  States 
Treasury  a  sufficient  amount  of  gold  coin  to  redeem  the 
certificate  on  demand  of  the  holder.  A  Silver  Certificate  is 
a  note  or  bill  containing  the  same  declaration  -with  reference 
to  silver  coin.  Treasury  notes  are  mere  promises  to  pay  in 
coin  without  specifying  gold  or  silver.  Inconvertible  Notes 
are  those  which  bear  simply  a  promise  to  pay  without  refer- 
ence to  time  or  manner  in  which  they  shall  be  paid.  Na- 
tional Bank  Notes  are  one  form  of  inconvertible  paper. 
These  notes  do  not  bear  the  promise  of  the  government  to 
pay,  but  that  of  the  Bank  by  which  they  are  issued  ;  they 
are  secured  by  government  bonds  deposited  with  the  United 
States  Treasurer,  and  are  payable  on  demand  in  some  form 
of  legal  tender  money,  but  not  necessarily  coin.  Thus,  it 
will  be  seen  that  the  people  of  the  United  States  are  at 
present  using  four  kinds  of  dollars — the  gold  dollar,  the 
silver  dollar,  the  paper  dollar,  which  may  be  exchanged  for 
coin,  and  the  paper  dollar  which  cannot  be  exchanged  for 
coin.  They  circulate  at  par  ;  that  is,  the  purchasing  power  of 
one  is  equal  to  the  purchasing  power  of  any  of  the  others. 
Coin  is  universally  acknowledged  to  possess  greater  intrinsic 
worth  than  any  other  kind  of  money;  so  it  would  naturally 
seem  that  its  purchasing  power  would  be  greater  ;  but  it 
must  be  remembered  that  the  purchasing  power  of  a  paper 
dollar  is  not  based  upon  its  own  intrinsic  value,  but  upon  the 
coin  for  which  it  is  exchangeable.  The  purchasing  power  of  an 
inconvertible  paper  dollar,  however,  is  based  upon  nothing 
but  confidence  in  the  government.  Such  a  note  has  no  value 


258 


PAPER   MONEY. 


' "  V 


i 

4- 


x  \  .^:>L 


C 
, 


c  A  x 


Y^    '  -tS 


Jku 


280;     <= 


Paper  Money.  257 

in  itself,  nor  is  there  any  provision  whatever  made  for  its  re- 
demption in  coin  ;  yet,  such  is  the  confidence  in  the  govern- 
ment's promise  to  redeem  them,  at  some  time  and  in  some 
manner,  not  specified,  that  they  are  exchanged  at  par  \vith 
the  other  kinds  of  paper  money.  Indeed,  confidence  is  an 
element  that  enters  largely  into  the  value  of  all  money.  We 
do  not  know  that  a  gold  coin  contains  all  that  is  claimed  for 
it  in  the  way  of  purity  or  weight,  but  we  have  confidence  in 
the  government's  stamp  upon  it,  and  we  receive  it  without 
question;  nor  do  we  know  for  a  certainty  that  there  are 
sufficient  silver  coins  in  the  government  treasury  to  make 
good  all  silver  certificates,  but  such  is  our  confidence  in 
the  statements  and  promises  of  the  government  that  we 
freely  receive  such  certificates  in  return  for  our  goods  or 
our  labor.  Thus,  we  see  how  several  kinds  of  money  with 
unequal  values  can  be  made  to  circulate  with  equal  purchas- 
ing power;  yet  this  equality  in  purchasing  power  may  be 
destroyed.  A  notable  example  of  depreciation  of  paper 
money  happened  during  the  civil  war.  At  the  beginning 
of  the  war  the  government  borrowed  large  sums  of  money 
by  the  issue  of  bonds;  the  war  continued  and  the  money 
was  soon  exhausted.  Unable  to  procure  any  more  funds  in 
this  way,  Congress  voted  to  issue  inconvertible  notes.  These 
notes  were  called  "Greenbacks  "  and  were  simply  promises 
to  pay  at  some  time  or  other,  nobody  knew  when  nor  how. 
They  were  made  legal  tender  and  everybody  was  obliged  to 
accept  them  in  payment  of  debts.  As  confidence  in  the 
government  sank,  the  purchasing  power  of  the  "Green- 
backs "  became  less.  At  one  time,  the  price  of  gold  went 
to  280;  that  is,  it  took  two  dollars  and  eighty  cents  in 
"Greenback"  money  to  eoual,  in  purchasing  pawer,  one 
dollar  in  gold. 
17 


258  HOW  AND  WHEN  TO  READ. 


sX 


r  c. 


.     .V. 


W5 


How  and  When  to  Read.  »58 

HOW  AND   WHEN  TO  READ. 

[746  words.] 

The  art  of  reading  to  the  best  advantage  implies  the  com- 
mand of  adequate  time  to  read.  The  art  of  having  time  to 
read  depends  upon  knowing  how  to  make  the  best  use  of 
our  days.  Days  are  short,  and  time  is  fleeting,  but  no  one's 
day  ever  holds  less  than  twenty-four  hours.  Engrossing  as 
one's  occupation  may  be,  it  need  never  consume  all  the  time 
remaining  from  sleep,  refreshment,  and  social  intercourse. 
The  half  hour  before  breakfast,  the  fifteen  minutes  waiting  for 
dinner,  given  to  the  book  you  wish  to  read,  will  soon  finish  it 
and  make  room  for  another.  The  busiest  men  I  have  known 
have  often  been  the  most  intelligent  and  the  widest  readers. 
The  idle  person  never  knows  how  to  make  use  of  odd 
moments;  the  busy  one  always  knows  how.  Yet  the  vast 
majority  of  people  go  through  life  without  ever  learning  the 
great  lesson  of  the  supreme  value  of  moments.  Let  us  sup- 
pose that  you  determine  to  devote  two  hours  every  day  to 
reading.  That  is  equivalent  to  more  than  seven  hundred 
hours  a  year,  or  to  three  months  of  working  time,  of  eight 
hours  a  day.  What  could  you  not  do  in  three  months,  if 
you  had  all  the  time  to  yourself  1  You  could  almost  learn 
a  new  language,  or  master  anew  science;  yet  this  two  hours 
a  day,  which  would  give  you  three  months  of  free  time 
every  year,  is  frittered  away,  you  scarcely  know  how,  in 
aimless  matters  that  lead  to  nothing.  A  famous  writer  of 
our  century,  some  of  whose  books  you  have  read — Edward 
Bulwer-Lytton — devoted  only  four  hours  a  day  to  writ- 
ing ;  yet  he  produced  more  than  sixty  volumes  of  fiction, 
poetry,  drama,  and  criticism,  of  singular  literary  merit. 
The  great  naturalist,  Darwin,  a  chronic  sufferer  from  a  de- 
pressing malady,  counted  two  hours  a  fortunate  day's  work 


260 


HOW    AND   WHEN   TO   BEAD. 


\ 


l 

L 


<  ..-^ )  k 

/  V, 

"^ ^      ^vr^'1 

>^x 

."V   I   c 
) 

vf  N  -f,  y\  ^  x- -A-  o  X  ( 


How  and  WJien  to  Read.  261 

for  him ;  yet  he  accomplished  results  in  the  world  of  science 
which  render  his  name  immortal. 

Be  not  particular  as  to  hours,  or  the  time  of  day,  and  you 
will  soon  find  that  all  hours  are  good  for  the  muse.  Have 
a  purpose,  and  adhere  to  it  with  good-humored  pertinacity. 
Be  independent  of  the  advice  and  opinions  of  others;  the 
world  of  books,  like  the  world  of  nature,  was  made  for  you ; 
possess  it  in  your  own  way.  If  you  find  no  good  in  ancient 
history  or  in  metaphysics,  let  them  alone  and  read  books  of 
art,  or  poetry,  or  biography,  or  voyages  and  travels.  The 
wide  domain  of  knowledge  and  the  world  of  books  are  so 
related  that  all  roads  cross  and  converge,  like  the  paths 
that  carry  us  over  the  surface  of  the  globe  on  which  we 
live.  Many  a  reader  has  learned  more  of  past  times  from 
good  biographies  than  from  any  formal  history ;  and  it  is  a 
fact  that  many  owe  to  the  plays  of  Shakespeare  and  the 
novels  of  Walter  Scott  nearly  all  the  knowledge  they  possess 
of  the  history  of  England  and  Scotland.  Most  writers  en- 
velop the  thought  or  the  fact  in  so  much  verbiage,  com- 
plicate it  with  so  many  episodes,  beat  it  out  thin  by  so  much 
iteration  and  reiteration,  that  the  student  must  needs  learn 
the  art  of  skipping  in  self-defense.  To  one  in  zealous  pur- 
suit of  knowledge,  to  read  most  books  through  is  pa/ing 
them  too  extravagent  a  compliment.  He  has  to  read  be- 
tween the  lines,  as  it  were,  to  note  down  a  fact  here  or  a 
thought  there,  or  an  illustration  elsewhere,  and  leaves  alone 
all  that  contributes  nothing  to  his  special  purpose.  As  the 
quick,  practised  eye  glances  over  the  visible  signs  of 
thought,  page  after  page  is  rapidly  absorbed,  and  a 
book  which  would  occupy  an  ordinary  reader  many  days 
in  reading  is  masteied  in  a  few  hours.  The  habit  of 


262 


DEMAND   FOR  STENOGRAPHERS. 


v  .^,   , 


L  |- 

' 


CX         X    ,    _L,  ./L...Y... 

DEMAND  FOR  STENOGRAPHERS. 
>x  .    I      >X — /    J_.       V^^*?>...,  ^6         — 

LD  o  ^  /^X  ^-   s  '    _  ^....^.1.  ' 
.  ^"^  *4   \*  '"\       C  *  ^  Ji 

Q-S  \S>m ' 

\  •    °LN  x  ^-^  ^-"  -I- 

i  1  \j  ^s  •'  .L.  I  L  r\  . 

-S> 


Demand  for  Stenographers.  263 

reading  I  have  outlined,  and  which  may  be  called  the  intuitive 
method,  or,  if  you  prefer  it,  the  shorthand  method,  will  more 
than  double  the  working  power  of  the  reader.  It  is  not  diffi- 
cult to  practise,  especially  to  a  busy  man,  who  does  with  all 
his  might  what  he  has  got  to  do;  but  it  should  be  learned 
early  in  life,  when  the  faculties  are  fresh,  the  mind  full  of 
zeal  for  knowledge,  and  the  mental  habits  are  ductile,  not 
fixed.  With  it,  one's  capacity  for  acquiring  knowledge, 
and  consequently  his  accomplishment,  whether  as  writer, 
teacher,  librarian,  or  private  student,  will  be  immeasurably 
increased. — A.  R.  Spofford,  late  Librarian  of  Congress. 

DEMAND   FOR   STENOGRAPHERS. 
[450  words.] 

A  stenographer  able  to  write  accurately  one  hundred  and 
twenty-five  words  a  minute,  operate  the  typewriter  accu- 
rately at  a  fair  speed,  and  who  has  a  good  common  school 
English  education  is  always  reasonably  certain  of  a  good 
office  position  at  a  good  salary.  But  stenographers  should 
understand  that  it  is  not  shorthand  and  typewriting  alone 
that  is  in  demand,  nor  is  speed  the  only  desideratum.  It 
makes  no  difference  how  rapidly  a  lightning  calculator  adds 
a  column  of  figures  if  the  result  is  wrong — in  fact,  it  had 
better  not  be  added  at  all.  It  does  not  help  the  stenog- 
rapher to  write  rapidly  and  then  mutilate  it  when  the  tran- 
script is  made.  Accuracy  is  the  first  essential,  and  then  get 
just  as  much  speed  as  it  is  possible  while  maintaining 
accuracy. 

The  trouble  with  the  average  stenographer  is  that 
he  does  not  understand  enough  about  English  to  know 
whether  he  is  writing  sense  or  nonsense,  and  if  he  is 
unable  to  read  his  notes  he  substitutes  something  which 
does  not  convey  the  idea  of  the  dictator,  and  probably 
does  not  convey  any  idea  at  all.  The  stenographer, 


264 


DEMAND   FOB  STENOGRAPHERS. 


-f 

ND         '    '  ^       u 

'  ^   X3^" 

\^^t?  Q— o   /      V.  r  ^  — 1   c  f 

N*fx  (Tl        J-  x  s— D  x       N/°  O  (T" 

1      x     £ 

,    ^  \   X_^, 

S_P  /  /X 

V^~^  X_P        .  X^  .IP 

.\» o     x~v 

XIP 

,  I      Ox     c ^"      \      ° 

yf    "  Xi3>  S^/ 

Z/.  I         /      S  "      o  _      ,/'* 

\  \ 

0  •  -  -  -'   ,  -xj,  [ ,  V^ 


Demand  for  Stenographers.  265 

like  the  young  man  in  business,  should  keep  his  eyes  and 
ears  open,  notice  the  drift  of  current  events,  read  the  news- 
papers, read  good  books,  and  extend  his  vocabulary  as  much 
as  possible.  No  one,  no  matter  what  position  in  life,  can 
make  a  pronounced  success  who  never  learns  anything 
except  when  told  of  it.  Reading,  study,  and  observation  will 
do  more  than  teachers  and  schools.  Experience  alone  will 
oftentimes  send  some  people  backwards,  because  by  experi- 
ence they  frequently  learn  many  things  that  are  not  so. 

The  average  business  man  is  improving  in  his  business 
methods,  his  dictation,  and  his  English  (and  for  this  thanks 
are  due,  we  think,  largely  to  the  business  schools  and  com- 
mercial departments),  and  he  does  not  care  particularly  to 
have  his  dictated  copy  edited  by  the  stenographer.  He  is 
satisfied  if  the  stenographer  is  able  to  translate  the  hierogly- 
phics and  get  the  copy  as  he  dictated  it.  The  average 
business  man  has  a  vocabulary  sufficiently  extensive,  and 
one  that  will  cause  the  average  young  stenographer  to  con- 
sult the  dictionary  quite  frequently.  And,  by  the  way,  the 
dictionary  habit  is  a  good  one.  The  trouble  with  many 
people  is  that  they  do  not  consult  the  dictionary  enough, 
and  when  they  do,  if  they  discover  it  does  not  spell  the 
words  as  they  are  accustomed  to  spell  them,  they  give  up  in 
despair. 

As  a  summary,  we  would  say,  read,  study,  observe,  and 
consult  the  dictionary,  become  an  expert  in  business  philol- 
ogy, and  your  shorthand  and  typewriting  may  take  care  of 
itself. — Penman's  Art  Journal. 


ABEAHAM  LINCOLN'S  SECOND  INAUGITKAL  ADDBESS. 


\  C.  >  i^x    '(,  '  L, 


\ 


'I     > 


r 


/ 


<  < 


Abraham  Lincoln's  Second  Inaugural  Address.    267 

ABRAHAM  LINCOLN'S   SECOND   INAUGURAL 
ADDRESS. 

Delivered  on  thelth  of  March,  1865,  only  a  few  weeks  before  Tie 
was  assassinated. 

[705  words.] 

FELLOW-COUNTRYMEN  :  At  this  second  appearing  to  take 
the  oath  of  the  Presidential  office,  there  is  less  occasion  for 
an  extended  address  than  there  was  at  the  first.  Then,  a 
statement,  somewhat  in  detail,  of  a  course  to  be  pursued, 
seemed  fitting  and  proper.  Now,  at  the  expiration  of  four 
years,  during  which  public  declarations  have  been  constantly 
called  forth  on  every  point  and  phase  of  the  great  contest 
which  still  absorbs  the  attention  and  engrosses  the  energies 
of  the  nation,  little  that  is  new  could  be  presented.  The 
progress  of  our  arms,  upon  which  all  else  chiefly  depends, 
is  as  well  known  to  the  public  as  to  myself;  and  it  is,  I 
trust,  reasonably  satisfactory  and  encouraging  to  all.  With 
high  hope  for  the  future,  no  prediction  in  regard  to  it  is 
ventured. 

On  the  occasion  corresponding  to  this  four  years  ago,  all 
thoughts  were  anxiously  directed  to  an  impending  civil 
war.  All  dreaded  it;  all  sought  to  avert  it.  While  the 
inaugural  address  was  being  delivered  from  this  place,  de- 
voted altogether  to  saving  the  Union  without  war,  insurgent 
agents  were  in  the  city  seeking  to  destroy  it  without  war — 
seeking  to  dissolve  the  Union,  and  divide  effects  by  negotia- 
tion. Both  parties  deprecated  war ;  but  one  of  them  would 
make  war  rather  than  let  the  nation  survive,  and  the  other 
would  accept  war  rather  than  let  it  perish.  And  the  war 
came. 

One-eighth  of  the  whole  population  were  colored  slaves, 
not  distributed  generally  over  the  Union,  but  localized  in 
the  southern  part  of  it.  These  slaves  constituted  a  peculiar 
and  powerful  interest.  All  knew  that  this  interest  was,  some- 
how, the  cause  of  the  war.  To  strengthen,  perpetuate,  and 
extend  this  interest  was  the  object  for  which  the  insurgents 
would  rend  the  Union,  even  by  war;  while  the  Government 
claimed  no  right  to  do  more  than  to  restrict  the  territorial 


ABRAHAM   LINCOLN'S  SECOND    INAUGURAL  ADDRESS. 


VI 


L.'  /     '   3  x^.^~-r.  >'N"V-P  t 

<:, 

JL 
&      /     i         \ 

V       V3        K     X  ,  <^<       ....      S      ->- 

(,  ^          u  4 

i-^— •?  V  I  ^^^.V^ 

r*" 

if        7      /^*7        ^S     ^        ^^~^>        v      ^^-^^l 

^-i.r^  <^-,  T  ^l^viJ 
\.  ^_^  i  ^  -i ,  °  >  r  .!)...t-.^. 

XL 


Abraham  Lincoln's  Second  Inaugural  Address.    269 

enlargement  of  it.  Neither  party  expected  for  the  war 
the  magnitude  or  the  duration  which  it  has  already  at- 
tained. Neither  anticipated  that  the  cause  of  the  con- 
flict might  cease  with,  or  even  before,  the  conflict  itself 
should  cease.  Each  looked  for  an  easier  triumph,  and  a  re- 
sult less  fundamental  and  astounding.  Both  read  the  same 
Bible,  and  pray  to  the  same  God,  and  each  invokes  His  aid 
against  the  other.  It  may  seem  strange  that  any  men  should 
dare  to  ask  a  just  God's  assistance  in  wringing  their  bread 
from  the  sweat  of  other  men's  faces:  but  let  us  judge  not, 
that  we  be  not  judged.  The  prayers  of  both  could  not  be 
answered ;  that  of  neither  has  been  answered  fully.  The 
Almighty  has  His  own  purposes.  "Woe  unto  the  world 
because  of  offenses !  for  it  must  needs  be  that  offenses  come ; 
but  woe  to  that  man  by  whom  the  offense  cometh."  If  we 
shall  suppose  American  Slavery  is  one  of  those  offenses 
which,  in  the  providence  of  God,  must  needs  come,  but 
which,  having  continued  through  His  appointed  time,  He 
now  wills  to  remove,  and  that  he  gives  to  both  North  and 
South  this  terrible  war,  as  the  woe  due  to  those  by  whom 
the  offense  came,  shall  we  discern  therein  any  departure 
from  those  divine  attributes  which  the  believers  in  a  living 
God  always  ascribe  to  him  ?  Fondly  do  we  hope,  fervently 
do  we  pray,  that  this  mighty  scourge  of  war  may  speedily 
pass  away.  Yet,  if  God  wills  that  it  continue  until  all  the 
wealth  piled  by  the  bondman's  two  hundred  and  fifty  years 
of  unrequited  toil  shall  be  sunk,  and  until  every  drop  of 
blood  drawn  with  the  lash  shall  be  paid  by  another  drawn 
with  the  sword,  as  was  said  three  thousand  years  ago,  so 
still  it  must  be  said,  "The  judgments  of  the  Lord  are  true 
and  righteous  altogether." 


270 


THE    UNION. 


°       ™        _D         )         \  A  1 

THE  UNION. 

Vo  V. 

/v_?  x         L 

NX       ^    \ 

L— -°)  ^  v^-./x 

*£.;v 

/*- 

\^  ;    i^    UV    °    J  ..|..  ^ 

v     )    N 

a  ^- 

-) 

^     Ls,   ^  ..•}..  <S , 

N/1 


The  Union.  271 

With  malice  toward  none,  with  charity  for  nil,  with  firm- 
ness in  the  right,  as  God  gives  us  to  see  the  right,  let  us 
strive  on  to  finish  the  work  we  are  in ;  to  bind  up  the 
nation's  wounds ;  to  care  for  him  who  shall  have  borne 
the  battle,  and  for  his  widow,  and  his  orphan ;  to  do  all 
which  may  achieve  and  cherish  a  just  and  a  lasting  peace 
among  ourselves  and  with  all  nations. 

THE   UNION. 
[516  words.] 

I  profess,  in  my  career  hitherto,  to  have  kept  steadily  in 
view  the  prosperity  and  honor  of  the  whole  country,  and 
the  preservation  of  the  Federal  Union.  It  is  to  that  Union 
we  owe  our  safety  at  home,  and  our  consideration  and 
dignity  abroad.  It  is  to  that  Union  that  we  are  chiefly  in- 
debted for  whatever  makes  us  most  proud  of  our  country. 
That  Union  we  reached  only  by  the  discipline  of  our 
virtues,  in  the  severe  school  of  adversity.  It  had  its  origin 
in  the  necessities  of  disordered  finance,  prostrate  commerce, 
and  ruined  credit.  Under  its  benign  influences  these  great 
interests  immediately  awoke,  as  from  the  dead,  and  sprang 
forth  with  newness  of  life.  Every  year  of  its  duration  has 
teemed  with  fresh  proofs  of  its  utility  and  its  blessings ; 
and  although  our  territory  has  stretched  out  wider  and 
wider,  and  our  population  spread  farther  and  farther,  they 
have  not  outrun  its  protection  or  its  benefits.  It  has  been 
to  us  .all  a  copious  fountain  of  national,  social,  and  personal 
happitess.  I  have  not  allowed  myself  to  look  beyond  the 
Union  to  see  what  might  lie  hidden  in  the  dark  recess 
behind.  I  have  not  coolly  weighed  the  chances  of  preserv- 
ing liberty,  when  the  bonds  that  unite  us  together  shall 
be  broken  asunder.  I  have  not  accustomed  myself  to 
hang  over  the  precipice  of  disunion,  to  see  whether,  witl? 


272 


THE   UNION. 


V^ 

•^   ^  7^ 

V    ,          I       A        OX     "       M\..      C        J 
-/  n_  p  \       I      \ 

\S>        \        XJ  V^^Q  »  .       Q '  V^3  ,        ' — \ 

'       y — N 

^J       Ir         «V  /         I         ^N  N        '  X5  9    ^^ 

=~7  y        x^  S       *-S      ~ 

\^>"l'~N_/ 

Q*.  Y  ^v\^V 

> 

,  (  c 


The  Union.  273 

my  short  sight,  I  can  fathom  the  depth  of  the  abyss  oelow ; 
nor  could  I  regard  him  as  a  safe  counselor  in  the  affairs  of 
this  government,  whose  thoughts  should  be  mainly  bent  on 
considering,  not  how  the  Union  should  be  best  preserved, 
but  how  tolerable  might  be  the  condition  of  the  people 
when  it  shall  be  broken  up  and  destroyed.  While  the 
Union  lasts  we  have  high,  exciting,  gratifying  prospects 
spread  out  before  us,  for  us  and  our  children.  Beyond  that 
I  seek  not  to  penetrate  the  veil.  God  grant  that,  in  my 
day  at  least,  that  curtain  may  not  rise.  God  grant  that  on 
my  vision  never  may  be  opened  what  lies  behind.  When 
my  eyes  shall  be  turned  to  behold,  for  the  last  time,  the 
sun  in  heaven,  may  I  not  see  him  shining  on  the  broken 
and  dishonored  fragments  of  a  once  glorious  Union ;  on 
States  dissevered,  discordant,  belligerent ;  on  a  land  rent 
with  civil  feuds,  or  drenched,  it  may  be,  in  fraternal 
blood  !  Let  their  last  feeble  and  lingering  glance  rather 
behold  the  gorgeous  ensign  of  the  republic,  now  known 
and  honored  throughout  the  earth,  still  full  high  advanced, 
its  arms  and  trophies  streaming  in  their  original  lustre,  not 
a  stripe  erased  or  polluted,  not  a  single  star  obscured ; 
bearing  for  its  motto  no  such  miserable  interrogatory  as — 
"What  is  all  this  worth?"  nor  those  other  words  of 
delusion  and  folly,  "Liberty  first,  and  Union  afterwards"; 
but  everywhere,  spread  all  over  in  characters  of  living  light, 
blazing  on  all  its  ample  folds  as  they  float  over  the  sea  and 
over  the  land,  and  in  every  wind  under  the  whole  heavens, 
that  other  sentiment  dear  to  every  true  American  heart — 
Liberty  and  Union,  now  and  forever,  one  and  inseparable. — 
Daniel  Webster. 


INDEX. 


The  figures  refer  to  the  Paragraphs,  except  where  the  page  is  mentioned. 
A  hyphen  after  the  figure  shows  that  the  subject  is  continued  in  the  fol- 
lowing paragraphs. 


Accent,  how  written,  207 

Analogy  of  sounds  and  signs,  9,  20 

Applause,  dissent,  etc.,  signs  for,  240 

Aspirate,  the,  12 ;  representation  of, 
117- ;  downstroke  h,  118;  upstroke 
fi,  119;  tick  h,  121;  dot  h,  122;  h  fol- 
lowing another  consonant,  120 

Aw  and  logogram  for  all  joined  ini- 
tially, 168 

Bright  T.,  author  of  first  shorthand 
work  published  in  England,  page 
123 

Business  letters,  page  137 

Capital  letters,  how  to  mark,  209 

C'h  and  ray.  17,  37- 

Chapter  and  verse,  how  to  indicate, 
244 

Charles  I.,  report  of  speech  by,  page 
126 

Charles  II.,  reported  by  S.  Pepys, 
page  127 

Circles  aud  loops  added  to  final  hooks, 
98- 

Cities,  fifty  principal,  outlines  for, 
•page  136 

Civil  Service,  shorthand  in,  page  128 

Clashing,  how  to  avoid,  226 

Coalescents,  12 

Commercial  note-taking,  page  128 

Consonants,  table  of,  page  4;  arrange- 
ment and  representation  of,  8-  ; 
pairs  of,  13;  size  of,  14;  joined,  29; 
double,  73- ;  treble,  86- ;  additional 
double,  112-  ;  vocalization  of  ditto, 
113- ;  Ir  and  rr,  115, 125, 130;  double 
consonants  which  cannot  be  halved, 
139  ;  single  and  double,  table  of, 
page  67  ;  half-length,  131 ;  double 
length,  149- 

Contents,  page  xiii 

Continuants,  11 

Contractions,  196-  ;  Corresponding 
Style,  list  of,  arranged  alphabeti- 
cally, page  104  ;  Reporting,  249  ; 
complete  list  of,  arranged  alphabeti- 
cally, paqe  177 

Corresponding  Style,  books  and  peri- 
odicals, printed  in,  214 


Court  reporting,  pages  209-224 

Demand  for  stenographers,  page  262 

Dickens  C.,  a  shorthand  writer,  paqe 
127 

Dictation  matter,  213- 

Dictiouary,  phonographic,  use  of,  214 

Diphthongs,  49- ;  component  vowels 
in|  49  ;  place  of,  51- ;  joined  initial, 
53- ;  joined  final,  55- ;  and  vowels, 
contrast  between,  56  ;  and  vowels 
between  consonants,  57 ;  monosyl- 
labic (w  and  y  series),  103- ;  disyl- 
labic, 169- 

Directions  to  the  student,  1- 

Disyllabic  diphthongs,  169-;  scale  of, 
169;  places  and  signification  of,  170; 
when  not  used,  171 

Double-length  principle,  149-;  adding 
tr,  dr,  thr  to  curved  consonants, 
149;  representation  of  dr,  150;  add- 
ing tr,  dr  to  straight  consonants, 
151 ;  nip  and  nq  doubled,  152;  mpr, 
nffkr,  etc.,  used  for  verbs,  153;  -ture 
expressed  by  doubling,  154;  doub'e- 
length  and  half-length  principle  for 
verbs,  155  ;  not  used  when  vowel 
ends  word,  156;  position  of  double- 
length  strokes,  225 

Emphasis,  208 

Errors,  240 

Evercirculators,  page  128 

Explodenti?,  10 

Figures,  210,  241- 

Final  /,  125 

Final  r,  128-9 

Foreign  consonants  and  vowels,  212 

Fountain  pens,  237 

Fr,  etc.,  alternative  forms  for,  when 
used,  84 

Grammalo2ues,  40,  189-;  Correspond, 
ing  Style^  irregular,  195;  ditto,  pho 
netically  arranged,  page  92  ;  ditto, 
alphabetically  arranged,  paqe  94  ; 
Reporting  Style,  247-;  ditto,  irregu- 
lar, 247.  page  159;  ditto,  representa- 
tion of  the  past  tense,  248 ;  ditto,  ar- 
ranged phonetically, page  160;  ditto, 
arranged  alphabetically,  page  162 


Index. 


Gold  nibs,  237 

Gurney  T.,  Old  Bailey  reporter,  page 
127 

Halving  principle,  131- ;  t  added  to 
light  consonants,  131;  d  added  to 
heavy  consonant*,  132;  vocalization 
of  halved  consonants,  133 ;  t  or  d 
expressed  when  hooked  finally,  134; 
also  in  words  of  more  than  one  syl- 
lable, 135  ;  halved  m,  n,  I,  r  thick- 
ened to  add  d,  136;  Id  and  rd  when 
used,  137;  It,  ho.w  written,  138;  halv- 
ing of  mp  and  tiff  when  permissible, 
139:  mpr,  etc.,  preferable  to  double- 
length,  153 ;  halving  of  h,  140  ;  rt 
half-length,  142;  half-length  strokes 
(two)  when  not  joined,  143;  the 
representation  of  verbs,  145;  when 
vowel  follows  t  or  d,  147;  circle  « 
and,  148 

Henry,  Patrick,  speech  of,  -page  242 

How  and  When  to  Read,  page  258 

Here,  there,  where,  compounds  of,  245 

Improvements  in  phonography,  vii 

Industry  and  Happiness,  page  246 

Initial  capital,  to  mark  an,  209 

Initial  /,  124 

Initial  r,  126 

Intersected  words,  262;  list  of,  pageg 
225-227 

John  of  Tilbury,  earliest  English 
shorthand  inventor,  page  122 

L  and  r  initial  hooks,  73-;  to  straight 
consonants,  73-;  how  named,  77-9; 
vowels  before  and  after,  78 ;  to 
curves,  80- ;  circles  and  loops  pre- 
fixed to,  86-9;  and  circle,  medial,  89 

L  and  r  upward  and  downward,  123- 

L  hook  to  curves,  82 

Labial  vowels,  20 

Law  courts,  early  reporting  in,  page 
127 

Law  Phrases,  pages  200-203 

Legal  Correspondence,  pages  204-208 

Legal  Forms,  pages  209-224 

Lincoln's,  Abraham,  Second  Inaugu- 
ral Address,  page  266 

Lingual  vowels,  20 

Liquids,  12 

Ln,  direction  for  writing,  97 

Logograms,  40, 189- ;  positions  of  ,190-; 
*  added  to,  193 ;  nsed  as  prefix  or 
suffix,  194 

Long  vowels,  19-  (gee  also  Vowels) 

Max-Muller  on  Pitmanic  alphabet, 
page  xi 

Mishearings,  240 

Mnemonics,  15,  75,  121,  165 

Monetary  units,  representation  of,  243 


Mp  hooked,  116 

A  and  /  hooks,  final,  90-,  96 ;  used 
medially,  95  ;  circle  or  loops  added 
to,  98 

Nasals,  12 

Ng  hooked,  85 

Az  or  ns  after  a  curved  consonant,  101 

Nominal  consonant,  211 

Note-books,  turning  •  the  leaves  of, 
page  266 

Numbers,  representation  of  round, 
242 

Of  the,  indication  of,  198 

Organs  of  speech  and  phonographic 
alphabet,  9-,  20 

Outlines,  rule  for  selecting,  215 ;  nn- 
vocalized,  216  ;  for  States  and  Ter- 
ritories, page  135 

Paper  money,  page  254 

Parliamentary  reporting,  early,  page 
125 ;  first  corps  of  reporters,  page 
126  ;  in  Canada,  Australia,  and 
United  States,  ib. 

Pen,  method  of  holding,  4 

Pen  or  pencil,  236 

Pepys  S.,  a  shorthand  writer,  page  121 

Perry  J.,and  Parliamentary  reporting, 
page  126 

Phonetic  notation, advantages  of,  page 
xi;  names  of  consonants  in,  16 

Phonography,  or  Writing  by  Sound, 
page  ix. ;  definition  and  illustra- 
tions of,  page  v.,  1 ;  standard  of 
S renunciation  in,  page  xi;  writing 
i,  2- 

Phraseograms,  list  of,  page  111;  lists 
of  general,  pages  184, 186, 188;  busi- 
ness, pages  192,  193,  195,  196, 198 ; 
law,  pages  200-203 

Phraseography,  201-;  advanced,  253 

Pitman,  Sir  Isaac,  first  treatise  by, 
page  yii;  page  123 

Pitmanic  alphabet,  Max-Mflller  on, 
page  xi 

PI  and  pr  series,  vocalization  of,  157; 
dot  vowels,  157-8  ;  strokes  or  diph- 
thongs, 159-161  ;  representation  of 
unaccented  vowels  unnecessary,  162 

Position,writing  in,  21 7-;  not  observed 
in  long  outlines,  227 

Practice,  method  of,  6,  7,  213-,  228 

Prefixes,  173 ;  com-  or  con-,  173;  cog, 
com,  con-,  or  cum-  between  two  con- 
sonants, 174;  inter-,  intro-,  or  enter-, 
175 ;  magna-,  magne-,  or  magni-, 
176;  self-,  177;  in-,  178;  not  nsed  in 
negatives,  179 ;  negative  prefixes, 
246 

Punctuation,  806 


276 


Index. 


Quotations,  240 

M  hook  to  curves,  83 

Reference  books,  266;  marks,  240 

Reporting  Exercises,  page  242 

Reporting  Style,  books  and  periodi- 
cals printed  in,  265 

Reporting  Style,  features  of,  228 

Roman  "  notes,"  page  122 

8  and  /,  vowels  and,  70- 

.Sand  z,  small  circle  sign  for,  58;  how 
written  and  read,  58- ;  initial  and 
final,  59-  ;  between  two  straight 
lines,  60  ;  joined  to  curves,  61  : 
added  to  st  or  str,  66:  added  to  final 
hooks,  98;  medial,  99;  after  «,  100: 
and  halving  principle,  148  ;  and 
double-length  principle,  156 

S  or  z  stroke  consonant,  use  of,  71- 

Secret  of  rapid  writing,  229- 

Sermon  reporting,  early,  page  124;  in- 
dication of  text,  244 

Sef,  st,  and  sir  and  w,  102 

Shi,  fhn,  direction  for  writing,  97 

Shorthand,  advantages  of,  page  viii ; 
essay  on  the  history  and  use  of, 

Ce  122  ;  earliest  use  of  the  art  in 
jland,  page   124;    in   practice, 

263- 

Short  vowels,  42  (see  also  Vowels) 
Significant  marks,  240 
Similar  words,  list  of,  distinguished 

by  outline,  page  228 
Size  of  characters,  14,  232 
Speed  of  public  speakers,  average  rate 

of,  235 

Speed  practice,  228- 
Spelling  by  sound,  illustrations  of, 

page  ix,  1 
8s  or  az  large  circle,  68 ;  vocalization 

of,  68;  exception  to  use  of,  69 
States  and  Territories,  outlines  for, 

page  135 

St  loop  initial,  63;  medial,  64 
Str  loop,  65 
Suffixes,  180-;  -Ing.  -in<i?,  180-1 :  -attty, 

'ility,  -arity,  etc.,  182  :  -ment,  183  ; 

•mental,  -mentality,  184 ;  -ly,  185 ; 


-self,  186 ;  -thip,  187;  -fitlnets,  Ififr; 

-lessness,  188 

Sw,  large  initial  circle,  sign  for  W 
Table  of  consonants,  page  4 ;  single 

and  double  consonants,  page  67 ; 

§ra mmul ogues  (Corresponding 
tyle),  page  94  ;  contractions  (Cor- 
responding Style),  104  ;    gramma- 
logues  (Reporting  Style),  page  162  ; 
contractions  (Reporting  Style),  page 
167 
The,  tick,  197 

-  Tion  hook,  103- ;  following  a  curve, 

104;  after  a  straight  consonant,  105; 
opposite  to  last  vowel,  105  ;  on  op- 
posite side  to  hook,  circle,  loop,  or 
curve,  106;  after  t,  d,  orj,  107;  used 
medially,  108  ;  following  circle  s  or 
ns,  109- ;  half-length  st  following, 
141 

Transcription,  239 

Triphthong  wi,  50 

Twentieth  Century  Edition,  page  vii 

Typewriter  and  shorthand,  page  128, 
264 

U.  S.  Commissioner  of  Education,  on 
systems,  viii 

Uniformity  in  shorthand,  Plea  for,  v 

Union,  The,  page  270 

Vowels,  19-  ;  long,  19  ;  lingual  and 
labial,  20;  scale  of,  21;  positions  of, 
22-27;  between  two  consonants,  39; 
short,  42;  positions  of,  43;  value  of, 
44  ;  between  two  consonants,  46- ; 
contrasted  with  diphthongs,  57;  be- 
tween fh  and  n,  111;  two  in  succes- 
sion, 172;  indicated  by  position  of 
outline,  217;  inserted  for  distinction 
in  Reporting  Style,  226 

W  and  y  diphthongs,  163 ;  scale  of, 
163-4;  mnemonic,  165 

•  Ward,  contraction  for,  135 
Waw,  wo,  etc.,  prefix,  166- 
Witnesses,  examination  of,  240 
Writing  materials,  3,  236- 
-Tard,  contraction  for,  135 

Z  stroke  consonant,  use  of,  71 


EDUCATIONAL 

BOOKS 

(SHORTHAND,  TYPEWRITING, 
BUSINESS,  LANGUAGES,  &c.) 

AND    SUPPLIES 


Trade  Mark 

ISAAC  PITMAN  SHORTHAND 
EXCLUSIVELY  ADOPTED  BY 
THE  DAY  AND  EVENING 
HIGH  SCHOOLS  OF  GREATER 
NEW  YORK. 


ISAAC  PITMAN  &  SONS, 

2  West  45th  Street,  New  York 


Previous  Lists  Cancelled. 


BY  MAIL  PREPAID 


Upon  receipt  of  the  price  we  will  send  any  book  by  mail, 
prepaid,  to  any  part  of  the  United  States,  Canada,  Mexico, 
Porto  Rico,  Hawaii,  Philippines,  or  any  country  in  the  Universal 
Postal  Union.  Goods  amounting  to  $2.50  or  over,  will  be  sent 
by  express,  C.O.D.,  on  receipt  of  one-fourth  of  the  price,  to 
insure  payment  of  charges.  Goods  cannot  be  sent  C.O.D.  by 
mail.  Strangers  desiring  to  open  an  account  with  us  will  apply 
for  terms  and  give  references  as  to  reliability.  In  the  case  of 
Institutions  or  School  Officials,  an  order  written  on  the  official 
letter  head  will  facilitate  matters. 

All  orders  must  be  accompanied  by  remittance. 

No  book  returnable  except  for  physical,  defects. 


HOW  TO    REMIT 


Remittances  may  be  made  by  P.O.  Money  Order,  Express 
Money  Order,  or  Bank  Draft  on  New  York,  to  the  order  of 
ISAAC  PITMAN  AND  SONS.  EXPRESS  MONEY  ORDERS  are 
SPECIALLY  RECOMMENDED.  We  do  not  object  to  postage  stamps 
if  so  inclosed  as  to  prevent  them  from  sticking  together  and 
sent  in  strips  of  five.  Foreign  postage  stamps  not  accepted. 
Add  ten  cents  to  all  oat  of  town  checks  to  cover  cost  of  exchange- 


CAUTION 


Write  plainly  both  your  name  and  your  address,  and  do  not 
fail  to  give  in  every  instance  the  exact  title  of  the  book  wanted. 

If  ordering  through  a  bookseller,  demand  the  editions  bearing 
the  imprint  of  ISAAC  PITMAN  &  SONS,  and  positively  refuse  any 
other. 


TEACHERS,  SCHOOLS,  AND  THE  TRADE 


These  are  supplied  at  a  very  liberal  discount.  Rates  on 
application.  TEACHERS  OF  SHORTHAND,  who  desire  to  keep 
up  with  the  progress  of  the  Art,  and  give  their  pupils  the 
advantages  to  be  derived  from  the  latest  improvements  and  best 
arranged  instruction  books  and  aids,  should  investigate  the 
superior  merits  of  the  Isaac  Pitman  text-books.  TEACHERS  of 
the  Isaac  Pitman  system  should  send  their  names  to  us  for 
registration,  and  keep  us  informed  of  their  address,  and  when 
open  for  engagements. 


SHORTHAND 


PHONOGRAPHIC  WORKS. 

Course  in  Isaas  Pitman  Shorthand.  Cloth,  embossed  in  gold 
240  pp.,  $1.50.  A  Course  of  Forty  Lessons  in  the  Isaac  Pitman 
System  of  Shorthand,  specially  designed  for  the  Shorthand 
Amanuensis  and  adapted  for  use  in  Business  Colleges,  Academies, 
and  High  Schools.  This  work  is  officially  used  in  the  High  Schools 
of  New  York,  Brooklyn,  and  other  large  cities.  Also  in  the  leading 
business  schools.  Special  features  of  this  work  are  : — 

Position  Writing  from  the  Beginning. 

Words  and  Sentences  introduced  in  the  1st  Lesson. 

Business  Letters  in  the  9th  and  subsequent  Lessons. 

Phraseography  taught  from  the  5th  Lesson. 

Reporting  Style  taught  from  the  Beginning. 

"  We  are  getting  excellent  results  with  Isaac  Pitman's  '  Short 
Course  in  Shorthand,'  and  we  expect  to  save  almost  a  term  by 
the  use  of  it.     All  of  our  shorthand  teachers  praise  it  highly." — 
.  Edwin  A.  Bolger,  Teacher  of  Isaac  Pitman's  Shorthand,  Com- 
mercial Hieh  School,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 

*»*  A  Special  Edition  of  "  Course  "  is  published  in  Lesson  Sheet 
Form  for  the  use  of  teachers  and  schools  who  give  instruction  by 
mail.  Each  lesson  is  printed  in  a  separate  part  and  enclosed  in 
a  cardboard  box.  $1.50. 

Key  to  "  Course."     Cloth,  gilt,  60c. 

Isaac  Pitman's  Shorthand  Instructor.  Cloth,  embossed  in  gold, 
270  pp.,  $1-50.  Twentieth  Century  Edition.  An  Exposition  of 
Isaac  Pitman's  System  of  Phonography.  Containing  instruction 
for  both  beginners  and  advanced  students  with  copious  lists  of 
Phrases  and  Exercises,  Business  Letters,  etc.  The  general  plan 
ot  the  "  Instructor  "  makes  it  equally  acceptable  for  self-tuition 
and  for  class-use. 

*  «*  The  "  Shorthand  Instructor  "  is  also  published  in  two  parts,  as 
follows : — 

Complete  Amanuensis  Course.  (PART  1.)  144  pp.>  stiff  boards  and 
cloth  back,  75c  ;  cloth  gilt,  $1.00. 

The  New  Phonographic  Reporter.  (PART  20  182  pp.,  stiff  boards 
and  cloth  back,  75c.  ;  cloth,  gilt,  $1.00. 

Key  to  "  Shorthand  Instructor."  50c. :  cloth,  80c.  Contains  a 
Shorthand  and  Longhand  Key  to  all  the  Exercises,  and  furnishes 
Answers  to  the  Review  Questions.  Also  forms  a  Key  to  "  Com- 
plete Amanuensis  Course,"  and  to  "  The  New  Phonographic 
Reporter." 


Card  Key  to  Exercises.  26c.  In  the  Reporting  Style.  Being  a 
Shorthand  Key  to  all  the  Exercises  in  "  The  Instructor,"  from 
pages  132  to  238  inclusive.  For  the  Use  of  Teachers  in  Shorthand 
Classes.  On  27  separate  cards. 

Pitman's  Shorthand  Writing  Exercises  and  Examination  Tests. 

Cloth  gilt,  240  pp.,  60c.  This  work  contains  exhaustive  classified 
lists  of  words  illustrative  of  every  rule  in  the  system,  and  over  one 
hundred  graduated  sentence  exercises  in  ordinary  print  for  writing 
or  dictation  •  practice.  No  word  is  introduced  before  the  rule 
governing  it  has  been  mastered  by  the  learner.  Brief  guidance 
is  given  at  the  head  of  sections,  and  there  are  exercises  on  upward 
and  downward  sh ;  also  special  exercises  on  the  Contractions. 

Key  to  "  Shorthand  Writing  Exercises."  Cloth,  gilt,  267  PP.  $1.25. 
In  Engraved  Shorthand. 

The  Phonographic  Teacher.  48  pp.,  25e.  A  Guide  to  a  Practical 
Acquaintance  with  the  Art  of  Phonography  or  Phonetic  Short- 
hand, containing  a  Series  of  Progressive  Lessons.  Each  principle 
.  is  clearly  and  fully  explained,  and  the  knowledge  learned  is 
applied  in  the  shorthand  and  type  exercises,  following  each 
principle. 

Key  to  the  "  Teacher."    20c.    Of  great  value  to  the  Private  Student. 

Pitman's  Shorthand  Class  Book.  Price  20c.  With  Exercises  and 
Key  for  Use  in  Classes.  This  work  is  designed  for  school  use  in 
conjunction  with  one  of  the  other  text-books,  and  gives  instruction 
in  Phonography  from  the  rudiments  onward  on  a  new  plan. 
Simple  explanations  take  the  place  of  rules,  and  the  bulk  of  the 
book  consists  of  copious  exercises  in  shorthand  characters,  with 
complete  interlinear  key  in  ordinary  print. 

The  Phonographic  Exercise  Book.  lOc.  Made  of  the  best  quality 
paper,  in  single  or  double  lines. 

Graduated  Tests  in  Isaac  Pitman 's  Shorthand.  80  pp. ,  20c.  A  series 
of  revisionary  exercises,  arranged  on  an  entirely  new  plan,  with 
the  object  of  testing  the  student's  knowledge  of  the  system.  The 
tests  consist  of  a  very  carefully  chosen  list  of  1,600  words  in 
ordinary  print,  illustrating  the  whole  of  the  rules,  forming  a 
valuable  means  of  adding  to  the  students'  phonographic  voca- 
bulary. There  is  a  space  for  the  learner's  first  outline  ;  a  space 
for  the  teacher's  correction,  should  such  be  required  ;  and  spaces 
for  the  pupil  to  re-write  the  correct  form. 

Pitman's  Shorthand  Reading  Lessons,  No.  1.  48  pp.,  20c.  For  use 
with  the  "  Teacher,"  "  Manual,"  or  "  Instructor,"  and  furnishing 
reading  practice  and  word-building  from  the  beginning  of  the 
Study  of  the  system. 

Key  to  Shorthand  Reading  Lessons,  No.  1,  in  ordinary  type.     6c. 

Pitman's  Shorthand  Reading  Lessons,  No.  2.    61  pp.,  25c. 

Key  to  Shorthand  Reading  Lessons,  No.  2,  in  ordinary  type.     6c. 

Letter  Dictation  from  the  Beginning.  32  pp.,  20c.  A  series  of 
practical  business  and  general  letters  (in  ordinary  print)  based 
on  the  principles  of  Isaac  Pitman  Shorthand. 


Progressive  Studies  in  Phonography.  40c. ;  cloth,  60c.  A  simple 
and  extended  exposition  of  the  Art  of  Phonetic  Shorthand,  as 
set  forth  in  the  "  Teacher,"  the  "  Manual,"  and  the  "  Reporter  ;  " 
intended  as  a  supplementary  book  to  these  three. 

The  "  Fono  "  Headline  Shorthand  Copy  Books.  BOOKS  A,  B,  AND  C- 
Each,  10c.  Containing  a  series  of  beautifully  engraved  graduated 
copies  to  be  written  in  Shorthand. 

Exercises  in  Phonography.  5c.  A  series  of  graduated  sentence 
exercises. 

Pitman's  Shorthand  Gradus.  6c.  A  series  of  Writing  Exercises 
for  use  with  the  "  Instructor  "  or  "  Manual."  Also  contains  a 
full  list  of  Consonant  Outlines,  and  exercises  on  same. 

2Esop's  Fables.  20c.  In  the  Learner's  Style.  A  valuable  reading 
book  in  words  of  one  syllable. 

Easy  Readings.  20c.  In  the  Learner's  Style  of  Shorthand,  with 
Key. 

The  Learner's  Shorthand  Reader.    20c. 

A  Compend  of  Phonography.  5c.  Containing  the  Alphabet, 
Grammalogues,  and  principal  Rules  for  Writing. 

Pitman's  Shorthaad  Manual.  114  pp.,  50c. ;  cloth,  60c.  Being 
a  condensed  edition  of  Part  I  of  the  "  Instructor,"  and  containing 
an  exposition  of  the  system,  with  numerous  engraved  shorthand 
examples  interspersed  with  the  text.  Review  Questions,  and 
Exercises  in  reading  and  writing. 

"  Teacher  "  &  "  Manual."    In  one  vol.,  roan,  gilt,  90c. 

Key  to  Exercises  in  "  Manual"    20c.    With  Answers  to  the  Review 

Questions. 

The  Phonographic  Reader.  20c.  A  course  of  Reading  Exercises 
in  Phonography,  with  Key. 

Pitman's  Shorthand  Reporter.  117  pp.,  60c. ;  cloth,  75c.  Being  a 
condensed  edition  of  Part  2  of  the  "  Instructor  "  and  an  adapta- 
tion of  Phonography  to  Verbatim  Reporting. 

Key  to  the  "  Reporter."    20c. 

Reporting  Exercises.  20c.  Intended  as  a  Companion  to  the 
"  Reporter  "  ;  containing  exercises  on  all  the  rules  and  contracted 
words  in  this  book. 

Key  to  the  "  Reporting  Exercises."  40c. :  cloth,  50c.  In  which  all 
the  Exercises  are  presented  in  Shorthand. 

TLe  Acquisition  of  Speed  in  Phonography.  16  pp.,  lOe.  In  ordinary 
type.  Containing  chapters  on  the  following  subjects :  The 
System — The  Importance  of  Thoroughness  and  Method  of  Study 
— Elementary  Speed  Practice — Tests  of  Speed — etc. 

The  Grammalogues  and  Contractions  of  Pitman's  "  Reporter."    5c. 

The  Phonographic  Phrase  Book.  88  pp. ,  40c.  ;  cloth,  60c.  Contain- 
ing above  two  thousand  useful  phrases  in  Phonography,  with 
Key  and  an  exercise  occupying  43  pages,  containing  all  the  phrases 
as  they  occur  in  the  book. 


Isaac   Pitman's   Shorthand   Dictionary.    312   pp.,    cloth,    $1.50. 
"  Library  Edition,"  roan,  gilt,  coloured  edges,  $1.75.     Eighth 
Edition,  Revised  and  enlarged,  containing  the  Shorthand  Report- 
ing Outlines,  beautifully  printed  from  engraved  characters,  of 
over  61,000  words  and  geographical  names,  with  parallel  Key  in 
ordinary    type.     Also   a   complete   list   of   Grammalogues   and 
Contracted  Words  alphabetically  arranged     The  most  compre- 
hensive Shorthand  Dictionary  published.     Specimen  pages  free. 
"  An  exceedingly  valuable  work." — N.  Y.  Sun. 
"A  practical  and  beautiful  book." — Western   Penman 

Abridged  Shorthand  Dictionary.  224pp.  Cloth,75c.;Frenchmorocco,size 
3  x  4|  in.  $1.00.  Contains  over  22,000  words,  with  their  short- 
hand characters,  and  a  complete  list  of  Grammalogues  and 
Contractions.  A  small,  handy  work,  thoroughly  up-to-date,  and 
beautifully  engraved. 

Cumulative  Speller  and  Shorthand  Vocabulary.  Cloth,  gilt,  145  pp. « 
50c. 

For  further  particulars  of  this  work  see  page  n. 

The  Reporter's  Assistant  132  pp.,  50c. ;  cloth,  60c.  A  Key  to 
the  Reading  of  the  Reporting  Style  of  Phonography.  All  the 
words  in  the  dictionary,  not  exceeding  three  consonants,  were 
written  in  Shorthand,  and,  from  this  extensive  list  of  outlines 
has  been  drawn  all  words  that  contain  the  same  outline,  and  they 
have  been  classified  according  to  their  forms.  Of  great  aid  in 
reading  one's  notes. 

Technical  Reporting.  60  pp.,  50c. ;  cloth,  60c.  Comprising 
Phonographic  Abbreviations  for  words  and  phrases  commonly 
met  with  in  Reporting  Legal,  Medical,  Scientific,  and  other 
Technical  Subjects,  with  type  key. 

Practical  Business  Letters  in  Shorthand.  64  pp.,  30c.  A  series  of 
Business  Letters,  in  engraved  Isaac  Pitman's  shorthand,  containing 
76  letters  on  the  following  subjects  :  Railroad  Correspondence — 
Life  Insurance — Banking — Fruit  and  Produce — Real  Estate,  etc. 
A  letterpress  Key  is  provided  at  the  end  of  the  book. 

Business  Correspondence  in  Shorthand,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6  and  7, 
40  pp.  each.  25c.  each.  A  series  of  valuable  books  containing 
actual  correspondence  in  various  branches'  of  business.  Each 
book  is  Keyed  in  ordinary  type  and  the  matter  counted  for  speed 
practice  in  either  shorthand  or  typewriting.  Stenographers, 
after  completing  their  studies,  feel  the  need  of  some  practical 
material  to  enable  them  to  keep  up  their  practice  and  at  the 
same  time  increase  their  speed.  Of  all  such  matter,  business 
letters  are  the  most  valuable,  and  the  advantage,  therefore,  of 
having  for  immediate  reference  such  a  practical  collection  of  letters 
will  be  at  once  recognized. 

LIST  OF  CONTENTS. 

BUSINESS  CORRESPONDENCE  :N  SHORTHAND  No.  1.  Subjects 
treated  :  Railroad  Correspondence  —  Law  (General)  —  Law 
(Patents) — Law  (Pensions) — Banking — Stock  Brokers' — Hard- 
ware— Lumber — Boots  and  Shoes — Miscellaneous — Power  of 
Attorney  Form,  etc. 

BUSINESS  CORRESPONDENCE  IN  SHORTHAND  No.  2.  Subjects 
treated  I  Real  Estate  Correspondence — Financial — Legal  and 


Law — Hardware — Dry  Goods — insurance — Electrical — Boots  and 
Shoes — Lumber — Publishing — Miscellaneous,  etc. 

BUSINESS  CORRESPONDENCE  IN  SHORTHAND  No.  3.  Subject! 
treated  :  Advertising  Correspondence — Agents — Automobile— 
Bicycle — Boiler  Appliance,  etc. 

BUSINESS  CORRESPONDENCE  IN  SHORTHAND  No.  4.  Subjects 
treated  :  Boiler  Appliance  Correspondence — Bookbinding — 
Builders' — Collections — Copying  Office — Cotton  —  Desks  —  Dry 
Goods — Drugs,  etc.  . 

BUSINESS  CORRESPONDENCE  IN  SHORTHAND  No.  5.  Subjects 
treated  :  Dry  Goods  Correspondence — Electrical  Construction — 
Express — Financial  Standing — Fire  Insurance — Flour  and  Feed — 
Furniture,  etc. 

BUSINESS  CORRESPONDENCE  IN  SHORTHAND  No.  8-  Subjects 
treated  :  Groceries — Hardware — Hotel — Investment — Legal — 
Life  Insurance,  etc. 

*,*  This  work  is  also  published  in  the  following  convenient  forms 
in  cloth  binding. 

BUSINESS  CORRESPONDENCE  IN  SHORTHAND,  Nos.  1  and  2,  in  one 
volume.  Cloth,  gilt,  80  pp.,  60c. 

BUSINESS  CORRESPONDENCE  IN  SHORTHAND,  Nos.  3  and  4,  in  one 
volume.  Cloth,  80  pp.,  60c. 

BUSINESS  CORRESPONDENCE  IN  SHORTHAND,  Nos.  5  and  6,  in  one 
volume.  Cloth,  80  pp.,  60c. 

BUSINESS  CORRESPONDENCE  IN  SHORTHAND,  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4.  In 
one  volume.  Special  Shorthand  Edition  without  Type  Key. 
Cloth,  gilt,  88  pp.,  75c. 

Shorthand  in  the  Office.    130  pp.,  40c. ;  cloth,  50c. 

Graduated  Dictation  Books.  47  pp.,  lOc.  each.  For  acquiring 
Speed  in  Shorthand  and  Typewriting.  Adapted  to  any  system. 
The  reading  matter  is  divided  on  a  new  and  improved  plan. 
Divided  for  speeds  of  50,  80,  100,  and  180  words  per  minute. 
No.  1. — Political  Speeches.  No.  2. — Sermons.  No.  3. — 
Commercial. 

Key,  in  Shorthand,  to  the  Graduated  Dictation  Book,  Nos.  1  and  2. 
20c.  each. 

Pitman's  Interlined  Speed  Practice  Books,  Nos  1, 2  and  3.  Each,  5c. 
Various  mechanical  expedients  have  been  devised  for  affording 
phonographers  speed  practice  when  it  is  not  possible  to  obtain 
the  assistance  of  a  reader.  The  present  interlined  speed  practice 
books  furnish,  perhaps,  the  most  useful  and  convenient  aid  yet 
devised. 

Key,  in  Shorthand  to  "  Interlined  "  Nos.  1,  2  and  3.  each  6c.    An 

exact  reproduction  of  the  printed  matter  in  the  Reporting  Style, 

Pitman's  Commercial  Correspondence  in  Shorthand.  224  pp.,  cloth, 
85c.  A  series  of  model  business  letters  in  engraved  Phonography. 
The  letters  are  examples  of  the  best  business  style  of  the  present 
day,  and  in  this  respect  possess  important  advantages  over  other 
publications  of  a  similar  character. 


Commercial  Correspondence  &  Commercial  English.  272  pp.,  cloth, 
86c.  A  practical  Manual  of  Commercial  Correspondence,  forming 
a  key  to  "  Commercial  Correspondence  in  Shorthand."  All  the 
letters  are  counted  for  shorthand  and  typewriting  speed  practice, 
and  editions  are  published  in  Spanish,  French,  and  German, 
corresponding  page  for  page. 

The  Shorthand  Commercial  Letter  Writer.  94pp.,40c. ;  cloth,  50c- 
A  Guide  to  Commercial  Correspondence  in  the  Reporting  Style 
of  Phonography. 

Key  to  "  Shorthand  Commercial  Letter  Writer."  In  ordinary  type. 
20c.  ;  cloth,  40c. 

The  Shorthand  Commercial  Letter  Writer  and  Key.  In  one  volume. 
Cloth,  60c. 

Office  Work  in  Shorthand.  96  pp.,  40c. ;  cloth,  50c.  Specimens 
of  Miscellaneous  Work  in  Reporting  Style. 

Key  to  "  Office  Work."     In  ordinary  type.    20c. ;  cloth,  40c. 
Office  Work  in  Shorthand  and  Key.    In  one  volume.    Cloth,  60c. 
Trade  Correspondence  in  Shorthand.    96  pp. ;   40c. ;  cloth,  50c. 
Key  to  "  Trade  Correspondence."    20c. ;  cloth,  40c. 
Pitman's  International  Mercantile  Letters. 

The  Phonographic  Railway  Phrase  Book.  20c.  An  adaptation  of 
Phonography  to  the  Requirements  of  English  Railway  Business 
and  Correspondence. 

The  Phonographic  Legal  Phrase  Book.  20c.  An  adaptation  of 
Phonography  to  the  Requirements  of  English  Legal  Business  and 
Correspondence. 

The  Insurance  Phrase  Book.    20  pp.,  20c. 

Instruction  in  Legal  Work.  40  pp.,  25c.  In  ordinary  type.  For 
Court  Stenographers  and  Law  Students.  Reprinted  from 
"  Pitman's  Twentieth  Century  Dictation  and  Legal  Forms." 

Military  Phrase  Book.    40  pp.,  40c. 

t  Phonographic  Medical  Outlines.  75c.  Being  a  list  of  outlines 
and  contractions  for  about  3,000  medical  terms.  Third  edition 
entirely  revised. 


ADAPTATIONS    OF    ISAAC   PITMAN'S 

PHONOGRAPHY  TO  FOREIGN 

LANGUAGES. 

f  Taquigrafia  Espafiola  de  Isaac  Pitman.  128  pp.,  cloth,  gilt,  $1.25. 
Adaptacion  a  la  Lengua  Epsafiola  del  Sislema  de  Fonografia  del 
Autor.  Para  uso  de  Escuelas  de  Comercio,  Institutos  y  tambien 
para  Estudio  Personal.  Being  an  Adaptation  of  Isaac  Pitman's 
Shorthand  to  the  Spanish  Language.  Designed  for  use  in 
Business  Colleges,  High  Schools,  and  for  Self  Instruction. 

"  As  the  book  is  primarily  designed  for  business  shorthand 
writers,  the  exercises  are  replete  with  suggestions  of  the  highest 
practical  value  to  all  note-takers  in  offices.  The  book  is  a  little 
marvel  ;  it  is  scientific  and  ingenious  to  a  degree,  and  no  steno 
grapher  should  be  without  it."  —  Mexican  Herald,  Mexico. 

t  Key  to  Taquigrafia  Espaoola.  Cloth,  gilt,  $1.00.  With  additional 
Exercises. 

t  French  Phonography.  40c.  ;  cloth,  60c.  Third  edition.  Revised 
and  Enlarged.  An  adaptation  of  Phonography  to  »-i.e  French 
language.  By  T.  A.  Reed. 

t  German  Phonography.  Crown  8vo.,  64  pp.,  50c.  ;  cloth.  bOc. 
An  adaptation  of  Phonography  to  the  German  language. 

t  Manuale  di  Fonografia  Italiana.  9Dc.  An  adaptation  of  Phono- 
graphy to  the  Italian  language.  By  Giuseppe  Francmi. 

t  Dutch  Phonography.  $1.50.  An  adaptation  of  Phonography  to 
the  Dutch  language.  By  F.  De  Haan. 

t  Phonographia  sef  Llaw  Per  Yn  01  Trem  Isaac  Pitman.    50c.    An 

adaptation  of  Phonography  to  the  Welsh  language.     By  Rev. 
R.  H.  Morgan,  M.A. 

t  Japanese  Phonography.  By  EDWARD  GAUNTLETT.  Rules  in 
English,  examples,  etc.,  in  Japanese.  Part  \,  Corresponding 
Style,  price  60c.  Part  2,  Reporting  Style,  price  75c.  Examples 
and  Exercises,  price  40c. 

Shinshiki 

ff  £  0  *  *  *  E  « 


EDWARD  GAUNTLETT'S  adaptation  of  Pitman's  Shorthand  to  the 
Japanese  language  ;  in  Japanese.  Parts  1  and  2,  with  Book  of 
Exercises,  complete,  price  $1.00. 

Pitman's  Phonography  adapted  to  Esperanto.    Limp  cloth,  50c. 
SHORTHAND  READING  BOOKS. 

The  student,  to  increase  his  speed,  and  to  improve  his  knowledge 
of  Phonography,  cannot  read  too  much  well-engraved  shorthand. 
One  advantage  of  studying  the  Isaac  Pitman  system  —  and  one 
which  cannot  well  be  over-estimated  —  is,  that  the  shorthand 
literature  in  that  system  is  far  in  excess  of  all  other  systems 
combined. 

"  We  would  emphasize  still  further  the  wealth  of  literatvrt 
Qu    Isaac    Pitman   system   has.  .  .  .    These   publishers   art 

7 


continually  issuing  new  works  in  shorthand,  and  this  in  itself 
should  make  their  system  a  great  force  in  the  shorthand  world." — 
Penman's  Art  Journal  (New  York). 

"  We  wish  to  repeat  what  we  have  said  before  with  reference 
to  the  literature  sent  out  by  Isaac  Pitman  &  Sons,  and  that  is, 
that  the  very  extensive  line  they  furnish  is  of  itself  the  highest 
recommendation  for  the  system.  No  other  system  /urnishes  as 
much." — Western  Penman.  (Cedar  Rapids,  la.). 

IN  THE  CORRESPONDING  STYLE. 

Select  Readings,  No.  1.  48  pp.,  20c.  An  entirely  new  book  of 
readings.  Partial  list  of  selections  : — "  A  Rill  from  the  Town 
Pump  "  (NATHANIEL  HAWTHORNE)  "  The  Heart  of  London  " 
(CHARLES  DICKENS)  ;  "  The  Man  in  Black  "  (OLIVER  GOLDSMITH) 
"  Household  Superstitions  "  (JOSEPH  ADDISON)  ;  "  Caught  in  the 
Quicksand  "  (VICTOR  HUGO),  etc. 

Select  Readings,  No.  2.  48  pp.,  20c.  Containing  "  A  First  Night 
at  Sea"  (RICHARD  H.  DANA);  "Niagara"  (DICKENS);  "The 
Candid  Man  "  (BULWER  LYTTON),  etc. 

The  Chimes.    127  pp.,  50c  ;  cloth.  60c.     By  CHARLES  DICKENS. 

The  Battle  of  Lile.  130  pp.,  40c. ;  cloth,  50c.  By  CHARLES 
DICKENS. 

The  Silver  Ship  of  Mexico.  132  pp.,  40c. :  cloth.  50c.  By  J.  H. 
INGRAHAM. 

The  Book  of  Psalms.    160  pp.,  40c. ;   cloth,  50c. 
Self-Culture.    91  pp.,  40c. ;   cloth,  50c.    By  PROP.  BLACKIE. 

Gulliver's  Voyage  to  Lilliput  88  pp.,  40c. ;  cloth,  50c.  By  DEAN 
SWIFT. 

Tales  and  Sketches.  96  pp.,  40c.  cloth  50c.  By  WASHINGTON 
IRVING  ;  with  printed  Key. 

Robinson  Crusoe.  309  pp.,  60c.  ;  cloth,  75c.  By  DANIEL  DEFOE. 
Illustrated.  This  work  is  extremely  well  adapted  for  use  as  a 
shorthand  reader,  and,  in  attractive  cloth  binding,  forms  a 
handsome  prize  volume. 

The  Vicar  of  Wakefield.    Illustrated.    280  pp.,  50c. ;   cloth,  60c. 

IN  THE  REPORTING  STYLE 

/.lections  from  American  Authors.  112  pp.,  40c. ;  cloth,  50c. 
With  Key  in  ordinary  type  at  the  foot  of  each  page,  and  containing 
the  following  selections.  The  Buccaneer's  Treasure  (IRVING)  ; 
My  Editing  (TWAIN)  ;  A  Venerable  Impostor  (HARTE)  ;  The 
Autocrat  of  the  Breakfast  Table  (HOLMES)  ;  The  Way  to  Wealth 
(FRANKLIN)  ;  The  Tell-Tale  Heart  (POE)  ;  Greatness  in  Common 
Life  (CHANNING)  ;  The  Story  of  a  Drum  (HARTE)  ;  The  Procession 
of  Life  (HAWTHORNE)  ;  A  Melting  Story  (TWAIN)  ;  The  Professor 
at  the  Breakfast  Table  (HOLMES). 

8 


The  Cricket  on  the  Hearth.  132  pp.,  50c. ;  clotn,  60c.  By  CHARLES 
DICKENS. 

Brief  Reporting  Notes  in  Shorthand,  or  Shorthand  Dictation  Exercises. 
48  pp.,  25c.  With  printed  Key,  and  the  matter  counted  and  timed 
for  testing  of  Speed  either  in  Shorthand  or  Typewriting. 

The  Sign  ol  Four.  171  pp.,  50c. ;  cloth,  60c.  By  A.  CONAN  DOYLE 
This  famous  detective  story  forms  a  very  attractive  bock  of 
phonographic  reading. 

Tales  from  Dickens.  147  pp.,  50c. ;  cloth,  60c.  Containing  "  The 
Tuggs's  at  Ramsgate."  "  The  Bloomsbury  Christening,"  "  The 
Great  Winglebury  Duel,"  and  "  Mr  Watkins  Tottle,"  from 
"  Sketches  by  Boz,"  forming  Vol.  5  of  "  Pitman's  Shorthand 
Library."  In  engraved  shorthand,  Reporting  Style.  With  17 
original  illustrations  and  heading. 

Around  the  World  in  Eighty  Days.  184  pp.,  50c. ;  cloth,  60c.  By 
JULES  VER.V;E. 

The  Haunted  Man.  104  pp.,  50c. ;  cloth,  gilt,  60c.  By  CHAS. 
DICKENS.  Twenty-one  Original  page  Illustrations. 

Thankful  Blossom.    105  pp.,  40c. ;  cloth,  50c.     By  BRET.  HARTE. 

A  Christmas  Carol.  Ill  pp.,  40c, ;  cloth,  60c.  By  CHARLES 
DICKENS. 

t  High  Speed  in  Shorthand:  How  to  Attain  It  64  pp.,  40o.  With 
type  key. 

t  Shorthand  Examinations:  How  to  Prepare  for  and  How  to  Pass 
Them.  25c. 

t  Won  and  Lost.    32  pp.,  20c.    By  JOHN  TAYLOR. 

t  The  Phantom  Stockman.    32  pp.,  20c.    By  GUY  BOOTRBY. 

Gleanings,  No.  1  and  2.  48  pp.  each.  Each  20c.  Containing 
reproductions  of  notable  essays  by  T.  A.  REED  and  others,  oa 
shorthand  matters,  with  printed  key. 

The  Legend  of  Sleepy  Hollow.  82  pp.,  20c.  By  WASHINGTO» 
IRVING  ;  with  printed  Key  at  the  foot  of  each  page. 

Rip  Van  Winkle.  32  pp.,  20c,  By  WASHINGTON  IRVING  ;  with 
printed  Key. 

The  Bible  In  Shorthand.  Cloth,  beveled  boards,  red  edges,  $3 ; 
roan,  gilt  edges,  $3.50 ;  morocco,  gilt  edges,  $4.50.  Each  style 
has  a  silk  marker  and  comes  boxed.  Containing  the  Old  and 
New  Testaments. 

The  New  Testament.  368  pp.,  roan,  red  edges,  $1.50 ;  Turkey 
morocco,  gilt  edges,  $2-  In  an  Easy  Reporting  Style  of 
Phonography. 

9 


The  Book  of  Common  Prayer.  296  pp.,  roan,  red  edges,  $1.50; 
Turkey  morocco,  gilt  edges,  $2.  In  an  Easy  Reporting  Style  of 
Phonography. 

The  Church  Services  (entire).  935  pp.,  roan,  $3  ;  morocco,  $4.  In 
an  Easy  Reporting  Style  of  Phonography. 

Commercial  Shorthand.  40c.  A  Reading  and  Dictation  book  with 
introduction  by  E.  A.  COPE. 


TYPEWRITING. 

Practical  Course  in  Touch  Typewriting.  By  CHAS.  E.  SMITH,  A  uthor 
of  "  Cumulative  Speller."  Eighth  Edition,  revised  and  enlarged. 
60c.  ;  cloth,  75c.  A  Scientific  Method  of  Mastering  the  Keyboard 
by  the  Sense  of  Touch.  The  design  of  this  work  is  to  teach  touch 
typewriting  in  such  a  way  that  the  student  will  operate  by  touch — 
will  have  an  absolute  command  of  every  key  on  the  keyboard, 
and  be  able  to  strike  any  key  more  readily  without  looking  than 
would  be  the  case  with  the  aid  of  sight.  A  separate  Chart  contain- 
ing Keyboard  and  Diagrams  printed  in  five  colours,  on  a  heavy 
double-calendered  cardboard  accompanies  each  copy.  Contains 
specimens  of  actual  Business  Letters,  Legal  Forms,  Specifications, 
Instructions  for  the  Use  of  the  Tabulator,  etc.,  all  printed  in 
actual  typewriter  type.  In  ordering  state  whether  Single  or 
Double  Keyboard  Edition  is  desired.  Adopted  by  the  New  York 
Board  of  Education. 

"  I  am  pleased  to  state  that  I  consider  '  A  Practical  Course  in 
Touch  Typewriting '  the  only  text-book  from  which  I  studied, 
the  best  Typewriting  instruction  book  that  I  have  seen.  The 
exercises  are  excellent,  and  have  helped  me  wonderfully  in 
working  up  speed.  The  whole  course  is  very  interesting  from 
the  beginning,  and  it  cannot  but  produce  the  best  results  in  the 
shortest  t'me." — Rose  L.  Fritz,  World's  Champion  Typist. 

"  You  may  be  interested  in  knowing  that  our  teachers  and 
pupils  are  greatly  pleased  with  '  Practical  Course  in  Touch 
Typewriting.'  Although  this  work  has  been  in  use  less  than 
two  weeks,  I  can  see  a  very  decided  improvement  in  the  work 
that  our  students  are  doing,  as  well  as  a  greatly  increased 
interest  in  Typewriting  work." — Chas.  Hermann,  President, 
Euclid  School,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 

Isaac  Pitman's  Typewriter  Manual.  $1.00-  Fifth  edition,  revised 
and  enlarged.  A  Practical  Guide  to  Commercial,  Literary,  Legal, 
Dramatic,  and  all  classes  of  Typewriting  work.  Contains  58 
plates.  All-finger  or  Touch  Typewriting  method. 

Remington  Typewriter  Mnnn^1T  40c. ;  cloth,  50c.  Seventh 
edition. 

10 


Instructions  on  the  Remington  Standard  Typewriter.-  32  pp.. 
20  cents.  Also  published  20c.  each  for  the  New  Century  Caligraph, 
Bar-Lock,  and  Yost. 

Typewriter  Backing  Sheet.  lOc.  Designed  to  protect  the  type,  the 
platen,  and  to  assist  in  giving  better  and  longer  service  to  the 
writing  machine  and  lessen  the  noise.  The  sheet  is  printed  with 
line  numerals  from  1  to  60,  which  indicates  the  nearing  of  the  end 
of  the  sheet.  It  prevents  slipping  ot  the  paper  and  wrinkling  of 
carbons. 

The  New  Universal  System  of  Touch  or  Sight  Typewriting.  By  I.  W. 
PATTON.  Third  Edition  Revised  and  EiJarged.  60c.  The  plan 
of  fingering  is  clear  and  simple.  No  antiquated  or  stereotyped 
method  to  puzzle  and  confuse  the  pupil.  The  keyboard  is  printed 
in  three  colors  for  the  different  fingers  and  one  glance  shows  the 
pupil  just  what  finger  to  use.  Over  two  thousand  lines  of 
fingering  exercises  on  words  and  sentences  are  furnished  to  the 
pupil. 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE, 
BUSINESS  ENGLISH,  SPELLING,  Etc. 

Pitman's  20th  Century  Business  Dictation  Book  and  Leeal  Forms. 
272  pp.,  stiff  boards  and  cloth  back.  75c. ;  cloth,  81.00.  (Fifth 
edition.)  Containing  an  up-to-date  collection  of  genuine  letters 
(in  ordinary  type)  which  have  been  used  in  the  transaction  of 
actual  work  in  large  American  business  houses,  classified  under 
fifty  distinct  lines  of  business,  each  set  of  letters  separate  ;  Legal 
Forms,  and  a  judicious  selection  of  practice-matter  for  general 
dictation.  Also  chapters  on  Spelling,  Punctuation,  Capitaliza- 
tion, and  Short  Practical  Talks  with  the  Amanuensis,  etc.  This 
work,  which  is  the  most  complete  dictation  course  published,  is 
specially  compiled  for  the  teacher,  the  beginner,  and  the  advanced 
student.  All  progressive  Schools,  without  reference  to  the 
system  of  Shorthand  taught,  should  insist  upon  each  student 
procuring  a  copy.  Every  teacher  of  Shorthand  or  Typewriting 
will  see  at  a  glance  the  immense  value  of  this  work  as  a  means  by 
which  students  may  study  American  business  correspondence  as 
it  actually  is.  All  matter  counted  for  speed-testing. 

Also  published  in  two  parts,  as  follows  :•• — 

Part  L — Business  Dictation.  168  pp.,  stiff  boards  and  cloth  back, 
50c.  Containing  fifty  distinct  lines  of  business. 

Part  2.— Legal  Forms  and  Miscellaneous  Selections,  etc.    103  pp., 

stiff  boards  and  cloth  back.    40c. 

Pitman's  Cumulative  Speller.  112  pp.,  cloth,  40c.  By  CHARLES 
E.  SMITH,  author  of  "  A  Practical  Course  in  Touch  Typewriting." 
A  modem  and  practical  speller  for  Commercial  Education.  As 
the  title  indicates,  the  plan  is  cumulative.  Each  lesson  consists 
of  sixteen  words,  the  first  twelve  of  which  are  respelled  phonetic- 
ally and  defined.  The  syllabication,  pronunciation,  and  definition 
it  the  remaining  four  words  should  be  assigned  to  the  student, 
either  as  homework  or  seat-work.  A  homework  dictionary, 
containing  all  of  these  special  words,  is  included  in  the  speller 
at  the  end  of  the  first  hundred  regular  lessons.  This  feature  of 

II 


the  work  is  intended  to  afford  vfae  .student  a  ready  means  of 
acquiring  the  dictionary  habit — a  habit  so  essential  to  all  who 
take  pride  in  turning  out  accurate  work.  Nearly  all  of  the  words 
assigned  for  homework  are  later  on  repeated  in  the  regular  lessons, 
so  that  the  lessons  review  themselves  and  reduce  to  a  minimum 
the  necessity  of  having  special  review  lessons.  This  work  contains 
a  special  chapter  on  the  New  Spelling,  together  with  the  300 
words  recommended  by  the  Simplified  Spelling  Board,  and  is  the 
only  business  speller  published  containing  this  feature. 
%*  A  special  edition  of  "  Cumulative  Speller  "  is  also  issued  with 
a  Shorthand  Vocabulary  for  schools  teaching  the  Isaac  Pitman 
system.  Goth,  gilt,  145  pp.,  50c.  Sample  pages  of  either 
edition  sent  on  request. 

"  The  Cumulative  Speller  appealed  to  me  so  strongly  when 
I  was  privileged  to  examine  the  proof  sheets,  that  it  was 
immediately  placed  on  our  list.  It  has  as  many  advantages 
as  the  old  time  speller  had  defects.  It  presents  a  unique  and 
scientific  method  in  dealing  with  what  has  always  been'  a  most 
unsatisfactory  subject  to  the  shorthand  teacher.  It  gives  the 
student  an  extensive  shorthand  vocabulary  and  facility  in 
reading  his  Shorthand.  It  also  gives  him  a  satisfactory 
meaning  for  each  word,  and  u  saves  a  vast  amount  of  the 
teacher's  time." — A.  M,  Kennedy,  Kennedy  Shorthand  School, 
Toronto,  Canada. 

Punctuation  as  a  Means  of  Expression.  Its  Theory  and  Practice. 
By  A.  E.  LOVELL,  M.A.  50c.  This  is  much  more  than  a  mere 
statement  of  rules.  The  author  has  written  an  interesting  and 
helpful  manual  of  the  subject,  that  will  greatly  impress  the 
intelligent  student  and  be  much  appreciated  by  all  who  value 
clearness  and  thoroughness  in  writing. 

Style  Book  of  Business  English.  234  pp.  85c.  For  Stenographers 
and  Correspondents.  This  new  treatise  will  especially  appeal  to 
the  teacher  of  English  wherever  it  is  seen.  Teachers  of  this 
subject  using  this  work  can  feel  assured  of  vastly  better  results 
than  they  have  ever  before  secured.  Contains  a  special  chapter 
on  Card-indexing  and  Letter-filing,  fully  illustrated. 

Key  to  Style  Book.    20c. 

Pitman's  Commercial  Dictionary.  The  latest  and  best  pocket  dic- 
tionary, 381  pp.,  cloth  back,  lettering  in  two  colors,  25c.;  French 
morocco,  gilt,  50c.  At  the  suggestion  of  a  number  of  commer- 
cial teachers  who  have  found  the  various  present-day  pocket 
dictionaries  incomplete  and  inaccurate  for  commercial  school 
work,  we  have  prepared  this  work,  which  contains  many  features 
not  found  in  books  of  this  character. 

WORKS  ON  SHORTHAND,  COURT 
REPORTING,  Etc. 

(In  Ordinary  Type.) 

t  The  Life  of  Sir  Isaac  Pitman,  Inventor  of  Phonography.  392  pp., 
with  fifty  illustrations,  including  photogravure  and  many  other 
full-page  plates,  consisting  of  portraits,  views,  and  facsimiles. 
Cloth,  gilt,  gilt  top,  52.00.  For  the  first  time  the  authentic 

12 


story  of  Sir  rsa«c  Pftman's  career  is  told  completely  In  the  new 
"Life."  The  narrative  will,  without  doubt,  have  great  attraction 
for  all  Shorthand  Teachers,  and  also  for  all  who  use  Phon- 
ography. Thousands  of  instructors  who  have  for  many  years 
oast  been  engaged  in  imparting  a  knowledge  of  the  system  the 
*' Father  of  Phonography"  invented,  will,  we  feel  convinced, 
consider  it  a  duty  to  acquaint  themselves  with  the  life  story  of 
one  whose  shorthand  system  forms,  either  wholly  or  in  part,  the 
foundation  of  their  vocation  in  life. 

The  Shorthand  Writer.  240  pp.,  cloth,  gilt,  $1.00.  A  complete 
Guide  to  the  Commercial,  Professional,  and  other  uses  of  Short- 
hand. By  THOMAS  ALLEN  REED.  This  volume  contains  Mr. 
Reed's  accumulated  experience  of  half  a  century's  study  and  prac- 
tice of  the  Art  of  Shorthand,  as  a  reporter,  professional  shorthand 
writer,  teacher,  lecturer,  and  examiner. 

History  of  Shorthand.  228  pp.,  75c. ;  cloth,  $1.00-  By  SIR  ISAAC 
PITMAN.  Third  edition.  Containing  a  description  of  the  principal 
systems  of  shorthand  which  have  been  published  from  the  time 
of  Bright  in  1588,  together  with  a  short  account  of  the  early 
history  of  the  art,  and  prefaced  with  a  summary  of  Phonography. 
The  book  also  contains  16  pages  of  alphabets  of  the  principal 
systems,  with  numerous  specimens  of  shorthand.  The  largest 
and  most  complete  history  of  shorthand  ever  published. 

t  A  Biography  of  Sir  Isaac  Pitman.  Cloth,  $100.  By  THOMAS 
ALLEN  REED.  Illustrated  with  Woodcuts  and  Facsimile  Pages 
The  only  authentic  biography  of  the  Inventor  of  Phonography. 

Life  and  Work  of  Sir  Isaac  Pitman.    Illustrated.    40c. 

The  Newspaper  World.     40c. ;   cloth,  60c.    By  ALFRED  BAKER. 

Pitman's  Popular  Guide  to  Journalism,    112  pp.,  cloth,  50c. 

t  Reporting  Hints  and  Practice.    Cloth,  40c. 

t  The  Student's  Phonographic  Shorthand  Exercises.    133  pp.,  75c. 

t  Pitman's  Shorthand  &  Typewriting  Year  Book  and  Diary.    40c. 

International  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  Contests.  Contains  the 
photographs  of  winners  and  the  records  made  in  the  principal 
contests.  24  pp.,  6c. 

A  Chapter  in  the  Early  History  of  Phonography.  Cloth,  40c.  By 
THOMAS  ALLEN  REED.  With  a  Preface  by  SIR  ISAAC  PITMAN. 

The  Bibliography  of  Shorthand.  256  pp.,  cloth,  $2.00.  By  Dr 
WESTBY-GIBSON.  Comprising  a  list  of  all  known  printed  Works 
and  Manuscripts  on  Stenography  and  Phonography,  by  English, 
Colonial,  and  American  authors  (including  periodicals,  works  in 
character,  and  the  best  magazine  articles)  with  Introduction. 

t  Court  Reporting:  A  Manual  of  Legal  Dictation  and  Forms.  290 
pp.  Half  law  sheep,  $1.00.  This  book  is  designed  for  Steno- 
graphers and  Typewriter  operators  who  are  desirous  of  becoming 
proficient  and  expert  in  Law  Work  and  Court  Reporting 

13 


t  Civil  Service  Examinations.  24  pp.,  25c.  One  c  f  the  most  im- 
portant branches  of  the  Civil  Service  is  that  covered  by  the 
general  title  of  clerical  force.  Of  this  department,  the  position 
of  stenographer  and  typewriter  usually  takes  precedence  and, 
with  one  or  two  exceptions,  is  the  most  remunerative. 

How  to  Become  a  Law  Stenographer.  165  pp.,  75c.  A  Compendium 
of  Legal  Forms,  containing  a  complete  set  of  Legal  Documents 
accompanied  with  full  explanations  and  directions  for  arranging 
on  the  typewriter  for  stenographers  and  typists.  This  work 
will  be  found  an  indispensable  companion  for  every  stenographer 
intending  to  take  a  position  in  a  law  office. 


MISCELLANEOUS  WORKS. 

BANKING,  BOOK-KEEPING,  INSURANCE,  MEMORY,   etc. 

A  Complete  Guide  to  the  Improvement  of  the  Memory.    136  pp. ,  40c. . 

cloth,  60c.     Or,  The  Science  of  Memory  Simplified.     By   Rev. 
J.H.BACON. 

A  Guide  to  English  Composition.  112pp.,  40c. ;  cloth,  60c.  With 
Progressive  Exercises.  By  Rev.  J.  H.  BACON. 

Business  Handwriting.    40c. 

Primer  of  Book-keeping.  40c.  An  introductory  and  preparatory 
course. 

Answers  to  "  Primer,"    Cloth,  40c. 
Book-keeping  Simplified.    Cloth,  85c. 
Answers  to  Book-keeping  Simplified.     Cloth,  40c. 
Pitman's  Advanced  Book-keeping.    187  pp.,  cloth,  $1.00. 
Answers  to  Advanced  Book-keeping.    Cloth,  40c. 
Pitman's  Complete  Book-keeping.    372  pp.,  cloth,  $1.50. 
Answers  to  Complete  Book-keeping.    Cloth,  85c. 
How  to  Teach  Book-keeping.    200  pp.,  cloth,  81.00- 
Pitman's  Business  Man's  Guide.    500  pp.,  cloth,  $1.25. 

Pitman's  Pocket  Dictionary  of  the  English  Language.  Size,  5  in. 
by  3  in.  Leather,  75c. 

Business  Terms  and  Phrases.  164  pp.,  cloth,  85c.  Containing 
explanations  of  terms,  phrases,  and  abbreviations,  in  English, 
with  French,  German,  and  Spanish  equivalents  and  facsimiles  of 
documents. 

Pitman's  Paper  Flower  Making.  Cloth,  60c.  Colored  plates  and 
150  illustrations. 

14 


The  World  and  its  Commerce.    128  pp.,  and  35  maps.    Boards,  JJ5c. 

Dictionary  of  the  World's  Commercial  Products.  163  pp.,  85: - 
Second  Edition  Revised.  With  equivalents  in  French,  German, 
and  Spanish.  A  simple  and  concise  encyclopaedia,  giving  in  clear 
and  accurate  language  a  description  of  all  the  principal  com- 
mercial products  of  the  world.  Information  is  supplied  as  to 
the  sources  of  production,  the  uses  to  which  the  various  products 
are  applied,  and  '^e  countries  which  trade  in  them. 

Cane  Weaving  for  Children.  32  pp.,  20c.  An  educational  method 
of  hand  training.  By  LUCY  R.  LATTER. 

Encyclopaedia  of  Marine  Law.  300  pp.,  cloth,  gilt,  $2.00.  By 
LAWRENCE  DUCKWORTH.  A  knowledge  of  Marine  Law  is  of  the 
utmost  importance  to  all  those  who  are  in  any  way  connected 
with  the  shipping  trade,  and  the  present  volume  draws  together 
the  main  parts  of  that  branch  of  knowledge. 

insurance.  340  pp.,  cloth,  $2.50.  A  Practical  Exposition  for  the 
Student  and  Business  Man.  By  T.  E.  YOUNG,  B.A.,  F.R.A.S., 
Ex-President  of  the  Institute  of  Actuaries,  and  Member  of  the 
Actuarial  Society  of  America.  A  thoroughly  practical  Treatise 
for  all  engaged  in  Insurance  work.  Treats  fully  of  Life,  Fire 
and  Marine  Insurance.  A  work  of  living  interest  and  will  prove 
of  the  utmost  practical  value.  Adopted  by  Yale  University. 

"  It  is  unquestionably  the  very  best  single  work  which  can 
be  obtained  for  use  of  a  class  in  the  subject,  and  I  am  very 
pleased  to  be  able  to  recommend  and  adopt  such  a  text." — 
Edear  Van  Dewson,  A.M.,  Instructor  in  Finance,  Dartmouth 
College,  Hanover  (N.H.). 

"  The  theory  of  the  subject  is  treated  in  a  particularly  lucid 
way,  the  more  abstruse  portions  being  stated  in  as  elementary 
a  form  as  possible,  and  the  views  and  positions  affirmed  and 
maintained  are  all  brought  to  the  test  of  actual  working,  and 
illustrated  by  actual  examples  that  have  occurred  in  the 
author's  professional  experience."  —  Publishers'  Weekly. 
New  York. 

insurance  Office  Organization,  Management  and  Accounts.  •  150  pp- , 
cloth,  $1.50.  A  Companion  Volume  to  "  Insurance."  By  T.  E. 
YOUNG,  B.A.,  F.R.A.S.,  and  RICHARD  MASTERS. 

"  It  covers  primarily  the  numerous  points  arising  in  office 
organization— books  of  accounts,  the  arrangement  of  work, 
the  staff  and  its  selection,  salaries,  promotion,  the  training  of 
clerks,  dismissals,  retirement  and  superannuation — together 
with  many  important  suggestions  as  to  matters  growing  out  of 
the  conduct  of  the  business  at  the  head  office.  This  work  is  an 
extremely  practical  one,  and  there  can  hardly  be  an  insurance 
office  in  the  country  which  would  not  find  useful  and  valuable 
suggestions  therein,  which  if  adopted  or  adapted,  would 
improve  the  records  or  minimize  the  office  work  or  both.  It 
is  of  particular  value  to  those  contemplating  the  establishment 
•f  new  insurance  companies." — The  Spectator.  New  York. 

Inountaney.  311  pp.,  cloth,  jplt,  $2.00.  By  FRANCIS  W.  PIXLEY. 
An  entirely  new  work  dealing  with  Accountancy,  Constructive 
and  Recording,  from  a  theoretical  and  a  practical  point  of  view. 
The  latest  exposition  of  the  science. 

15 


Money,  Exchange  and  Banking.    270  pp.,  cloth,  gilt,  $2.00.    By 

H.  T.  EASTON,  Associate  of  the  Institute  of  Bankers.     Treats  of 

the  above  subjects  in  their  practical,  theoretical,  and  legal  aspects. 

"  Is  so  complete  and  contains  so  much  that  business  men  and 

banks  in  the  financial  districts  have  ordered  their  clerks  to 

read  it.  It  also  contains  information  that  every  modern  business 

man  should  have  at  his  fingers'  ends." — Ar.  Y.  Evening  Telegram. 

Office  Organization  and  Management  315  pp.,  cloth,  gilt,  $2.00. 
By  LAWRENCE  R.  DICKSEE,  M.Com.,  F.C.A.,  and  H.  E.  BLAIN. 
This  volume  gives  in  detail,  with  the  aid  of  specially  selected 
illustrations  and  copies  of  actual  business  forms,  a  complete 
description  of  management  and  organization  under  the  most 
improved  and  up-to-date  methods. 


WORKS,   ETC.,   FOR    TEACHERS  OF 
PHONOGRAPHY. 

All  Teachers  of  Isaac  Pitman's  Phonography  are  requested  to  send 
their  address  for  registration  to  Isaac   Pitman  &•  Sons,  31   Union 
Square,  New    York. 

Handbook  for  Shorthand  Teachers.  Cloth.  60c.  Containing 
Instructions  to  Teachers,  Lessons  on  the  Text-books,  etc.  Teachers 
will  find  in  this  work  a  description  of  the  best  methods  of  successful 
shorthand  teaching. 

The  Pitmanic  Guide.  24  pp.,  15c.  Containing  a  veritable  mine  of 
information  about  the  system  both  for  students  and  teachers, 
especially  those  who  have  previously  studied  other  Pitmanic 
methods,  and  it  will  be  found  exceedingly  useful  to  teachers  who 
are  contemplating  making  a  change  from  such  modifications  to 
the  pure  Isaac  Pitman  system. 

Chart  of  the  Phonetic  Alphabet  22  by  35  in.  lOc.  Same  mounted 
on  canvas  rollers  and  varnished,  75c.  Containing  the  Shorthand 
and  Printing  letters, 

t  Chaits  on  Pitman's  Shorthand.  35  by  22  in.  $2.50  ;  on  canvas, 
$4  00.  Ready  for  hanging  on  wall.  A  series  of  14  large  Charts 
illustrating  the  principles  of  Phonography  as  developed  in  tha 
text-books.  Every  Teacher  should  have  a  set  to  hang  on  the 
walls  of  his  class-room.  These  Charts  are  invaluable  for  Class 
tuition.  • 

Some  Points.  Twelve  pages  and  four  cover  pages  printed  in  red 
and  green.  Price,  40c.  per  100  ;  SI. 75  for  500,  post  paid.  Teachers 
and  schools  will  find  this  one  of  the  most  attractive  pamphlets 
ever  published  in  connection  with  the  Isaac  Pitman  system. 
Sample  copy  free. 

A  Persuasive  to  the  Study  and  Practice  of  Phonography,  16  pp.,  40c. 
per  100  ;  $3.00  per  1,000  net,  post-paid.  In  attractive  tinted 
cover,  and  space  being  reserved  for  Teachers'  terms.  By  a 
judicious  distribution  of  this  pamphlet,  pupils  can  be  secured, 
and  publications  sold. 

16 


A  Smaller  Edition  of  above  PERSUASIVE  consisting  of  8  pp.,  giving 
Alphabet,  etc.  Sample  free.  Price,  POST  PAID,  100  copies,  20c.  ; 
500  copies  90c. 

"  Which  System  of  Shorthand  Should  we  Learn  ?  "  32  pp.  in  attrac- 
tive cover.  Sample  copy  free.  10  copies,  20c. ;  50  copies,  65c.  ; 
100  copies,  $1.20,  post  paid. 

The  Commercial  Value  of  Shorthand.  24  pp.  in  tinted  cover.  Text 
in  two  colours  and  marginal  captions.  Sample  copy  free.  25 
copies,  25c. ;  100  copies,  75c.,  post-paid. 

Shorthand  in  the  Executive  Departments  at  Washington.  6  pp., 
and  space  for  school  imprint,  two  colors.  Sample  free.  Price, 
POST  PAID,  100  copies,  15c. ;  500  copies,  65c. 

Court  Reporters'  Testimony  to  the  Superiority  of  the  Isaac  Pitman 
Shorthand.  12  pp.,  and  space  for  imprint  on  first  page  of  cover. 
Teachers'  NET  PRICE,  POST-PAID  :  25  copies,  15c. ;  100  copies, 
40c.  250  copies,  85c. 

Twelve  Reasons  for  Learning  Isaac  Pitman's  Shorthand.  Four 
pages,  printed  in  two  colors,  and  space  for  imprint.  Teachers' 
NET  PRICE,  POST  PAID  :  100  copies,  12c. ;  500  copies,  50c. 

The  New  vs.  The  Old,  or  the  Isaac  Pitman  Phonography  vs.  Benn 
Pitman,  Graham,  and  Others.  Eight  pages.  Teachers'  NET 
PRICE,  POST-PAID,  :  25  copies,  15c. ;  100  copies,  40c. ;  250  copies, 
85c. 

PERIODICALS. 

Pitman's  Journal.  Terms  of  Subscription  :  Per  Year  in  Advance, 
50c.  Special  Club  rates  on  application.  Sampla  copy  free.  An 
American  Magazine  for  Isaac  Pitman  Teachers  and  Writers. 
Issued  monthly,  except  July  and  August.  Each  number  of 
PITMAN'S  JOURNAL  contains  twenty- four  pages  (size  7J  by  9|)  and 
includes  eight  columns  of  beautifully  engraved  Phonography, 
furnishing  invaluable  means  for  study  and  practice  to  students 
of  the  art.  Current  topics  of  interest  appear  in  every  issue  by 
contributors  of  reputation  and  experience,  making  the  JOURNAL 
of  the  highest  usefulness  to  both  the  beginner  and  experienced 
teacher.  Facsimile  notes  and  Prize  Competitions  are  special 
features. 

t  Bound  volumes  of  PITMAN'S  JOURNAL:  Vol.  I  and  II,  $2-50 
each  ;  Vol.  Ill,  $1.50. 

Other  Shorthand  Periodicals. 

ISAAC  PITMAN  &  SONS,  31  Union  Square,  New  York,  are  agents  and 
accopt  subscriptions  for  the  following  English  publications : — 

Pitman's  (English)  Journal.  Founded  by  Sir  Isaac  Pitman  in  1842. 
The  oldest  and  only  weekly  periodical  (in  any  system)  in  existence 
devoted  to  SHORTHAND,  TYPEWRITING,  and  kindred  subjects. 
Each  number  consists  of  42  pp.,  and  comprises  12  COLUMNS  OF 
PRINTED  SHORTHAND.  Terms  of  Subscription,  Payable  in 
Advance : — 

12  months,  52  weekly  issues       . .        |1.75 
6        „       26  „  ..1.00 

t  Bound  volumes  of  the  JOURNAL  from  1842  to  1875  are  out  of 
print.  Volumes  from  1878  to  1890,  $2.50  each,  post  free.  Volumes 
from  1891,  to  present  date,  $2-00  each,  post-free.  Handsome 
covers  for  binding  the  present  or  past  yearly  volumes,  t  40c.  each. 

17 


pitman's  Shorthand  Weekly.  Twelve  pages.  Beautifully  printed 
in  the  reporting,  corresponding,  and  learner's  styles,  and  profusely 
illustrated.  The  contents  consist  of  stories  and  tales,  serial  and 
complete  ;  interesting  extracts  ;  amusing  paragraphs  ;  phono- 
graphic jokes  and  anecdotes.  Terms  of  subscription  same  as  the 
PITMAN'S  (ENGLISH)  JOURNAL. 

•f  Bound  volumes  (Half- Yearly)  of  PITMAN'S  SHORTHAND  VVEEKLY 
as  follows  : — Vols.  1  to  7  out  of  print ;  vol.  8  to  the  present  date 
$1.50  each. 

Pitman's  Shorthand  Budget  The  monthly  edition  of  P.S.W. 
Each  issue  contains  32  to  pages  of  40  Engraved  Phonography, 
and  fully  illustrated.  Twelve  months,  $1.75;  Six  months,  fl.OO; 
Sample,  15c. 

Reporters'  Journal.  Sample  copy,  10c.  Yearly  subscription,  post* 
paid,  $1.26.  Edited  by  J.  H.  FORD. 

Reporters'  Magazine.  Sample  copy,  10c.  Yearly  subscription, 
post-paid,  $1.25.  Edited  by  E.  J.  NANKIVELL. 


PHONOGRAPHIC  STATIONERY 
AND  SUPPLIES. 

Bepprters'  Note-book.  "  Fono  Series."  For  pen  or  pencil.  Isaac 
Pitman  &  Sons'  "  Fono "  Series.  Specially  made — ELASTIC 
BOUND  (no  stitching)  opening  PERFECTLY  FLAT.  The  paper 
contained  in  these  note-books  is  expressly  manufactured,  and  is 
of  a  very  superior  quality.  The  peculiar  fibre  of  same  permitting 
of  a  high  rate  of  speed  in  shorthand  writing.  The  old  style  note- 
book, on  account  of  its  cheap  stiff  binding,  has  a  constant  tendency 
to  close,  and  when  forced  open  will  not  lie  flat.  In  the  Isaac 
Pitman  "  Fono  "  Series  this  difficulty  is  entirely  obviated,  and 
when  the  page  is  turned  will  lie  absolutely  flat.  This  feature  will 
be  thoroughly  appreciated  in  rapid  work.  Ruled  in  red  unless 
otherwise  stated.  Sample  pages  of  the  different  rulings  sent  on 
request. 

"  I  have  become  so  used  to  your  No.  5  Note-Book  that  I 
can  use  no  other.  .  .  .  My  colleague  (Mr  Beard)  in  this  court 
says  that  your  books  are  the  best  he  has  ever  used  in  twenty 
years'  experience." — Peter  P.  McLoughlin,  Court  of  General 
Sessions,  New  York  City. 

END  OPENING. 

No.  5—"  Fono  "  Series,  200  pp.,  5  by  8  in.  . .         . .     20c. 

,,    5 —        „  „  „  „  marginal  line      20c. 

»,    5 —         „  „  „  „  marginal     line 

and  pages  num- 
bered 1  to  200    25c. 

n    6—        „  »  „  „  marginal    line 

and  stiff  board 
covers  . .     S5c. 

18 


No.  5x — "  Fono  "  Series,  200  pp.,  5  by  8  in.,  narrow  ruling    20f 

„    SB —      „  „  „  „  marginal,  and 

two  additional 
faint  blue  lines    20c. 

v   SB —  „  .,  with  pages  numbered  1  to  200     . .  25c. 

n   5C —  n  „  200  pp.,  Si  by8J  in. .si*  vertical  lines  25c. 

M   5c —  „  „  with  pages  numbered  1  to  200     . .  30c. 

„   SE —  „  „  (pencil  paper)  200  pp.,  6  by  8  in...  20c 

.     20 —      .,  ,,      200  pp.,  5i  by  8|  in.,  stiff  board 

covers,  with  blue  narrow  ruling  and  red  marginal  line. .     25c. 

SIDE    OPENING. 

No.  6 — "  Fono  "  Series,  240  pp.,  4|  by  7  in.,  unruled      . .     20c. 

M    BA —      „  „      160  pp.,  Si  by  8J  in.,  eight  vertical 

lines  25c. 

„    BB —      „  „     160  pp.,  Si  by  8i  in.,  line  down  centre    25c. 

„    6c—  „     160    , 

Pencil  paper         . .         . .          . .     25c. 

tS"  A  liberal  reduction  by  the  dozen  copies.  Note-Books  should 
be  ordered  in  quantities  to  warrant  sending  by  express  and  thus 
saving  extravagant  postage  required  on  this  class  of  matter. 

Loose  Sheets.  No.  5  "  Fono  "  Series  Reporting  Paper,  size  8i  by 
lit  in.  Sold  only  in  packages  of  1,000  sheets.  Numbered  1  to 
1,000.  Price  $310  net. 

Students'  Note-Books.  Made  of  superior  quality  paper  and  suitable 
for  pen  or  pencil.  End  opening. 

No.    1—100  pages,  4  by  6}  in.,  red  lines 5c. 

„     2 — 180  pages,  4  by  8i  in.,  red  lines 8c. 

„     3—200  pages,  4i  by  7i  in.  red  lines 10c. 

„   19—140  pages,  4|  by  9  in.,  red  lines  and  marginal  line. .  20c. 

•»*  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3  contain  a  complete  list  of  Reporting  Gramma- 
logues  and  Contractions,  alphabetically  arranged,  printed  inside 
the  covers.  This  feature  will  be  found  of  the  greatest  convenience 
to  the  shorthand  student. 

Lead  Pencils.  Isaac  Pitman  &  Sons*  Reporting  Pencils  will  in 
future  be  stamped  and  known  as  Pitman's  "  Fono  "  Pencils,  but 
the  quality  will  remain  the  same — it  cannot  be  improved.  For 
smoothness,  durability,  and  uniformity  of  grade  (which  is  at 
once  detected  by  a  sensitive  hand),  and  for  easy  cutting,  these 
pencils  have  stood  unequalled  for  upwards  of  a  quarter  of  a 
century.  Once  used,  always  used,  ensuring  satisfaction  with  the 
pencils  and  with  the  writer.  Made  in  two  qualities  : — No.  1 
(Silver  script  letters).— Per  dozen,  50c.  ;  per  half  gross,  $2.60  ; 
per  gross,  $4.50.  Sample  of  six,  post-paid,  25c. ;  three,  16c. 

19 


No.  2  (Silver  old  English  letters).— Per  dozen,  SI ;  per  half  gross, 
$5  ;   per  gross,  $9.    Sample  of  six,  post-paid,  50c. ;    three,  SOc, 

"  I  have  tried  about  every  make  of  pencil  in-  practical  work, 
and  can  truthfully  say  that  the  '  Isaac  Pitman  Reporting 
Pencil '  is  by  far  the  best  of  them  all,  and  less  than  half  the 
cost  of  many." — A.  Cooper,  Official  Stenographer.  Dept.  Public 
Works,  New  York. 

Note-Book  Covers.  20c.,  post-paid,  25c.  Neat  black  cloth  covers 
for  holding  either  Nos.  1.  2,  or  3,  and  forming  a  knee  rest.  For 
"  Fono  "  Series  No.  5,  price  30c.,  post-paid,  35c. 

Reporting  Paper.  Per  Quire,  10c. ;  post-free,  12c.  Five  Quires, 
40c. ;  post-free,  50c. 

Reporting  Covers.    Cloth,  20c. ;   leather,  60c. ;   morocco,  $1.00. 

Evercircnlator  Covers.  Cloth,  30c. ;  leather,  40c.  To  hold 
Evercirculator  paper. 

Fono  "  Writing  Paper.    Packet  of  60  sheets,  30c.,  post-paid,  35c. ; 
five  quires,  60c.,  post-paid,  60c. 

"  Fono  "  Letter  or  Evercirculator  Paper,  ornamental  border.  Packet 
pf  60  sheets,  30c.,  post-paid,  35c. ;  five  quires,  50c.,  post-paid,  60c. 

Note-Book  Cover  and  Transcribing  Slope.  Size  9  in.  by  5  in.  Price, 
with  140-page  Note-Book,  red  ruling,  marginal  line,  80c.  ;  post- 
free,  90c.  Without  Note-Book,  70c.  ;  post-free,  75c.  Made  of 
leather.  Forms  a  convenient  rest  suitable  for  knee  or  desk. 

Fountain  Pens.  No.  12,  $2-50;  No.  14,  $4;  The  Waterman 
"  Ideal  "  is  the  most  perfect  fountain  pen  made  and  is  unequalled 
for  shorthand  or  longhand  writing.  Sent  carefully  packed  and 
post-paid  on  receipt  of  amount. 

**  Fono  "  Pencil  Case  and  Fountain  Pen  Holder.  60c.  Price,  with 
six  of  our  celebrated  Reporting  Pencils,  75c.  Made  of  roan, 
leather  lined.  The  case  folds  up,  and  occupies  less  space  than 
an  ordinary  pocket  book. 

"  Fono  "  Pencil  Sharpener.    35  cents. 

Reporters'  Rest  or  Desk  for  the  Knee.  60c.  Folds  up  for  the 
pocket. 

The  Phonographic  Badge.  Sir  Isaac  Pitman's  design,  symbolic  of 
Phonography,  has  been  chosen  for  the  Phonographic  Badge.  It 
is  produced  in  an  artistic  ornament  of  sterling  silver.  Issued  in 
two  forms  :  (1)  Scarf  Pin  ;  (2)  Brooch.  Either  design  75c.  each. 


PHOTOGRAPHS. 

Photograph  of  Sir  Isaac  Pit-nan,  Inventor  of  Phonography.     30c. 
Size  8  z  91-    Suitable  for  framing  and  hanging  in  the  class  room. 

20 


LANGUAGES. 

SPANISH. 

Pitman's  Practical  Spanish  Grammar  and  Conversation  to  Sell- 
Instruction.  113  pp.,  40c.  ;  cloth,  50c.  With  copious  Vocabulary 
and  IMITATED  Pronunciations.  By  the  aid  of  this  book, 
the  student  is  enabled  to  rapidly  acquire  a  perfect  knowledge 
of  the  Spanish  language. 

"  This  honored  house  has  a  right  to  style  itself  '  rapid,'  for 
it  not  only  is  at  the  front  with  rapid  stenography  and  with  the 
best  rapid  methods  of  learning  French  and  Spanish,  but  it  is 
rapid  in  getting  into  the  field  with  new  books  for  new  issues. 
\Ve  would  advise  well-educated  young  men  to  master  Spanish. 
It  is  not  a  difficult  language,  and  Pitnan's  Practical  Spanish 
Grammar  makes  it  doubly  easy.  In  saying  anything  of  the 
Pitmans  we  think  of  their-shorthand  equipment.  There  is  not 
much  trouble  in  acquiring  the  ability  to  write  Spanish  in 
shorthand  after  one  thoroughly  masters  the  language.  The 
future  is  very  promising  in  this  direction  for  American  youths 
who  know  Spanish." — Journal  of  Education  (Boston). 

Easy  Spanish  Conversational  Sentences.  32  pp.,  20c.  With  Literal 
Interlinear  Translation  and  Imitated  Pronunciation. 

Advanced  Spanish  Conversational  Exercises.    32  pp.,  20c. 

Spanish  Business  Letters.  32  pp.,  20c.  With  Vocabulary  and 
copious  notes  in  English. 

Spanish  Commercial  Phrases.  32  pp.,  25c.  With  Abbreviations 
and  Translations. 

Spanish  Business  Interviews.  96  pp.,  40c. ;  doth,  50c.  With 
Correspondence,  etc.,  each  forming  a  complete  Commercial 
Transaction,  including  Technical  Terms  and  Idiomatic  Expres- 
sions, accompanied  by  a  copious  Vocabulary. 

Spanish  Tourists'  Vade  Mecum.  Cloth,  40c.  Every-day  Phrases, 
With  Vocabularies,  Tables,  etc.,  and  the  exact  pronunciation  of 
every  word. 

Dictionary  of  Commercial  Correspondence  in  French,-  German, 
Spanish,  and  Italian.  508  pp.,  cloth,  $2.25.  Containing  the 
most  common  and  ordinary  terms  and  phrases  of  a  commercial 
nature. 

Pitman's  Commercial  Correspondence  in  Spanish.  267  pp.,  cloth, 
gilt,  $1.00.  The  increasing  importance  of  a  study  of  the  Spanish 
language  has  induced  the  Publishers  to  issue  an  edition  of 
their  successful  work,  "  Commercial  Correspondence  "  (already 
published  in  English,  French,  and  German)  in  that  language.  The 
work  gives  all  the  :etters  contained  in  the  other  editions,  and 
there  is,  in  addition,  a  full  account  of  the  Spanish  Weights  and 
Measures  and  the  Spanish  Coinage.  Facsimiles  of  all  important 
business  forms  and  documents  in  Spanish  are  an  important  feature 
of  the  work.  The  Map  of  Spain  has  all  the  names  of  towns,  rivers, 
etc.,  in  Spanish.  A  very  complete  Appendix  of  commercial 
idioms  adds  to  the  value  of  the  work. 

21 


FRENCH. 

Pitman's  Complete  French  Course.  210  pp.,  cloth,  gilt,  60c.  For 
Self-Instruction.  Part  I.,  consisting  of  Grammar  to  the  end  of 
the  Regular  Verbs,  Conversational  Phrases  and  Sentences,  Short 
Stories,  and  French-English  and  English-French  Vocabularies. 
Part  II.,  Grammar,  including  the  Irregular  Verbs,  Conversational 
Phrases  and  Sentences,  Selections  of  French  Prose,  and  French- 
English  and  English-French  Vocabularies,  and  Summary  of 
French  Grammar  Reforms. 

Pitman's  French  Course.  Part  I.  96  pp.,  20c. ;  cloth,  25c. 
Grammar  to  end  of  the  regular  verbs  ;  with  exercises. 

Pitman's  French  Course.  Part  II.  25c. 
Key  to  Part  1,  French  Course.  Cloth,  50c. 
Key  to  Part  2,  French  Course.  Cloth,  50c. 

Pitman's  Practical  French  Grammar.  128  pp.,  paper  boards,  40c. ; 
cloth,  60c.  And  Conversation  for  Self-Instruction,  with  Copious 
Vocabulary  and  Imitated  Pronunciation.  The  Latest  and  Best 
Method  for  Learning  French  without  a  Master. 

A  Child's  First  Steps  in  French.  64  pp.,  cloth,  25c.  An  elementary 
French  reader  with  vocabulary. 

Pitman's  Chart  of  the  French  Regular  Verbs.  lOc.  Terminations 
of  the  Four  Conjugations  and  a  Full  Exhibition  of  the  Auxiliaries. 

Pitman's  French  Commercial  Reader.  208  pp.,  cloth,  gilt.  8Sc. 
Deals  in  an  interesting  manner  with  the  leading  commercial  and 
National  Institutions  of  France.  The  reading  matter  is  most 
carefully  selected,  and  while  the  student  of  French  is  improving 
his  mastery  of  the  language,  he  is  at  the  same  time  getting  a  good 
insight  into  French  commercial  methods.  Accuracy  is  assured 
as  the  Reader  has  been  prepared  under  the  supervision  of  well 
known  masters  in  modern  languages. 

Tourist's  Vade  Mecum  of  French  Colloquial  Conversation.  91  pp., 
cloth,  40c.  A  careful  selection  of  every-day  Phrases  in  constant 
use,  with  Vocabularies,  Tables,  and  the  Exact  Pronunciation  of 
every  Word.  An  Easy  Method  of  acquiring  a  knowledge  of 
French  sufficient  for  all  purposes  for  Tourists  or  Business  Men  on 
a  trip  to  Paris. 

Commercial  Correspondence  in  French.  240  pp.,  cloth,  85c.  Gives 
all  the  letters  of  the  "  Commercial  Correspondence  "  translated 
into  French,  and  also  a  chapter  on  French  Commercial  Corre- 
spondence, a  List  of  French  Commercial  Abbreviations,  French 
coinage,  weights,  measures,  etc.,  together  with  a  number  of 
reduced  facsimiles  of  actual  French  business  forms  and  documents. 
Notes  are  added  to  each  letter. 

French  Business  Letters.  31  pp.,  20c.  Being  a  Practical  Handbook 
of  Commercial  Correspondence  in  the  French  language,  with 
copious  notes  in  English.  • 

22 


Ecooomie  Domestique.  46  pp.,  20c.  A  French  translation  (with 
copious  marginal  notes  in  English'  of  the  "  Avon  Domestic 

Economy." 

Easy  French  Conversational  Sentences.    32App.,  20c. 

French  Business  Interviews.  104  pp.,  40c. ;  clotb,  50c.  With 
Correspondence,  Invoices,  etc.,  each  forming  a  complete  Com- 
mercial Transaction,  including  Technical  Terms  and  Idiomatic 
Expressions,  with  copious  vocabulary  and  notes  in  English. 

French  Commercial  Phrases  and  Abbreviations  with  Translations. 
30  pp.,  20c. 

Madge's  Letters.  32  pp.,  20c.  Introducing  Idiomatic  Expressions, 
French  and  English. 

Advanced  French  Conversational  Exercises.    32  pp.,  20c. 

L'Avare.  120  pp.,  cloth,  50c.  Moliere's  Comedy  in  FRENCH. 
Expressly  Annotated. 

Les  Bourgeois  Gentilhomme.  40c. ;  cloth,  60c.  Moliere's  Comedy 
in  French,  fully  annotated. 

Dictionary  of  Commercial  Correspondence  in  French,  German, 
Spanish,  and  Italian.  500  pp.,  cloth,  $2.25. 

Pitman's  International  Mercantile  Letters.  English-French.  Clotk, 
gilt,  85c. 


GERMAN. 

Pitman's  Practical  German  Grammar.  112  pp.,  40c. ;  cloth,  50c. 
And  Conversation  for  Self-Instruction,  with  copious  Vocabulary 
and  Imitated  Pronunciation.  An  entirely  original  method  never 
before  presented  to  the  public. 

Pitman's  German  Coarse,  PART  I.    96  pp.,  20c. ;   cloth,  26c. 
Key  to  Pitman's  German  Coarse,  PART  1.    50c. 

Pitman's  German  Commercial  Reader.  208  pp.,  cloth,  gilt,  86c. 
Is  prepared  on  similar  lines  to  the  French  Commercial  Reader. 
It  furnishes  a  practical  introduction  to  German  commercial 
institutions  and  transactions,  with  questions  and  exercises  which 
render  it  well  suited  for  use  in  schools.  Students  are  afforded 
the  fullest  help  possible  from  plates,  illustrations,  maps,  and 
facsimiles  of  German  commercial  documents. 

Commercial  Correspondence  in  German.  240  pp.,  doth,  860 
Gives  all  the  letters  of  the  "  Commercial  Correspondence  " 
translated  into  German,  with  useful  notes  at  the  foot  of  each 
letter.  It  also  contains  a  chapter  on  German  Commercial 
Correspondence,  with  a  List  of  German  Business  Abbreviations. 

German  Business  Interviews.  Series  1  and  2,  each  100  pp.,  each 
40c.  ;  cloth,  60c.  With  Correspondence,  Invoices,  etc.,  each 
forming  a  complete  Commercial  Transaction. 

English-German  Dictionary  of  Business  Words  and  Term*.  Vest- 
pocket  edition.  160  pp.,  85c. 

23 


Tourist's  Vade  Mecum  o!  German  Colloquial  Conversation.  64  pp. 
cloth,  40c. 

Popular  German  Reader,  No.  1,  "My  Child  Wife."  32  pp.,  20c. 
From  "  David  Copperfield."  With  Translation  and  Imitated 
Pronunciation. 

Hier  and  Da.  Part  1  and  2.  32  pp.,  eacn.  20c.  eacn.  A  collection 
of  Wit,  Humor,  Satire  and  Interesting  Extracts. 

Madge's  Letters.  32  pp.,  20c.  German  and  English  on  opposite 
pages. 

Allerlei.     20c.     Titbits  and  Quotations  in  German. 

German  Commercial  Phrases  and  Abbreviations,  with  Translations. 
30  pp.,  20c. 

German  Business  Letters.  PART  I.  30  pp.,  20c.  A  Practical 
Handbook  of  Commercial  Correspondence  in  the  German  Lan- 
guage, with  Letters  in  German  Script  characters. 

Easy  German  Conversational  Sentences.    32  pp.,  20c. 

Advanced  German  Conversational  Exercises  with  Translations. 
32  pp.,  20c. 

Der  Neffe  Als  Onkel.    20c. ;   cloth,  40c. 
Grimm's  Tales.    20c. 

Dictionary  of  Commercial  Correspondence  in  French,  German, 
Spanish,  and  Italian.  500  pp.,  c.oth,  $2.25. 

Pitman's  International  Mercantile  Letters.  English-German.  Cloth, 
gilt,  85c. 

PORTUGUESE. 

A  New  Dictionary  of  the  Portuguese  and  English  Languages' 
Enriched  by  a  great  number  of  technical  terms  used  in  commerce, 
industry,  arts  and  sciences,  and  including  a  great  variety  of 
expressions  from  the  language  of  daily  life,  based  on  a  MS.  of 
JULIUS  CORNET.  By  H.  MICHAELIS.  Second  Edition.  In  two 
vols.,  cloth  gilt.  Portuguese-English  and  English-Portuguese. 
$4.25  each.  Each  volume  sold  separately. 

Abridged  Dictionary  of  the  Portuguese  and  English  Languages. 

Including  Technical  Expressions  of  Commerce  and  Industry,  of 
Science  and  Arts.  By  H.  MICHAELIS.  In  Two  Parts :  I, 
Portuguese-English  ;  II,  English- Portuguese.  Both  parts  in  one 
vol.  $4.25. 

Pitman's  International  Mercantile  Letters.  English- Portuguese. 
Cloth,  gilt,  $1.25. 

ITALIAN. 

Pitman's  International  Mercantile  Letters.  English-Italian.  Cloth, 
gilt,  $1.00. 

HUGO'S    SYSTEM. 

t  Spanish  Simplified.  85c. ;  cloth,  $1.00. 

t  French  Simplified.  85c. ;    cloth,  $1.00. 
t  German  Simplified.    85c. ;   cloth,  $1.00. 

t  Italian  Simplified.  85c. ;  cloth,  $1.00. 

24 


SOME    EXPERT   OPINIONS   OF 

ISAAC  PITMAN'S  SHORTHAND 


THE  STANDARD  SYSTEM. 

"  The  standard  system  of  the  world." — "  The  Globe  and 
Commercial  Advertiser,"  New  York. 

THE  BEST  SYSTEM. 

**  All  shorthand  writers  in  the  world  concede  the  debt  of  gratitude 
to  Isaac  Pitman  as  the  original  Inventor  of  the  best  system  of  short- 
hand, and  the  one  which  forms1  the  basis  for  a  hundred  or  more 
modifications." — Dr.  W.  T.  Harris,  late  U.S.  Commissioner  of 
Education,  Washington,  D.C. 

UNDOUBTEDLY  THE  BEST. 

"  The  Isaac  Pitman  Phonography  is  undoubtedly,  when  aH  points 
are  considered,  the  best  system.  ...  It  is  the  only  one  prescribed 
in  Ontario,  and  it  is  used  extensively  in  the  United  States  and  in 
the  public  schools  of  its  largest  cities.  ...  It  has,  too,  a  more 
extensive  literature  than  all  other  svstems  combined." — Dr.  A.  H. 
Mac  Kay,  Supt.  of  Education,  Halifax,  N.S.,  Canada. 

CAN  MAKE  NO  MISTAKE  IN  CHOOSING  IT. 

"  Two  hundred  and  eighty-one  systems  have  appeared  since  Isaac 
Pitman's  invention  of  Phonography,  and  all  are  founded  upon  that 
system.  Pitman's  is  now  written  by  at  least  three-quarters  of  the 
practical  shorthand  writers,  and  the  learner  can  make  no  mistake 
in  choosing  it  On  the  other  hand,  he  may  be  led  into  wasting 
much  time  by  adopting  some  other  system  having  serious  defects, 
not  apparent  at  first." — "  The  Youth's  Companion,"  Boston,  Mass. 

SUPERIOR  TO  ANY  OTHER. 

**  I  have  been  3  practitioner  of"  the  Isaac  Pitman  system  for  many 
years,  and  believe  it  is  superior  to  any  other.  Although  I  am 
personally  acquainted  with  many  fast  and  accurate  writers  among 
the  users  of  the  various  Pitmanic  systems,  I  regard  this  fact  as  an 
endorsement  for  the  Isaac  Pitman  system,  because,  '  imitation  is 
the  sincerest  form  of  flattery.'  I  can,  however,  truthfully  say  that 

25 


f  am  not  acquainted  with,  noi  do  I  know  oi  by  reputation  (excepting 
two  veteran  Gurney  writers)  a  single  rapid  and  accurate  writer  who 
is  not  a  Pitmanic  follower.  It  does  not  follow,  of  course,  that  such 
do  not  exist,  but  I  do  know  they  are  not  conspicuous  in  this  vicinity 
I  am  a  firm  believer  in  the  orthodox  manner  of  teaching  and  prac- 
tising Phonography  as  laid  down  in  the  authorised  text-book  of 
the  Isaac  Pitman  system,  viz.  :  '  The  Complete  Phonographic 
Instructor,"  and  am  decidedly  of  the  opinion  that  any  serious 
departure  therefrom  will  only  produce  harmful  results." — Frank 
D.  Curtis,  Official  Stenographer,  U.S.  Circuit  Court,  New  York. 


HOLDS  THE  RECORD  FOR  SPEED. 

"  The  Isaac  Pitman  Shorthand  is  the  best  system.  It  is  the  most 
universally  used,  being  the  simplest,  briefest,  and  most  logical  in 
existence.  It  is  adapted  to  Spanish  and  ten  other  languages.  It 
is  used  exclusively  in  the  New  York  High  Schools,  and  it  holds  the- 
record  for  speed." — "  Success,"  New  York  City. 


THE  MOST  SIMPLE,   LEGIBLE,   AND  BRIEF. 

"  In  1890,  Isaac  Pitman  &  Sons",  to  meet  the  increasing  American 
demand  for  a  more  perfect  system  than  that  of  the  ninth  or  tenth 
editions,  established  head-quarters  in  New  York.  The  result  has 
been  that  the  New  York  High  School  of  Commerce  and  other  leading 
educational  institutions  are  now  adopting  the  twentieth  century 
presentation  of  the  Isaac  Pitman  phonography,  which  is  conceded 
to  be  the  most  simple,  legible,  brief,  and  logical  system  in  existence. 
Its  publishers  have  behind  them  the  plant,  capital,  and  experience 
of  sixty-five  years'  accumulation,  and  the  co-operation  of  over  three 
millions  of  successful  practitioners.  .  .  .  The  improvements  made 
by  the  inventor  and  assisted  by  a  large  army  of  experienced  teachers 
and  expert  reporters  in  the  United  States  and  Great  Britain,  have 
continued  from  1840  to  the  present  time,  and  everything  that  brains 
and  experience  can  accomplish  has  been  applied  to  its  improvement. 
.  .  .  The  Isaac  Pitman  alphabet  (1903),  which  is  composed  of 
simple  and  distinct  characters,  is  not  likely  to  be  improved  upon 
during  the  existence  of  any  one  now  living." — From  1904  Edition  of 
Appleton's  "  Universal  Cyclopaedia  and  Atlas." 

"  Owing  to  the  fact  that  the  Isaac  Pitman  system  of  stenography 
has  been  exclusively  adopted  by  the  New  York  Board  of  Education, 
the  appearance  of  a  new  edition  of  the  '  Shorthand  Instructor '  is 
a  matter  of  more  than  ordinary  interest.  This  system  has  been  in 
use  for  over  sixty  years,  and  it  is  well-nigh  impossible  to  imagine 
that  the  art  could  ever  be  brought  to  a  higher  state  of  perfection. 
The  revised  twentieth  century  edition  of  the  '  Instructor '  contains 
many  improvements,  and  all  Pitman  writers  who  took  up  the  study 
of  shorthand  several  years  ago  will  do  well  to  secure  a  copy,  so  that 
they  may  know  the  system  in  its  highest  state  of  development." — 
"  The  Globe  and  Commercial  Advertiser,"  New  York.  • 

"  The  committee  of  the  Public  School  Board  appointed  to  select 
the  best  system  of  shorthand  for  the  schools'  commercial  course,  met 
yesterday  and  decided  upon  the  Isaac  Pitman  system." — "  Toronto 
Globe,"  Toronto,  Ont.,  Canada. 

26 


"  I  am  not  an  Isaac  Pitman  writer  (although  I  am  a  Pitmanic 
writer),  yet  I  recognize,  and  demand  recognition  of  Isaac  Pitman 
as  the  source  of  the  so-called  Benn  Pitman,  Munson,  and  all  the  other 
Pitmanic  styles.  There  is,  in  fact,  only  one  Pitmanic  system,  viz., 
that  invented  by  Mr.  Isaac  Pitman,  the  others  are  merely  different 
styles,  or  adaptations  of  the  original." — Editor,  "  Typewriter  and 
Phonographic  World,"  New  York. 

"  The  system  of  shorthand  invented  by  Sir  Isaac  Pitman  is  me 
best  known  of  all  methods,  and  has  been  adopted  by  the  city  of 
New  York  and  other  large  cities  as  the  standard  in  the  Public 
Schools." — "  Waverley  Magazine,"  Boston,  Mass. 

"  The  most  logical,  practical,  and  systematic  of  any  system  of 
shorthand." — Boston  (Mass.)  Journal. 

"  Many  systems  of  shorthand  have  come  and  gone  since  Sir  Isaac 
Pitman  invented  his  '  Phonography '  in  1837,  but  none  has  been 
able  to  supplant  it  entirely,  for  it  has  been  steadily  improved.  In 
spite  of  the  many  variations  and  offshoots  from  it,  this  system  still 
has  a  claim  to  call  itself  the  standard." — The  Chicago  (III.)  Record- 
Herald. 

"  The  time  and  money  necessary  to  acquire  the  mastery  of  a  good 
shorthand  system  are  always  well  spent.  Of  all  the  shorthand 
systems,  the  Isaac  Pitman  is  the  best  for  all  practical  purposes,  being 
the  simplest  and  most  natural,  the  most  harmonious,  logical,  and 
legible.  This  system  has  been  chosen  for  the  '  Christian  Herald's ' 
course  of  shorthand  lessons." —  Christian  Herald,  New  York. 

"  The  Isaac  Pitman  system  of  shorthand  is  founded  on  a  philoso- 
phical basis,  approved  by  Max  Muller  and  other  eminent  authorities 
on  the  representation  of  language  in  writing,  and  as  the  result  of 
its  use  by  a  host  of  able  shorthand  writers  in  every  field  of  work, 
the  system  has  been  developed  on  lines  of  practical  usefulness  to  a 
far  greater  extent  than  any  other  method." — Hartnsivorth's  Self' 
Educator. 

"  I  think  it  no  extravagance  to  hope  that  your  '  Course  in  Short- 
hand '  will  prove  an  innovation  second  in  importance  only  to  that 
inaugurated  by  the  great  Father  of  Phonography  himself.  Until  such 
time  as  rival  systems  are  in  a  position  to  re- model  their  text-books, 
it  would  seem  idle  to  discuss  their  inferiority.  The  Isaac  Pitman 
now  stands  in  a  class  by  itself,  thanks  to  '  Course  in  Shorthand.'  *'— 
Brother  Rogaiian,  De  La  Salle  College,  Vedado,  Havana,  Cuba. 


Send  for 

"SOME  POINTS," 
and  a  copy  o!  "PITMAN'S  JOURNAL." 


ISAAC  PITMAN  &  SONS,  2  West  4sth  Street 
New  York 


27 


Twelve   Reasons  for  Learning 
Isaac   Pitman's  Shorthand 

It  was  the  first  invented,  and  is  the  latest 
improved. 

It  is  the  Easiest  to  Learn. 

It  is  the  most  complete. 

It  is  the  briefest. 

At  the  great  International  Contest  for  Speed 
and  Accuracy  in  shorthand  writing,  held  at 
Boston,  March  30,  1907,  under  the  auspices 
of  the  Eastern  Commercial  Teachers' 
Association,  Miss  Nellie  M.  Wood  (Isaac 
Pitman  writer)  carried  off  the  EAGAN 
INTERNATIONAL  CUP,  and  Sidney  H. 
Godfrey  (Isaac  Pitman  writer)  won  the 
MINER  GOLD  MEDAL.  These  trophies 
were  offered  for  HIGH  SPEED  and  ACCU 
RACY  in  shorthand  writing,  and  candi- 
dates representing  all  the  leading  systems 
competed. 

The  entire  system  is  built  on  a  scientific  basis. 

It  is  universal  arid  international,  having 
completely  circumnavigated  the  globe. 

Its  adaptation  to  ten  foreign  languages  is  a 
great  help  to  the  study  of  such  languages. 

It  has  more  shorthand  literature  than  all  other 
systems  combined,  ranging  from  the 
complete  Shorthand  Bible  to  popular  fiction 
of  the  day. 

It  is  taught  in  the  High  Schools  of  New  York, 
Brooklyn,  and  other  leading  cities. 

Has  many  imitators,  which  in  itself  is  a 
guarantee  of  its  superiority. 

The  late  U.S.  Commissioner  of  Education  (Dr. 
W.  T.  Harris)  says  :  "  It  is  the  BEST 
system,  and  the  one  which  forms  the  basis 
for  a  hundred  or  more  modifications. ' ' 


IMPORTANT  NOTICE 


Teachers  and  schools  are  cautioned 
against  purchasing  modifications  of 
the  Isaac  Pitman  Shorthand  sold 
under  various  titles,  which  are  in 
many  instances  worthless  reprints 
of  obsolete  editions.  The  only 
genuine  and  authorized  text-books 
of  this  system  bear  the  imprint  of 
Isaac  Pitman  &  Sons. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


1  3 


orin  L9-25(n-9,'47(A5618)444 


IJNTVERSITY  ot 
AT 

LOS  ANGELES 
LIBRARY 


A  000  573  694  7 


Z56 

P684s 

1912 


*  .. 


